Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit M07-007 - TARGETTARGET 301 STRANDER BL EXPIRED 11 7 M07.007 Parcel No.: Address: Suite No: 2623049005 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Tenant: Name: TARGET Address: 301 STRANDER BL , TUKWILA WA Owner: Name: DAYTON HUDSON CORP Address: C/O PROPERTY TAX DEPT , 777 NICOLLET MALL Contact Person: Name: GARY PETERSON Address: 60 E PLATO BL, #300 , ST PAUL MN Contractor: Name: S D DEACON CORP OF WASHINGTON Address: 2375 130TH AVE NE #200 , BELLEVUE WA Contractor License No: SDDEACW 108NT Value of Mechanical: 270,000.00 Type of Fire Protection: Furnace: <100K BTU >100K BTU Floor Furnace Suspended/Wall/Floor Mounted Heater Appliance Vent Repair or Addition to Heat/Refrig /Cooling System.... Air Handling Unit <10,000 CFM >10,000 CFM Evaporator Cooler Ventilation Fan connected to single duct Ventilation System Hood and Duct Incinerator: Domestic Commercial/Industrial doc: IMC -10/06 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us MECHANICAL PERMIT EOUIPMENT TYPE AND OUANTITY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * *continued on next page ** Permit Number: Issue Date: Permit Expires On: Expiration Date: 06/20/2008 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ADDITION OF REFRIGERATED CASES ON SALES FLOOR, WALK -IN COOLER/FREEZER IN STOCK ROOM, (6) CONDENSING ROOFTOP UNITS, AND REPLACE COMPATOR W/ SELF - CONTAINED COMPACTOR IN DOCK AREA. Phone: Phone: 651 209 -2852 Phone: (425)284 -4000 Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Steve Lancaster, Director M07 -007 04/13/2007 10/10/2007 Fees Collected: $2,505.88 International Mechanical Code Edition: 2003 Boiler Compressor: 0-3 HP/100,000 BTU 0 3 -15 HP /500,000 BTU 0 15 -30 HP /1,000,000 BTU.. 0 30 -50 HP /1,750,000 BTU.. 0 50+ HP /1,750,000 BTU 0 Fire Damper 0 Diffuser 0 Thermostat 0 Wood/Gas Stove 0 Water Heater 0 Emergency Generator 0 Other Mechanical Equipment 0 M07 -007 Printed: 04 -13 -2007 Permit Center Authorized Signature: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206- 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: httn: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Steve Lancaster, Director Permit Number: M07 -007 Issue Date: 04/13/2007 Permit Expires On: 10/10/2007 Date: 4 0 7 I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulatinc construction or th performance work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this mechanical permit. L / Signature: n 7 Date: 40 7 Print Name: /<'& 1,1 fa r i l e f This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspender or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. doc: IMC M07 -007 Printed: 04 -13 -2007 Parcel No.: 2623049005 Address: 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Suite No: Tenant: TARGET 1: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 12: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** doc: Cond -10/06 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: MOT-007 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 01 /18 /2007 Issue Date: 04/13/2007 2: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 3: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4)(Extend sprinkler protection to the walk -in coolers /freezers.) 4: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3) 5: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers Kemper or any other representative designated and/or recognized by the City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #2050) 6: Maintain automatic fire detector coverage per N.F.P.A. 72. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding automatic fire detectors. 7: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051) 8: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC 104.2) 9: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 10: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 11: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. 13: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 14: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431- 3670). 15: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. M07 -007 Printed: 04 -13 -2007 tirsf City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 16: The special inspections and verifications for concrete construction shall be required. 17: When special inspection is required, either the owner or the registered design professional in responsible charge, shall employ a special inspection agency and notify the Building Official of the appointment prior to the first building inspection. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official in a timely manner. 18: A final report documenting required special inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted to the Building Official. The final inspection report shall be prepared by the approved special inspection agency and shall be submitted to the Building Official prior to and as a condition of final inspection approval. 19: Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 20: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 21: Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 22: Masonry construction shall be special inspected. 23: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 24: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 25: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 26: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the Cityof'Tukwila Permit Center. 27: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206 - 431 - 3670). 28: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 29: This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. 30: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and #2051) 31: An operational permit is required to install or operate a mechanical refrigeration unit or system. (IFC 105.6.3a, Chapter 6) 32: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 515. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. doc: Cond -10/06 M07 -007 Printed: 04 -13 -2007 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. Signature a f Date: '04 7 Print Name: r(refl f r ✓11 t V doc: Cond -10/06 M07 -007 Printed: 04 -13 -2007 Name: Mailing Address: viS CITY OF TUKW/LA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://wwwci.tukwila.wa.us ENGINEER OF RECORD S - All plans must be wet stamped by Engineer of Record Company Name: Sao - ( - + - (au Mailing Address: � 'S 15 l `i U -t i /T Ue.1k) • Contact Person: X/t e1.L --rte E -Mail Address:.x.bH . Qom& ( ftel ru „cm> Q:\ ApplicetionsTomms- Applications On Line\3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 4 -2006 bh Building Permit No. Mechanical Permit No. "' 0 Plumbing/Gas Permit No. Public Works Permit No. Project No. (For office use only) King Co Assessor's Tax No.: New Tenant: Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** 22. wf-{ —aoo< Site Address: DC) I �, 61-rap d f)1 a_' Tenant Name: 6 u-f Property Owners Name: a Co) e-p • n , +' 2 3 Mailing Address: ' > , I ) `�i C.- l }k) r' b1l5 n 9 -k) City Suite Number: ❑ Yes State Zip par() PelLOSE513 Day Telephone: 105/ - a4 q - aeSa- E -Mail Address: A y 6 ka 5 m t eam ') Fax Number: CO 5/ -77 4 39 / i Zip GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION - (Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5) ) Company Name: 'S n O cupts s Mailing Address: 31 l30 (t. (3 S Z(SO t 1.1. I ,, I ,, City / (a' State Zip Contact Person:` n „ t _ L �(�. -Ir Day Telephone:` �5 - (' � ()fb E -Mail Address: 1 .O v -e-(J Vta-r Gt�c.o vt - Fax Number: 95 - a l - too Contractor Registration Number: Expiration Date: ARCHITECT OF RECORD - All plans must be wet stamped by Architect of Record Company Name: 6 -1'1h m UQ J 1_.)� lLJ 1 t Mailing Address: D . P t) 1\ .) eil 3/y 4. Q�� m 1._, 5S[ 0 -y I � D City State Zip Contact Person: ("1\1 ` • bent/tar/N. 0 - y _ Day Telephonet 0 .) 1 - d-O q - s 9 E -Mail Address: 6 o- riTeA- -t r e [ Y `. ° cz r'1 Fax Number: (o5 - 11 %-” 3911 t ?b 5 city State ' Zip Day Telephonee:� � Ji ' (D 9 ^1 l + Fax Number LQ I • (e _ 4-1 ao Page 1 of 6 Unit Type: Qty Unit Type: Qty Unit Type: Qty Boiler /Compressor: Qty Fumace<100K BTU Air Handling Unit >10,000 CFM Fire Damper 0 -3 HP /100,000 BTU Furnace>100K BTU Evaporator Cooler Diffuser 3 -15 HP /500,000 BTU Floor Furnace Ventilation Fan Connected to Single Duct Thermostat 15 -30 HP /1,000,000 BTU Suspended/Wall/Floor Mounted Heater Ventilation System Wood/Gas Stove 30 -50 HP /1,750,000 BTU Appliance Vent Hood and Duct Water Heater 50+ HP /1,750,000 BTU Repair or Addition to Heat/Refrig/Cooling System Incinerator - Domestic Emergency Generator Air Handling Unit <10,000 CFM Incinerator — Comm/Ind Other Mechanical Equipment Mailing Address: MECHANICAL PERMIT INFORMATION - 206 - 431 -3670 MECHANICAL CONTRACTQR IN)ti'ORMATION Company Name: 'I 1_V Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: IL44 I A i I A A AS' 41 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed info tion): kJO - tyl ( olev / rrtaelr 11� •O Tel , Go Use: Residential: New .... ❑ Replacement .... ❑ Commercial: New .... I,1S1, Replacement .... ❑ Fuel Type: Electric ❑ Gas.... ❑ Other: Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: Q: Applications\Fonns- Appliatiom On Line\3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised 4 -2006 bh tr City State Zip Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: Ifc 1Xh 4 Page 4 of 6 PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Applicable to all permits in this application Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. BUILDING Signature: Print Name: Mailing Address: Building and Mechanical Permit The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). Plumbing Permit The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY c PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. Date Application Expires: Date Application Accepted: R OR AUTHORIZED AGENT: t ad.ts' itr � P Oht[ Q: Apptcatione\Fanns- Applications On Line\3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 4 -2006 bh 1v ►3t6 Day Telephone: lP (' '2 - 2652. City Date: lzl loc N State Staff Initials: Zip 6 Page 6 of 6 Receipt No.: R07 -00075 Initials: JEM User ID: 1165 Payee: BENHAM ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description PLAN CHECK - NONRES City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: //www.ci.tukwila.wa.us RECEIPT Parcel No.: 2623049005 Permit Number: M07 -007 Address: 301 STRANDER BL TUKW C Status: PENDING Suite No: Applied Date: 01/18/2007 Applicant: TARGET Issue Date: TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 247500 495.18 Account Code Current Pmts 000/345.830 495.18 Total: $495.18 Payment Amount: $495.18 Payment Date: 01/18/2007 11:40 AM Balance: $2,010.70 7!355 O1 /lfl 9714 TO AE 49 13 doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 01- 18-2007 Receipt No.: R07 -00592 Payee: SD DEACON ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description MECHANICAL - NONRES City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http://www.citukwila.wa.us RECEIPT Parcel No.: 2623049005 Permit Number: M07 -007 Address: 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Status: ISSUED Suite No: Applied Date: 01/18/2007 Applicant: TARGET Issue Date: 04/13/2007 Initials: BLH Payment Date: 04/17/2007 02:17 PM User ID: ADMIN Balance: $0.00 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Cash .50 Account Code Current Pmts 000/322.100 .50 Payment Amount: $.50 Total: $.50 7195 04/18 9710 TOTAL 0.50 doc: Receipt -06 Printed: 04 -17 -2007 Parcel No.: 2623049005 Address: 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Suite No: Applicant: TARGET Receipt No.: R07 -00591 Payee: SD DEACON ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description MECHANICAL - NONRES City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us RECEIPT Initials: BLH Payment Date: 04/17/2007 02:16 PM User ID: ADMIN Balance: $0.50 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 80865 2,010.20 Account Code Current Pmts 000/322.100 2,010.20 Total: $2,010.20 Permit Number: M07 - 007 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 01/18/2007 Issue Date: 04/13/2007 Payment Amount: $2,010.20 7196 04/18 9710 TOTAL 2010.20 doc: Receipt -06 Printed: 04 -17 -2007 Project: /(' 7 g/( Type of Inspection: A /A/'9 / Address: 36/ - 5 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: ra.m. Requester: Phone No: ca 6- as s- 5. r INSPECTION NO. ❑ Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 /99G ?co - 1 (206)431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ./Aef Ilnspecto . V� i fJ $58. EINSPECTION EE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: Type of Inspection: \./ Address: 0 l 5 a N z (3 (--- Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: (.) - O 7 p.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit ' .- INSPECTIO O . CITY OF UKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PER T NO. 206)431 -3f 7 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: p ,, T_,tin\ NC��c 1 ee-1 ✓ I f 0( i, y7 j- lv c Hc, 58.00 REINS EC N FEE REQUI paid at 6300 Southce ter Blvd., S Receipt No.: — { ( D. Prior to inspection, fee must be ite 100. Call to sechedule reinspection. Date: Project: 7:47,9?--/ T ype of Ins Ftion: g___)i /� ,�, ,o, a 7�P Address: / 30 /S /rte /1/ ��- j r Date Called: Special Instructions: G(j ,,e) l K IA) S Date Wanted: 3 — /_O e>_m m. Requester: " .C)/ Phone No: d JD -2 4"' `72 INSPi(CTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 COMMENTS: 1 > k 1 of spector: Rece • t Date: ) �� REINSPECTION FEE RE IRED. P or to inspection, fee must be at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., uite 1 . Call to sechedule reinspection. Date: Approved per applicable codes. ['Corrections required prior to approval. Project: TIns tion: , Type ?°Ii 1 /vry v �, // ?6p7 Address: 3U / SMoilt/vfe A 1 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 9 2 71 . a.m. e Requester: Phone No: 5-03-516 y }? /170) -av7 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSP CTI NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431- Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. 0 .00 REINSPECTION F REQUIRED. Pr' r to inspection, fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter B vd., Suite 10 . Call to sechedule reinspection. COMMENTS: 7v1Ae4/ F G/4114/ J ctt� �rti Dl /�, -c c4' ►/ A// fl Receipt No.: Date: COMMENTS: ' Type of Inspection: _ (/, u i'e'k- 5/i _ 4/5 Address: ___?O / .S7`.PA '4' .B L Date Called: . /i.e.' ,' ti # l Li Special Instructions: © ,--,c,� ��re --, ,4,7f A . a.m.:. ( a.p.m. Requester: Phone No: r ,2 6 (( 9' 7, 7 Project: 774 %? Type of Inspection: _ (/, u i'e'k- 5/i _ 4/5 Address: ___?O / .S7`.PA '4' .B L Date Called: . Special Instructions: Date cr 7 Wanted: )�?? 9 -- a.m.:. ( a.p.m. Requester: Phone No: r ,2 6 (( 9' 7, 7 3 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 / e7 -607 ( I,LIApproved per applicable codes. JJ Corrections required prior to approval. ,Z4, // El x: . 00 REINSPEC»ON FEE RE A RED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100. Call to sechedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Project: Type of Inspection: // Ni Address: Date Ca led: Special Instructions: ' 1 &c ? oAo - 19/ Date Wanted: m ✓lr -,97 `gym Request er: T• (.72- Phone No: 7-C INSPECTION NO. Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Reta a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (20. 431 -3 El Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: _ p4 70ki Inspector: L ave( $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to sechedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: Type of Inspection:/ - ...- \, Address: 30 / .57.? 441JF2 Date Called` Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. Requester: Phone No: _ 5:5---C-7 INSPEW ION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 r , (206)431 -36 roved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. I COMMENTS: $58. EINSPECTIO r FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter, Blvd., Suite 100. Call to sechedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: CO Sprinklers: Type of Inspection: _SPA iiti, Address: .3.9 / ,S— rc #1 Suite #: &- ( � jSOkINKLEK 1 N AI._ / t2le . Phone No.: 2a‘. - Os3 - s5 0 • iT' L - r, /v ---e_ _b a I p TE 5 -'7 � 4 Project I 42 bc 7 Sprinklers: Type of Inspection: _SPA iiti, Address: .3.9 / ,S— rc #1 Suite #: &- Contact Peron: ,JoE L.q N✓CLL Special Instructions: Phone No.: 2a‘. - Os3 - s5 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT - Approved per applicable codes. /i?D7 ov7 39 -S - /o PERMIT NUMBERS 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 I I Corrections required prior to approval. Date: 6A /a 7 Inspector: l j /5 / 2 _ $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from e City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. H T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 B�EN_HAM Project Description: I, c ME Copy Peru t Pao. STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS New condensing units are being placed on top of the existing roof and a transformer is suspended from existing roof members. The following pages are the calculations of the existing support members with the new loadings due to the addition of the condensing units or transformer. Engineer of Record: John D. Westerheide Ill REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE f,nnnrtucn 1' FEB — 2 2007 Ci Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISIONS Store Numbel T -0627 Store Location: South Center, WA 60 Plato Blvd. E. St. Paul, MN 55107 651.771.2222 Fax 651.778.3911 Info @benham.com www.benham.com RECEIVED JAN 18 2007 PERMIT CElN7Eb MDR- -D01- F l 02W-0/2 24*-0' EMP-4' MAIN ROOF Ark EL, 2410Y4° [Tr-OW*3 02O-WO) / TYP. ate 'E' UNO • T'tP 0F4 ft • ROOF . FRAMINGPLAN /t r-o I SEE SHEET S FOR PERGOLA COLUMN LOCATIONS NOTES • • • I. ELEVATIONS NOTED THUS • C 1. ARE JOIST BEARING ELEVATIONS AT GIGO INTERSECTIONS, OULDWO CORNERS. OR WALLS. SLOPE STRUCTURE IJNIFMG.T BETREEN VARYING • ELEVATIONS. • 2. • (AP INDICATES VARIATIONS OF TO HEWER FROM JOIST BEARING ELEVATIONS IN RICHES.' • S. VERY SIZE At. LOCATION OF ROOF OPENINGS WITH OTHER TRADES. FOR FRAMES AT ROOF OPENINGS AND 14 EOUPMENT - SEE AND FIR SUMP PRI • 2'-0 4. FOR COLUMN, BEAM. JO/ST I JOIST GIRDER SCHEDULES - SEE SIT 54. FOR ROOF Dag WELDING PATTERN *- SEE S. TTP 2'- BID P4 1 CONSTP SPEW BID PM F D • • 2 CORE ixi - PLUMS PIP M• PRECAST CO,IC PLANK TYPICAL PRECAST • CONC PLANK r 1 r -1 I 'I },I I L • L • 97' -10• r JO* MECH SLEEVE 6' -6•U INV EL. 95' -B• ' 5'•3 /x 244)• 15' -2 23'!3S 11'40• 12'41' B. COL k 16' -3• . CCL J OL AA r-6. glh , O ' A It 10• MECH SLEEVES ^N INV EL. 95' -4' 1 Caiwg . • Q = • TYP i PANEL JT FOUNDATION & FLOOR PLAN 3/32• ■ r-0' p. - rte BID PACK 3.0 FOR COMPIETE CONSTRUCTION INCORPORATES AND SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUSLY ISSUED BID PACKAGES. . - Ir •-a • • rz6' -r /,' SA •1 1 r' 1 r' �1 • � • �ROI DE . LL i TYPICAL SLAB ON GRADE POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIER BASE FILL S SPA O 20' -0' • r' � ! - r' 'I , J• `I • • 1 r I- r 2 SPA'• 22• -0• 2' -0+-■ ICONDENSING !UNIT 2 MOUNT CONDENSING UNI ON ROOF PAD (TYP). ' I I I - -- I - �RTU -5 proo k-N" c 1, REFRIGERANT PIPING DOWN THRU ROOF (TYP). SEE SHEET MI FOR CONT. ! PRV SEE MECH. FOR AND LOCATION. FOR SEE DETAIL r (E) J -1 (E) J -4 4" 00 -4-81 tU. ■1z11:3C9 Cbts_: — (z) P u C6t3t•EA 3R-�G u s - r. EA. W EIc 315 Ibs MA�c, 1,�1LL gE Lc AT E ©*� 'Tdt�' c�F TNT V. -o4t) 'jjlQ_ ..G.1 ovE.Q ' T �.4E k.l:,1 WCa tukt,.v\h..v.n co L.tJ~ AA ra GS �o . l.J EA(' KT a LW 11 5 �.. �� Ta-A �s FE- .a_ -.a To C E. CAt.u...Nt•s JsA . Fx t SZ r.JCo 9,OoF /dteMB S CCo s Er. t ) — Q► KVA C338 16s mox wT ,k.sP E iD FQO 1( R.bOF 5atsT s MAC(. LSt06 1-► t F C. -oL LLJ4t1 S — ALLowAgt. -E (j _ .LAA' -.t C1d.PNC. T'/ 1DEAt) LC) AO 15 PsF Lao E.. L0001 = 3o Ps MAXC . LoAD oTAL = LA-S ?5F TRt ell 1 0OLP-A 34 x 4-4 I = Z c»- E NC H LoL.kw.t ; 4.5 PsP s . 41 '1' 1".51 • or w.) Z. © ©?v Mac.. k� St " ., AMtPbm. tots G sL k►es 0 •5 -% C, ( 62. k-1 P s a,a__E - 1756x6x I`t1 ± e�3 f PROJECT BENHAM PROJECT NO. YR. I SEO. I I111111 TASK III DATE I 2.1‘ MFJ. DISC. I C. IIIIII REF. FROM I I I I IIII MAT 13 v- L REV. R 11 00 -4-81 CJAE.0 1i: EX sT t ^s (, b a4"Ct 0 >`t ALI.DLOABLE SDi L BEA. pRe5SuP -J . - 1600 PSG' - Ex +sT /0C.o Fbo r" EaiG CA Pactr`/ 6' x 6 x Z.S ks = 10 lops ADD IT Lc' K'D AT 3a 1ST EJJDS (SvfloWtAt-sC, U...0 , T 15 FTc, t 'bS 4 CAP Ac s • A Sivi A SJ(, LO' J t t.L tty T(z 4Usv- 'Leo ¶o C am) ?LU -T S.1-$ C s W A P O.O r R_ . C I its ,4 Mi L) t MA,1. - Lao ki c 66.7g. k• rs /' . e_oz v..3) v /ott....) Ass a. en Au.0.0-4.6t.E ,Sole /S£AQt?JCs woe-sr CMlsa) • Iii. -& C o m. P A c — r -. Flaw -er 5 t p f T POST Fe:T. ` 14, 4 S (Tusk su.nrt -EQ l►C>Aq FOOT : s; f126¥ x 5 X 4'- Zco Its (i l A IS f P = 2b51 i1,s > � Zoaa iti Y PROJECT ASV 1 - PROJECT NO. OFF. YR. SEQ. IiiIIIII TASK III ;ATE REF. FROM SHEET .SQL le REV. R I I AIL I a )-0• 4.7 • ...grit/61116- AIL 'CRT SFM:oNG PLAN • IF OPENING 'FRAME NO SGAL.E JOIST SEAT • '2-W FLUUTE JOIST • NOTE: FCIF; :JOIST SEAT • J7E51(�1- DESIGN CHORD � EX'T�KHOtI FOR STIFF R SEES 4 WELDS 4 FRA,MIN6 L4.4'M'.tp. _- (EL.TDP OF FRAMING, L's. SAME AS EL.TOP OF EUPPDRTS.I 4 OJP IS E• •5's G,& O S' : LDO� S MINE Ii) Al MriIGR2 DIM. 'R' IS b OR LM. TM1S L MA`( 6E OMITTG.D. I) FRM4GS SMALL bE *MOP WGLDED M oiAE UNrf ` IN; FACET WELD AROUND ALL COWTALTh 4 caw WELDED TO SuPPoST MENDERS •+/ SN; FILLET wax) ALL AROUND. 2)vERIG'f OPENIM6 512E 4 LOGATIOW W /MGGMANLCAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR Tb FAESRICATION OF FRAMES. COIJ5IFUCTIOm Jr Viso SITDOTN OWLS Kw 04 � Z , O' IONb, cTit OIIE ENO J7 GAEASEP. DNSLOMTN.AIE FEINT N_ v.0 rr „GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES Lee: KUW - n Nt -up Nall) ESIGN CODES T EDITION OF 1988 URI7ORM BUILDING CODE WITH LOCAL AMENDMENTS. RISC, 'SPECIFICATIONS FOR;TNE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS.' ACI -318, 'BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE.' SJI, 'STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,. LOAD TABLES AND WEIGHT TABLES FOR STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS.' SDI, 'DESIGN MANUAL FOR FLOOR DECKS AND. ROOF DECKS.' AWS 01.1, 'STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - STEEL.' AWS 01.4, 'STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - REINFORCING STEEL.' 2. ESIGN STRESSES TEEL STRUCTURAL TUBING CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE MASONRY COREFILL MEZZANINE CONC. TOPPING FOOTINGS AND PIER CAPS GRADE BEAM AT SHEAR WALLS ALL OTHER INCLUDING WALL PNLS REINFORCING CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT MORTAR FOR CMU'S JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS OUNDAFION ;WM is LE SO L BEARI PR a URE ALLOWANCE OVER BACKROOM OFFICE MEZZANINE WIND STAIRS ,- SEISMIC F 1- r Fy * 36 KSI (ASIR A36) Fy • 46 XSI (ASTM AS00, GRADE B) f'c - 3000 PSI* f'c • 3000 PSI* f'c • 3000 PSI f'c • 3000 PSI f'c • 3000 PSI f'c • 4000 PSI Fy • 60 KSI (ASTM A615) Fy - 40 KSI ASIA A615) FOR UNIT MASONRY Fy • 60 KSI'(ASTM A706) FOR REINF. WELDED TO PLATES OR ANGLES F'■ • 2000 PSI, Grade N -1 f'c - 2500 PSI, Type M SJI SPECIFICATIONS 2500 PSF THE FOLLOWING SOIL ' REPORTS AND SUPPLEMENTS BY GEOENGINEERS, BELLEVUE, WA: ORIGINAL REPORT SUPPLEMENTAL REPORT SUPPLEMENTAL REPORT DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS REPORT NSITION ZONE FILE NO. 1192 -12 -t” FILE NO. 1192 -12 -1 FILE NO. 1192 -12 -1 FILE NO. 1192 -12 -1 FILE NO. 1192 -27 -1 FILE NO. 1192 -26 -1 100 PSF + 20 PSF PARTITIONS 27 PSF FOR OVERALL STABILITY 100 PSF ZONE 3 IN - PLACE CONCRETE ARRANGEMENT AND RENDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE .. WITH THE ACI 'MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR DETAILING REINFORCING URES. L UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE, MAKE WELDED REINFORCEMENT CONNECTIONS WITH E9OXX ELECTRODES IN ACCORDANCE WITH AILS D1.4. PROVIDE SUITABLE WIRE SPACERS, CHAIRS AND TIES FOR SUPPORTING REINFORCING STEEL IN PROPER POSITION. SPLICE BARS 36 BAR DIAMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. '• CONCRETE COVERAGE SHAM COMPLY WITH.CHAPTER 7 OF ACI 318. MINIMUH CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCEMENT: . 1) CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH. 3 2 CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER. CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR IN CONTACT WITH GROUND; SLABS AND WALLS 3/4' BEAMS AND COLUMNS : 1 -1/2' }- COORDINATE SIIZ A LOCATION OF SLEEVES, INSERTS AND BOX -OUTS • 1- SUBMIT A DRAWING SHOWING THE PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. DRAWING MIST BE REVIEWED BY OSR AND RETURNED TO THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO POURING CONCRETE. FURNISH CONSTRUCTION JOINT'LOCATIONS TQ'PABRI ATOMS SO THEY CAN BE SHOWN ON SHOP DRAWINGS. 8. !STRUCTURAL STEEL . DETAILED OTHERWISE. SELECT STANDARD RISC BEAM CONNECTIONS TO !SUPPORT ONE -HALF OF TOTAL ALLOWABLE UNIFORM LOAD (W L) SHOWN IN •UNIFORM LOAD CONSTANTS,' PART 2 OF RISC STEEL CON ION MANUAL. EIGHTH EDITION, OR FOR BEAM REACTION SHOYII OR DRAWINGS., MINIMUM BEAM CONNECTIONS SHALL NOT BE SMALLER THAN THOSE LISTED IN TABLES II AND III, PART 4 OF THE RISC MANUAL, EIGHTH EDITION, FOR GIVEN BEAM DEPTH, BOLT DIAMETER AND WELD SPECIFICATION. UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE, MAKE SHOP CONNECTIONS WITH E70XX ELECTRODES OR BOLTED WITH 3/4' A325 BOLTS IN BEARING -TYPE CONNECTIONS WITH THREADS IN THE SHEAR PLANE (A325 -N). UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE, MAKE FIELD CONNECTIONS USING 3/4' A325 AI BOLTS OR'E70XX ELECTRODE WELDS. BOLTED CONNECTIONS USING A 32S -F BOLTS SHALL 8E INSTALLED AS SLIP - CRITICAL CONNECTIONS ACCORDING TO RISC SPECIFICATIONS. SHEAR STUDS SMALL SE 'NELSON STUDS' AS MANUFACTURED BY THE NELSON DIVISION OF TRW. ICBO REPORT 00. 2614. 7. STEEL JOISTS AND JOIA GGIRDERS I- WELD JOISTS ARO JUT \SRS TO SUPPORTING STEEL ACCORDING TO SJI SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL .sRIDGIRG FOR JOISTS AND LATERAL SUPPORT FOR JOIST ,GIRDERS ACCORDING TO SJI SPECIFICATIONS. CAMBER JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS AS FOLLOWS: SPAN CAMBER LESS THAN 20' 1/4' '20' - 30' 3/8' 30' - 40' 5/8' GREATER THAN 40" 3/4' PROVIDE CEILING EXTENSIONS WHERE REQUIRED. 1- ROOF JOISTS OVER STOCK ROOM AREAT ARE DESIGNED FOR AN ADDITIONAL 5 PSF HANGING LOAD. WANG LOADS FROM J)ST TOP CHORD PANEL POINTS ONLY UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE. 8. STEEL ROOF DECK 1 -1/2', TYPE B DECK, GAUGE AS INiICATED ON DRAWINGS. *CONCRETE DESIGNED FOR f'c • 2500 PSI; THEREFORE; ND SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIRED. 10 -6-88 10 -24 -88 11 -21 -88 12 -2-88 2 -13-89 4 -3 -89 2' 1--1 1- g 0 1 q A O COLUMN SCHEDULE . 30 P.S.F. MK SIZE BASE PLATE . COMMENTS SIZE B.P.E. TYPE CI TS 5 x5x .250 3 /4xI0xI' -0' 16=b l5 • r TS 6x6x .250 f4'.(l2x1'-0•1840 1411.* 43 A B3 C3 T x nTc AO ✓0.Kli.x1' -0' 18411 A TS 6x611 375 3/4x12x1•- 0 A MA 14 C5 TS x�x25 3/4 xl2x1' -0' 98=04' A 25 C6 TS 6x6x .250 ' xl2xl'-0' 86 A (AT SHEAR NIL RIPS 4 4 7) C7 Is 8•81I .S00 X/g x13111 =1' 18'11' A WI2x14 C8 TS 8.8x.500 7/8 x13•ILI" WIN' A • C9 4x4 250 I * 10% lb' 18=10 E. , CIO 15 C. 4a.3125 1' 11 12 xIV lEitioN A CII IS 5. 5. •3l25 r •lox 1-d 18= 10•' F. CM 1S 6.4x.250 4 4 x IO"I L O . 18 g ' C13T5 3 4*I2.' t' -0" 9&$O A W1(0.36 C I 6x6a 0 4. a12xI=T1' 18=0 . C' 8)3 15 5 5 x5 x .2. 0 ' X11x1 -0' 98=10 4 . r7>, 814 W2tx44 I) B.P.E.= BOTTOM OF BASE PLATE ELEVATION 2) ORIENT I' -0' DIMENSION PARALLEL TO JOIST GIRDERS OR TO WALL 3) USE Y4' CAP PLATES ON COLS. - WELD W/ I/4' FILLET ALL AROUND 4) FOR TYP ANCHOR BOLT & BASE PLATE DETAILS SEE I /S4 BEAM SCHEDULE • 30 P.S.F. MK SIZE COMMENTS MK SIZE COMMENTS . 81 WI6x26 615 W2446 B2 MA Z4 516 1411.* 43 B3 WSOx99 817 418435 B4 WI6x50 818 MA 14 85 WI6x26 • 86 1414*S1. . B7 WI2x14 ' 88 WWI - ' 89 WIOx55 BIO WIOx30 • Bu W14•22 BI2 W1(0.36 ' 8)3 W24x62 • 814 W2tx44 MK Ler fZ F3 F4 f6 F4 F7 F B NOTESI - Ace. 1L4' 7=0 } 7.ter 2^O U.O F[G El SEE PLAN SEE RAN sEEPLAN SEE PLAN SEE?L»L SEE PLAN 3r' it Kt: Wig A307 MOOR 60L1 PER ANCHOR H MT LRs . d a 20.04.01 O - TYP ANCHOP, BOLT BA NO SCALE- 3-12. • . _ JOIST PIYEL -NERD LOCA1ION MECH.. EQUIP SUPPORT Aneuux IN+srrnrrE OF Srte. ComrxucaoN Nominal Size Thickness Wt. /ft F 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A (in2) I r (in.) 81 Bending factor a /10 Note: Heavy lin 4 2 3 3 2 2 2 Fy= 46ksiI • COLUMNS Square structural tubing Allowable concentric loads in kips r---i L__J Nominal Siz 6 x 6 h 5 x 5 Thickness 3/ % I % I Vie I % I g6 % I % I %6 � � 3'. Wt./ft. 38.86 35.24 27.48 23.34 19.02 14.53 28.43 22.37 19.08 15.62 1 11.97 F,. 46 ksi c c . m 2 o n i i ____Z-0 = Y c L o, 5 m w 0 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 31 32 34 36 37 38 39 315 283 275 268 259 251 242 232 222 212 201 190 178 166 153 140 116 98 83 72 62 58 55 49 43 287 257 251 244 237 229 221 212 203 194 185 175 164 153 . 142 131 106 91. 77 67 58 54 51 45 40 223 201 196 191 186 180 174 168 161 154.. 147 140 132 124 115 107 89 75 64 55 48 45 42 37 33 32 189 171 167 163 158 154 149 143 138 132 126 120 113 107 100 93 78 65 56 48 42 39 37 33 29 27 26 154 140 137 133 130 126 122 117 113 108 104 99 94 " 65 55 47 40 35 33 31 27 24 23 22 118 107 105 102 99 96 93 90 87 83 80 76 72 68 64 60 5 - 43 36 31 27 26 24 21 19 18 17 16 231 200 193 186 178 169 160 151 141 131 120 109 97 87 78 70 58 49 41 36 31 182 159 153 148 142 135 129 122 115 107 99 90 82 73 65 59 49 41 35 30 26 25 155 136 131 127 122 116 111 105 99 93 86 79 72 64 58 52 43 36 31 27 23 22 127 111 108 104 100 96 92 87 82 77 72 66 60 54 49 44 36 31 26 22 20 17 97 86 83 80 77 74 71 67 64 60 56 52 47 43 39 35 29 24 21 18 15 14 P operiies A (in 2) I (m!) r (in.) B l Bending I factor a /10 11.40 54.1 2.18 0.633 8.07 10.40 50.5 2.21 0.615 7.52 8.08 41.6 2.27 0.583 6.20 6.86 36.3 2.30 0.567 5.40 5.59 30.3 2.33 0.553 4.52 427 23.8 2.36 0.539 3.54 8.36 27.0 1.80 0.773 4.03 6.58 22.8 1.86 0.722 3.39 5.61 20.1 1.89 0.699 2.99. 4.59 16.9 1.92 0.677 2.52 3.52 13.4 1.95 0.656 2.00 Note: Heavy line indicates KUr of 200. Aneuux IN+srrnrrE OF Srte. ComrxucaoN Nominal Size Thickness Wt. /ft F 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A (in2) I r (in.) 81 Bending factor a /10 Note: Heavy lin 4 2 3 3 2 2 2 Rer 580004 Use KW-0605352, Ver 5.8.0, 1 -Dec -2003 (c)1983 -2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software Description Roof top condensing unit support curb design. General Information Section Name Beam Width Beam Depth Member Type Load Dur. Factor Beam End Fixity 3 -2x12 I Point Loads Dead Load 500.0 lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs Live Load lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs ...distance 3.250 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft i Span= 6.50ft, Beam Width = 4.500in x Depth = 11.25in, Ends are Pin -Pin Max Stress Ratio Maximum Moment Allowable Max. Positive Moment 0.81 k -ft Max. Negative Moment 0.00 k -ft Max @ Left Support 0.00 k -ft Max @ Right Support 0.00 k -ft Max. M allow 10.77 fb 102.72 psi fv Fb 1,361.72 psi Fv Deflections Center Span... Deflection ...Location ...Length/Defl Camber ( using 1.5 @ Center @ Left @ Right Stress Calcs Bending Analysis Ck 29.908 Le Cf 1.100 Rb @ Center @ Left Support @ Right Support Shear Analysis Design Shear Area Required Fv: Allowable Bearing @ Supports Max. Left Reaction Max. Right Reaction 4.500 in 11.250 in Sawn 1.250 Pin -Pin Dead Load -0.005 in 3.250 ft 14,322.8 *D.L Den ) ... 0.008 in 0.000 in 0.000 in 13.385 ft 9.448 Max Moment 0.81 k -ft 0.00 k -ft 0.00 k -ft @ Left Support 0.38 k 1.667 in2 225.00 psi Cr- 4,23- 0.25 k 0.25 k 0.075 1 General Timber Beam Code Ref: 1997/2001 NDS, 2000/2003 IBC, 2003 NFPA 5000. Base allowables are user defined 0.8 k -ft 10.8 k -ft at at 7.41 psi 225.00 psi Center Span 6.50 ft Left Cantilever ft Right Cantilever ft Douglas Fir - Larch, No.1 Fb Base Allow 1,000.0 psi Fv Allow 180.0 psi Fc Allow 625.0 psi E 1,700.0 ksi Total Load -0.005 in 3.250 ft 14,322.76 3.250 ft 0.000 ft Reactions... Left DL Right DL Title : Dsgnr: Description : Scope : Sxx 94.922 in3 CI 0.990 Sxx Req'd 7.16 in3 0.00 in3 0.00 in3 @ Right Support 0.38 k 1.667 in2 225.00 psi Bearing Length Req'd Bearing Length Req'd Maximum Shear * 1.5 Allowable Shear. 0.4 k 11.4 k @ Left 0.25 k @ Right 0.25 k Camber. @ Left 0.000 in @ Center 0.008 in @ Right 0.000 in 0.25 k 0.25 k Left Cantilever... Deflection ... Length/Defl Right Cantilever... Deflection ... Length/Defl Lu Lu Lu Area 50.625 in2 Allowable fb 1,361.72 psi 1,375.00 psi 1,375.00 psi Dead Load Total Load 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.0 0.0 0.089 in 0.089 in Job # Date: 3:07PM, 13 NOV 06 6.50 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft Max 0.25 k Max 0.25 k Page 1 Beam Design OK 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.0 0.0 M, V, & D @ Specified Locations @ Center Span Location = © Right Cant. Location = © Left Cant. Location = 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft Moment 0.00 k -ft 0.00 k -ft 0.00 k -ft Title : Dsgnr. Description : Scope : Rev. 580004 User. KW-0605352, Ver 5.8.0, 1 -Dee-2003 (0)1963 -2003 ENERCALC Engineering software Description Roof top condensing unit support curb design. General Timber Beam Shear 0.25 k 0.00 k 0.00 k Job# Date: 3:07PM, 13 NOV 06 Page 2 Deflection 0.0000 in 0.0000 in 0.0000 in r'2 1 ,1,1104)X1res L2 4 7 0-i 11; L. 1 L 7*. I • • " ot•t:ev:: I : (it,';: • - - „ 1 . r 7 / n.i. : .• Oe; .:.■:: ' : . . . I» • .. .1._ , • c....,,,, • ",!...t .., ,; • .:. ,;.-:,.. -!..,,::•. .1 /. . ..• . ,.... . . --,-,,,,,,,,-"11'•:, ■ s% 1 ' itctv;',..ettvit ,:',:::•,q/Tit:t t I , " \\ ,Ct : =•;.'.;::--, , i.'l. ' .,--il - V: :: ,.:.`:."-■ . 1 / —• 4,... ..!tH.? 'i— .t.Y.Z:,.... '..., . — : ' • - s, . %,., , , . , 1 st `-,'' , • L I/ 7 1.' '.. I.; , fc... • i xv .2 ,.., . -- i: I ' .1..it,' :.•it..CM.i.:::,+ I.{ 41 1 r• " .N I a i • ' . „,,,,.... ; ) _ .. . -‘..,,, •••; , 00 -4-81 C.NE-C.A.... EY.% STl w ca a ... zoo %1"'s F o Q.. A P vT" •a 1% �.. Lo /h'D - Du, E. TO - R " . ti S t:t sQ 38 Ib — A Est i.& E 5boo Ibs M% SG. - 5T 3'o I ST -oThL LO AV aF ft-AE q 65-1 • U1/43 - t_ of UW %T = 5Q0 Ibs . Ass+L e. TF11LT %z. Lk," j EA V NT 15 su p Q ba -c E D d •J 1 So %s T- SEE- GA Le_u_I--AT t 0 N S O w 11-1E- N Cs PACs . PROJECT FRO.ECT NO. OFF. YR. SEQ. IiiIIIII TASK III DATE 1?-1113 104 REF. FROM I RJIT. REV. R I I BEAM SCHEDULE 30 P.S.F. WI6x26 COMMENTS JOIST SCHEDULE. 30 P.S.F. 241111 I4H3 • -28118 LOAD -z800 0 FOR JOIST CAMBER SEE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTE 8 7. 2) SEE PLAN FOR AXIAL SEISMIC LOAD AT DRAG STRUT JOIST GIRDER SCHEDULE 30 P.S.F. A) LOADNG DIAGRAMS ARE DRAIN �PI IP2 1P3 IP4 IPS IP6 LOOKING UP OR To THE LEFT ON SHEET 52. T B)FOR JOIST GIRDER SPAN AND LOAD SPACING SEE SHEET 52. COMMENTS I) B.P.E.= BOTTOM OF BASE PLATE ELEVATION 2) ORIENT 1'-0' DIMENSION PARALLEL TO JOIST GIRDERS EOTR TO AROUND 3) USE 74' CAP PLATES ON COLS. - WELD W/ 1/4' 4) FOR TYP ANCHOR BOLT & BASE PLATE DETAILS SEE 1/54 ®D PI P2P3P42P ® 40' 11.0 11.0 El 11.0 ILO 11.0 Ell 4 °' 2131/215111=1 ®D R.o 124 [)A '2' 10.' SEE NOTE iZ A Q A * 4 8.4 8.4 SEE NOTE A "Z An OA 24.0706 DETAIL NO SCALE 2o.osoa SLAES JOINT 0 COLUMN ' CAP it FL x.3 NOPIINAI WM A53, -Q I' r 8" SEE PLAN L 4A3Y ) "4 JOIST SEA' JOIST (,rIZ foe NOTS /H. E L• 122=0' 23.04.24. DETAIL Y4si0` 6 Z`i L4 *4 *%b / Jo ROD HAW L4 *4 A VE SPAN 2 PANE NOTE =VERIP ROp LOCATI EQUIP. SUPPI IF 5LAB IS PM .COLUMN ERE CONSTRUCT 'I N / '' 4 PWLS w CENTERED IN SLAB I) IFCOL 15 EREC1 SLAB 15 fI%IR.E 801J12 BREAKS (NO PWLS) • COLUMN ca$ TRACTOR • , 100)11' SNAPS 2 DOWELS PI -- "JO ;ST (wilco CoLUM1 \y of A <200 200 <A <600 A >600 20 21.08 12 1 1.2- 0.001At 0.6 The Benham Companies LLC. 60 E Plato Blvd., Suite 300 St. Paul, MN 55107 (651)771 -2222 FAX(651)778 -3911 /exist joist.xls JOIST LOADS LIVE LOAD PER 2003 IBC W/WAAmedments TRIBUTARY LOADED AREA: At (ft^2 Roof LL = Reduction R1 = Reduction R2 = Joist Span = Joist Space = Snow = Therefore Use: Roof LL = DEAD LOAD - Roof membrane - Insulation - 22 gage roof deck - Roof Joists - Ceiling - Lights - Electrical - Mechanical - Joist girders USE 1 30 4.86 ; : . 30': I 30 Roof Deck 0.4 4.0 2.0 6.4 15.0 I (Roof slope F <4) ft ft psf psf Roof Joists 0.4 4.0 2.0 3.0 1.4 0.5 0.5 1.0 psf 12.8 NEW TRANSFORMER WT = ( ::500 :0 ` USE 250 lbs LOAD AT MID -SPAN OF JOIST FOR ANALYSIS ASUMMING TRANSFORMER SPANS BETWEEN TWO JOISTS Page : 1 Store # : T -0627 Location: South Center, WA Proj. #: 6250655000 By : JDW Date : 12/19/06 Joist MK #: J -16 At = Roof LL = Girders /Cols 0.4 4.0 2.0 3.0 1.4 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.1 psf 13.9 psf 146 ft^2 30.00 psf JOIST ANALYSIS W/ NEW RTU LOADS 4' Span ►I JOIST SPAN, L = JOIST SPACING, S = POINT LOAD DIST, L1 = POINT LOAD DIST, L2 = POINT LOAD DIST, L3 = UNIFORM DEAD LOAD, WdI = DL *S = 72.9 Ipif UNIFORM LIVE LOAD, WLII = LL *S UNIFORM SPRINKLER LOAD = TOTAL LIVE LOAD, WI = WII + Wsp + Wpt = 145.80 Iplf TOTAL UNIFORM LOAD, WI + WdI = RTU POINT LOAD, P u _t = RTU POINT LOAD, Prtu_2= SPR POINT LOAD, P RIGHT REACTION, RR = LEFT REACTION, R _ ATX= ; 15, MAX MOMENT, Mx = MAX SHEAR, Vx = ft JOIST MK = ACTUAL JOIST SIZE = TOTAL ALLOWABLE LOAD = AT JOIST SPAN = ALLOWABLE MOMENT = ALLOWABLE SHEAR = L3 L2 I l 4 4� 30.00 4.86 15.00 0.250 0.000 0.000 3.406 3.406 26.479 3.406 *USE SOLVER TO SET SHEAR EQUAL TO ZERO J -16 18H6 221 34.0 31.935 3.757 ft ft ft ft ft kips kips kips kips kips PsPr Pra, -2 I 4, 4 SHEAR, V = kip -feet* kips 145.8 0.00 218.70 -0.125 Page : 2 Store #: T -0627 pif plf plf kips plf ft kip -feet MOMENT CAPACITY IS ADEQUATE kips SHEAR CAPACITY IS ADEQUATE 1? 6 1b Joist Designation 16H4 16 16H5 16 16H6 16 16H7 16 16H8 16 18H5 18 18H6 18 ' 18H7 18 18H8 18 20H5 20 20H6 20 20H7 20 20H8 20 22H6 22 22H7 22 22H8 22 24H6 24 24H7 24 24H8 24 *Depth In inches Resisting Moment in Inch - Pounds 221,000 289.000 344,000 413,000 478,000 325,000 383,000 466,000 540,000 365,000 406,000 499,000 602,000 422,000 526,000 653,000 462,000 576,000 716,000 Maximum End Reaction In Pounds 3800 4300 4600 4900 5200 4500 4800 5200 5400 4800 5100 5400 5600 5400 5600 5800 5600 5800 6000 tApproximate Weight In Pounds per Foot 6.6 7.8 8.6 10.3 11.4 8.0 9.2 10.4 11.6 8.4 9.6 10.7 12.2 9.7 10.7 12.0 10.3 11.5 12.7 Span In Feet 16 475 538 575 613 650 17 447 506 541 576 612 18 422 478 511 544 578 500 533 578 600 19 400 399 368 342 334 295 304 957 453 430 413 410 357 391 310 484 460 438 429 418 373 516 490 467 445 434 547 520 495 473 474 450 429 409 398 505 480 457 436 547 520 495 473 568 540 514 491 480 457 436 510 486 464 540 514 491 560 533 509 491 509 527 20 21 22 23 279 225 256 364 972 334 400 326 383 287 426 379 408 334 392 377 . .252 . 363 4 350 210 452 434 433 382 416 400 . 30.0 385 .: 371 391 348 375 306 • 321 241 417 417 400 MEM 369 289 452 433 400 385 470 450 432 NM 400 ,: 417 400 384 336 443 425 408 an 392 60 Mita 470 450 432 415 400 487 467 448 431 415 400 470 450 432 415 .. EN 487 467 448 431 504 483 464 446 467 448 431 483 464 446 500 480 462 24 25 236 218 .155 202 188 308 285 , tea . 264 lea 246 � 367 4 339 . 226 315 201 293 B 26 3bU 310 27 297 276 415 400 430 414 415 430 444 28 ..17.9 414 429 29 175 : 304 242 Inatilligillialginglial 400 366 400 414 30 164 _101_ 153 IIIMINI 200 239 133 306 287 347 195 241 357. 225 284 .1.88. 266 .219... 323 360 .251 348 270 301 360 73 373 IFIMEN 400 31 ® 282 361 293 361 301 374 820 374 387 32 144 BAINISMII 199 249 234 303 285 ® iL' 327 188 ® jam 223 210 249 234 305 288 350 339 329 275 363 301 36 352 300 375 364 33 34 187Y , ' 269 35 35 177 ' min 272 190 230 313 3 36 ., • 167 , 240 imam 209 257 .11u 217 206 271 256 322 314 2 04 238 335 37 � � 225 1R2 22 296 280 324 241■1 38 243 262 316 39 ___ 160 INIIIIMIIMIEN 231 286 202 2 2 0 8 40 208 mmism 167 112 209 11n 272 259 1a9 144 183 11a 168.. 228 196 ..193 284 17Q 41 42 159 Ina 199 121 247 110 175 12d 218 1a9 271 1A7 43 152 Q7 190 111 235 I 1n 167 11n 208 115 258 195 44 145 Qn 181 1ns 225 121 159 Ina 198 126 247 1.19 45 'Indicates Nominal Depth of Steel Joists only. tApproximate Weights per Linear Foot of Steel Joists only. Accessories and nailer strip not included. *tSee manufacturers' catalogs for detailed information on specific joist types. 152 190 236 46 146 Oil 181 110 2 26 197 47 139 174 101 216 48 1 34 at Q7 207 111 *For Joi epths 16" to 24" inclusive. N EACH PHASE OCNNECI TO TAPS PPoMARY VMS 4...2.611 FCLN 4-2.611 FGaN 004 1 492 2 400 .1 466 4 470 5 444 6 432 7 CP 1.13 (2911 1125 30 00 12641 r i WALL MOUNTING �I- ',RACKET MOLES a3 01A. 1161 1752] 20.00 N. J .J ' l i; V 3.00♦ i • WALL-* 1 MOUNT NO BRACKETS 15.00 (4373 • NOTES UL USTCO 150'C RISE ABOVE 40•0 AMBIENT MNMUM CLEARANCE CF 6.O0IN /152r0M BETWEEN VENT CPENINCS, WALL OR OTHER OBSTRUCTION. USE WEATHERSHIELD CATLOS NO. 09363 • WALL NOUNTINO BRACKET CATALOG NO. W9313-354 • SNCC AVM. .Z N DOROM ran WSIOMOIS OONOU• FNI14 Nx. SPACE AVNLADLE ON 901H ENOS FOR CLST06ERS CON7'1T. 1200 ( H.50 16 4.50 (1141 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS 45 KVA 3PH 60HZ 440V GD.rA PRIMARY NOAA 2 ENCLOSURE TTPC DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMER 45 KVA 30 6C14 460V DELTA P}VMARY NEMA 2 01CLOSIRE TYPE 144 143 21 3537 H1 142 113 7, T_ 6346. 1�__u j }3 1I fr 06 xA X1 A1.1 J 1 Ft1 x x xa Q x1 —(..xo H1 N3 x3 sECONOMY 2061 /1201 I TAPS HI ENCLOSURE HOLES 1- _ Mill i4 ill .50 X .58 SLOT l E15] E22] X1 )42 63 x A3 xA SECONDARY 240V DELTA 6 TAPS OWL DIIAENSIOI4S INCHES N1WL1T015 ® SCIUAF Schneider Ci6CU'k JULY 2003 NEr DWG P3637 CATALOG !WIMPS OUR. 5QUN 1 49 f NOT LH3 3r:; J 51 V K na ., a KVA 20E1Y /123Y S 24W CELTA SECONDARY 45 451311 477811 CP 1.13 (2911 1125 30 00 12641 r i WALL MOUNTING �I- ',RACKET MOLES a3 01A. 1161 1752] 20.00 N. J .J ' l i; V 3.00♦ i • WALL-* 1 MOUNT NO BRACKETS 15.00 (4373 • NOTES UL USTCO 150'C RISE ABOVE 40•0 AMBIENT MNMUM CLEARANCE CF 6.O0IN /152r0M BETWEEN VENT CPENINCS, WALL OR OTHER OBSTRUCTION. USE WEATHERSHIELD CATLOS NO. 09363 • WALL NOUNTINO BRACKET CATALOG NO. W9313-354 • SNCC AVM. .Z N DOROM ran WSIOMOIS OONOU• FNI14 Nx. SPACE AVNLADLE ON 901H ENOS FOR CLST06ERS CON7'1T. 1200 ( H.50 16 4.50 (1141 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS 45 KVA 3PH 60HZ 440V GD.rA PRIMARY NOAA 2 ENCLOSURE TTPC DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMER 45 KVA 30 6C14 460V DELTA P}VMARY NEMA 2 01CLOSIRE TYPE 144 143 21 3537 H1 142 113 7, T_ 6346. 1�__u j }3 1I fr 06 xA X1 A1.1 J 1 Ft1 x x xa Q x1 —(..xo H1 N3 x3 sECONOMY 2061 /1201 I TAPS HI ENCLOSURE HOLES 1- _ Mill i4 ill .50 X .58 SLOT l E15] E22] X1 )42 63 x A3 xA SECONDARY 240V DELTA 6 TAPS OWL DIIAENSIOI4S INCHES N1WL1T015 ® SCIUAF Schneider Ci6CU'k JULY 2003 NEr DWG P3637 • nnesota TARGET T U KWILA,JAA PROJECT MANUAL Propert 1000 Nicl MinneapO December 21 C. Prepared b ARCHITEC BENHA 60 Eas St. P 65 TE PACKAGE ooler Installation and related 0.4 ORE yard -West, Suite 135 5114 OMANN E ngineer ersity Avenue West, Suite 135 ul, Minnesota 55114 44.2400 Architect's Project No. 6250655000 AA01- JAN • 8 2007 PERMIT CENTER PROJECT MANUAL CERTIFICATION • r r REGISTERED ARCHITECT DENNIS C. WOODY STATE OF WASHINGTON • Dennis Woody Architect Reg. No. 6570 Applicable Portions of Divisions 0 thru 13 for COMPLETE PACKAGE for Freezer /Cooler Installation and related remodel work for T -627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tukwila, WA Prepared for: ()TARGET Property Development 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 December 21, 2006 Prepared by: ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS BENHAM COMPANIES, LLC 60 East Plato Boulevard, Suite 300 St. Paul, Minnesota 55107 651.771.2222 SCOTT F. RUDIE Consulting Engineer 2575 University Avenue West, Suite 135 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55114 651.644.2400 ANDREW N. ERDMANN Consulting Engineer 2575 University Avenue West, Suite 135 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55114 651.644.2400 Architect's Project No. 6250655000 ExPmEs 7.2/107 I Scott F. Rudie Mechanical Engineer Division 15 Reg. No. 23386 Andrew N. Erdmann Electrical Engineer Division 16 Reg. No. 21722 PROJECT MANUAL CERTIFICATION for COMPLETE PACKAGE for Freezer /Cooler Installation and related remodel work for T-627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tukwila, WA Prepared for: ®TARGE°T Property Development 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 December 21, 2006 Prepared by: ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS BENHAM COMPANIES, LLC 60 East Plato Boulevard, Suite 300 St. Paul, Minnesota 55107 651.771.2222 SCOTT F. RUDIE Consulting Engineer 2575 University Avenue West, Suite 135 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55114 651.644.2400 ANDREW N. ERDMANN Consulting Engineer 2575 University Avenue West, Suite 135 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55114 651.644.2400 Architect's Project No. 6250655000 I p S I TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 1.1 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.2 A- CHANGE MODIFICATIONS 1.3 BID A. DOCUMENT 00120 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS A. Include Instructions to Bidders, sample bidding and contract forms, and the proposed Contract Documents including A- Change Modifications issued prior to receipt of Bids. Electronic Project Documents, Drawings and Specifications, are available for General Contractors and Vendors at the ProLog Website; https: / /pdzone.target.com. A. A- Change Modifications: Written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to or any time after receipt of Bids which modify or interpret Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 BASE BID A complete and properly signed Bid to do the Work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated, supported by data required by the Bidding Documents. A. The sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or deducted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.5 ALTERNATE BID (OR ALTERNATE) A. An amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work as described in the Bidding Documents is accepted. 1.6 UNIT PRICE A. An amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the Bidding documents. Unit prices do not substantially change scope and general character of Work. Unit prices shall be based on labor, material, equipment, and related services necessary for complete installation of Work described. 1.7 BIDDER A. One who submits a Bid for a contract with the Owner for the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 SUBBIDDERS A. One who submits a Bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work. 1.9 OTHER DEFINITIONS A. Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION 2.1 BIDDERS AND SUBBIDDERS A. By submitting a Bid, Bidder and Subbidder represents that he has read and understands the Bidding Documents and his Bid is made in accordance therewith; he has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, including but not restricted to, those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation and conditions of the surface and subsurface conditions of the site, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during execution of the " Work, and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the Bidding Documents; and his Bid is based upon materials, systems and equipment described in the Bidding Documents. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00120 - 1 P0"1 RIGHTSIZE T -627 ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 DOCUMENT USE AND AVAILABILITY A. Subbidders may obtain Documents from Contractor. B. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. C. The issuing party or Owner, in making copies of the Bidding Documents available, does so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the Work and does not confer a license for, or grant any other use of, the documents. 3.2 INTERPRETATIONS /CORRECTIONS A. Bidders and Subbidders shall promptly notify Target's Project Architect in writing of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions, codes and regulations. B. Bidders and Subbidders requiring clarification or interpretations shall make a written request to Architect, to reach Architect at least ten days prior to date for receipt of Bids. C. Any interpretations, corrections or changes to the Bidding Documents will be made by A- Change Modification. Interpretations, corrections, or changes made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections and changes. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bidders and Subbidders are encouraged to submit requests for approval of substitutions that may have a cost/benefit value for the Project. No action will be taken on these requests during the bidding period. Substitute products, equipment and systems may be submitted in writing to the Owner during the bidding period for evaluation after Bids have been received, or they may be submitted as voluntary alternates in compliance with the provisions of the Bid Form. Comply with procedural requirements and criteria for substitutions as specified in Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. All requests shall be in writing and shall include pertinent INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00120 - 2 ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURE TARGET descriptive material, including price differential between proposed substitution and work specified. Only specified products, equipment and systems shall be included in the Base Bid. 4.1 PRE - BID MEETING A. A "Pre -Bid Conference" may be held by the Owner prior to the Bid date to review the Project, the bidding, the award procedures and to answer questions by the Bidders. B. The location and time, if a meeting is to be held, will be announced to all Bidders of record. 4.2 FORM OF BIDS A. Submit Bids in duplicate on forms provided. Oral, telephonic or telegraphic bids will not receive consideration. Fill in all blanks on the form with typewriter or ink using "NA" or "No Bid" in blanks for which a time or sum is not applicable. Where required by the form express sums, quantities, and days, in both figures and words. The words shall govern in the event of a discrepancy between the two. B. Any interlineations, alteration, or erasure, must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. Bidders shall make no stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify a Bid in a manner not specified or provided in the Bid Form. C. Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. A Bid by a corporation shall give the state of incorporation with the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying agent's authority to bind Bidder. 4.3 FORM OF SUBBIDS A. The Owner has pre - selected the Contractor for Complete Construction who will receive subbids. B. Submit Subbids in the form prescribed by Contractor. j 4.7 BONDS A. Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond may be required by the Owner. ■ The cost of bonds, if required, will be added to the Bid amount by Alternate. B. The Owner reserves the right to purchase the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from his surety company. p 1 TARGET 4.4 BID OPENING TIME /PLACE A. The Contractor for Complete Construction shall determine the time and place to receive subbids. 4.5 BID MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL A. A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the 30 day period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and Bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bids submitted may be withdrawn or modified only by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. The notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of Bidder must have been mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids. B. Withdrawn Bids may not be resubmitted. 4.6 CONTRACT ASSIGNMENT A. Bidders for Complete Construction shall, by submitting a Bid, agree to accept as Subcontractors, by contract assignment, the firms to which the Owner has separately awarded Contracts and which may be identified in the Bidding Documents. 4.8 REJECTION OF BIDS A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and Subbids. 4.9 ACCEPTANCE OF BIDS A. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid or Subbid. 4.10 CONSIDERATION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates, if any, may be accepted in any order and in any combination. 4.11 CONSIDERATION OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Prices, when required as a part of a Bid or Subbid, may be considered in award. B. Any quantities shown or specified are approximate. Each Bidder or Subbidder shall be responsible for the estimate of quantities used in submitting Unit Prices. 4.12 CHANGE ORDER MARK- UPS /MARK -DOWNS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 A. Percentage amounts quoted in the Bid for mark -up /mark -down on Project Change Orders may be considered in award. ARTICLE 5 - POST -BID INFORMATION 5.1 BIDDER SUBMISSIONS A. The successful Bidder shall submit the following in compliance with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements within ten calendar days (or at earlier times specified elsewhere) after date of the fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice to Proceed, whichever is earliest: 1. A Construction Cost Breakdown. 2. A Certification indicating the Contractor has recorded the Contract with any city, county, or state agency, if such action is required by law. 3. A Proposed Construction Progress Schedule. 4. A Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule. 5. A Certificate of Insurance indicating compliance with the insurance requirements. 6. Subcontractors list, including names, addresses, telephone numbers, and trade classification of each. 7. When required, a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond. END OF DOCUMENT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00120 - 3 Isa TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 DOCUMENT 00215 OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Specification Sections for mo specific information on Owner Furnished Materials and Equipment. 1. Furnished by Owner, Installed by Owner. 2. Furnished by Owner and Installed by Contractor. 1.2 STORE PROCESS MANUAL A. An electronic copy of the Store Process Manual is available for General Contractors and Vendors at the ProLog Website; https: / /pdzone.target.com. On the Projects screen select the Submit button and go to the _PD Reference Material project. 1. This document is located in the Project Documents\Document Management\Procurement\Manuals\ Construction Process folder. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DOCUMENT OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION 00215 -1 rap TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 DOCUMENT 00300 BID FORM NAME OF BIDDER: TO: TARGET • 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 Attn: Construction Dept. DATE: The undersigned having carefully examined the Site of the Work and the Bidding Documents, and other Conditions affecting the Work, proposes to furnish in accordance with these Documents material and labor required for the construction of: S Bid Pack No. 3.0 for the Market Upgrade Remodeling of: T-627 Target Store 301 Strander Boulevard Tukwila, WA 98188 i BASE BID Dollars ($ ) and the following amounts for Alternates: ALTERNATE NO. 1 (Performance Bond) [Add][Deduct] Dollars ($ ) UNIT PRICE (Designation/Amount /Unit) The following list of Unit Prices shall be submitted with the Bid. The Unit Prices listed shall be used for computing the cost of all Work added to, or deducted from, the Contract Documents, as applicable. • SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION (Sprinkler Heads) Unit Price SSP: Pendent Quantity Each Add - $ Deduct - $ Per Unit Assembly r Unit Price SSU: Upright Quantity Each Add - $ Deduct - $ Per Unit Assembly Unit Price SCH: Flush Concealed Quantity Each Add - $ Deduct - $ Per Unit Assembly Unit Price SSR: Semi - Recessed Quantity Each ✓ Add - $ Deduct - $ Per Unit Assembly 1 I I BID FORM 00300 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET SUBSTITUTIONS For the Owner's consideration, the undersigned offers the following substitutions and net deduct amounts for each item with the understanding that the Owner reserves the sole right to accept or reject the substitutions: Section Item Mfr/Descrintion Amount CHANGE ORDER MARK -UP /MARK -DOWN We propose the following percentages for overhead and profit on Change Orders: For work performed by our work forces only: Add work mark -up Deduct work mark -down %o For work performed by Subcontractors under our direction: Add work mark -up Deduct work mark -down We will enforce a maximum mark -up of %, and a minimum mark -down of % for Subcontractors' and Suppliers' Change Order work. In submitting this Bid, we understand that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any /or all Bids, and that this Bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the bid date. We agree to commence the Work when directed to proceed and to complete the Work as specified to meet milestone dates indicated in Section 01010 - Summary of the Work. BID FORM 00300 - 2 " TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 We hereby acknowledge receipt of A- Change Modification numbers: No. No. No. No. (The Bidder is to fill in ID number and date of each, thereby acknowledging receipt of A- Change Modifications. () we are incorporated in the state of Owe are a partnership () we are a proprietorship ADDRESS AND LEGAL STATUS Date No. Date Date No. Date Date No. Date Date No. Date Company Name By Corporate Seal Signed Title END OF DOCUMENT The undersigned designates the following address as the legal address to which all notices, direction, or other communications may be served or mailed: Street City State Zip Code BID FORM 00300 - 3 TARGET DOCUMENT 00330 RECEIPT AND WAIVER OF LIEN RIGHTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 FROM: (Contractor) TO: (Owner) PROJECT: (Name) (Location) 1. The undersigned does hereby waive, release and surrender any claim, lien or right of lien resulting from labor, skill, and/or materials, subcontract work, equipment or other work, rent, services or supplies heretofore furnished in and for the construction, improvement, alteration or additions to the above described project prior to the date hereof. 2. This release is given for and in consideration of the sum of $ and other good and valuable consideration received inhand from 3. In further consideration of the payment made as above set forth, and to induce the Owner to make said payment, the undersigned agrees to defend and hold harmless the Owner or Lender, and/or the principal and surety from any claims hereinafter made by the undersigned and/or its material suppliers, subcontractors or employees, servants, agents or assigns of such persons against the project. 4. It is acknowledged that the designation of the above project constitutes an adequate description of the property and improvements for which the undersigned has received consideration for this release. • 5. This instrument shall constitute a full, fmal and complete release of all rights and claims of the undersigned, for the work completed to date. ▪ DATED this day of , 20_ i By (Officer) (Partner) STATE OF Address COUNTY OF The foregoing receipt and waiver of Lien Rights was subscribed and sworn to me this _ day of , 20_, by , as (Title) of (Company name) as a true and complete act of said ▪ Corporation. WITNESS MY HAND AND OFFICIAL SEAL. My Commission expires NOTARY PUBLIC, in and for County, • END OF DOCUMENT ■ ■ RECEIPT AND WAIVER OF LIENS 00330 -1 Imo TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 DOCUMENT 00350 MATERIALS STORED PAYMENT FORM Progress Payment Number: Value Item Stored At Per Attached 1 1 r Project 1. The following items have been included in the above noted request for payment even though not yet incorporated into the Work: 2. The total value of the above items per the attached invoice(s): r 3. In addition to any insurance(s) the Owner may carry, the undersigned states that the above items are covered by Contractor's property insurance against all risks and that said insurance will remain in effect until final acceptance of the completed project by the Owner. 4. The undersigned hereby represents and guarantees that full payment has been made for the above items, and by signature below, contingent upon receipt of payment on account of the above items, the Contractor hereby transfers title to the above items to the Owner of the project. 5. Receipt of payment on account of the above items shall in no manner or in any degree relieve the Contractor of any obligation under its contract, particularly, but not limited to, its obligations with regard to warranties and guarantees. The below signature is by member of firm or corporation entitled to sign contract documents for the Contractor. Contractor: Signed by: Title: Date: END OF DOCUMENT r i MATERIALS STORED PAYMENT FORM 00350 -1 r TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", Version: December 2004, Target Document, is attached herewith. END OF DOCUMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 - 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1.1 DEFINITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Target Corporation Version: December 2005 ARTICLE 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents for the Work are identified in the Agreement. 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT. The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction (the "Contract "). The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the Work to be performed by the Contractor with respect to the Project and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral with respect to the Work. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. A Modification is a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, a Change Order or a Directive. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create any contractual relationship of any kind between the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor, but the Architect/Engineer shall be entitled to performance of obligations intended for its benefit and to enforcement thereof. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner or the Architect/Engineer and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, or between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. 1.1.3 THE WORK. The Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT. The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS. The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents. The Drawings show the design, location and dimensions of the Work, and generally include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS. The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, performance of related services and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 1.1.7 BULLETINS AND FIELD ORDER MODIFICATIONS. Bulletins and Field Order Modifications are written or graphic instruments prepared by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner and issued after the execution of the Agreement. Bulletins and Field Order Modifications modify or interpret the Contract Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Items of Work described in a Bulletin or Field Order Modification shall become a part of the Contract Documents only upon the issuance of a Change Order or Directive authorizing such changes in the Work. 1.1.8 PROJECT MANUAL. The Project Manual is the volume or volumes, if any, identified in the Agreement that may contain the bidding requirements, sample forms and certain of the Contract Documents such as the Specifications. Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents shall be required to the extent it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations that have well -known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.2.2 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections, and articles, and the arrangements of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.3 The Specifications contain incomplete sentences. Words that do not contribute to clear and concise directions have been omitted ("The Contractor Shall," "Shall Be," "As Noted on the Drawings," and similar words). Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference. The words "Shall Be" and "Shall" may be indicated by a colon (:), e.g., "Color: Brown." 1.2.4 As used in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified, "Provide" or "Provided" shall mean furnish and install and includes, without limitation, labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services and other items required to complete the specified Work. 1.2.5 As used in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified, "Install" or "Installed" shall mean unload, unpack and uncrate materials or equipment; remove packing materials from the site; store, protect, assemble, move to area of use, set in place and connect to services. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications, plans and other documents prepared or furnished by the Owner or the Architect/Engineer in connection with the Project are the property of the Owner and not the Contractor. They are to be used by the Contractor only with respect to the Project and are not to be used on any other project, and the Contractor shall take such steps as the Owner may reasonably request to protect the Owner's rights therein and to prevent their unauthorized use. With the exception of one set of Contract Documents for each party to the Contract, such documents are to be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner on request at the completion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of any copyright or other reserved rights of the Owner. 2.1 DEFINITION 2.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ARTICLE 2. ARCHITECT /ENGINEER 2.1.1 The Architect/Engineer is the professional architect, engineer or consultant identified as such in the Agreement. The term Architect/Engineer means the Architect/Engineer or its authorized representative. 2.2.1 To the extent directed to do so by the Owner, the Architect/Engineer will provide administration of the Contract as hereinafter described. 2.2.2 The Owner may appoint the Architect/Engineer to serve as the Owner's representative. The Architect/Engineer will advise and consult with the Owner as requested by the Owner. The Architect/Engineer will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents or in a written instrument executed by the Owner and the Architect/Engineer. 2.2.3 The Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for and will not have control of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and it will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in Page - 2 Document#: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for or have control or charge over the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 2.2.4 The Architect/Engineer will advise the Owner concerning the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents and will advise the Owner in evaluating the performance thereunder by both the Owner and the Contractor. 2.2.5 The Owner may initially refer claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents to the Architect/Engineer for decision, which it will render in writing within a reasonable time. If the Owner does refer a claim, dispute or other matter to the Architect/Engineer, the rendering of a decision by the Architect/Engineer will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Contractor of any rights or remedies it may otherwise have with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter. 2.2.6 If the Owner concurs, the Architect/Engineer will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in its opinion, the Architect/Engineer considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, it will have authority with the Owner's approval to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents whether or not such Work is then fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither the Architect/Engineer's authority to act hereunder, nor any decision made by it in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Architect/Engineer to the Contractor or to any other person or entity. 2.2.7 The Architect/Engineer will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon those Contractor's submittals (such as Shop Drawings and Product Data) referred to the Architect/Engineer for review by the Owner. Such review shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Architect/Engineer's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 2.2.8 The Architect/Engineer, when requested by the Owner, will assist the Owner in conducting inspections of the Work. 2.2.9 In the case of the termination of the employment of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner may appoint a replacement Architect/Engineer, in which case the Owner shall advise the Contractor of the identity of such replacement. 3.1 DEFINITION ARTICLE 3. OWNER 3.1.1 The Owner is the entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Owner means the Owner or its authorized representative. 3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE OWNER 3.2.1 If required to perform the Work, the Owner shall furnish a legal description of the site, a soils report for the site, and surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site. 3.2.2 Except as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. If so directed by the Owner or required by govemmental authorities, the Contractor shall secure the same at the Owner's expense. 3.2.3 Upon receipt of a written request therefor from the Contractor, information or services under the Owner's control shall be fumished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 3.2.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 3.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct the Work as required by Paragraph 13.2 or fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written notice to the Contractor, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. This right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. 3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 3.4.1 If the Contractor defaults under any provision of the Contract Documents or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedy it may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case there shall be deducted from the payments then or thereafter due to the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, which shall include compensation for the Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. This right of the Owner to carry out the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. 3.5 OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT THE WORK 3.5.1 The Owner will have the right to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. The Owner will also have the right to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, whether or not such Work is then fabricated, installed or completed. Neither the Owner's right to act under this Subparagraph nor any decision made by it either to exercise or not to exercise such right shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Owner to the Contractor or to any other person or entity. 3.6 OWNER'S REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS 3.6.1 The Owner will have the right to review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. The Contractor acknowledges that any such review, approval or other action by the Owner shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and the information given in the Contract Documents. Neither the Owner's right to act under this Subparagraph nor any action taken by the Owner with respect to any submittal shall relieve the Contractor from its ultimate responsibility to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner shall act upon submittals with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Owner's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 3.7 OWNER'S SITE REPRESENTATIVE (OSR) 3.7.1 The Owner may appoint to the Project an Owner's Site Representative (OSR) who shall represent the Owner. The OSR shall at all times have access to the Work and the Contractor shall provide facilities for such access. The OSR may schedule and conduct periodic Project meetings at the site, which the Contractor shall attend as requested. If an OSR is appointed, the Owner's instructions to the Contractor may be issued through the OSR and Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for Owner- supplied equipment may be forwarded to the Contractor by the OSR. Page - 4 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 4.1 DEFINITION 4.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term Contractor means the Contractor or its authorized representative. 4.2 AGREEMENTS OF THE CONTRACTOR ARTICLE 4. CONTRACTOR 4.2.1 The Contractor acknowledges that it is an independent contractor and not an agent of the Owner. 4.2.2 The Contractor acknowledges the position of trust it occupies and that the Owner will rely upon the Contractor for the proper performance of the Work. 4.2.3 The Contractor acknowledges that, except as specifically provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner, by supplying maps, drawings, data or other technical information makes no representations as to the accuracy of such maps, drawings, data or technical information and that it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify all conditions. 4.2.4 The Contractor represents that it has: (a) visited the site, (b) taken such other steps as may be necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the Work and the general and local conditions which affect the Work or the cost thereof, and (c) examined the site, the obstacles which may be encountered and all other conditions (including without limitation, the availability of labor and any potential labor difficulties) having a bearing upon the performance of the Work, the superintendence of the Work, the time of completion and all other relevant matters. The Contractor acknowledges that, except as specifically provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner has no responsibility for understandings or representations concerning conditions made by any of the Owner's agents, representatives or employees. 4.2.5 The Contractor acknowledges its responsibility to coordinate its Work with that of separate contractors for the installation of other work within the Project. The Contractor expressly promises to schedule and coordinate its Work with such separate contractors so as to assist them and permit the Project to be completed on schedule. 4.2.6 The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it shall have no right to additional compensation or a time extension for or on account of 1) labor disputes, or 2) preexisting conditions of the site, unless such conditions could not reasonably have been discovered by the Contractor in the course of a diligent and prudent investigation of the site in accordance with Subparagraph 4.2.4. The Contractor expressly waives its right to make claims for such matters. Moreover, the Contractor agrees to work overtime and accelerate its performance to deal with such matters in order to achieve the Construction Schedule and to permit the Project to be completed on schedule. 4.2.7 The Contractor agrees that no payment or compensation of any kind shall be made to it for any damages that may arise out of or be caused by any delay from any cause in the progress of the Work, whether such delay be avoidable or unavoidable, and the Contractor waives any right to claim such damages. The foregoing does not affect the Contractor's ability to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum to the extent and in the manner permitted elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 4.3 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.3.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with any technical information furnished by the Owner and shall at once report to the Owner any error, inconsistency or omission it may discover. The Contractor shall not be liable for any damage resulting from any such error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs, delays and damages resulting from its failure immediately to report any such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions that it may discover, or resulting from the performance of any construction activity which it knows, or reasonably should have known, involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved submittals for such portion of the Work. 4.4 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4.4.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using its best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. 4.4.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of the Contractor and the Contractor's agents and employees. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees from any claims, damages, losses, costs, penalties and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising out of, caused by, or incurred in connection with such acts or omissions. Page - 6 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 4.4.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the acts and omissions of the Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors, their agents and employees, anyone acting on behalf of any of them, and any other persons performing any of the Work directly or indirectly under a contract with the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees from any claims, damages, losses, costs and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising out of, caused by, or incurred in connection with such acts or omissions. 4.4.4 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees and other persons performing the Work and shall not employ or permit the employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in the task assigned to them. 4.4.5 The Contractor shall not be relieved from its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Architect/Engineer in its administration of the Contract, or by the activities or duties of the OSR or other representatives of the Owner, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 4.5 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.5.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 4.5.2 In the case where the Owner undertakes the procurement and supply of equipment or materials ( "Owner Furnished Materials "), the following terms shall apply: 4.6 WARRANTY .1 The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the delivery of the Owner Furnished Materials to the site at a time that is mutually agreeable to the manufacturer or distributor of the Owner Furnished Materials and the Contractor. The Contractor shall confirm the agreed -upon delivery dates by facsimile or email to the manufacturer or distributor. The Contractor must take delivery of all Owner Fumished Materials on the agreed upon delivery date unless the Contractor gives the manufacturer or distributor of such materials at least 21 days notice. Any costs incurred as a result of the Contractor's failure to notify the manufacturer or distributor of a change in the delivery date with at least 21 days notice shall be borne solely by the Contractor. .2 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take delivery of all Owner Furnished Materials and arrange for the unloading of the Owner Furnished Materials at the site. The Contractor shall inspect the Owner Furnished Materials prior to delivery and shall not take delivery of any materials that are defective. The Contractor shall store all Owner Fumished Materials in an appropriate manner to ensure that such materials are not damaged and remain in working order. .3 The Owner Fumished Materials shall only be used for incorporation in the Project. Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any remaining Owner Fumished Materials and dispose of such materials in accordance with the Owner's directions. The Contractor shall at all times maintain a listing of all Owner Furnished Materials at the site. .4 The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all losses, damages, theft, misuse or deterioration of the Owner Furnished Materials. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the ownership of all Owner Furnished Materials shall at all times be and remain in the Owner. 4.6.1 The Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be of good quality and will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, shall be considered defective. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment incorporated in the Work. This warranty is not limited by any other provision of the Contract Documents. Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 7 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 TARGET 4.7 TAXES 4.7.1 The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor, which taxes are legally enacted at the time bids are received, whether or not yet effective. 4.8 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.8.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for construction permits and for all other permits and govemmental fees, licenses, approvals and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. 4.8.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work, and in the event of an allegation that the Contractor has failed to do so, the Contractor shall pay any fines or penalties imposed upon the Owner, and shall reimburse the Owner for any expenses (including attorneys' fees) incurred by the Owner, as a result of such allegation. 4.8.3 It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, it shall promptly give written notice thereof to the Owner. If the Contractor performs any Work which it knows, or reasonably should have known, to be contrary to such laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs, delays and damages attributable thereto. 4.9 ALLOWANCES 4.9.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons against whom it makes a reasonable objection. 4.9.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 these allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the materials and equipment required by the allowance delivered at the site, and shall include all applicable taxes; .2 the Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance; .3 whenever the cost is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will take into consideration changes, if any, in handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses. 4.10 SUPERINTENDENT 4.10.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent ( "Superintendent ") and necessary assistants in connection with the Project who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the Superintendent shall be binding upon the Contractor. Upon the Contractor's written request in each case, the Owner shall confirm important communications in writing. Page - 8 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 4.11 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4.11.1 The Contractor, with the assistance of the Owner, shall develop and maintain a construction progress schedule. The Contractor shall update and distribute the progress schedule as required to inform all parties of the status of the Work. 4.12 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.12.1 The Contractor shall maintain in good order at the site for the Owner one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner and shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 4.13 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.13.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 4.13.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information fumished to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. 4.13.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.13.4 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents. 4.13.5 No portion of the Work requiring submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner as provided in the Contract Documents. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 4.13.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals the Contractor represents that it has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or that it will do so, and that it has checked and coordinated the information contained in such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owner Shop Drawings and Product Data of all Owner- supplied equipment. The Contractor shall review and retum a copy thereof to the Owner with comments and approval. Approval by the Contractor shall represent that field conditions have been or will be coordinated to receive the Owner- supplied equipment. 4.13.7 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect/Engineer's or Owner's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Owner has specifically approved such deviation by Change Order. The Contractor shall specifically inform the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, if such submittal is to be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer, in writing of such deviation at the time of submission. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect/Engineer's or Owner's approval thereof. 4.13.8 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or noted on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner on previous submittals. 4.13.9 The Contractor shall furnish copies of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals to separate contractors and to Subcontractors as may be necessary to coordinate their work or upon their request. Document #: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 9 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 4.14 USE OF SITE 4.14.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment. 4.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4.15.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly, except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractors by excavation or by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 4.15.3 Cutting shall be accurately located and neatly done. Unnecessary cutting shall be avoided. Patching shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Patching work shall conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, such work shall conform to the highest standards of the trade. Finished patching work shall be acceptable to the contractor whose work has been patched. 4.15.4 The Contractor shall leave all holes, chases and other openings in its construction required by other contractors for the installation of their work, provided such openings are accurately located by the party requiring them before the execution of the construction. The Contractor shall afford other contractors a reasonable opportunity to locate such openings. 4.16 CLEANING UP 4.16.1 The Contractor at all times shall keep the site free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by its operations. At the completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove all of its waste materials and rubbish from and about the site as well as all of its tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4.16.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up at the completion of the Work, and the Contractor does not correct such failure within three days after receipt of written notice from the Owner, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor and may be deducted from any amounts then or thereafter due to the Contractor. 4.17 COMMUNICATIONS 4.17.1 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or as otherwise directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit those Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples which are to be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer directly to the Architect/Engineer, and shall direct all other communications to the Architect/Engineer or the Owner through the OSR or, if no OSR has been appointed, through the project manager identified by the Owner. If the Contract Documents require written notice, it shall be given in accordance with Paragraph 7.3. 4.18 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.18.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent, trademark, trade secret, copyright or other intellectual property rights, and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, it shall be responsible for such loss unless it promptly gives such information to the Owner. Page - 10 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 11 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 4.19 INDEMNIFICATION 4.19.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor agrees to assume entire responsibility and liability for all damages or injuries to all persons, whether employees or otherwise, and to all property, arising out of, resulting from, or in any manner connected with the execution of the Work. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Architect/Engineer, the agents and employees of each of them, and any other person or entity designated as an Indemnified Party in the Contract Documents (collectively the "Indemnified Parties ") from and against all claims, losses, damages and expenses (including court costs, attorneys' fees and investigative and discovery costs) which (1) arise out of, result from, or are in any manner connected with the Contractor's operations, the execution of the Work or the Contractor's failure to perform its obligations under the Contract Documents, and which are attributable to personal or bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage to or destruction of property (other than the Work itself), including loss of use resulting therefrom, or (2) arise out of, result from or are caused by (in whole or in part) the acts, errors, omissions, negligence or fault of the Contractor or any Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone acting on behalf of any of them. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the foregoing assumption of liability and indemnity shall apply regardless of whether or not such claims, losses, damages, injuries or expenses are ones for which any of the Indemnified Parties may be or may be claimed to be liable, as a result of negligence, gross negligence or otherwise. The Contractor agrees to obtain, maintain and pay for liability insurance coverage and endorsements to insure the provisions of this paragraph. The foregoing indemnity obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph 4.19. The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 4.19 shall survive the expiration or termination of the Contract and shall extend to claims, losses, damages and expenses asserted or arising after completion of the Work as well as during the Work's progress. 4.19.2 In any and all claims against any of the Indemnified Parties by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone acting on behalf of any of them, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 4.19 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor or other party under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 4.19.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 4.19 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect/Engineer, its agents or employees, arising out of, (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect/Engineer, its agents or employees, provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 4.19.4 The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against any assertion of claims for mechanics' liens or other encumbrances by Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors or material suppliers and against any assertion of security interests by suppliers of goods or materials. 4.20 ACCESS TO THE WORK 4.20.1 The Contractor shall allow the Architect/Engineer, the Owner and the Owner's representatives, agents and consultants free access to the site and to the Work wherever located at all times. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access. 4.21 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS 4.21.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, identifying and collating the following materials from Subcontractors, and shall deliver one copy to the Owner at the time of Final Completion: .1 Complete equipment diagrams, operating instructions, maintenance manuals, parts lists, wiring diagrams, pneumatic and /or electrical control diagrams, test and balance reports, inspection reports, guarantees and warranties, as applicable, for each piece of fixed equipment furnished under the Contract, together with specific information regarding manufacturer's name and address, nearest distributor, service representative's name, address, office and home phone Page - 12 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 number, make and model numbers, operating designs and characteristics, and the like. These materials shall be supplied in a ring binder, hard -cover book, properly indexed for ready reference. .2 Name and address of all Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors (including equipment and material suppliers), together with their respective areas of work, materials or equipment furnished. .3 Complete list of all materials and equipment utilized, together with the respective location in the Work. .4 Complete operating instructions for each equipment system. .5 Complete parts lists, together with recommended spare parts for each type and model of equipment installed. 4.22 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 4.22.1 At the time of Final Completion, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of as -built drawings to the Owner. 4.23 FIELD OFFICE 4.23.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary field office at the site that is suitably equipped. The field office is to be located on the site at a location acceptable to the Owner and removed when the Work is completed. If the Owner has appointed an OSR, sufficient space, including desk, chair and table, is to be provided for the OSR. 4.24 MAINTENANCE AND ACCESS TO RECORDS 4.24.1 The Owner shall have access at all reasonable times to the Contractor's records and other documents of any kind which relate to the Contract and the Project including, without limitation, all subcontracts, purchase orders, receipts, accounting records, cancelled checks, vouchers and correspondence. All such records and other documents shall be preserved by the Contractor, and the Owner shall have access to them, for not less than three (3) years after final payment to the Contractor with respect to the Project or such longer period required by law. The Owner may conduct periodic audits of the Contractor's records and other documents, and the Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in conducting such audits. 4.25 STORM WATER DISCHARGE COMPLIANCE. 4.25.1 The Contractor hereby designates the Contractor's Superintendent as its "Storm Water Coordinator" and agrees that the Superintendent, as Storm Water Coordinator, shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan applicable to the site and for ensuring compliance with any and all laws, rules, regulations and orders relating to storm water discharge including, but not limited to, the Clean Water Act's National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (33 U.S.C. Section 1251 et seq.). For purposes of the Contract Documents, "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" shall mean any plan regarding storm water discharge with respect to the Project required by any permit, rule, regulation or order of a governmental entity. Upon its completion, the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents as a Specification. 5.1 DEFINITION ARTICLE 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or its authorized representative. The term Subcontractor does not include any separate contractor or its subcontractors. Document #: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 13 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Sub - subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub - subcontractor or an authorized representative thereof. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.2.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner copies of all bids and other proposals from potential Subcontractors, and shall advise the Owner which Subcontractors it proposes to use. In addition, the Contractor will provide such information as the Owner may require from time to time regarding each potential Subcontractor, including whether or not the potential Subcontractor is minority -owned or women - owned. The Contractor shall also submit a bid for each portion of the Work which the Contractor proposes to perform with its own forces. The Owner may determine which portions of the Work will be performed by Subcontractors. The Owner may require the Contractor to obtain multiple bids for any portions of the Work. The Owner may designate entities from whom the Contractor shall solicit bids, and the Owner may require that additional bids be obtained if it determines the initial bids to be unsatisfactory. The Owner will determine with the advice of the Contractor which bids will be accepted. The Contractor shall not contract with anyone who is not acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. If a Subcontractor is selected to do a portion of the Work who is different from the person or entity proposed by the Contractor, and if the bid of such person or entity was the basis upon which the Contract Sum was determined, then the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued, provided that the person or entity proposed by the Contractor was qualified to do the proposed portion of the Work. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall make no substitution for any Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected without the prior approval of the Owner. The Owner may require the Contractor to change any Subcontractor previously approved, in which case the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By an appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these documents, assumes toward the Owner. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with its Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound by this Subparagraph 5.3.1 and shall identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor similarly to make copies of such documents available to its Sub - subcontractors. 5.3.2 The Contractor shall not award a subcontract on the basis of the cost of the work plus a fee without the Owner's prior consent. In addition, the Contractor shall not award a subcontract that provides that the allowance for overhead and profit payable to the Subcontractor with respect to changes in the Work is greater than the following: 1) with respect to those portions of such Work performed by such Subcontractor, the allowance shall not exceed 15% of the cost of such portions of the Work, 2) with respect to those portions of such Work performed by any lower tier Sub - subcontractor, the allowance shall not exceed 5% of the amount paid to such lower tier Sub - subcontractor as a result of such change. 5.3.3 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that such assignment is effective only after the termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause and provided that such assignment is effective only as to those subcontracts which the Owner specifically accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing. The Contractor agrees to execute such additional documents as the Owner may request to confirm such assignments. The Contractor shall insure that each subcontract agreement recognizes the rights of the Owner pursuant to the foregoing Page - 14 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 contingent assignment. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy of each subcontract agreement upon request. 5.3.4 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relations between the Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractors. ARTICLE 6. WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner shall have the right to perform work related to the Project with its own forces and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site. 6.1.2 The Owner will provide for the coordination of the work of its own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate therewith as provided in the Contract Documents. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate its Work with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the Owner any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects which were not reasonably discoverable but which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others. 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be bome by the party responsible therefor. 6.2.4 Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on the site, the Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage. 6.2.5 Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall promptly attempt to settle with such separate contractor or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractor's expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attomeys' fees and court or arbitration costs which the Owner has incurred. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises between the Contractor and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the parties responsible therefor as the Owner shall determine to be just. 7.1 GOVERNING LAW ARTICLE 7. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 15 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2.1 The Owner and the Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not assign the Contract nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to it under the Contract without the previous written consent of the Owner. 7.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 7.3.1 Any written notice required to be given by either party shall be given in the manner set forth in the Agreement. The Contractor shall give a copy of all notices to the Owner to the OSR or, if no OSR has been appointed, to the project manager identified by the Owner. 7.4 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES 7.4.1 Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of its employees, agents or others for whose acts it is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such injury or damage. 7.5 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 7.5.1 The Owner may require that the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a performance bond or a payment bond if and as required in the bidding documents or in the Contract Documents. If such bonds are required, they shall be executed by the Contractor and a corporate bonding company licensed to transact such business in the state in which the Project is located and acceptable to the Owner. The bond shall have affixed to it a certified and current copy of a power of attorney for the attorney in fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety. If at any time a surety on any such bond is declared a bankrupt or loses its right to do business in the state in which the Work is to be performed or is removed from the list of surety companies accepted on Federal bonds, Contractor shall within ten (10) days after notice from the Owner to do so substitute an acceptable bond (or bonds) in such form and sum and signed by such other surety or sureties as may be satisfactory to the Owner. No further payments from the Owner shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new surety or sureties shall have furnished an acceptable bond to the Owner. 7.6 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7.6.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder are cumulative and are in addition to, and not a limitation on, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 7.6.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect/Engineer or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically provided in the Contract Documents or agreed in writing. 7.6.3 Subparagraphs 7.6.1 and 7.6.2 shall not permit the Contractor to assert a claim which has not been timely made or has otherwise been waived under the terms of the Contract Documents. 7.6.4 The Owner shall be entitled to recover from the Contractor all costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees, incurred to enforce any provision of this Contract. In connection with the Contractor's obligation to provide a legal defense to the Owner or other Indemnified Parties pursuant to any provision of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to select counsel to provide such defense. 7.7 TESTS 7.7.1 If the Contract Documents or the laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness so that the Owner or Architect/Engineer may Page -16 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 observe such inspection, testing or approval. Where initial test or inspection reveals a failure of the Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs of additional tests and inspections necessary to determine compliance, including compensation for the Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such failure. Document #: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 17 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 7.7.2 If the Owner or the Architect/Engineer determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Subparagraph 7.7.1 does not include, the Owner will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness so that the Owner or the Architect/Engineer may observe such inspection, testing or approval. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise, the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.7.3 Reports of tests, inspections and approvals performed by an independent testing agency engaged by the Owner may be submitted to the Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor directly from the testing agency. AU other required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by it to the Owner. 7.7.4 The Contractor shall make all arrangements, furnish all samples and materials to be tested, and perform all related work necessary for the inspections, tests and approvals of the Work required under Subparagraph 7.7.1 or Subparagraph 7.7.2. 7.8 CONTINUATION OF WORK 7.8.1 The Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Construction Schedule during all disputes and disagreements with the Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements. 7.9 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO TURNOVER 7.9.1 The Owner shall have the right to install its furnishings and equipment within the Work prior to Turnover. Such installation shall not constitute occupancy or use by the Owner. The Contractor shall have the responsibility to protect such furnishings and equipment. 7.9.2 The Owner shall have the right to use or occupy the Work, or a portion thereof, prior to Tumover under the following conditions: .1 The Owner shall give the Contractor at least ten days prior written notice of its intention to use or occupy the Work, or a portion thereof. Prior to use or occupancy, the Owner, accompanied by the Contractor, will conduct an inspection of the area to be used or occupied; based on this inspection, the Owner will prepare a list of work to be completed or corrected. Prior to use or occupancy, the Owner and the Contractor shall agree in writing on their individual responsibilities for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance for the area to be used or occupied. .2 After occupancy, the Owner will allow the Contractor reasonable access to the occupied area to complete and correct the Work. .3 The Contractor shall not be held responsible for any damage to the occupied part of the Work resulting from the Owner's use or occupancy. .4 Use or occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of any claims the Owner or Contractor may have against each other. 8.1 DEFINITIONS ARTICLE 8. TIME 8.1.1 The time allotted for the completion of the Work, or designated portions thereof, as provided in the Construction Schedule is the Contract Time. The Construction Schedule is set forth in the Agreement and may be adjusted only by Change Order in accordance with the Contract Documents. Page - 18 Document#: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 8.1.2 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically designated. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. The Contractor shall employ sufficient forces and take all other steps necessary to achieve each of the dates set forth in the Construction Schedule. In the event any delays are experienced in the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall accelerate its performance, employ overtime, cause the Subcontractors to employ overtime, and take such other steps as are necessary to meet the Construction Schedule. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 An "Excusable Delay" is a delay in the progress of the Work caused by the act or neglect of the Owner or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather conditions not reasonably foreseeable, damage to the Work by fire or other casualty, or other similar causes beyond the Contractor's control. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the Contractor and are not Excusable Delays. An Excusable Delay does not include delays (1) due to events or causes described in Subparagraph 4.2.6, (2) due wholly or in part to the fault, act, omission, neglect, imprudent management or default of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone acting on behalf of any of them, or (3) due to events or causes reasonably foreseeable to the Contractor at the time the Contractor submitted its bid for the Work, such as weather patterns reasonably to be anticipated during the period of construction of the Work. 8.3.2 Any claim of an Excusable Delay shall be made by written notice to the Owner not more than ten days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. In the case of a continuing delay only one claim is necessary. The Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress and cost of the Work. 8.3.3 In the event of an Excusable Delay, the Contract Time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner may determine. Delays affecting events not on the critical path will not be cause for a time extension. In lieu of granting an extension of time, the Owner may issue a Change Order or a Directive directing the Contractor to accelerate its performance to meet the Construction Schedule, in which case the Contract Sum shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents for a change in the Work to reflect the actual increase, if any, in the cost of performance as a result of such acceleration, except that there shall be no additional fee or allowance for overhead and profit payable to the Contractor for such change. The Owner shall have the right to determine in its discretion whether to handle an Excusable Delay by extending the Contract Time or by directing the Contractor to accelerate its performance, or by a combination of both. 8.3.4 If an event which would constitute an Excusable Delay causes an unanticipated increase in the cost of performance beyond the additional cost due to the acceleration of the Contractor's performance, the Contractor may make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum in accordance with Subparagraph 12.2.1. 8.4 DAMAGES FOR DELAY 8.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for damages and expenses incurred by the Owner and any separate contractors for delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to complete the Work within the Contract Time or resulting from the progress of the Work failing to conform to the Construction Schedule. 9.1 CONTRACT SUM ARTICLE 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, together with authorized adjustments thereto, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the Work under Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 19 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET the Contract Documents. The Contract Sum will be paid in periodic progress payments following the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents. Page - 20 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare a Schedule of Values for the Work including quantities, when required, and submit two copies to the Owner for approval at the time required by the Owner. . The Schedule of Values shall be submitted on a form designated or approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall submit such data as required to substantiate the correctness of the Schedule. The Contractor's fee, if applicable, shall be listed separately. Figures should be rounded to the nearest ten dollars. The total of all values on the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Sum. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 The Contractor shall submit itemized Applications for Payment to the Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each Application for Payment shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner may require, and shall reflect the retainage provided in the Agreement. The Application for Payment shall not include any amount relating to a change in the Work until a Change Order has been issued by the Owner with respect to such change. Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payments of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor because of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Application for Payment shall constitute a representation by the Contractor to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated, that the quality of the Work covered by the Application is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount requested. 9.3.4 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in the construction or upon the receipt of payment by the Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances (hereinafter referred to in this Article as "liens ") and that no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor or by any other person performing Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Work subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or imposed by the Contractor or by such other person. 9.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.4.1 After receipt of an Application for Payment, the Owner will pay those amounts which are properly owed within the time provided in the Contract Documents, provided that the Application meets the requirements of the Contract. Documents. There shall be deducted from each progress payment the retainage provided in the Agreement. The retainage will be paid at the time of final payment and shall not be earned by the Contractor nor owed by the Owner until the Final Completion of the Work. 9.4.2 Promptly upon receipt of payment from the Owner, the Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 9.4.3 The Owner shall have no obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys to any Subcontractor. Document #: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 21 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 9.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 9.5.1 The Owner may decline to approve or pay the Contractor's Application for Payment in whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner if, in the Owner's reasonable opinion, the Work has not progressed to the point indicated on the Application for Payment or the quality of the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner may also decline to approve or pay any Application for Payment or nullify the whole or any part of any Application for Payment previously approved to such extent as may be necessary, in the Owner's reasonable opinion, to protect the Owner from loss because: .1 the Work, or any portion of the Work, is defective; .2 third party claims have been filed or there is reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; .3 the Contractor has failed to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 the Contract Sum has been reduced by Change Order, or there is reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 the Owner or a separate contractor has incurred damage for which the Contractor is responsible; .6 there is reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; or .7 the Contractor has persistently failed to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contracts Document or has failed to adhere to the Construction Schedule. 9.5.2 In the event any liens are filed by any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material supplier, the Owner may withhold from amounts otherwise due the Contractor an amount equal to 150% of the amount of such liens until such liens are resolved. The foregoing is in addition to the Owner's rights under Subparagraph 9.5.1 and any other provisions of the Contract Documents. 9.5.3 When the above reasons for withholding payment are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 9.6 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.6.1 If the Owner does not pay the Contractor within fifteen days after the date established in the Contract Documents any amount then due, then the Contractor may, upon fifteen additional days' written notice to the Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount due has been received. If the Owner disputes that such amount is then due, the Contractor shall carry on the Work as provided in Subparagraph 7.8.1, provided the Owner has paid the amounts not in dispute. 9.7 FINAL COMPLETION AND TURNOVER 9.7.1 Final Completion is achieved when the Contractor has fully performed the Contract and completed the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall achieve Final Completion prior to the date established for Tumover in the Construction Schedule. 9.7.2 Tumover is the time at which the Contractor delivers the completed Work to the Owner. Upon Tumover, the Owner assumes responsibility for security, maintenance, heat and utilities. The Owner shall acknowledge its acceptance of Turnover in writing. Tumover shall occur on the date set forth in the Construction Schedule, provided that the Owner shall not be required to accept Tumover on that date if the Contractor has not achieved Final Completion. The Owner's decision to delay the acceptance of Tumover does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to achieve the Construction Schedule, and does not constitute a waiver of any claim by the Owner relating to the failure to achieve the Construction Schedule. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Turnover, provided Final Completion has been achieved. Page - 22 Document #: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 9.7.3 When the Contractor considers that the Work is substantially complete, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing and shall submit to the Owner a comprehensive list of items to be corrected or completed. The Contractor shall correct or complete all items on the list prior to the date established for Tumover in the Construction Schedule. The failure to include an item on such list does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner may conduct such inspections of the Work as the Owner deems appropriate. If the Owner determines that any items (whether or not on the Contractor's list) are not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall complete or correct such items prior to the date established for Turnover in the Construction Schedule. Neither the failure of the Owner to conduct inspections nor the failure of the Owner to notify the Contractor of items not in accordance with the Contract Documents shall relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8 FINAL PAYMENT 9.8.1 After the Owner has accepted Tumover and after the Contractor has achieved Final Completion and delivered all manuals and instructions, insurance certificates, bonds and other documents required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may submit its Final Application for Payment, following the procedure set forth in the Agreement. 9.8.2 Neither the final payment nor the remaining retained percentage shall be earned by the Contractor or owed by the Owner until the Contractor submits to the Owner: (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or its property may in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied; (2) other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated or required by the Owner; (3) consent of surety, if any, to final payment; and (4) the manuals and instructions, certificates of insurance and all other documents required to be submitted by the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 If any Subcontractor refuses to fumish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may fumish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9.8.4 The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of the Final Application for Payment. 9.9 NO WAIVER BY OWNER 9.9.1 The Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither the approval of any Application for Payment, the making of any payment, the giving of any approval, the use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof, the acceptance of Tumover, the making of final payment, nor any other action on the part of the Owner shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner or an acceptance of any Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS ARTICLE 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work including compliance with the requirements of OSHA. Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 23 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or Toss to: 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and by performance of the Contract, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other wamings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 10.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property referred to in Subparagraphs 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone acting on behalf of any of them. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to its obligations under Paragraph 4.19 and any other provisions of the Contract Documents. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's Superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner. 10.2.7 its safety. .1 all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages, death or injury of any kind to any persons, whether employees or otherwise, and for any damage to property, resulting from the failure to maintain adequate safety precautions and programs or from the failure to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property, and the Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees, from and against any claims, fines, penalties, losses, damages and expenses (including court costs and attorneys' fees) suffered or incurred as a result of such failure. 10.3 EMERGENCIES The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger 10.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at its discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 12 for changes in the Work and in Article 8 for Excusable Delays. 10.4 HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAMS 10.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between Page - 24 Document#: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 or among employers at the site in accordance with the requirements of OSHA and other applicable laws and regulations. Documentd: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 25 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain (in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located and rated no less than A- in the current edition of Best's Insurance Reports) such insurance as will protect the Contractor and the Owner to the extent required herein from claims, which may arise out of, result from or may be in any manner connected with the execution of the Work or the operations under the Contract by any person or entity, regardless of whether such claims are ones for which the Owner may be or may be claimed to be liable, including without limitation, the following: .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other employee benefit acts; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease or death of the Contractor's employees; 3 claims tor damages because of bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage that are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor; or (2) by any other person for any other reason; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage resulting from or arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and .8 contractual liability claims involving the Contractor's obligations under any indemnification provision in the Contract. 11.1.2 The Contractor's liability insurance as required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits of liability and include the following minimum coverages: .1 Workers' Compensation Insurance as required by any applicable law or regulation. .2 Employer's Liability Insurance in the amounts of: $ 1,000,000 each accident; $ 1,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit; and $ 1,000,000 Disease -Each Employee. .3 Commercial General Liability Insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of the Contractor including, without limitation, coverages for Premises and Operations, Elevators and Escalators (if applicable to the Project), Products and Completed Operations (which shall be maintained for three years after Final Completion), Contractual Liability (including the indemnity obligations assumed by the Contractor under the Contract Documents), Independent Contractors, Broad Form Property Damage (including completed operations), Explosion, Collapse and Underground, and Personal Injury and Advertising Liability: $ 2,000,000 each occurrence $ 5,000,000 general aggregate Page - 26 Document#: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 $ 5,000,000 Products/Completed Operations aggregate $ 2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury combined single limit per occurrence .4 Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance (including owned, non -owned and hired vehicle coverage) in the amount of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Bodily Injury and Property Damage each occurrence. .5 Aircraft Public Liability Insurance if aircraft of any kind is used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor or sub - Subcontractor or by anyone else on their behalf, insuring against personal injury, bodily injury, property damage and passenger liability with limits of $5,000,000 combined single limit for any occurrence, each aircraft. 11.1.3 Commercial General Liability, Employer's Liability and Automobile Liability Insurance may each be arranged under a single policy for the full limits required, or by a combination of underlying policies with the balance provided by an Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy. 11.1.4 The Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on an occurrence basis. The Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance shall include an endorsement in a form acceptable to the Owner whereby the Owner and its subsidiaries are named as additional insureds for liability arising out of or related to the Work and all operations performed for the Owner and /or any of its subsidiaries by or on behalf of the Contractor, including completed operations coverage. At the direction of the Owner, other Indemnified Parties shall also be included as additional insureds. The Contractor's insurance shall also include an endorsement providing that there shall be severability of interests with respect to the additional insureds and that all of the coverage afforded to the Owner through the Contractor's insurance shall be primary and not contributory to any coverage available to the Owner under any other insurance held by the Owner. The policies shall contain a provision that coverage will not be canceled, allowed to expire, reduced or materially altered until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. Certificates of insurance showing required coverages and all material endorsements in force shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the commencement of the Work. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall submit copies of the insurance policies to the Owner. 11.1.5 It is the obligation of the Contractor to provide insurance that complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's agreement to provide insurance is a material part of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. The parties intend that the Contractor shall provide the required insurance and that such insurance shall protect the interests of the Contractor and the Owner notwithstanding any assertion or determination that any indemnity provision of the Contract Documents is void or unenforceable. The obligations of the Contractor under the Contract Documents with respect to insurance shall not be waived by the Owner's failure to request evidence of insurance or to enforce any of the other provisions of the Contract Documents respecting insurance, or by the Owner's failure to respond to or object to any submission by the Contractor respecting insurance. The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for all damages incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor's failure to carry the required insurance. The Owner does not represent that the above limits and coverages are adequate to protect the Contractor's interests and assumes no responsibility therefor. 11.2 SUBCONTRACTORS' LIABILITY INSURANCE. 11.2.1 It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the appropriate types, level and extent of insurance coverage provided by its Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors; provided, however, all Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors must carry workers' compensation insurance as required by any applicable law or regulation and Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Owner against any Subcontractor's or sub - Subcontractor's failure to do so. 11.3 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE. 11.3.1 The Owner may, at its option, obtain liability insurance to protect the Owner against claims that may arise from operations under the Contract. Such insurance shall be solely for the benefit of the Owner and shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the Contractor's obligations to the Owner under the Contract Documents. Document #: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 27 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk "all risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum for the Work at the site on a replacement cost basis. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or unless otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities that are beneficiaries of such insurance, until Tumover. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors in the Work. .1 Such property insurance shall be on an "all -risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical Toss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, false -work, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect/Engineer's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. .2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors in the Work and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. .3 In the event of a loss which is covered by such property insurance, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles, except the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles if the loss is caused by the fault of the Contractor or those for whom the Contractor is responsible, including Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors, up to $25,000 per loss. .4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site and also portions of the Work in transit. .5 This property insurance to be obtained and maintained by the Owner will NOT cover and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance covering, losses to any tools owned by the workers and any vehicles, tools, equipment, scaffolding, stagings, towers or forms owned, rented or used by the Contractor, any Subcontractor or sub - Subcontractor. The Contractor's property insurance shall cover 100% of the replacement value of the insured items, shall be provided by a company licensed in the jurisdiction(s) in which the insured items are located, and shall be in a form satisfactory to the Owner. At the Owner's request, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a certificate of insurance evidencing that the foregoing insurance is in full force and effect. The Contractor hereby waives all rights and all causes of action against the Owner for any losses to the extent that such losses are actually covered by the property insurance maintained and also for any losses to the extent they should have been covered by the property insurance required to be maintained by the Contractor pursuant to this clause 11.4.1.5. The Contractor shall obtain for the benefit of the Owner a waiver of subrogation from the Contractor's insurer. 11.4.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until Turnover; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, the Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors in the Work. 11.4.3 Upon request, the Owner shall provide the Contractor with a certificate evidencing the insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Page -28 Document#: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 11.4.4 Waivers of Subrogation: The Owner and the Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect/Engineer, the Architect /Engineer's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of Toss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.34or other property insurance obtained by the Contractor or any Subcontractor or sub - Subcontractor covering the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect/Engineer, the Architect/Engineer's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. The Owner's waiver under this Subparagraph does not apply to any Toss to the Owner's property other than the Work, or to any Toss that occurs after Turnover. 11.4.5 A Toss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner on behalf of the insureds and made payable to the Owner for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their sub - Subcontractors in a similar manner. 11.4.6 The Owner shall have sole power to adjust and settle any Toss with its insurers. 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS AND DIRECTIVES ARTICLE 12. CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.1.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions by way of Directives and Change Orders. 12.1.2 A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor modifying the Contract by authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Orders. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates agreement therewith including the adjustment in the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 12.1.3 A Directive is a Modification of the Contract and constitutes a written order to the Contractor to proceed with the Work described in the Directive prior to final approval of a Change Order relating thereto. A Directive has the same effect as a Change Order except that it does not change the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Upon receipt of a Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the changes in the Work involved. A Change Order will be issued by the Owner with respect to each Directive indicating the adjustments, if any, to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time resulting from work performed pursuant to the Directive. 12.1.4 The increase or decrease in the Contract Sum resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined as provided in the Agreement. 12.1.5 In the event of an adjustment of the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Owner may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. If the parties have agreed upon a guaranteed maximum price with respect to a change in the Work, the amount of the increase in the Contract Sum with respect to such change shall not exceed the agreed guaranteed maximum price. 12.1.6 Any change in the Work that affects the Contract Time shall require the prompt notification by the Contractor as to the time impact of such change. In computing the cost of such changes for Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 29 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET submission to the Owner, the Contractor shall altemately compute costs on the basis of completion of the Work within the existing Contract Time and on the basis of completion on an extended Contract Time. 12.1.7 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 12.2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS 12.2.1 If the Contractor is permitted by the Contract Documents to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall give the Owner written notice thereof within ten (10) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim, or the claim shall be waived. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed as provided in Paragraph 10.3. There will be no change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim until authorized by a Change Order. 12.2.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is involved because of, but not limited to, (1) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Paragraph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault, (2) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph 12.3, or (3) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.6, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.1. 12.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.3.1 The Owner shall have the right to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be affected by written field orders and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out field orders promptly. 12.4 INACCURACIES IN THE SOILS REPORT 12.4.1 If the Owner has provided a soils report, and the information contained therein is materially inaccurate, the Contractor shall give the Owner written notice of such inaccuracy as soon as the Contractor becomes aware of such inaccuracy. The Owner shall determine how to proceed and any necessary changes shall be handled as provided in this Article 12 for changes in the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs, delays and damages resulting from its failure promptly to report any such inaccuracies that it may discover or reasonably should have discovered. 13.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK ARTICLE 13. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13.1.1 If any portion of the Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Owner, be uncovered for the Owner's observation and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. 13.1.2 If any portion of the Work has been covered which the Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it is found that this condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor, in which event the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 13.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 13.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Final Completion and Page - 30 Document#: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work. Document #: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 31 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 13.2.2 As used in this Subparagraph 13.2.2, the term "Correction Period" means one year after Tumover, or if the Owner accepts Tumover prior to Final Completion, one year after Final Completion. If, within the Correction Period or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so. This obligation shall survive termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. 13.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site all portions of the Work which are defective or nonconforming and which have not been corrected, unless removal is waived by the Owner. 13.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct defective or non - conforming Work, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Subparagraph 3.4.1. 13.2.5 If the Contractor does not proceed promptly and diligently with the correction of defective or non - conforming Work, the Owner may remove it and may store any salvageable materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written notice, sell such materials and equipment at auction or at a private sale. The Owner shall account for the net proceeds thereof after deducting all costs that should have been borne by the Contractor. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have bome, the difference shall be deducted from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 13.2.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by correction or removal of defective or non - conforming Work. 13.2.7 Nothing contained in this Article shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.6 hereof. The establishment of the time period set forth in Subparagraph 13.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work and has no relationship to the time within which its obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to its obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON - CONFORMING WORK 13.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non - conforming Work, it may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 If, through no act or fault of the Contractor or its agents or employees, or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work directly or indirectly under a contract with the Contractor, the Work is stopped 1) for a period of thirty days by the Contractor in accordance with Subparagraph 9.6.1 because the Owner has not made payment as required by the Contract Documents, or 2) for a period of sixty days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of govemment, such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner, terminate the Contract. In that case the Contractor may recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 14.3. Page - 32 Document#: 130736 Version: v3 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and its surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor with respect to the Project in the event of any of the following: (1) the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency; (2) the Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; (3) the Contractor persistently fails or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; (4) the Contractor fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor; (5) the Contractor persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction; or (6) the Contractor otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents: In such case, the Owner may: (1) take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor, (2) in the Owner's discretion, accept assignment of some or all of the subcontracts as provided in Subparagraph 5.3.3; and (3) finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient. In such case, the payments between the parties shall be determined in accordance with the Agreement and the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.2 Where the Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of monies due the Contractor by the Owner will not release the Contractor from liability. 14.2.3 If the Owner terminates this Contract pursuant to this Paragraph 14.2, and such termination is determined to be improper or without proper grounds, such termination shall be deemed to be a termination for convenience and the provisions of Paragraph 14.3 shall apply. 14.3 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 Upon written notice to the Contractor, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Contract. In such case, the Contractor shall be paid in accordance with the terms of the Agreement. 14.4 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER 14.4.1 Upon written notice to the Contractor, the Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. In that case, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents for a change in the Work to reflect the actual increase, if any, in the cost of performance caused by such suspension, delay or interruption, subject to the following: (1) there shall be no increase in the Contract Sum as a result of costs incurred by the Contractor which could have been avoided using reasonable diligence, (2) there shall be no additional fee or allowance for profit payable to the Contractor with respect to such change, and there shall be no additional allowance for overhead unless the Contractor can substantiate increased overhead costs. Document#: 130736 Version: v3 Page - 33 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 PROJECT 1.3 OWNER SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Project identification and Contract summary. 2. Work awarded separately. 3. Owner - furnished material and equipment. 4. Project scheduling and coordination. 5. Contractor use of premises and existing facilities. 6. Owner occupancy. A. Project Consists Of The Freezer /Cooler Installation And Related Remodel Work For: T-#### Target Store StreetAddress CityStateZip A. Owner of Project: Target Property Development 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 Fax No. (612) 761 -3322 Joe Borgert - 612.761.1583 Owner's Design Project Manager Charles Morse - 612.761.7342 Owner's Construction Project Manager (CPM) 1.4 ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS A. Architect for Project: Architectural Firm 60 East Plato Boulevard, Suite 300 St. Paul, Minnesota 55107 Gary Peterson, Project Designer Telephone: 651.209.2852 FAX: 651.778.3911 B. Structural Engineer For Project: The Benham Companies, LLC 60 East Plato Boulevard, Suite 300 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55107 Telephone 651.209. C. Mechanical Engineer For Project: P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 Nelson -Rudie & Associates, Inc. Or Scott F. Rudie PE 2575 University Avenue West, Suite 135 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55114 John Brison, Project Mechanical Designer Telephone 651.644.2400 D. Electrical Engineer for Project: Nelson -Rudie & Associates, Inc. Or Andrew N. Erdmann PE 2575 University Avenue West, Suite 135 Saint Paul, Minnesota 55114 Andrew N. Erdmann, Project Electrical Designer Telephone 651.644.2400 1.5 CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Owner will award a Contract for Complete Construction to include General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction Work. 1.6 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices are defined as prices per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in Bidding Documents for use in computing cost of work added to, or deducted from, the Contract Documents. B. A "Schedule of Unit Prices ", if applicable, is included in the Bid Form. Each unit price is defined by abbreviated language, recognizing that Drawings and Specifications sections document the requirements. 1.7 WORK AWARDED SEPARATELY A. Contract documents for work awarded separately may be examined at the office of Target Stores. B. Work which will be executed prior to, or in conjunction with, work under these documents may be included for reference in Section 00215, Owner Furnished Information. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 TARGET 1.8 FUTURE CONTRACTS A. Owner reserves the right to award future separate contracts for Project. 1.9 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Refer to "Owner Furnished Material and Equipment Schedule" on Drawings for list of items and division of Owner's and Contractor's responsibilities. Refer to Section 01600, Material and Equipment, and individual Specification Sections for Owner furnished items affecting each unit of Work. B. Certain Owner furnished items require installation as Work of this Contract. C. Certain other items furnished and installed by Owner are not in Contract, but have requirements in Specification Sections and Drawings for related work, including hook up, rough -in services, blocking, preparatory work to receive items, or anchorage devices. D. Drawings may show items furnished and installed by Owner requiring no work under this Contract except for cooperation with Owner's workers or separate contractors. 1.10 OWNER'S PROJECT MILESTONE DATES A. Project Milestone Dates will be determined and announced by the Target Project Manager prior to bid due date. 1.11 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A. Refer to General Conditions, Article 4, for securing and payment of permits and fees. 1.12 PROJECT MEETINGS A. CPR will schedule periodic coordination meetings to discuss progress, coordination between Contractor and Owner's separate contractors, and problems that may have arisen. Each contractor performing Work at Site shall attend each meeting. Subcontractors and material suppliers shall attend upon request of CPR Subcontractors, material suppliers, and other interested parties may attend. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 1.13 INSPECTION OF WORK NOT IN CONTRACT A. Inspect work not in contract which is to receive or is adjacent to work of Contract before commencing Work. Do not proceed until conditions which would result in an inferior installation are satisfactorily corrected. Commencing Work shall be construed as acceptance of work not in Contract as satisfactory to receive Work. 1.14 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Coordinate use of premises under direction of CPR Confine operations and storage of material to areas assigned by CPR. B. Conduct operations to permit public access to existing attached and/or adjacent businesses occupied or under construction during the term of this contract. C. Cooperate with CPR in scheduling, executing Work and Site usage. Notify CPR as far as possible in advance of commencing Work which may interfere with use of attached and/or adjacent buildings. D. Maintain public walks, driveways, and entrances in safe condition, free of equipment, material, and debris. 1.15 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Refer to Document General Conditions, Article 7, for requirements for Owner use or occupancy prior to Substantial Completion of Project. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Remove, cut, fit, and/or patch old work as required to join new Work to existing attached and/or adjacent construction. B. Remove and replace existing construction to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced as a result of Work and is unsuitable for use intended. TARGET C. Patch existing defective or incomplete surfaces caused or exposed by work to match adjacent materials. Perform patching using skilled mechanics experienced in type of Work involved. Conform to standards of Contract Documents where applicable; where not specified, conform to highest standards of the trade. D. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, underpinning and support during demolition, cutting, remodeling and new construction as necessary for execution of the Work and protection of persons and property. Provide protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing construction to remain. E. Salvage and material not specifically designated otherwise shall become property of Contractor, and shall be removed promptly from Site. Remove trash, debris and other waste material promptly from Site. 1.17 WORK ON OTHER PROPERTY A. Correct damage to existing property on or adjacent to Site, including, but not limited to, lawns, walks, pavement, roadways, structures, and utilities cut or damaged by construction and not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement during construction. B. Construct Work occurring on public property according to governing laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of public authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 3 TARGET SECTION 01120 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedural requirements. B. Rehabilitation and renovation of existing spaces and materials. C. Installation of products removed in Section 02073. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02073 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling: Removal and storage of products to be reinstalled in this Section. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Leave items indicated to "remain" in their present condition. B. Restore items indicated to be "repaired ", not replaced, following the general guidelines of Part 3 of this Section, and any more specific guidelines specified in Sections governing work of the respective materials. C. Follow the more specific guidelines specified in Sections goveming work of the respective materials for items indicated to be "replaced." D. Notify Architect if items indicated to "remain" or be "repaired ", appear to need "replacement." Beginning replacement work without prior approval may result in loss of compensation for additional work. E. Work on Existing Roof: 1. Verify that work on existing roofing membrane shall not void existing roof membrane warranty. 2. Obtain existing roofing contractor's approval to perform any work on existing roof or use the services of the existing roofmg contractor to perform the work. 3. Use roofmg materials compatible with existing roofmg system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 B. Obtain approval of Architect/Engineer of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: 1. Bearing and retaining walls. 2. Structural Concrete. 3. Structural steel, bar joists and joist girders. 4. Lintels. 5. Metal floor or roof deck. 6. Cold rolled metal framing. 7. Miscellaneous structural metals. 8. Equipment supports. 2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in individual Sections. B. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work. C. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, fmish, or type of work, requires that patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent with specifications. 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01120 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. F. Provide temporary shoring, bracing and structural supporting members of work to be cut to carry existing and imposed loads as required. G. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. H. Maintain all means of egress and exit ways from space and adjacent spaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to accommodate Owner occupancy. B. Project rooms shall be complete in all respects including operational mechanical and electrical systems. C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to specified condition. D. Refmish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new fmishes. E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning and electrical systems. F. Install products as specified in individual Sections. 3.4 TRANSITIONS A. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01120 - 2 B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. Where a change of plane of 1/8 inch or more occurs, submit recommendations for providing a smooth transition for Architect review. B. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refmish trimmed areas. C. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces. 3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 3.7 FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual sections. 3.8 CLEANING END OF SECTION TARGET B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. A. Clean daily the Owner- occupied areas of work in which Contractor is working or traversing. TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures and review action. 2. Construction progress schedules. 3. Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule. 4. Submittals to the Construction Project Representative (CPR). 5. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, test reports, mix designs, certificates and calculations. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Documents 00700 - General Conditions; for progress schedule and submittals. B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment; for product substitution submittals and Owner- supplied equipment and material submittals. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout; for contract closeout submittals. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Prepare a preliminary Construction Progress Schedule for Work and submit two copies for review to CPR within ten days after date of fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice To Proceed, whichever is earliest. Relate schedule to Work of entire Project. C. Develop schedule using Contractor's proposed plan of action, sequence of construction, and activity duration times. Comply with Owner's Project Milestone Dates. D. Upon approval by Owner and Contractor, preliminary schedule will be the fmal Construction Progress Schedule. E. Contractor to issue two copies to CPR, and perform the following: 1. Maintain the Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Provide pertinent information related to status of Work of Subcontractors for construction progress meetings. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 3. Submit schedule updating reports to CPR in two copies upon request. 1.4 PROCUREMENT AND SHOP DRAWING SCHEDULE A. Prepare a Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule and submit two copies to CPR and one to Project Representative within ten days after date of fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice to Proceed, whichever is earliest. B. Promptly revise Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule to meet Project completion date and to conform to the current status of the Work. Furnish two revised schedules to CPR and one to Project Representative. 1.5 SUBMITTALS TO THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE A. Make submittals for the following specification sections directly to PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE or ENGINEER with a copy of transmittal only to the CPR 1. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: a. Test Reports. 2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: (Shop Drawings only, for the following): a. Roof opening frames. 3. Section 16440 - Disconnect Switches. 4. Section 16460 - Dry Type Transformers. 5. Section 16470 - Panelboards. B. Make other submittals directly to CPR or Owner's Project Representative as indicated herein. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit Shop Drawings requested under Article above to the Project Representative, with copy of transmittal to the CPR. Shop Drawings not requested by the Project Representative under Article above shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractor. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET B. For Work by separate contractors not assigned to Contractor, CPR will review and submit Shop Drawings to Contractor. Refer to Section 01600 for additional requirements related to Owner- supplied material and equipment. C. Shop Drawings submitted by Contractor not bearing Contractor's review action will not be reviewed and will be returned to Contractor for review and resubmission. D. Clearly identify Shop Drawings as to Project, Contractor, Manufacturer, Specification Section and item submitted. SUBMIT IN WRITING DEVIATIONS FROM REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. E. Submit Shop Drawings in the form of one reproducible transparency and one prints of each Drawing, unless otherwise specified. Each Drawing shall have a clear space of not less than 20 square inches on the right hand side. Transmit transparencies in mailing tubes without folding. F. Make submissions of Shop Drawings of related items or individual items of an assembly in a package to permit coordinated review. Shop Drawings will be reviewed in the sequence submitted unless written request is submitted to the contrary, or submittals are components of an assembly not submitted as a package. Wiring diagrams shall be complete composite drawings specially prepared for Project, showing color coding, terminal markings and locations. Manufacturer's typical wiring diagrams will not be accepted, unless specified otherwise. G. After Project Representative has reviewed Shop Drawings he will retain at least one Shop Drawing print for his record and will return transparency to Contractor. Project Representative will send a copy of transmittal to CPR For Shop Drawings returned requiring a resubmittal, Contractor shall make revisions and submit one new transparency and two prints marked "Resubmittal" to Project Representative. 1.7 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit five copies of Product Data to Project Representative as required. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2 B. Submittals to Project Representative: Project Representative will review, retain one copy for his record, and return remaining copies to Contractor. Submit one additional copy of Product Data for structural, mechanical, and electrical work for engineering department's records. C. Clearly mark each copy of Product Data as to Project, Contractor, Manufacturer, Specification Section and item being submitted. SUBMIT IN WRITING DEVIATIONS FROM REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA REVIEW A. Submittals will be reviewed and returned by the Project Representative/Engineer within 10 working days of receipt by the reviewer. Submittals will be reviewed with following actions: 1. APPROVED: Indicates authorization to proceed with fabrication. 2. APPROVED AS NOTED: Indicates authorization to proceed with fabrication subject to noted corrections, if corrections are accepted without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Indicates submittal must be revised, resubmitted, and approved before fabrication is authorized. 4. REJECTED: Indicates unspecified material, insufficient information, unapproved system or similar inadequacies. Additional information must be submitted and approved before fabrication is authorized. B. Shop drawings are reviewed only for conformance with design concept of Project and general compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for quantities, dimensions, coordinating all work and trades, and for fabrication and construction techniques. C. Direct specific attention in writing to deviations from Contract Documents and to revisions of resubmitted Shop Drawings and Product Data other than those revisions requested by Project Representative or CPR on previous submittals. TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1.9 SAMPLES END OF SECTION A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Submit, unless otherwise specified, two samples of each item required to Owner's Project Representative with a transmittal to CPR. Do not use samples in Work. One approved sample will be retained by Owner's Project Representative, and other approved sample will be forwarded to CPR to be retained at Site. Where Contractor requires approved samples to be returned, submit additional samples as required. C. Clearly identify samples as to product, type, color range, texture, finish, and other pertinent data. Submit with samples a Letter of Transmittal indicating Contractor's approval and other supporting information as may be necessary, with a copy to CPR. D. Provide mock -ups and field samples of finishes at Project as required by individual Specification Sections. Install sample complete and fmished. Acceptable samples in place may be retained in completed Work if use is approved by CPR. 1.10 CERTIFICATES A. Submit two copies of Certificates of Compliance required by the Contract Documents to Project Representative or CPR, unless specified otherwise. 1.11 CALCULATIONS A. Submit design calculations as required by Contract Documents. Calculations are for Owner and Project Representative's records and not for review. Submit one copy to Project Representative and one copy to CPR. 1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submit Operating and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 01700, Contract Closeout. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 TARGET SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Construction water. 2. Sanitary facilities and drinking water. 3. Telephone service. 4. Field offices and temporary buildings. 5. Protection of persons and property. 6. Moisture and weather protection. 7. Cleaning public facilities. 8. Temporary signs. 1.2 POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS A. Temporary Electrical Service. The Contractor may use the electrical service available at the existing building for the Work at no charge, subject to provisions of this Article. B. Power Service: 1. Verify that power service is adequate for intended temporary use. 2. Coordinate power use requirements with CPR C. Power Distribution: Provide power for construction operations including wiring, transformers, connections, and protection for temporary and permanent equipment for environmental control, for temporary use of electrically operated equipment, and for testing. 1. Provide one 20 amp, 120 volt temporary branch circuit with three grounding, duplex receptacles minimum, for each 7500 square feet of floor area. Locate receptacles to limit maximum extension cord length to 100 feet. Temporary branch circuits may be used for portable tools, portable lights, and other small power loads. Each separate contractor or Subcontractor shall furnish their own extension cords and supplemental lights. D. Lighting: Provide lighting for remodeling and expansion construction operations. 1. Temporary lighting shall consist of minimum one 150 watt incandescent lamp, or equivalent, for each 500 square feet of floor area with minimum one light P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 in each room (excluding closets and utility chases). Provide additional lights in corridors and stairwells to provide adequate illumination for proper performance of Work and safe passage. 2. Provide lamps for temporary lighting system. E. Code compliance: All temporary electrical work shall comply with applicable provisions of Article 305 of the National Electrical Code and more stringent requirements of state and local electrical codes and authorities having jurisdiction. F. Power and Lighting Costs: 1. Owner will pay for energy use costs during construction incurred from use of the project power and lighting systems within the limits specified herein. 2. Do not use the existing building power for resistance heating devices of for the operation of welding machines; make other arrangements if those items are required. 3. Do not waste the Owner's power. The Owner reserves the right to backcharge the Contractor for power use if it is found that the Contractor is wasting power. 1.3 . USE OF PERMANENT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. When installation of penmanent electrical service, lighting and distribution system is sufficiently complete to be operated safely, system may be used to provide construction light and power, and testing and operation of permanent equipment. Contractor for Complete Construction shall replace equipment damaged or rendered inoperative during construction. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION WATER A. Water. The Contractor may use the water service available at the existing building for the Work at no charge, subject to provisions of this Article. B. Do not waste the Owner's water. The Owner reserves the right to backcharge the Contractor for water use if it is found that the Contractor is wasting water. 1.5 DRINKING WATER A. The Owner will provide drinking water for the Project during construction. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1.6 CONSTRUCTION TOILET FACILITIES A. Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide and maintain adequate toilet facilities for use of entire Project during construction. Maintain toilets in clean and sanitary condition. B. Temporary toilets shall be enclosed, portable chemical toilets furnished and serviced by a company specializing in required service. C. Do not use permanent toilets during construction. 1.7 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS AND SHEDS A. If required, each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall provide and maintain trailers, sheds, and other temporary buildings on site required for storage of materials, tools, and equipment and other purposes in conjunction with his work. Coordinate location with CPR. B. Remove temporary buildings when no longer required. 1.8 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Comply with provisions of Article 10 of General Conditions. B. Where required by governing regulations, Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide temporary portable fire extinguishers. C. Keep all exit ways and means of egress clear and free of all construct materials, to allow emergency exiting from building at all times. D. Do NOT obstruct exit signs. 1.9 MOISTURE AND WEATHER PROTECTION A. Each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall protect excavations, trenches, other temporary work, the building, and other work of Project from damage from water, including ground water, rain water, backing up of sewers and drains, and ice and snow. Each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall keep his excavations and trenches free from water during progress of Work, and provide temporary enclosure, pumps and equipment and perform grading, pumping, bailing or other work necessary to insure protection. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 B. Each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall provide protection against wind, storms, . frost, rain, snow, heat, and cold to prevent damage to material in transit, stored material, and work in place. 1.10 CLEANING PUBLIC FACILITIES A. Each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall keep public sidewalks and streets surrounding Site free from dirt, waste materials, and rubbish caused by his operations. Avoid interference with traffic. 1.11 TEMPORARY SIGNS A. Erect only billboards, advertisements, or similar signs authorized by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION TARGET TARGET SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 PRODUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Products. 2. Transportation and handling. 3. Storage and protection. 4. Product options. 5. Owner - furnished material and equipment. 6. Substitutions. A. Document 00120 - Instructions to Bidders; for requests for substitutions during the bidding period. B. Document 00700 - General Conditions; for quality of substitute products and change of costs in substitutions. C. Section 01010 - Summary of the Work; for Contractor's use of premises and for storage of materials and equipment. D. Section 01300 - Submittals; for submittal of manufacturer's certificates and product data. E. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout; for operating instructions and maintenance manuals. A. Products include material, equipment, and systems. B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. C. Components required to be furnished in quantity within a Specification section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry, with labels intact. P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 B. Arrange deliveries of products according to construction progress schedule. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at Site, work of separate contractors,. and Owner's use of premises. Do not deliver products subject to damage until required in Work, or until suitable storage facilities are available at Site. C. Deliver items for embedment in concrete or masonry to permit building -in as Work progresses. Provide templates showing exact locations. D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling or damage. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products according to manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. Protect finished surfaces from scratching and similar damage. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports over ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well - drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions. 1.6 OWNER - FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Refer to "Owner - Furnished Material and Equipment Schedule" on Drawings for list of items and basic division of Owner and Contractor responsibilities. The following detailed division of responsibilities applies except where otherwise indicated in Contract Documents. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Owner (CRP) Responsibilities: 1. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Contractor. 2. Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor. 3. Submit claims for transportation damage. 4. Arrange for and deliver manufacturer's warranties and bonds to Contractor. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Notify and arrange for Owner Furnished material suppliers to obtain drawings and specifications within two weeks of receipt of Project Contract Documents. 2. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in Construction Progress Schedule. 3. Arrange for delivery of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, manufacturer's installation instructions, and certificates. 4. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. Submit to CPR with notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non - conformance with Contract Documents. 5. Arrange for delivery to Site of Owner Furnished Materials according to Construction Progress Schedule. Owner to pay for delivery costs to jobsite. 6. Receive and unload products at Site. 7. Inspect deliveries, record shortages, and damaged or defective items. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items. 8. Handle products at Site, including uncrating and storage. 9. Protect products from damage, and from exposure to elements. 10. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products as indicated in Contract Documents and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 11. Provide installation inspections required by public authorities, and other testing required by Contract Documents. 12. Arrange for manufacturer's field services. 13. Repair or replace items damaged during construction. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Specification Options: 1. Products specified by Reference Standards or by Performance and Descriptive Requirements only: Provide any product meeting those standards or requirements. 2. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. 3. Products specified by naming several manufacturers and, where applicable, sample products: Provide products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions allowed. 4. Products specified by naming only one manufacturer: No options, no substitutions allowed. B. Options Incorporated in Work: Products shown on Drawings may be typical of the style and model of one specified manufacturer. Perform changes in Work required to accommodate actual installed products of other acceptable manufacturers, at no additional cost to Owner. 1.8 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS TARGET A. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern action on requests for substitutions, submitted under requirements specified in this Section. B. Requests for substitutions of products will be considered only within 15 days of Owner- Contractor Agreement. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor. C. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on Shop Drawings or Product Data submittals without separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance. TARGET E. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is not accepted, provide specified product. F. Owner's Architect and CPR will determine acceptability of substitutions. G. Products and materials proposed for substitutions shall NOT contain asbestos. 1.9 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. C. Attach Product Data as specified in Section 01300. D. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variations, and reference to Specifications section and Article numbers. E. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and the specified product. F. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product, and amount of net change to Contract Sum. G. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. H. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other work or products. 1.10 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has determined that it does not contain asbestos, is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product, or that the cost reduction offered is ample justification for accepting the offered substitution. B. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 C. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. D. Contractor certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts. E. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become apparent. 1.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit two copies of request for substitution. B. C. D. E. Architect or CPR will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. During the bidding period, no action will be taken on requests for substitution. After award of Contract, CPR will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution within 30 days. For accepted products, submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples under provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 TARGET SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Operating instructions and manuals. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Substantial completion and final completion. 4. Final payment. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Document 00700 - General Conditions; for Contract Closeout. 1.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. Prepare and submit operating instructions and maintenance manuals, as required by Specification Sections, and instruct Owner's personnel in use and maintenance of operating equipment. B. Operating Instructions: Permit CPR and maintenance personnel to observe and familiarize themselves with equipment during assembly and installation. After installation is complete, arrange to meet and instruct Owner's designated personnel in use, operation, care, and cleaning of equipment. Instructions shall be given only by qualified personnel, thoroughly familiar with use and maintenance of equipment. C. Operating Manuals: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit operating and maintenance manuals for equipment to CPR in duplicate unless otherwise specified. Neatly edit manuals with similar equipment grouped, pages tabbed and indexed, material printed or typewritten, and individual pages set into plastic page covers. Include the following information: 1. Complete operating instructions and recommendations for fuel and other materials to be used with each item. 2. Manufacturer's complete data sheets. 3. Complete cleaning instructions including recommended cleaning materials. 4. Complete lubrication data and schedules. 5. Maintenance, repair, and adjustment data including manufacturer's instructions. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 6. Parts list with numbers, recommended parts to stock, and nearest parts depot and service organization. 7. Assembly drawings, wiring diagrams, mechanical diagrams, installation diagrams, and instructions. D. Maintenance Tools: Provide special tools furnished with equipment for adjustment during installation, such as closer wrenches. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Immediately prior to inspection for Substantial Completion, remove waste materials and rubbish from building and Site. Remove protective coatings, barriers and other protective devices, temporary work, and surplus materials. C. Clean the building and Site. Leave building in neat and orderly condition, ready for occupancy and use by Owner. Wash and polish glass on both faces. Dust and vacuum fmished spaces; wash and otherwise clean as necessary to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Leave mechanical rooms and similar unfinished spaces "Broom Clean ". D. Clean and sterilize plumbing fixtures. E. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean heaters, grilles and registers, and other mechanical work in finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Dust equipment, ducts, pipes, and other mechanical work m mechanical rooms and similar unfinished spaces. construction dirt and debris from interior of ductwork and air handling equipment. Replace filters for air handling equipment or clean thoroughly according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean light fixtures and other electrical work in finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Electrical Subcontractor shall remove protective plastic covering from Owner furnished light fixtures, as directed by CPR. Dust electrical equipment in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and similar unfinished spaces. Replace burned out lamps. G. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean all owner supplied and installed fixtures in finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 H. Maintain Work in clean condition until CPR determines Work to be Substantially Complete. I. Upon Completion of Work, remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from premises. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL COMPLETION A. Refer to Article 9 of General Conditions for additional information. B. When Work approaches Substantial Completion, submit to CPR a written request for a preliminary inspection for Substantial Completion, including a list of items to be completed or corrected. Submit request approximately 21 days prior to scheduled date for Substantial Completion. If CPR considers Work to be sufficiently complete, CPR will establish a date for preliminary inspection to be held approximately 14 days prior to scheduled date for Substantial Completion or occupancy. C. The CPR, accompanied by Contractor, will conduct preliminary inspection for Substantial Completion. Based on preliminary inspection, CPR will prepare a Punch List for Substantial Completion, indicating items which shall be completed or corrected before Work will be determined to be Substantially Complete. Complete and correct items on Punch List before scheduled occupancy date. D. When items on Punch List for Substantial Completion have been completed or corrected, return Punch List to CPR indicating in writing action taken for each item. Include items completed, items not complete, and reasons for not completing remaining items. After returning Punch List, submit to CPR a request for inspection for Substantial Completion. CPR will establish a date for inspection. E. The CPR, accompanied by Contractor, will conduct inspection for Substantial Completion. If CPR determines Work to be Substantially Complete, CPR will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion as provided in Article 9 of General Conditions, and a Punch List for Final Completion of items remaining to be completed or corrected before Work will be determined fully complete and ready for acceptance. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 TARGET F. When items on Punch List for Final Completion have been fully completed or corrected, submit to CPR a written indication of action taken for each item, and request Final Inspection. CPR will establish a date for inspection. G. The CPR, accompanied by Target Project Architect and Contractor, will conduct Final Inspection. If CPR determines Work is acceptable under Contract Documents and Contract fully performed, CPR will notify Contractor in writing. 1.6 FINAL PAYMENT A. Refer to Article 9 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Upon receipt of written notification from CPR that Work is acceptable under Contract Documents and Contract fully performed, prepare and submit to CPR a Final Application for Payment with the following attachments, in two copies: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706; Most recent edition. 2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A; Most recent edition. 3. Contractor's Lien Waiver in full amount of Contract Sum. 4. Lien waivers from all Subcontractors, Sub - Subcontractors, and major material suppliers who have furnished material for Work under contract with Contractor or Subcontractor. Lien waivers shall total full amount of Contract Sum. 5. Guaranty/Warranty Certifications for Products and Equipment specified with special warranties in the Project Manual. 6. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707; Most recent edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION TARGET C. Removal of designated partitions and components. D. Capping and identifying utilities. E. Temporary partitions and enclosure to allow building occupancy for normal operation. F. Temporary partitions and enclosure to protect the public way and allow for occupancy of adjacent retail spaces affected by this Work. SECTION 02073 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolition, removal and disposal of work indicated on Drawings. B. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner occupancy. B. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures: Re installation of removed materials. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary barriers and enclosures; security; cleaning during construction. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. E. Section 02220 — Trenching Excavation and Backfilling; for fill and compaction. 1.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Do not close or obstruct streets, roads or walks without permission or permit. Do not place or store debris on streets, roads or walks. B. Protect existing walks and curbs with protective covering during demolition. C. Do not store debris on existing roofs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, salvaged material shall become property of Contractor. 2.2 DEBRIS A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, debris and material not indicated to be salvaged shall become property of Contractor. 3.1 GENERAL A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with areas of the building which continue to be occupied by the Owner. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. B. Coordinate demolition work with CPR, Store Team Lead and Store Security, to minimize disruptions during stores' open hours. C. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Demolish work scheduled or noted for demolition carefully and only to extent required for final work. B. Protect existing work to remain. C. Following demolition, repair damage to existing work, caused by demolition. 3.3 UTILITIES PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Maintain and preserve utilities traversing premises as long as required. B. Disconnect or terminate according to requirements of governing authorities. C. Seal or cap utility lines leading from demolished structures. 3.4 DUST CONTROL A. Wet work with water to prevent airborne dust. B. Provide air -tight dust barriers and partitions to separate demolition activity from stores' operations. 3.5 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Remove and store with care materials scheduled for reuse. B. C. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 Comply with Owner's directions for salvaged materials to become property of Owner. Remove salvaged materials to become property of Contractor from site. Sale of salvaged material is not permitted at site. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02073 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 3.6 DEBRIS A. Remove debris promptly from site and dispose of legally. Do not burn or bury debris at site. END OF SECTION MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02073 - 2 TARGET U IN 11 w 1 1 1 TARGET SECTION 02220 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes excavation, trenching and backfill required for the underground utility systems. All work shall be in accordance with these specifications, and if they also exist governing local Standard Utilities Specifications. B. Related Items: 1. Section 03350 - Concrete Repair Work for slabs that must be repaired due to this Section. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Trench excavation and backfilling work for this Section shall include cutting and removal of existing concrete slabs for trenching procedures. Trench excavation and backfilling will be for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the CPR and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide a minimum of 48- hours' notice to the CPR and Store Team Lead and receive written `notice to proceed' before interrupting any utility. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): Use Local applicable Standard. 1. ASTM D1557 - "Test Methods for Moisture- Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 -1b. Rammer and 18 -in. Drop." or P01 RIGHTSIZE T 2. ASTM D698 - "Test Methods for Moisture- Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 -in. Drop." 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off -site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: 1. Existing Fill Material removed during trenching procedure is acceptable for backfilling if it meets approved soil classification and can be compacted to specified requirements. 2. Soil materials approved by the Soils Engineer; free of rock or gravel larger than 1 -1/2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: 1. Existing Fill Material removed during trenching procedure is not acceptable for backfilling if it does not meet approved soil classification, or it can not be compacted to specified requirements.. 2. Soil materials not approved by the Soils Engineer. D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1 - 1/2 inch sieve, 100 percent passing a 2 inch sieve, and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Engineered Fill: Subbase or Base materials. G. Bedding Material: Subbase or Base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 02220 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Slab Removal: Identify trench locations and mark slab for removal. Remove slab at trench locations by saw cutting or other approved method. Control all by- products of the cutting process (i.e. water, dust, noise, etc.), so as not to harm surrounding surfaces and the Owners normal operations. Verify proposed slab removal method with CPR before beginning work. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation to top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance of each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches above the top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 6" to 9" each side of pipe or conduit. 2. Clearance : AS indicated or otherwise required. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, and flat - bottomed multiple -duct conduit units, hand excavate trench bottoms; support pipe and conduit on undisturbed subgrade. TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 02220 - 2 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches below invert elevation to receive bedding course. 3.4 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by CPR TARGET 3.5 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on rock or other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Concrete backfill trenches that project below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. Concrete to match footing concrete requirements, per Section 03300. C. Place and compact initial backfill with satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch , to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil materials to final subgrade. 3.6 COMPACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers used for trench material compacting. 1 TARGET B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to required elevations of each lift. Compact each layer as specified: 1. Percentages of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less r+ than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D1557: or 2. Percentages of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D698: a. Trench areas at existing slabs, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of 12 inches of backfill or fill to 95 percent al maximum dry density. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field in -place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), ASTM D 2922 (nuclear method, or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. 1. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in -place density test for each 150 feet of less of trench, but no fewer than two tests. • 3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS j 1 1 1 B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 02220 - 3 TARGET sk aui No SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fabricate, deliver, store, and install reinforcing steel and accessories for cast -in -place concrete. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete; for installation of reinforcing steel in cast -in -place concrete. B. Section 03350 — Concrete Repair Work. A. American Concrete Institute, (ACI): 1. ACI 301, "Specs for Structural Concrete for Buildings ". 2. ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ". 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ". B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM A185, "Spec for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement ". 2. ASTM A615, "Spec for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ". 3. ASTM A706, "Standard Spec for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ". C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, (CRSI): 1. CRSI MSP -1, "Manual of Standard Practice ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspect reinforcing steel in concrete members requiring special inspection, including reinforcing dowels in the floor slab on grade. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement in bundles marked with metal tags identifying bar size, length or mark, and grade. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 B. Prevent damage, severe rusting, or contamination. Store material elevated off the ground. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING BARS A. ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars, for cast -in -place concrete. ASTM A615, Grade 40 plain bars only where noted. B. ASTM A706, Grade 60, deformed bars, where noted on Drawings. 2.2 REINFORCING MESH FABRIC A. ASTM A185, welded wire fabric. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND BAR SUPPORTS A. ACI 315. Use plastic tips for accessories in contact with surfaces exposed to view or weather. B. Ground Supported Reinforcing: Class 3 wire supports with sand plates or precast concrete black bar supports per CRSI. 2.4 DETAILING AND FABRICATION A. Detail reinforcing steel and bar supports according to ACI and CRSI references. B. Use bending procedure which does not damage steel. C. Bars with extra bends or kinks and bars with cross - sectional areas reduced by rust or fabrication will be rejected. 3.1 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Placing: 1. Place reinforcing steel according to approved Shop Drawings. Use reinforcing steel free of loose flaky rust, mud, oil, or coatings that reduce bond with concrete. 2. Position and support reinforcing steel by wiring together and fastening in place to insure against displacement during concrete placing. Do not tack weld. Place no bars while concrete is being poured. 3. Provide minimum cover according to ACI 318 unless detailed otherwise. 4. Locate reinforcing for slabs on grade as shown on the Structural Drawings. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 5. Bend no bars after being partially embedded in hardened concrete. 6. Heat bending of reinforcing is not permitted. B. Splices: 1. Lap splices 46 bar diameters unless otherwise indicated. Do not splice detailed bars without written permission from Engineer. 2. Lap wire fabric m slabs so that full, uncut squares of fabric of both sheets lap each other at least 1/2 square or 6 ", whichever is greater. C. Field Adjustments: Adjust bar locations to avoid interference with inserts, sleeves, and reinforcing. When adjustment exceeds 25% of spacing within the plane or one bar diameter perpendicular to the plane of reinforcing, review layout with OSR. END OF SECTION CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 - 2 IOW IWO r TARGET SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary formwork. 2. Cast -in -place concrete. 3. Embedded items. 4. Installation of vapor barrier below freezer insulation. 5. Related accessories. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance. B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute, (ACI): 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings ". 2. ACI 302.1R, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction ". 3. ACI 304R, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete." 4. ACI 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting ". 5. ACI 117, "Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials ". 6. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ". B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM A36, "Spec for Structural Steel ". 2. ASTM A53, "Spec for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated Welded and Seamless ". 3. ASTM C31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ". 4. ASTM C33, "Spec for Concrete Aggregates ". 5. ASTM C39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ". 6. ASTM C42, "Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ". 7. ASTM C94, "Spec for Ready -Mixed Concrete ". 8. ASTM C143, "Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 9. ASTM C150, "Spec for Portland Cement ". 10. ASTM C171, "Spec for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete ". 11. ASTM C231, "Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure Method. 12. ASTM C260, "Spec for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ". 13. ASTM C309, "Spec for Liquid Membrane — Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ". 14. ASTM C494, "Spec for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ". 15. ASTM C1019, "Method of Sampling and Testing Grout ". 16. ASTM E1155, "Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F- Number System ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ an independent testing laboratory to test proposed aggregate and design concrete mixes for each type of concrete required. B. Design concrete mix proportions on basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures in accordance with ACI 318 for structural concrete and ACI 302 for concrete slabs on grade. Design masonry grout proportions in accordance with ASTM C476. C. Use approved mix designs as long as aggregate characteristics remain unchanged. Upon significant changes in aggregate, prepare and submit new mix designs. D. Delivery Tickets: Submit one copy to indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump and time of batching for each load delivered. E. Authorizations: Obtain written authorization from Structural Engineer for use of admixtures not specified or site mixing of concrete. F. Floor Sealer/Hardener Applicator: Approved and certified by floor sealer/hardener manufacturer as qualified and experienced with the application of the sealer/hardener furnished. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Exposed Surface Form Material: 1. General: Provide smooth form finish to concrete surfaces exposed to view in the fmished work according to ACI 301. 2. Form Material: Facing material of plywood, tempered concrete form grade hardboard, metal, plastic, paper, or other approved material capable of producing a smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. Support facing material by studs or other backing capable of preventing excessive deflection. Use sheets as large as practicable and free from tom grain, worn edges, or defects which impair texture of concrete surfaces. Arrange sheets orderly and symmetrically. B. Unexposed Surface Form Material: 1. Form Material: Steel, fiberglass, sound plywood or lumber. C. Form Ties: Manufactured units of adequate strength designed to break off cleanly, leaving no metal within 1" of the formed surface. D. Form Coating: Commercial product to facilitate stripping without staining or damaging concrete or impairing future concrete treatment. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: Conform to ACI 301 and as specified herein. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. C. Aggregate: 1. Exposed Concrete: ASTM C33. Obtain aggregate for exposed concrete from same source for uniform appearance throughout the work. 2. Aggregate derived from sources containing chert, shale, or shaly rock shall not be used without approval of Structural Engineer. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. E. Water: Clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 C. Air Entraining Admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Euclid. b. Master Builders. c. SIKA. d. Grace. 2. Comparable products from other manufacturers. TARGET 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Retarding Admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type B. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Euclid. b. Master Builders. c. SIKA. d. Grace. 2. Comparable products from other manufacturers. B. Accelerating Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type C. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Euclid. b. Master Builders. c. SIKA. d. Grace. 2. Comparable products from other manufacturers. D. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A, free of added chloride ions. 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Euclid. b. Master Builders. c. SIKA. d. Grace. 2. Comparable products from other manufacturers. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Barrier: Ten (10) mil thick, decay resistant, clear polyethylene sheet, type recommended for below grade application with adhesive backed polyethylene tape. B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, preformed, resilient, non - extruding, bituminous impregnated fiber board units; 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. r TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 C. Embedded Items: 1. Weld Plates and Structural Steel Inserts: ASTM A36. 2. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, galvanized. r 3. Headed Studs: "Nelson Studs" as manufactured by Nelson Division of 1 TRW. D. Evaporation Retarder: One of the following: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Euclid: Eucobar b. Master Builders: Confilm 2. Comparable products from other manufacturers. E. Moisture Retaining Cover: One of the following, conforming to ASTM C171: 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene- coated burlap. F. Patching Compound: Portland cement mortar and bonding grout complying with ACI 301, Chapter 9 - Repair of Surface Defects. 2.5 CURING COMPOUND A. General: Clear, waterborne, curing and sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1. B. Compatibility Requirements: Verify compatibility with resilient flooring and carpet adhesives or floor sealer compound. DO NOT USE WHERE SLABS ARE SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE PENETRATING SEALER OR SEALER/HARDENER, ceramic tile or quarry tile and exterior sidewalks. C. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc.: High Seal. 2. Dayton- Superior Corporation: Safe Cure and Seal. 3. Euclid Chemical Co.: Diamond Clear VOX. 4. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.: Dress and Seal WB. 5. Sonneborn: Kure -N -Seal W. 6. TK Products: Achro Kure WB. 2.6 INTERIOR CONCRETE PENETRATING SEALER/HARDENER A. General: Penetrating colorless, odorless, VOC compliant, water -based reactive silicate solution sealer, hardener and dustproofer. B. Acceptable Manufacturers & Products: 1. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc.: Intraseal. 2. Curecrete Chemical Company, Inc.; Ashford Formula. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem Sure Hard. 4. Euclid Chemical Co.; Euco Diamond Hard. 5. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. 6. Sonneborn: Kure -N- Harden. 7. TK Products: TK- 5329A. 3.1 COORDINATION A. Notify trades involved to allow installation and completion of their work prior to concrete placement. 3.2 FORMWORK ERECTION A. Except for footing bottoms, obtain approval from Architect prior to using soil as formwork. B. Construct forms to shapes, lines, grades and dimensions indicated and required. Maintain tolerances for formed concrete surfaces according to ACI 301. C. Construct forms true, plumb and level. Adequately support and brace forms to support loads occurring during construction. Construct form joints to minimize bleeding or loss of mortar when concrete is vibrated. D. E. F. PART 3 - EXECUTION Install 3/4" x 3/4" chamfer strips at exposed external corners. Box -out and provide openings as required. Leave openings for cleaning of forms and proper placement of concrete. Build -in sleeves, anchors, inserts, bolts and other devices indicated or required. Provide sleeves 2" larger in diameter than piping to be sleeved, unless otherwise indicated. Install sleeves flush with finished surfaces. Install other items according to manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate and build -in sleeves, thimbles, and other items furnished or set in place by other trades. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 Class Strength ' p, s i. ; Nominal Agg. . Max. Slump ' inches Air ": ;Max C 3000 1 -1/2 3 -4 - 0.55 D 3000 1 -1/2 3 -5 - - F 3000 sand 8 -11 - - P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 G. If a release agent (form coating) is used, coat forms before reinforcing steel is placed. Thoroughly clean forms of debris immediately before concrete is placed. 3.3 FORMWORK REMOVAL A. Strip forms only after concrete has cured sufficiently to prevent damage. Exercise care in removing forms from exposed concrete surfaces to prevent marring or damage. B. Strip forms after the recommended time has elapsed after concrete placing. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR BARRIER A. Install vapor barrier directly under interior slabs on grade. 1. Contractor Option for Location of Vapor Barrier: At no additional cost to Owner, Contractor may install vapor barrier within or below granular base material in lieu of directly below floor slab. B. Lap joints 6" and seal with vapor barrier tape, or lap 16" without tape. Protect vapor barrier during placing of base material, reinforcing and concrete. Repair punctures and tears before placing concrete. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (INTERIOR SLABS ON GRADE) A. Locate construction joints for interior slabs on grade as shown on Drawings. 3.6 ISOLATION JOINTS (INTERIOR SLABS ON GRADE) A. Provide isolation joints where shown on Drawings. B. Column Isolation Joints: Use plastic circular formwork designed to lock shut around columns for the full slab thickness or diamond joint as shown on the Structural Drawings. 3.7 CONCRETE MIXES A. Schedule: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 B. Class D Concrete: Substitute 3/4" or 1" maximum aggregate size if 1 -1/2" is unavailable. 3.8 CONCRETE CLASS APPLICATIONS A. Class C: Interior slabs on grade. B. Class D: Spread and continuous footings. 3.9 CONCRETE MIXING TARGET C. Fly Ash Use: 1. Class C Concrete: Fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 15 percent by weight. A. Concrete Supplier: Ready -mix concrete, mixed and delivered according to the requirements of ASTM C94. B. High -Early Strength: Except for Class C concrete, Type III Portland cement may be used to produce high -early strength concrete. Adding additional amounts of Type I Portland cement to produce high -early strength concrete will not be permitted. C. Cement: Use a single brand of Portland cement unless written permission to use more than one is obtained from Architect. Use same brand and type of cement for concrete exposed to view. D. Workability: Provide workable concrete to fill forms, without leaving voids or honeycombs without segregation. E. Admixtures: Water reducing admixture may be used to reduce the unit water content of concrete or to increase slump. Use air entraining admixture for air entrained concrete. Accelerators or Retarders may be used to decrease or increase setting time in order to facilitate concrete finishing. Use no other admixtures. Do not use calcium chloride as a set accelerator. ti TARGET rr C. Where new concrete is to be placed against concrete that has set, roughen and clean existing surfaces. Thoroughly dampen existing surfaces and slush with a neat cement grout immediately before placing new concrete. 3.10 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place no concrete until reinforcing steel and items to be embedded in concrete are in place. B. Thoroughly clean forms before placing concrete. Dampen porous earth in contact with concrete. Do not place concrete under water. D. Place concrete according to ACI 301 and ACI 304. Place concrete continuously so that no concrete is placed against concrete that has attained its initial set, except at authorized joints. E. Place concrete as close as possible to fmal position. Prevent segregation. Place with maximum free drop of five feet. Consolidate during placing with internal vibrators (8000 vpm minimum). Work around reinforcement, embedded items and into form corners. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Refer to Section 04200 for additional Class F concrete criteria. F. Place concrete within one hour after mix water has been added. G. Maintain, on -site, an adequate supply of evaporation retarder during concrete slab -on- grade placement to prevent premature setting of the concrete. Apply in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.11 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING A. Screed exposed concrete floors and floors to receive resilient flooring, carpet, or thin -set ceramic and quarry tile to an even, level plane. Float and provide troweled finish in accordance with procedures in ACI 302.1R, and as recommended by ACI to achieve floor flatness and levelness specified. Uniformly slope to elevations shown on the Drawings to floor drains. B. Finished surfaces, other than rooms with floor drains, shall have floor flatness and levelness as determined in accordance with ASTM E1155 as follows: SOV - Specified Overall Value MLV - Minimum Local Value 3.12 CONCRETE CURING P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 I Flatness Levelness (FF): FF: 35 (FL): F 25 FF: 24 F 17 C. A test surface to determine the average value shall be the entire building. D. A test section to determine the minimum local value shall meet the following criteria: 1. No test section shall measure less than 4 ft. in width or less than 15 ft. in length. 2. No portion of the test surface shall be associated with more than one test section. 3. When testing a concrete floor, no test section boundary shall cross any construction joint. E. Verify floor flatness and levelness of first section within 72 hours of finishing. If floor slab does not meet minimum average values specified, do not proceed with further installations until corrective measures for installation and finishing are made to meet minimum average floor flatness and levelness. F. Corrective measures such as underlayment or grinding, may be made to floor slabs scheduled to receive fmish materials. G. Corrective measures such as grinding, planning, surface repair or re- topping will not be permitted for floor slabs scheduled for clear sealer/hardener fmish. A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Maintain concrete with a minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature above 55° F for a total of seven days for normal concrete or three days for high -early strength concrete. Changes in temperature of concrete shall not exceed 5° F in any one hour or 50° F in any 24 hour period. B. Cure formed surfaces by leaving formwork in place during entire curing period, or if forms are removed during curing period, by one of the methods specified below for unformed surfaces. Keep steel forms heated by sun and wood forms in contact with concrete wet during curing period. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 C. Cure slabs to receive exterior concrete penetrating sealer, interior concrete penetrating sealer/hardener, ceramic tile, or quarry tile and exterior sidewalks by moisture cover curing. Apply moisture retaining cover as soon as finishing operations are complete and concrete is sufficiently hard to be undamaged by the covering. Sprinkle concrete as necessary during application of covering. Lap edges and ends at least 4 ", and seal laps. Weigh down covering to prevent displacement. Patch holes and tears that occur during the curing period. D. Cure other unformed surfaces by using a water based curing compound. Apply curing compound according to manufacturer's instructions using spray equipment. Apply curing compound as soon as fmishing operations are complete, free water on surface has disappeared and no water sheen can be seen. Apply two coats at right angles to each other on exterior slabs and one coat on interior slabs. Re -Apply at saw cut joints if curing compound was applied before sawing. 1. Coordinate with resilient flooring and carpet suppliers and verify that adhesives to be used are compatible with curing compound floor sealer specified herein. Provide moisture cover curing as indicated above at slabs where non - compatible adhesives are used. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Arrange for the following tests according to ACI 301 and ACI 318 unless otherwise specified. B. Compressive Strength Tests: Make one set of test cylinders (three per set) for each day's pour in excess of one cubic yard for each type of concrete. If day's pour exceeds 25 cubic yards, make one set of test cylinders for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. 1. For concrete class A through E, mold and laboratory-cure cylinders for strength tests in accordance with ASTM C31 and test in accordance with ASTM C39. For concrete class F, masonry grout, mold and test concrete in accordance with ASTM C1019 when required in section 4200. Strength level is satisfactory if both of the following criteria are met: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 TARGET a. For concrete class B and C, average of all sets of two consecutive 28 day strength tests equal or exceed fc. For class F concrete, average of all sets of three consecutive 28 day strength tests equal or exceed f c. b. No individual 28 day strength test (average of two cylinders) falls below fc by more than 500 psi. 2. Where samples have not been taken or tests conducted as specified, or strength of laboratory test cylinders for a particular portion of the structure fails to meet requirements of ACI 318 for evaluation of concrete strength, OSR shall have the right to order compressive and flexural test specimens taken from hardened concrete according to ASTM C42, load tests according to ACI 318, Chapter 20, or other tests necessary to clearly establish strength of concrete. C. Slump Tests: Furnish and maintain a mold and tamping rod. Test first batch of each type of concrete delivered for each day's pour, plus one test for each 25 cubic yards or fraction thereof, in accordance with ASTM C143. D. Entrained Air Tests: Furnish and maintain a properly calibrated pressure -type air meter. Test first batch of air entrained concrete delivered for each day's pour plus one test for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, in accordance with ASTM C231. 3.14 PATCHING AND CLEANING FORMED SURFACES A. General: Patch tie holes and defective areas immediately after form removal. B. Rough Form Finish: Patch holes and defects to leave surfaces with texture imparted by forms. C. Smooth Form Finish: Patch holes and defects, and completely remove fins by rubbing with wood blocks. D. Cleaning: Clean exposed concrete to remove laitance, efflorescence and stains. 1 TARGET 3.15 APPLICATION OF INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER/HARDENER clean. rr A. Seal and harden interior concrete floors where indicated on Drawings, according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply minimum seven days after pouring floor. B. Clean floors of curing compounds, contaminants and stains such as waxes, grease, oil, dirt, and dust as recommended by the sealer/hardener manufacturer. C. Apply sealer to floors thoroughly dry, and D. Do not apply sealer when temperature is below manufacturer's recommendations. E. Apply sealer at a rate based on concrete porosity and manufacturer's recommendations. Aggressively scrub into surfaces with an abrasive mechanical scrubber or bristle broom. Keep surface thoroughly wet with sealer, and when sealer begins to gel and thicken, spray with water and repeat scrubbing. Squeegee and vacuum surface thoroughly dry leaving no surface sealer. Immediately repeat the process a second time to ensure complete penetration of sealer. On completion of second application, again thoroughly squeegee and vacuum surface as necessary to leave surface completely dry to prevent sealer film left wet on the surface from drying to a patchy milky appearance. F. If patchy and milky appearance results, remove by means recommended by the sealer/hardener manufacturer. G. After application is complete and thoroughly dry, abrasively scrub with a mechanical scrubber and water to bring out shine. H. Close spaces in which sealer is being applied to traffic, and keep closed for 24 hours after application is completed, or longer if recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 03350 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete patching. 2. Concrete repair work. 3. Floor underlayment. 4. Installation of vapor barrier below floor `r slab on grade. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 02220 - Trench Excavation and Backfilling, for slab removal that this work may be in conjunction with. B. Section 09650 - Adhesives used to install resilient flooring. C. Section 09900 - Field painting. D. Division 15 - Sealing of pipe sleeves. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM C33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ". 2. ASTM C94, "Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete ". 3. ASTM C109/C109M, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars ". 4. ASTM C144, "Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ". 5. ASTM C150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement ". 6. ASTM A309, "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ". 7. ASTM C348, "Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic- Cement Mortars ". 8. ASTM C494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ". 9. ASTM A615, "Spec for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ". 10. ASTM C618, "Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete ". P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 11. ASTM C939, " Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced- Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method) ". B. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, (CRSI): 1. CRSI MSP -1, "Manual of Standard Practice ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ an independent testing laboratory to test proposed aggregate and design of all concrete mixes, patching mixes, and floor underlayment mixes, as requested by CPR . B. Submit chemical and physical analysis of fly ash if used, as requested by CPR. C. Use approved mix designs as long as aggregate characteristics remain unchanged. Upon significant changes in aggregate, prepare and submit new mix designs. D. Authorizations: Obtain written authorization from CPR for use of admixtures not specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Aggregate Test Reports and Mix Designs: Submit mix design including historical or trial mixture data, and aggregate test reports, as requested by CPR 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Place no concrete patching, cementitious floor underlayment, or concrete repair work without approval of CPR if air temperature is expected to rise above 85° F in work area. B. Verify and comply with State and Local Code Jurisdiction Regulations regarding Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) and Special Solvent Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE PATCHING A. Concrete Patching (Horizontal Surfaces). 1. Horizontal Patching Mortar - Design Criteria: Water -to- Cement Ratio Slump Without PSP -N2 With PSP -N2 Cement Factor, Nominal Air Content, Calculated 0.40 1 -1/2" 5 -1/2" 6.91 sq. /yd 6.5% CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 03350 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2. Horizontal Patching Mortar - Materials: a. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, Portland Cement, or equal. b. Aggregate: 1) Course: ASTM C33, Size No. 7 (1/2" to No.4). 2) Fine: ASTM C144. c. Admixtures: 1) Plasticizer: ASTM C494, Type F; Protex Industries, Inc., "PSN -NZ ", or equal. 3. Horizontal. Patching Mortar - Mixing (per Cu. Yd.). a. Cement (lbs.): 650. b. Admixtures: 1) Plasticizer 60.0 ounces* 2) Air Entrainer .5 ounces ** 3) Fine Aggregate (lbs.) 1475 4) Coarse Aggregate (lbs.) 1485 5) Water, Net (lbs.) 260 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 03350 - 2 The batch weights shown above are on an over dry basis and should be adjusted for the amount of moisture in the aggregates at the time of hatching. Mix in accordance with admixture manufacturer's recommendations. * The amount of plasticizer may be varied as necessary to produce the desired consistency. ** The amount of air entraining agent will have to be varied to maintain the specified air content. B. Concrete Patching (Vertical Surfaces). 1. Vertical Patching Mortar: a. Patching Material shall be "Thorite" as made by Standard Dry Wall Products, or equal. Material shall be delivered in factory- sealed and labeled containers. Furnish mixing and application instructions with the material. b. Liquid Admixture shall be "Acryl 60" as made by Standard Dry Wall Products, or equal. Admixture shall be compatible with the patching material. c. Mixing. Add the factory prepared dry material to a mixture of three parts water to one part liquid admixture, in TARGET 2.2 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK A. Concrete Repair Work (to be used when the repair is full depth - i.e. filling in a portion of slab that has been removed): 1. Concrete may be ready -mixed or may be job -mixed at the Contractor's option. a. Ready -mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94 except as may be otherwise specified herein. b. Job -mixed concrete shall be equivalent to ready -mixed concrete furnished under ASTM C94. c. Concrete may contain admixtures as allowed by ASTM C94 except that accelerators shall not be used. At the Contractor's option, fly ash may be used to reduce cement content and also subject to the following. Fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618 except that loss on ignition shall not exceed 5 %. The ratio of fly ash to cement shall not exceed 0.15. The maximum water - to-cement plus fly ash ratio (by weight) shall not exceed 0.45. d. Cement used shall be Type I conforming to ASTM C150. e. Coarse aggregate shall be 3/4" to No. 4 in size and shall be regular weight type. Slump shall be 4" or less. Ready -mixed concrete shall be proportioned per ASTM C94. Strength at 28 days shall be 4000 psi, minimum. 2. Reinforcing Steel Bars: deformed bars from new billet stock, ASTM A615 Grade 60. f. g. strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Mix to a "batter" consistency for the first coat and to a suitable heavy trowel consistency for patching. 2.3 FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT AND FLOOR TRANSITION MATERIAL A. Materials: 1. Self - Leveling Floor Underlayment: a. Compress. Strength: 4100 psi -28 days. b. Flexural Strength: 1000 psi -28 days. 2. Trowel - Applied Floor Transition Material: i TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 a. Compress. Strength: 800 psi -1day. 4500psi - 28days. •+ b. Flexural Strength: 1360 psi - 28days. CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 03350 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Self - Leveling Products & Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. "K -15 Self - Leveling Underlayment", by Ardex, Inc., Corapolis, PA. 2. "300 Premium Underlayment", by The Burke Group, Converse, TX. 3. "Selby Self - Leveling Underlayment", by Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc., Jacksonville, FL. 4. "Sonoflow ", by Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN. 5. "Levelex ", by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE. 6. "Thoro Underlayment Self Leveling ", by Thoro System Products, Centerville, IN. C. Troweled Products & Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. "Thin Patch ", L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, , note that Thin Patch has 1 -1/2" max. depth per layer. 2. "Set Latex Cement, and Acryl -Set Liquid Polymer", by Master Builders, Cleveland, OH, note that Set Latex Cement has 1/4" max. depth per layer . 3. "Sonopatch 100 ", Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, note that Sonopatch 100 has 3/4" max. depth per layer. 4. "Thoro Underlayment Trowel Grade ", by Thoro System Products, Centerville, IN, note that Thoro Underlayment Trowel Grade has 5/8" max. depth per layer D. Troweled Applications that have a feathered edge condition (may) require primer to be used for entire area covered with floor transition material. Primer for Troweled Products & Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. "Everbond ", by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE. 2. No primer required by Master Builders. 3. "Sonoprep ", by Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN. 4. No primer required by Thoro. E. Floor Sealer/Hardener (at trowel- applied locations that are permanently exposed without another floor fmish over them) provide the following sealer/hardner: 1. "Seal Hard ", L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE. 2. "Kure -N- Harden ",Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN. 3. "Ashford Formula ", Curecrete Chemical Company, Inc. CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 03350 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION TARGET r« 3.1 CONCRETE PATCHING PLACEMENT A. Horizontal Patching: 1. Removal: In the areas, designated to be patched, the Contractor shall remove all deteriorated concrete down to sound concrete. The perimeter of each area to be patched shall be saw -cut to provide vertical faces around the patch. Depth shall be as directed by the CPR. All debris shall be removed promptly by the Contractor. All reinforcing encountered shall be left in place, cleaned, and adjusted as may be necessary to provide for good cover after patching. a. The Contractor shall exercise extreme caution in his removal operation so as not to disturb any existing reinforcing, anchor plates, etc. 2. Surface Preparation. Substrate must be sound, clean, free from oil, solvents, paint, dust and foreign material. Chip and /or abrade painted concrete to expose clean surfaces. Scrub dirty surfaces with heavy duty caustic detergent and clear water flush. All areas to receive concrete patching shall be sand blasted, or as any option may be acid etched to remove laitance and efflorescence. If acid etched, neutralize with ammonia and clear water rinse twice. a. Immediately prior to placing concrete patching mix, the slabs shall be thoroughly soaked with water. Free water shall be removed shortly before placing finish. 3. Installation. A thin cement wash proportioned of 15 pounds of Portland cement to 4 gallons of water shall be applied to the damp, but not wet, surface of the concrete slab to receive the concrete patching mix just prior to the applications. Limit application of cement wash to an area that can be covered with patching mortar before cement wash dries. a. Concrete patching mixture shall be applied over the cement wash while the wash is still wet and/or tacky. If the wash has hardened, another application must be made. b. Concrete patching shall be applied and troweled in, so as to form a dense, 6 1 TARGET solid overlay with a uniform, granular surface. c. Sprinkle in sand as may be necessary to prevent glossy, slippery surfaces where there will be pedestrian and/or vehicle traffic. d. As the patching work is completed, it shall be checked with straight -edges and level to assure that all surfaces will drain freely; correct as may be necessary before the material sets up. B. Vertical Patching: 1. General. All work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Removal. In the areas designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove all deteriorated concrete back to sound concrete. The Contractor shall remove all debris promptly. All reinforcing encountered shall be left in place cleaned and adjusted as may be necessary to provide for good cover after patching. a. The Contractor shall exercise extreme caution in his removal operation so not to disturb any existing reinforcing, anchor plates, etc. 3. Surface Preparation. Substrate must be sound, clean, free from oil, solvents, dust and foreign material. Chip and/or abrade oil saturated concrete to expose clean surfaces. The perimeter of each area to be patched shall be saw -cut to provide vertical faces around the patch. Depth shall be as directed by the Engineer. Loose concrete and rust on steel rods should be removed by sandblasting, chisel and hammer, or wire brush, as applicable. Heavy particles of concrete should be removed by air or electric hammer. Wash clean with water from hose before filling with patching material. 4. First coat shall be brush applied and worked under any exposed reinforcing bars and shall cover the complete patched area. Apply within ten minutes after the liquid has been added. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 5. Patching mortar shall be trowel applied in 1/2" to 1" thick layers. Apply within five to ten minutes after liquid is added to the mix. Apply in successive 1/2" to 1" layers. Scratch previous layer, cool with water and apply successive layer within 15 to 20 minutes. If patch gets hot and turns light gray, cool by wetting. Build up patch to restore original surface plane, or profile. As the patching work is completed, it shall be checked with straight -edges and level to assure that all surfaces are in accurate alignment; correct as may be necessary before the material sets up. Keep patch damp 20 to 30 minutes after filling to complete curing. 3.2 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK A. Splicing Bars: New reinforcing steel shall be clean and shall be free from paint, oil, grease, form coating, mortar, dirt, mill scale, rust, etc. A thin film of rust may be permitted at the discretion of the CPR provided the rust does not exceed that allowed by ASTM A615. 1. Existing reinforcing steel shall be reasonably clean of hardened cement, dirt and rust; and shall be bent back to approximately its position prior to being cut. New bars shall be placed across the gap and wired securely inplace. 2. Lap for bars shall be as follows: bars in tension shall be lapped 36 diameters and bars in compression 24 diameters, but not less than 12" in either case. B. Placing Concrete. No concrete which has commenced to set and no retempered concrete shall be used. Coordinate this work with the mechanical and electrical work. Work embedded shall be securely fastened in place. Concrete shall be placed as soon as practicable after mixing. It shall be deposited in such manner as to cause no separation or segregation of the ingredients. Concrete shall not be dropped any considerable distance (not over four feet) through space. It shall not be deposited in large quantities at one place and permitted to run or be worked any considerable distance, but shall be deposited in its final position as nearly as practicable. Concrete shall be rammed, spaded and agitated by suitable tools so as to produce a thoroughly compacted concrete of maximum density; and so that the concrete will present a smooth, finished, unbroken mortar surface without exposed stone when the forms are CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 03350 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 removed. Use power vibrators wherever applicable, and provide a spare vibrator at the site when starting each concrete placement operation. 1. A thin cement wash proportioned of 15 pounds of Portland cement to 4 gallons of water shall be applied to the dampened, but not wet, edges of the existing concrete slab. 2. The temperature of the mixed cement shall not vary more than 10 degrees F plus or minus from the temperature of the concrete forming the slab which is to receive the cement patch. C. Finish: Troweled concrete shall be screeded, floated and troweled. The finished surface shall be free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be a true plane within 3/16 inch in ten feet. Provide a troweled fmish on floor slab patch as required to match existing slab finish D. Curing: Newly placed concrete shall be kept damp on all surfaces for seven full days following the completion of placement. Curing methods used shall be appropriate to each situation. Curing compound shall not be used. Curing shall not stain the concrete. Curing methods and maintenance thereof shall be subject to the CPR's approval. 3.3 FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT PLACEMENT A. Scarify existing surfaces to receive underlayment, as recommended by manufacturer. B. Priming for Underlayment: If the underlayment manufacturer requires primer for the substrate encountered provide it and place as recommended by manufacturer. C. Placing underlayment: Place self - leveling and troweled underlayment as recommended by the manufacturer. No underlayment which has commenced to set and no retempered concrete shall be used. Embedded work shall be securely fastened in place. 1. Underlayment shall be placed as soon as practicable after mixing. It shall be deposited in such manner as to cause no separation or segregation of the ingredients. It shall not be deposited in large quantities at one place and permitted to run or be worked any considerable CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 03350 - 6 TARGET distance, but shall be deposited in its final position as nearly as practicable. Place so that the underlayment will present a smooth, finished, unbroken mortar surface. 2. The temperature of the mixed underlayment shall not vary more than 10 degrees F plus or minus from the temperature of the concrete forming the slab which is to receive the cement patch. D. Finish: Troweled underlayment shall be screeded, floated and troweled as recommended by the manufacturer. The fmished surface shall be free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be a true plane within 1/8 inch in ten feet. Provide a troweled fmish as required to match existing slab fmish. END OF SECTION 1 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 SUBMITTALS SECTION 03542 FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Hydraulic- cement based underlayment for preparation of substrate surfaces to accept new flooring materials. A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete; for .,, concrete floor fmish and flatness and levelness criteria. B. Section 03925 — Concrete Floor Preparation; for preparation of substrate surfaces, including grinding / shot blasting of existing concrete slab. C. Section 09300 — Tile; for ceramic and quarry tile floor fmishes. D. Section 09650 — Resilient Flooring; for underlayment, vinyl composition tile, vinyl base and floor transition strips. A. Product Data: For each type of product used. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certifying that products are compatible. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certify in writing that products are compatible. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage: Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. 1. Place hydraulic- cement -based underlayment only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor covering products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRAULIC- CEMENT BASED UNDERLAYMENTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 A. Underlayment: Hydraulic- cement based, polymer- modified, self - leveling and trowel grade products that can be applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 3/16 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements. a. "K -15" self - leveling. b. "SD -P" or "SD -F Feather Finish" trowel application. 2. Mapei. a. "Ultra/Plan" self - leveling. b. "Plani/Patch" trowel application. 3. Degussa Building Systems, Inc. a. Thoro® Underlayment Self- Leveling. b. Thome Underlayment Trowel Grade. C. Provide self - leveling and/or trowel grade products as required to produce a level floor substrate acceptable to floor fmish manufacturer and installer. D. Gypsum based or latex, non - cementitious underlayments are NOT acceptable. E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. 2.2 CONTROL JOINT FILLER A. Trowel grade products of same manufacturer as self leveling product selected. 1. Products: FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 03542 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 03542 - 2 a. Ardex SD -F Feather Finish. b. Thoro® Underlayment Trowel Grade. c. Mapei "Plani/Patch ". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form- release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to- substrate and intercoat adhesion. TARGET 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.4 CONTROL JOINT PREPARATION A. Locate all non- moving control joints in concrete slab in areas to receive VCT flooring. Re -cut joint, clean out and vacuum all debris from joints. B. Fill control joint with trowel grade joint fill material. Force material down into joint with edge of trowel, followed by crossing the joint at a direction of 45 degrees to the joint. Continue process until the entire joint depth is fully filled with joint fill material. C. Allow joint fill material to set and then proceed with application of floor underlayment as required. D. Do not overwater trowel grade material. Overwatering the product and creating a "flowable" consistency can cause the material to contract or shrink during curing. This may cause a concave recess to occur along the length of the joint and allow the joint to telegraph through the VCT. Follow the manufacturer's guidelines for proper mixing and application. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1 END OF SECTION FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 03542 - 3 TARGET lad SECTION 03925 CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation of substrate surfaces, including grinding of existing concrete slab. 2. Preparation of substrate surfaces, including shot blasting of existing concrete slab. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. B. Section 03542 — Floor Underlayment; for preparation of substrate surfaces to accept new flooring materials. Section 09250 — Resilient Flooring; for removal of existing VCT and adhesive. 1.3 REFERENCES A. International Concrete Repair Institute, (ICRI). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer that employs workers trained in concrete floor preparation operations as specified. 2.1 MATERIALS A. Not Used. 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FLOOR PREPARATION A. Grinding: After the existing VCT flooring has been removed, prepare the existing floor slab by the following treatment: P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 1. Grinder: SASE 780 Multifunctional Grinder with following attributes: a. Weight: 1,100 lbs (minimum). b. Req'd Power: 220volt, 50amp, 3 phase. c. 20 Horsepower (minimum). d. Grinding Width: 30.5 inches. e. Grinding Head: Planetary. f. RPM: Variable (300 — 1,000). g. Grinding Torque: 70.8Foot Pounds (min). 2. Dust Control: SASE Bull 100 Dust Containment System. a. Contractor's Option: SASE Bull 3600 Dust Containment System. Selected system must provide: 1) Filtering: 3 stage system 2) Required Power: 220volt, 14amp, 3 phase. 3) 10 Horsepower. 3. Manufacturer: a. SASE Company, Inc. 26423 79` Avenue South Kent, WA 98032 Telephone No. 1- 800 -522 -2606 3.3 FLOOR PREPARATION A. Shot Blasting: After the existing VCT flooring has been removed, prepare the existing floor slab by the following treatment: 1. Shot Blast floor surface to achieve International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guidelines, profile #4. Use size #360 shot to achieve #4 profile. 2. Shot Blaster: SASE T -40 Shot Blaster with following attributes: a. Req'd Power: 220volt, 50amp, 3 phase; or 440 volt, 30 amp, 3 phase. b. 20 Horsepower (minimum). c. Blast Width: 16 inches. d. Filtering: 8 filter dust collector. 3. Manufacturer: a. SASE Company, Inc. 26423 79 Avenue South Kent, WA 98032 Telephone No. 1- 800 -522 -2606 B. Drill and/or core all inserts in slab that are no longer used, fill the remaining hole with non- shrink grout and allow to cure. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean removal areas of loose concrete, dust, and debris. CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION 03925 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 TARGET END OF SECTION CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION 03925 - 2 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL Section Includes: 1. Mortar and grout. 2. Concrete masonry units. 3. Joint reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories. 4. Installation of reinforcing bars and deformed bar anchors in unit masonry. 5. Installation of anchor bolts and other embedments in unit masonry. A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance. B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement; for furnishing of reinforcing bars. C. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1. Masonry grout. D. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; for famishing of metal fabrication items embedded in unit masonry. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Masonry Units supplied by manufacturers that are members of the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) are preferred. B. Submit documentation indicating compliance with the requirements for the specified compressive strength of masonry f' in accordance with the following subsection. This testing shall be arranged by Contractor and performed by Owner's testing agency. 1. Unit Strength Method: a. Determine the compressive strength of masonry, based on the strength of the unit and type of mortar specified using Table 2, of ACI 530.1. The following articles must be met: I) Units conform to ASTM C55 or ASTM C 90 and are sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 2) Thickness of bed joints does not exceed 5/8 in. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 3) For grouted masonry, the grout meets the following requirement: (a) Grout conforms to ASTM C 476. 2. Refer to subsection FIELD QUALITY CONTROL for Field Testing and Special Inspection requirements. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM A153, "Standard Spec for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ". 2. ASTM C33, " Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C55, "Standard Spec for Concrete Building Brick ". 4. ASTM C90, "Standard Spec for Load- Bearing Concrete Masonry Units ". 5. ASTM C 140, "Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units ". 6. ASTM C144, "Standard Spec for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ". 7. ASTM C150, "Standard Spec for Portland Cement ". 8. ASTM C207, "Standard Spec for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ". 9. ASTM C270, "Standard Spec for Mortar for Unit Masonry". 10. ASTM C331, "Standard Spec for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units ". 11. ASTM C 476, "Specification for Grout for Masonry". 12. ASTM -C979, "Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete ". 13. ASTM C 1019, " Test method for Sampling and Testing Grout'. 14. ASTM C1314, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms ". 15. ASTM C1329, "Specification for Mortar Cement ". B. American Concrete Institute, (ACI): 1. ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602. "Specifications for Masonry Structures ". 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submitted under Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 C. Product Data/Certifications: Prior to delivery to Site: 1. Submit certification of type, density and shrinkage of concrete masonry units. 2. Submit product data and certification of mortar products. 3. Submit mortar mix design with proportions for each type of mortar used. D. Test Reports: Submit test reports for concrete masonry prism tests performed in advance of construction if such testing is required by section 1.03. E. Final Reports: Submit as specified. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Construction: 1. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 Do not lay masonry when outside air temperature is below 40° F or expected to fall below 40° F, unless measures are in place and followed for heating and protecting masonry according to cold weather construction procedures defined in ACI 530.1. B. Hot Weather Construction: 1. Implement the following when ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F. or 90 degrees F. with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph. a. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 feet ahead of masonry. b. Set masonry units within one minutes of spreading mortar. C. Hot Weather Construction: 1. Implement the following when ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F. or 90 degrees F. with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph: a. Maintain sand piles in a damp. Loose condition. b. Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar having a temperature below 120 degrees F. c. Maintain mortar and grout temperature below 120 degrees F. d. Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water before they come into contact into mortar ingredients or mortar. e. Maintain mortar consistency by re- tempering with cool water. f. Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing. 2. When ambient temperature exceeds 115 degrees F. or exceeds 105 degrees F. with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph: a. Implement the requirements of paragraph 1 above and, b. Shade materials and mixing equipment from direct sunlight. c. Use cool mixing water for mortar and grout. d. Ice is permitted in the mixing water prior to use. Do not permit ice to be present in the mixing water when added to the other mortar or grout materials. 3. When the daily mean temperature exceeds 100 degrees F. or exceeds 90 degrees F. with a wind velocity greater than 87 mph, fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times a day until the masonry is three days old. D. Protect masonry walls from excessive moisture after laying. Cover tops of walls with weather resistive membrane when work is not in progress. D. E. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. B. Hydrated Lime ASTM C207, Type S. C. Aggregate: 1. Mortar - ASTM C144. 2. Grout - ASTM C404. Water: Clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials. TARGET Mortar Cement: Contractor may, at his option, use mortar cement manufactured by Lafarge Corporation conforming to the requirements for mortar types specified and complying with the current Uniform Building Code Standard 21 -14 for Mortar Cement. 1. Submit current certified test report indicating mortar cement meets UBC requirements for air content, flexural bond strength and compressive strength for each mortar type. TARGET F. If pre - blended portland cement - hydrated lime is used, submit product data for each mortar type and certification that products contain only portland cement and hydrated lime, and meet ASTM C270, proportion specifications, with maximum air content of 12 percent. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU - 1) A. Normal Weight Units (Minimum 125 pcf): ASTM C90, without water repellent additives, Type I, moisture controlled, manufactured from sand - gravel aggregate conforming to ASTM C33. • NI r 1 G. Masonry cements are NOT acceptable. B. Load Bearing Units: ASTM C90, without water repellent additives, Type I, plain or open core type units. C. Concrete Brick: ASTM C55, Grade N, Type I. D. Faces of units exposed in finished work shall be of uniform color and texture and free of chips, cracks, or other imperfections detracting from appearance of a sample wall when viewed from a distance of 15 feet. E. Normal Weight Units (Minimum 125 pcf): ASTM C90, without water repellent additives, Type II, manufactured from sand - gravel aggregate conforming to ASTM C33. F. Load Bearing Units: ASTM C90, without water repellent additives, Type II, plain or open core type units. G. Concrete Brick: ASTM C55, Grade N, Type I1. H. Faces of units exposed in finished work shall be of uniform color and texture and free of chips, cracks, or other imperfections detracting from appearance of a sample wall when viewed from a distance of 15 feet. I. Decorative Block Units: ASTM C90, without water repellent additives, Type II; as scheduled. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A.A Wire Products (AA). 2. Dur -O -Wall (DOW). 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. (H & B). P01 RIGHTSIZE T B. Single Wythe CMU Joint Reinforcement: Provide hot - dipped galvanized, complying with ASTM A153, Class 13-2 coating; longitudinal rods and cross rods. preformed corners and special shapes. Provide 9 gauge wire minimum. 1. A A "AA500 Blok -Lok ", Standard. 2. DOW "Ladur" Design, Standard. 3. H & B "No.220" Ladder -Mesh. C. Adjustable Wall Ties: Hot dipped galvanized, 9 gauge wire minimum: 1. A A "AA300" Adjustable Ties. 2. DOW "D /A 515 ". 3. H & B "No. 600 ", Rectangular. D. Injection Adhesive Anchors: 1. Hilti, "HIT HY -20 or HY 150 Injection Adhesive Anchors ". 2. Rawl, "Chem -Fast Acrylic Epoxy Injection Mortar" Anchors; or approved equal. 3. ITW Ramset/Redhead Epcon system, ceramic 6 epoxy; or approved equal. 2.4 MORTAR PROPORTIONS AND STRENGTHS A. Conform to the requirements of the "Proportion Specifications" of ASTM C270 for portland cement -lime with a maximum air content of 12 %. B. Use mortar type proportioned by volume, with minimum average compressive strength as follows: (Use no masonry cement.) 1. Above Grade: Type S; 1800 psi. 2. Below Grade: Type M; 2500 psi. C. Use no admixtures, salts, or antifreeze compounds. 2.5 MIXING MORTAR A. Use a drum -type mixer. Mix dry ingredients to a uniform color. Add water to bring mortar to proper consistency for use. Mix for three to five minutes after water is added. Thoroughly clean mixer after discharging each batch. B. Use mortar within 2 -1/2 hours after initial mixing, and discard mortar not used within this time. Mortar may be retempered by adding water and remixing at any time within two hours after its initial mixing. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2.6 GROUT A. Grout Type: Use concrete for typical masonry grout. 3/4" maximum aggregate grout may be used in voids larger than 6" except for bond beams with No. 8 or larger reinforcing bars. 2.7 CONCRETE MASONRY STRENGTH A. Provide concrete masonry with ultimate compressive strength as follows unless noted otherwise: 1. Exterior wall construction: fm = 1500 psi. 2.8 MASONRY FLASHINGS AND WEEPS A. Through Wall Flashing: sheet polyvinylchloride; 20 mil thick, plastic flashing; Color: black. 1. Acceptable Flashing Manufacturers: a. AFCO "V- Seal ". b. Nervastral Inc., "Nervastral HD ". c. Sandell "Nu -flex PVC Flashing." d. Sonnebom, "Hydrocide VinylSeal ". e. York Manufacturing, "Wascoseal" Type 20. B. Weeps: Either of the following. 1. Plastic tubes, 1/4" dia. x 8" medium density polyethylene. 2. Rope wicks, 3/8" dia. x min. 12" cotton. Nylon, hemp or other synthetic rope are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify items furnished under other sections as properly sized and located. B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Provide solids and special shapes at jambs and corners. cutting with a masonry saw. Expose no broken units in finished work. B. Provide unit types as specified below at masonry containing vertical reinforcement. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 1. Load Bearing Unit Shapes: All units (excluding lintel, cap and sill block units) to be Plain Double Corner; Single Open End, ( "A" shaped); or Double Open End, ( "H" shaped) units. C. Do not wet concrete masonry units during installation. D. Lay masonry plumb and true to lines and levels indicated. TARGET r 1 1 E. Where masonry units are disturbed or repositioned after initial placement, remove mortar and relay units with fresh mortar. Where new masonry is placed against masonry that has set or begun to set, remove loose mortar and clean existing surfaces. F. If head or bed joint is not full thickness of face shell of unit, or contains voids, remove unit and relay with fresh mortar. G. Keep grout spaces, cavities, and wythes free of excess mortar droppings. H. Form corbels, chases, openings and recesses required for work of other trades. I. Build -in anchors, nailing blocks, ties, and work of other trades. J. Build -in hollow metal frames in masonry walls. Build frame anchors into mortar joints, and solidly grout jamb sections full of mortar, except where electrical wiring is shown. K. Do NOT use mortar as grout/corefill. 3.3 ERECTION A. Lay masonry in running bond, unless otherwise indicated, with 3/8" joints. B. Joints: Tool mortar joints as follows: a. Exposed joints: Concave. b. Non - exposed joints: Flush cut. C. Lay first course of concrete masonry units above footings, foundations and concrete slabs in full bed of mortar. Starting course bed joints shall not be less than 1/4 inch thick and not more than 3/4 inches thick. D. Head and bed joints shall be full thickness of face shell of unit, or fully mortared for solid units. E. Fully mortar webs where adjacent cells are to be grouted. 1 on TARGET F. Butter head joints on both faces, and shove into place to squeeze out excess mortar. G. Where bearing walls are laid up separately, regularly block vertical joint with 8" maximum offsets, and reinforce joint with rigid anchors spaced not over four feet on center vertically. Build anchors into mortar joints. • H. Anchor non - bearing partitions at corners and intersections with masonry bonding. I. Anchor non - bearing partitions at corners and intersections with masonry bonding. J. Where masonry abuts cast -in -place concrete walls, install dovetail triangular ties spaced 16" o.c. vertically. K. Veneer anchor spacing: 1. For adjustable two-piece and anchors of wire size W1.7, provide at least one anchor for each 2.67 square feet of wall area. 2. For all other anchors, provide at least on anchor for every 3.5 square feet of wall area. 3. Do not use corrugated sheet metal anchors. 4. Space anchors at a maximum of 32 inches horizontally and 18 inches vertically. 5. Provide additional anchors around all openings larger than 16 inches in either dimension. Space anchors around the perimeter of openings at a maximum of 3 feet on center. Place anchors within 12 inches of openings. L. Reinforce masonry veneer walls with Veneer wall Anchor, Wire -Tie, and Seismiclip; spaced maximum 16" o.c. horizontally. Connect Seismiclip to continuous 9 gauge wire spaced 16" on center vertically. Fully embed wire in mortar joints. Lap wire reinforcement ends minimum 6 ". M. Where masonry abuts cast -in -place concrete walls, install dovetail triangular ties spaced 16" o.c. vertically N. Where walls are not placed with horizontal deformed reinforcing bars, continuously reinforce walls with joint reinforcement placed in mortar joints not over 16" on center vertically, or as indicated on Drawings. Embed side rods in full mortar bed. Lap reinforcing 6" minimum. Discontinue reinforcing at control joints. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 O. Place deformed reinforcing bars as masonry is laid. Lap bar ends not less than lap indicated on Drawings. Place single bars in center of wall thickness unless otherwise noted. Prior to grouting, secure reinforcing against displacement by wire positioners. Intervals shall not exceed height of lift for low lift grouting or exceed 8' -0" on center for high lift grouting. Locate reinforcing within + 1/2 inch of specified location. P. Grout cores at reinforcing; grout all cells as noted on Drawings. When grouting operations must be interrupted for 1 hour or longer, create a construction joint by stopping grout 1 -1/2" below top of uppermost course. Cleanouts (3 "x3" minimum) shall be provided at the base of all pours exceeding 5' -0" in height. Grout lifts shall not exceed 6' -O" in height unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Consolidate grout with 3/4" diameter low velocity internal vibrator (8,000 vpm min.). Dip vibrator full height within grout around reinforcement and embedded items. Reconsolidate grout after initial water loss and settlement. Do not use vibrator in contact with reinforcing to consolidate grout. R Grout cores in 5' -0" maximum lifts or if cleanouts are provided, according to Table 4.3.3.4 of ACI 530.1 -92 /ASCE 6 -92 \TMS 402 -92. Consolidate grout with 3/4" diameter low velocity internal vibrator (8,000 vpm min.). Dip vibrator full height within grout around reinforcement and embedded items. Reconsolidate grout after initial water loss and settlement. Do not use vibrator in contact with reinforcing to consolidate grout. S. Cleanouts (3 "x3" minimum) shall be provided at the base of all pours exceeding 5' -0" in height. Grout lifts shall not exceed 5' -O" unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Grout cores in 5' -0" maximum lifts or if cleanouts are provided, according to Table 5 of ACI 530.1 -95 /ASCE 6 -95 \TMS 602 -95. Consolidate grout with 3 / " diameter low velocity internal vibrator (8,000 vpm min.). Dip vibrator full height within grout around reinforcement and embedded items. Reconsolidate grout after initial water loss and settlement. Do not use vibrator in contact with reinforcing to consolidate grout. Q. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 T. Provide temporary bracing/shoring during erection. Leave temporary bracing /shoring in place until structure is permanently self - supporting. 3.4 LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated on Drawings. B. Where other types of lintels are not indicated, provide reinforced unit masonry lintels at wall openings, including openings for mechanical and electrical work. Provide lintel reinforcing as indicated on Drawings for width of opening. C. Support and tie reinforcing in place with a minimum clearance of 3/4" between reinforcing and block shells. Build in anchors and other accessories. D. Grout lintels and bond beams. Place and consolidate with internal vibrations (8,000 vpm) without disturbing reinforcing. 3.5 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Extend flashings through veneer, turn up minimum 8" and bed into mortar joints of masonry back -up. B. Extend flashings through veneer, turn up minimum 8" onto gypsum sheathing and lap with building paper at steel stud back -up. C. Lap end joints minimum 6" and seal watertight. D. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive. E. Turn the ends of the flashing up into the head joint a minimum of 2" to form a dam. 3.6 CAVITY DRAINAGE A. Install weep tubes or rope wicks where masonry is installed in cavity wall construction. Place weeps in veneer at 24" on center horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles, and at bottom of walls. B. Do not let mortar fall into cavity air space, plug weep tubes; or bury rope wicks. Clean mortar droppings promptly. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 TARGET C. At Exterior Walls Drainage and Pressure Relief Holes: Prior to painting exterior wall, drill 3/8" diameter hole through horizontal mortar joint of CMU exterior face, angled upwards, located at top and bottom of an open core, spaced approximately 4 feet on center, centered between each and every vertically reinforced and grouted core. Provide additional holes immediately above and below horizontally reinforced cores that interrupt cavities at same spacing. 3.7 CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, power wash and clean as necessary exposed masonry to remove laitance, excess mortar, efflorescence and stains. B. Cut out and repoint defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Do not use acid solutions or proprietary cleaning compounds without prior approval of CSR. Do not use metal cleaning tools and brushes or abrasive powders. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit documentation indicating compliance with the requirements for the following subsections. The testing and inspections shall be arranged by Contractor and performed by Owner's testing agency. 1. Field Testing: a. Units are sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 2. Special Inspections: a. As masonry construction begins verify the following: 1) Proportions of site prepared mortar 2) Construction of mortar joints 3) Location of reinforcement and connections b. Periodically during the tasks listed verify the following: 1) Thickness of bed joints do not exceed 5/8 in 2) Size and location of structural elements 3) Type, size, and location of anchors and anchorage details 4) Specified size, type, and grade of reinforcement 1 ▪ TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 NW hal r • r dil 5) Protection of masonry during cold and hot weather c. Prior to grouting verify the following: 1) Grout space is clean 2) Placement of reinforcement and connectors 3) Proportions of site - prepared grout 4) Construction of mortar joints d. Verify compliance with construction documents and approved submittals e. Continuously inspect the following: 1) Welding of reinforcing bars 2) Grout placement 3) Observation of any required grout specimens, mortar specimens, or prisms B. Owner's inspector will periodically inspect construction of masonry work reinforced with deformed reinforcing bars for compliance with contract documents. Periodic inspections to occur at the start of laying units, after the placement of reinforcing steel, grout space prior to grouting, and during all grouting operations. C. Inspector will furnish inspection reports to the building official, CPR, and Project Representative. D. Inspector will immediately report deficiencies to Contractor and CPR. E. Contractor shall correct deficiencies and obtain approval of inspector and CPR. F. Inspector will submit a final report within one week of completion of masonry work, stating compliance with contract documents. Deficiencies observed during construction shall be noted, along with corrective measures taken. 3.9 MASONRY UNIT SCHEDULE A. Masonry unit designations as indicated on Drawings are as follows: 1. CMU -1: Smooth Faced. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 lir TARGET SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Stud Framing, anchorage and bracing. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; for metal supports and hangers. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; for wood blocking and plywood sheathing. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems; for interior non -load bearing drywall framing systems and exterior gypsum sheathing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, ". B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653/A 653/M: "Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process ". 2. ASTM A 780: "Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings ". 3. ASTM A 1003 /A 1003M -02a: Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic- Coated for Cold- Formed Framing Members. 4. ASTM C 955: "Specification for Load - Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. C. D. PART 1 - GENERAL American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS DI.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel ". Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA): 1. Product Technical Information — ICBO ER4943P. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Test Reports: Owner will submit as specified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold - formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold - formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PART2- PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Steel Joists, Studs, Runners, and Accessories: 1. Clark Steel Framing Industries. 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 3. Marino \Ware; A Division of Ware Industries 4. The Steel Network, Inc. 5. Comparable products from other SSMA members that comply with specified requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H; yield strength of not less than 33,000 ksi. 2. Coating: G60; Galvanized coating weight. B. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955. 1. Web depth, minimum base metal thickness, flange width and maximum spacing as indicated on Drawings. C. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955. 1. Web depth, and flange width as indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum base metal thickness of track not less than thickness of studs or joists. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel- framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003 /A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as required for complete installation: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips: standard 2" x 2 ", 68 mil. steel, pre - punched, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Gusset plates. 6. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 7. Joist hangers and end closures. 8. Hole reinforcing plates. 9. Backer plates. 10. Slide Clips: 1 -3/4" x 2 -1/4" minimum; not less than 54 mil. steel; lateral capacity 600 pounds minimum. 2.4 ANCHORS, CLIPS AND FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners necessary for complete installation as recommended by manufacturer, including the following: 1. Structural Steel to Clip Angle and Runners: 1 -1/4" Buildex type 12 -24 HWH, TEKS /5 screws. 2. Clip Angle Supports, Joist to Runner, and Runner to Studs: 5/8" Buildex type 8 -18 HWH, TEKS /3 screws. 3. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion- resistant- coated, self - drilling, self - threading steel drill screws. a. Head Type: Low - profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 4. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional fastener and weld requirements. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 780. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and Products: a. Norfolk: "ZRC ". b. Welco: "Cold Galv". B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 TARGET C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cold - formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Fabricate cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Welded connections are permitted only where indicated on Drawings or with written approval of OSR, and upon Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings indicating welding requirements. 1) Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold - formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. TARGET D. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Square: Fabricate each cold - formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out -of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch. 3.2 PREPARATION i 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install cold - formed metal framing according to AISI "Standard for Cold - Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install shop or field- fabricated, cold - formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true - to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. P01 RIGHTSIZE T C. Install cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Welded connections are permitted only where indicated on Drawings or with written approval of OSR, and upon Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings indicating welding requirements. 1) Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. D. Install framing members in one -piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold - formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. G. Furnish and install insulation of type shown on Drawings and specified in Section 07200 in locations not accessible after fabrication. H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold - formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 LOAD - BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacing as indicated on Structural Drawings and approved Shop Drawings. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated on Structural Drawings and approved Shop Drawings. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non - plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall - framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full- height wall studs. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4 TARGET 1 H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated on Drawings. Fasten at each stud intersection. Provide one or more of the following bridging types as indicated or required. 1. Bridging: Cold - rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip - angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall - framing system. TARGET 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After erection of cold formed metal framing and before enclosure, Owner's testing and inspection agency will visually inspect the work for conformance with Contract Documents. Connections and welds will be inspected for type, size, quantity, and quality. B. Deficiencies found during inspection will be brought to attention of OSR, Architect and Contractor. C. Remove and replace work where test results indicate, does not comply with specified requirements. Corrective procedures for deficiencies to be demonstrated to the satisfaction of OSR and testing agency before erection of framing is resumed. D. When erection of framing is completed, but before placing finish or insulation materials, testing agency will make a final inspection of installation and submit a final report to OSR and Architect as soon as Work is in accordance with Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Immediately after erection prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold - formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection to installed components subject to damage from construction activities. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 6 DESIGNATOR SYSTEM MATRIX FOR COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING WEB DEPTH 250 350 362 400 550 600 800 1000 1200 2 -1/2" 3-1/2" 3 -5/8" 4" 5-1/2" 6 " 8 " 10" 12" S T U F Stud/ Joist Track Channel Furring FLANGE W DTH 137 162 200 250 300 350 1 -3/8" 1 -5/8" 2" 2 -1/2" 3 " 3-1/2" MIN METAL THICKNESS 33 43 54 68 97 118 0.0329" 0.0428" 0.0538" 0.0677" 0.0966" 0.1180" GAUGE REF 20 18 16 14 12 10 END OF SECTION TARGET 3.7 PRODUCT DESIGNATOR SYSTEM A. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA), representing many metal framing manufacturers, has adopted a common designator system that combines the depth, shape, width, and steel thickness, in that order, of a framing section into a single expression. This system has been incorporated into the Drawings and Specifications to align more closely with industry standards. B. The following matrix has been compiled to aid in understanding of this designator system and to allow for a direct reference to the traditional "gauge" indicators. 1. Framing dimensions have been designated by inches and fractions of an inch in 0.001 -inch increments. References to and use of the term gauge have been replaced with a figure based on the minimum base -metal steel thickness in mils or 1 /1000 of an inch. 2. Shape of the framing member has been identified by a letter character: S for stud and joist sections that have flange stiffeners or lips, T for track sections without lips, U for channel studs without lips and for cold - rolled channel, and F for furring channel. Other shapes may be added with other letter characters. Some common industry designators include FS for flat strap, L for angle, and PL for plate. 3. Example: A typical framing section can be identified by 600S162 - 33 designating a stud or joist with a web depth of 6 inches, a flange width of 1 - 5/8 inches, and a minimum base -metal steel thickness of 0.0329 inch, comparable to the traditional 20 gauge stud. 4 1 A. Section Includes: Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized or prime painted, including but not limited to the following: 1. Structural framing for roof openings. 2. Steel supports and hangers at bulkheads. 3. Steel pipe bollards. 4. Steel framework at openings. 5. Fasteners necessary for connection of metal fabrications. 6. Other items of miscellaneous iron and steel indicated on Drawings, not indicated on Structural Drawings, and not specified under other Sections. Di TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 1.2 RELATED ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section 03350 - Concrete Repair Work; for installation of metal fabrication items embedded in concrete. B. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing; for entry soffit. C. Section 09900 - Painting; for field painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," with Commentary. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. AISI, "Stainless Steel Sheet Finishes ". C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A36, "Spec for Structural Steel ". 2. ASTM A53, "Spec for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated Welded and Seamless ". 3. ASTM A167, "Spec for Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip ". 4. ASTM A312, "Spec for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe ". 5. ASTM A496, "Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement ". D. E. F. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit for approval. 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: New, of best commercial quality for purpose intended, and free from defects impairing strength, durability, and appearance. 2.2 STEEL A. Steel Components: steel for miscellaneous structural framing and non - structural purposes as follows: 1. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. 2. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53. Provide standard weight (Schedule 40), black fmish except where galvanizing is specified, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Checkered Steel Floor Plates: FS QQ-F-461C(1), Class 1. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL A. Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP 304. Provide standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. B. C. D. P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 6. ASTM A1011, "Steel, Sheet, Hot - Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low - Alloy and High - Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM B32, "Spec for Solder Metal ". American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code ". Federal Specification (FS): 1. FS QQ- F -461C, "Floor Plate, Steel, Rolled ". National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Stairs Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Plate: ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 60A. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors, Clips, Brackets, and Accessories: Provide as necessary for erection of work and attachment of work of other trades. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type material and finish as supported members, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fasteners: Bolts, nuts, washers and other fasteners conforming to appropriate Federal Specifications, of type, grade, and class required. Comply with ASTM A307 for bolts 1/2" diameter or larger. Provide zinc- coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. D. Expansion Anchors: Expansion Anchors: 1. "Kwik Bolts" as manufactured by Hilti; ICBO RR #2156. 2. "Trubolt" wedge anchors as manufactured by ITW Ramset/Redhead; ICBO #1372. 3. "Wedge -All" wedge anchor as manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie, ICBO #3631. 4. "Power- Bolt" as manufactured Powers/RAWL; ICBO #5225. E. Deformed Bar Concrete/Masonry Anchors: Nelson "D2L Deformed Bar Anchors" or comparable product conforming to ASTM A496 Low Carbon Steel. F. G. Cold Galvanizing: 1. Norfolk "ZRC ". 2. Welco "Cold Galv". Grout: Non - metallic, non - shrink. 1. Conspec: "Enduro 50 Grout ". 2. Euclid: "Euco N -S Grout ". 3. L & M: "Duragrout ". 4. Master Builders: "Masterflow 830 Grout ". 5. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout ". 6. Industrial Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout ". 7. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi -Vex Grout #1000. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint -12, compounded for 30 -mil thickness. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 TARGET 2.5 FABRICATION A. Design and fabricate structural members according to AISC and AWS references. Weld or bolt shop connections. Bolt field connections unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal fabrications in finished spaces shall be considered ornamental metal. Metal shall be smooth and free of surface blemishes including roughness, pitting, roller and seam marks, and rolled trade names. C. Provide members with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles. D. After shearing and punching, leave clean, true lines and surfaces. E. Detail joints to maintain strength and rigidity of adjoining members. Generally, weld shop joints using concealed welds where possible. Locate exposed welds in least conspicuous place, and weld continuously. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. F. Bolt shop connections, where detailed, and field connections using bolts or machine screws of adequate size. Use countersunk, Phillips, flat, or oval- headed machine screws for exposed bolted connections in finished spaces. G. Provide neat, hairline joints with matching surfaces at exposed joints. H. Shop assemble work ready for erection insofar as possible. Where field joints are required, completely shop assemble work to assure accurate fit and then disassemble for shipment. 2.6 REINFORCING A. Provide as required at connections, hardware locations, and as necessary to make sections rigid and substantial. Perform mortising, drilling, punching and tapping required for attachment of hardware or attachment to other work. 2.7 WELDING A. Comply with appropriate AWS references. TARGET B. Weld behind finished surfaces to minimize distortion and discoloration on finished side. Remove weld splatter and welding oxides from finished surfaces by descaling and grinding. Grind and polish weld beads on exposed surfaces to match and blend with finish on adjacent parent metal. 2.8 FINISH A. Galvanized Steel: Shop applied cold galvanized after fabrication. Apply in conformance with manufacturer's directions for intended use. B. Shop Primed Steel: Shop prime steel items not indicated to be galvanized. Remove loose mill scale and rust from structural steel, and remove mill scale and rust from ornamental metal. Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease, dirt and other foreign material, and apply one shop coat of rust- inhibitive primer containing at least 50% rust- inhibitive pigments. Carefully apply paint to provide smooth and even surface. C. Stainless Steel: AISI No. 6 finish ( dull satin, directional polish). 2.9 STEEL SUPPORT SYSTEM A. Framing Material: Formed steel channels, ASTM A1011, Grade 33. 1. Unistrut: 1 -1/4 inch Framing System, No. A 1000. 2. Unistrut: 1 -5/8 inch Framing System, No. P3000. 3. Provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices which are incidental to or necessary for a secure and complete installation. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1 Unistrut Corporation. 2. Comparable products of the following manufacturers: a. B -Line System, Inc. b. Allied Support Systems Power Strut. 3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS A. PART 3 - EXECUTION Install metal fabrications using skilled mechanics experienced in erection of ornamental metal. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Erect work plumb, true, square, and securely attached to supporting construction. Field joints shall be neat, hairline joints with adjoining surfaces in alignment. Completed installation shall be secure and rigid with sufficient strength to support loads. C. Frames for equipment mounted on roof or hung from joists shall impart loads to joists at top chord panel points only, unless indicated otherwise. D. Protect aluminum in contact with steel metal fabrications from galvanic and corrosive action with bituminous coating applied prior to erection. E. F. Coordinate erection of entry soffit supports and hangers with erection of cold formed metal framing. Immediately after erection, clean welds, scratches and other abraded spots and touch up with the same paint used for the prime coat. Touch up galvanized surfaces with cold galvanizing. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensioned lumber, plywood and accessories. 2. Fire Retardant treatment of all wood members where required. 3. Preservative treatment of wood as required. 4. Dust proof enclosures. 5. Mechanical equipment wood curbs. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Division 16 - Electrical equipment mounting panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Plywood Association, (APA). B. American Wood Preservers' Association, (AWPA): 1. AWPA C2, "Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process ". 2. AWPA C9, "Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process ". C. National Fire Protection Association, (NEPA): 1. NFPA, "Manual for House Framing - WCD #1 ". D. Product Standard of NBS, (PS): 1. PS 1, "U. S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood ". 2. PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard ". E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL): 1. UL, "Building Materials Directory". 2.1 LUMBER SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL PART 2- PRODUCTS A. General: Conform to requirements of PS20. Provide lumber bearing grade and trade mark of appropriate grading association. Provide new, sound, and thoroughly seasoned lumber. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Moisture Content: Do not exceed 19% moisture content of dimension lumber at time of installation. Do not exceed 14% moisture content of fmish lumber. Dress lumber S4S, unless otherwise specified. C. Grades and Species: 1. Non -Load Bearing Studs: Stud grade, Douglas Fir- larch, Hem -fir, Western Hemlock or Southern Pine. 2. Miscellaneous Blocking, Nailers, and Framing Lumber: Standard Light Framing grade, Douglas Fir - larch, Hem -fir, Western Hemlock or Southern Pine. 3. Boards: No.2 Common Ponderosa Pine, Sugar Pine or Idaho White Pine. 4. Mechanical Equipment Wood Curbs: Douglas Fir Fb 1500 Minimum. 2.2 PLYWOOD AND SHEATHING A. General: Conform to requirements of PS 1. Provide panels bearing appropriate APA grade and trade mark. Provide exterior grade plywood where any face or edge is permanently exposed to the weather. B. Grades, Types, and Thickness: unless otherwise indicated. 1. Roof Blocking: APA C -D, Group 2, Exposure 1, thickness as required. 2. Interior Partition Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, C -D, Exposure 1, 24/0, Minimum 1/2" thick. 3. Roof Sheathing: APA rated Structural 1 sheathing, EXP -1, span index of 32/16. a. Thickness: 23/32 or 3/4 inch depending upon availability. b. Edge detail: Standard square edges. 2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. KC Metals (ICBO #2894). 2. Silver Metal Products (ICBO #2039). 3. Simpson Company (ICBO #1258). 4. Union Steel Connectors (ICBO # 1540, 3969). 5. USP Lumber Connectors. 6. Substitutions: Submit product literature under provisions of Section 01600. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Provide hangers and other connectors, and accessories of proper size, type and strength for intended use and material to be fastened, as indicated on Drawings. Drawing indications reference Simpson Co. products. Use non - corrosive, non - staining rough hardware for exterior applications. C. Provide anchor bolts, headed bolts and strap anchors as indicated on Drawings or otherwise required to attach wood members to masonry and concrete. Deliver anchor bolts to site promptly to be built in as work progresses. D. Unless noted otherwise, provide anchor bolts 3/8" in diameter minimum, threaded one end with 1-1/2" right angle bend opposite end. Extend horizontal bolts 6" minimum into concrete and masonry. Extend vertical bolts 6" minimum into concrete and 16" minimum into masonry. E. Expansion Anchors: 1. "Kwik Bolts" as manufactured by Hilti; ICBO RR#2156. 2. "Trubolt" wedge anchors as manufactured by ITW RamsetlRedhead; ICBO #1372. 3. "Wedge -All" wedge anchor as manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie, ICBO #3631. 4. "Power -Bolt" as manufactured Powers/RAWL; ICBO #5225. F. Injection Adhesive Anchors: 1. Hilti, "HIT HY20 Injection Adhesive Anchors ". 2. Simpson Strong -Tie: "Epoxy -Tie Adhesive (ET) ". 3. Powers/Rawl, "Chem -Fast Anchor System ". 4. ITW Ramset/Redhead Epcon system, C6 epoxy or approved equal. G. Concrete Screws: tapered flathead. 1. Hilti "Kwik -Con II" fasteners. 2. Simpson Stron -Tie "Titer" screw anchors. 3. Powers/RAWL "Tapper" anchoring system. 4. ITW Ramset/Redhead "Tapcon" anchors. 2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: Pressure impregnate lumber in the following locations with a waterborne preservative in accordance with AWPA Standard C2. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 TARGET 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no Arsenic or Chromium. 2. Dry lumber to moisture content of not more than 19% after treatment. B. Fasteners and Hardware: Due to the corrosive nature of the preservative treatment, provide stainless steel fasteners and hardware that are in contact with treated wood. C. Application: Treat items as indicated on Drawings and as follows. 1. Lumber used for nailers, and other locations in contact with roofing. 2. Lumber used for blocking at openings in exterior walls. 3. Lumber used for plates and ledgers in contact with concrete or masonry. 2.5 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT A. Provide pressure impregnated lumber and plywood bearing a UL label indicating fire hazard classification(smoke contribution and flame spread) of 25 or less, or "FR -S" Classification. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. CSI "D- BLAZE ". 2. Hickson "Dricon ". 3. Hoover "Pyro-guard ". C. Kiln dry after treatment lumber and plywood exposed to view in finished work to a moisture content of not more than 12 %. Dry other lumber and plywood after treatment to a moisture content of not more than 19 %. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware Cloth: 1/2 inch mesh galvanized, standard commercial product. B. Dust and Vapor Barrier: Reinforced flame retardant polyethylene sheets, 6 mil minimum thickness. C. Polypropylene Tape: Flame retardant self - adhering type, 2" wide. TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 3.2 FRAMING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Accurately construct work square, true, to required levels and line, and adequately ■+ fastened and anchored to produce a rigid system of sufficient strength to support loads. Conform to N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing" as a minimum standard of construction and assembly, unless otherwise indicated. Conform to APA recommendations for plywood application, unless otherwise indicated. B. Conform to APA recommendations for plywood application, unless otherwise indicated. A. Space framing members 24" on center, unless otherwise indicated. Cut framing members accurately with full, square bearing surfaces. Fit members neatly and set plumb to required lines and levels. Do not shim bearing surfaces. Fasten members securely in place at bearings and connections. Conform to the following minimum requirements unless otherwise indicated: 1. Double studs at openings. 2. Single sole plates and double top plates. 3. Double 2 by 4 headers set on edge for openings less than three feet wide, and double 2 by 6 headers for openings from three feet to four feet wide. 4. Space framing, at walls to receive merchandising fixturing, to provide proper support for fixturing inserts. 5. Where framing extends to roof structure above, allow for roof deflection. 3.3 PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. Sheathing: Install sheathing with face grain perpendicular to supports. End joints shall occur over supports. Stagger end joints between adjacent panels. Leave 1/8 inch wide space between panel edges and 1/4 inch wide space between panel ends. Screws spaced 6 inches on center at panel edges and 12 inches on center at intermediate supports. 3.4 BLOCKING A. Install treated wood blocking, bucks, nailers and similar items securely to receive intended work. Shim blocking as necessary to provide a true and level surface. B. Install treated wood curbs and blocking at roof, and other work in conjunction with roofing and sheet metal, to meet approval of roofmg and sheet metal installers. C. Space blocking and furring, at walls to receive merchandising fixturing, to provide proper support. D. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 HARDWARE CLOTH PARTITIONS A. Cover studs with hardware cloth. Locate joints in hardware cloth over studs and horizontal blocking and attach to studs and blocking 6" on center using screws with washers. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Cover wood curbs and blocking with a temporary waterproof covering securely fixed in place. Maintain coverings until permanent flashing is installed. 3.7 DUST PROOF ENCLOSURES A. Cover wood studs with reinforced flame retardant polyethylene sheets. Locate joints in polyethylene sheets over studs, and horizontal blocking and attach to studs and blocking with staples at 6" on center. Lap joints 6" and seal with tape. Seal perimeter of dust proof enclosures to adjacent existing construction with tape. Maintain dust proof enclosure in sound condition during construction and remove when no longer required. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 r TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Board insulation under freezer floors. 2. Board insulation, furring and vapor barrier at exterior wall. 3. Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall construction. 4. Batt insulation for filling crevices in exterior wall. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 03350 - Concrete Repair Work: no concrete topping slab at freezer floors. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; for wood blocking. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board; for metal furring components and installation of acoustic insulation, (INSUL -6). imo D. Division 15 - Mechanical system insulation. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. For all insulation types except INSUL -2 and INSUL-3 Polystyrene Board Insulation, comply with applicable codes for Class I (Class A) flame /smoke ratings of 25 or less /450 or less for insulation types when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM C578, "Spec for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation ". 2. ASTM C612, "Spec for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation ". 3. ASTM C665, "Spec for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing ". 4. ASTM E84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 (INSUL -1) NOT USED 2.2 (INSUL -2) EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded Polystyrene: Extruded polystyrene insulation boards conforming to ASTM C578, Type IV, 1.6 pcf density min., 25 psi compressive strength min., k -value of 0.20, water absorption 0.3% max., water vapor transmission 1.1 perm -inch max.; square edge. 1. Diversifoam Products "Certifoam ". 2. Dow Chemical "Styrofoam ". 3. Owens Corning: "Foamular 250 ". 2.3 (INSUL -3) NOT USED 2.4 (INSUL -4) NOT USED 2.5 (INSUL -5) NOT USED 2.6 (INSUL -6) NOT USED 2.7 (INSUL -7) GLASS FIBER BOARD INSULATION A. Fiberglass Board Insulation: ASTM C612, Class 1, semi -rigid glass fiber type; density of 2.25 pcf, faced one side with mesh reinforced aluminum foil; square edges. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville: Insul Shield Semi -rigid Board, I/S 225 FSK. 2. Owens - Corning, CW -225 FRK Insulation. C. Fiberglass Board Insulation: ASTM C612, Class I, semi -rigid glass fiber type; density of 2.25 pcf, square edges. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville: Insul Shield Semi -rigid Board, I/S 225. 2. Owens - Corning, CW-225 Insulation. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 1. Flame Spread: 25. 2. Smoke Developed: 50. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Barrier: 1. Walls: Flame retardant polyethylene sheets, four (4) mil minimum thickness. INSULATION 07200 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2. Freezer Floor: Ten (10) mil thick, decay resistant, clear polyethylene sheet, type recommended for below grade application. B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturers. C. Polypropylene Tape: Flame retardant self - adhering type, 2" wide. D. Foil Tape: Flame retardant pressure- sensitive type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application, 2" wide minimum. E. Fasteners: As recommended my manufacturer of specified item. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide thickness of insulation and related materials to meet required R values and installation requirements. 3.2 FREEZER FLOOR INSULATION A. Place poly vapor barrier over entire concrete freezer subfloor. Use largest sheets possible to eliminate joints. Lap joints 12 inches min. Run up vertical surfaces and continue onto slab a minimum of two feet. Secure in place. Trim off excess when freezer wall panels are in place. B. Install (INSUL -2) extruded polystyrene freezer floor insulation in 2 lay ers, staggering second layer joint with first layer joints. Butt pieces snug to each other and against perimeter of slab recess. C. Install treated wood thermal break strip directly beneath freezer wall around entire perimeter of freezer. D. Follow immediately after installation of insulation and thermal break with installation of concrete topping slab. 3.6 GLASS FIBER BOARD INSULATION A. Install (INSUL -7) glass fiber board insulation at exterior walls where scheduled on the Drawings. Install using mechanical fasteners. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions for mechanical fastener pattern and spacing. 1. Provide 1-1/2" thickness. INSULATION 07200 - 2 B. Install with vapor barrier facing toward warm side (heating season). Repair punctures in facing with foil tape. Seal edges and butt joints with tape to provide continuous vapor barrier. 3.7 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION END OF SECTION TARGET r1 A. Install vapor barrier on warm side (winter season) of insulation applied to exterior walls beneath gypsum board. Vapor barrier in locations not covered by gypsum board is part of insulation specified. B. Seal edges, joints, punctures and tears with polypropylene or foil tape. TARGET SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous sheetmetal items. 2. Flashing reglets. 3. Installation of joint sealants. 4. Miscellaneous flashing work not specified as work of other sections. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealing; for sealant product specifications. B. Section 09900 - Painting. C. Division 15 - Mechanical; for frost proof jackets for plumbing vents and other roof penetrations. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Construction Manual: Aluminum Sheet Metal Work and Building Construction ". B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM A526, "Spec for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality". 2. ASTM B32, "Spec for Solder Metal ". 3. ASTM B209, "Spec for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate ". 4. ASTM D4586, "Spec for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos - Free ". C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, (SMACNA): 1. SMACNA, "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GALVANIZED STEEL A. Phosphatized, galvanized, copper bearing steel sheet conforming to ASTM A526, Coating Class G90. B. Fasteners: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers at exposed locations. 2.2 ALUMINUM A. B. ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, temper H14, thickness as indicated on Drawings. Finish: Mill unless otherwise indicated. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 Fasteners: Non - corrosive, compatible with flashing and substrate, with soft neoprene washers at exposed locations. 2.3 BITUMINOUS PLASTIC CEMENT A. Conform to ASTM D4586. Verify compatibility with roofmg membrane. 2.4 SOLDER A. 50% lead - 50% tin solder conforming to ASTM B32; commercial soldering flux. 2.5 PLASTIC UNDERLAYMENT A. Plastic Underlayment: 20 mil. thick, polyvinyl chloride sheeting. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AFCO "V- Seal ". 2. Nervastral Inc., "Nervastral HD ". 3. Sandell "Nu -flex PVC Flashing." 4. Sonneborn, "Hydrocide VinylSeal ". 5. York Manufacturing, "Wascoseal" Type 20. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Sealants; specified in Section 07900. 2.7 GAUGES OF SHEET METAL A. As indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated, use galvanized iron of minimum gauges as follows: 1. Fascias, coping, and roof flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" or less: 24 gauge. 2. Fascias, coping, and roof flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" to 10 ": 22 gauge. 3. Fascias, coping, and roof flashing with an exposed vertical face of 10" to 15 ": 20 gauge. 4. Hook strips and keepers: 22 gauge. 5. Other sheet metal work: 24 gauge. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2.8 FABRICATION A. Accurately form flashing work with brakes, straight, true, and sharp, free from waves and buckles. Match profiles at connections. Bead or return exposed edges for strength and appearance. Provide ribs, cleats, and reinforcement necessary to make sections rigid and substantial. Allow for expansion and contraction. B. Overlap seams in direction of flow with fmished width of lock seams and soldered lap seams not less than 1", and fmished width of unsoldered lap seams not less than 3 ". Do not lock seam aluminum flashing. C. Generally provide shop joints single locked and soldered, or lapped, riveted and soldered; and field joints designed to permit expansion. At field joints provide joint covers or lapped joints with "S" clips, and do not solder. D. Provide shop formed corner pieces. When exposed to view, provide locked and soldered external corners. Where appearance is not a factor, internal corners and external corners may be lapped, riveted and soldered. Locate field joints not less than one foot nor more than three feet from actual corner. Shortest length dimension of any corner piece leg shall not be less than one foot. E. Provide miscellaneous items of sheet metal work indicated on Drawings and not specified under other Sections. Fabricate as indicated. Where specific details are not shown, fabricate according to SMACNA" Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and AA "Aluminum Construction Manual." 2.9 SOLDERING A. Pre -tin edges of sheet metal to be soldered with solder on both sides. Width of pre - tinning to be not less than 1 -1/2 ". B. Solder slowly with well heated coppers. Thoroughly heat sheets and completely sweat solder through full width of seam. Use ample solder to provide seams which show not less than 1" of evenly flowed solder. Wherever possible solder work in a flat position. Solder seams with a slope greater than 45 deg a second time. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600 - 2 3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with roofmg and other trades. Furnish metal flashings and other work required to be built into roofmg and flashing promptly, so roofing operations may be performed continuously to completion without delay. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sheet metal work neatly and securely anchor in place. Anchor work and form joints properly to permit expansion and contraction. Overlap seams in direction of flow and slope horizontal surfaces for drainage. Finished work shall be water and weathertight. B. Install expansion joint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not place dissimilar metals in contact or in position where drainage will occur across them. 3.3 PLASTIC UNDERLAYMENT A. Install at expansion joints and where indicated on Drawings. 3.4 SEALANT PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION TARGET ti tr A. Seal coping and flashing with specified sealant as indicated on Drawings. Clean and prime surfaces and install sealant according to sealant manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of Section 07900. t TARGET W 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 REFERENCES 1.4 SUBMITTALS SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL Section Includes: 1. Cleaning and preparation of joint surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing materials. A. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures, dealing with existing roofmg; for sealant directly related to alterations to existing roofmg system B. Section 03350 - Concrete Repair Work; for joint fillers for concrete slabs -on- grade. C. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim; for installation related to sheet metal r flashing and trim. D. Section 09950 - Wall Covering; for installation of silicone sanitary SLNT -4. E. Division 15 - Mechanical; for: 1. Installation of silicone sanitary SLNT -4 between plumbing fixtures and walls. 2. Sealant and caulking of mechanical sleeves and piping above and below grade. F. Division 16 - Electrical; for sealant directly related to electrical work. A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM C834, "Spec for Latex Sealing Compounds ". 2. ASTM C920, "Spec for Elastomeric Sealants ". 3. ASTM C1193, "Guide for Use of Joint Sealants ". A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit sealant manufacturer's technical data. Include manufacturer's recommendations for joint size; joint preparation; back -up material; sealant storage, mixing and application instructions; and specific instructions for use of primer on this Project. C. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 Samples: Submit color samples of sealants exposed in finished work for approval. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply joint sealing materials at temperatures above or below manufacturer's recommendations, during rain or snow, or to damp or frosted surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 (SLNT -1) POLYURETHANE SEALANT A. Contractor Option: Contractor has the option to provide a one part or a two part polyurethane sealant, both items specified below: B. Two-part Polyurethane Sealant: Non -sag urethane sealant with movement capability of +/- 25 percent and conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Pecora Corporation: Dynatrol II. 2. Sonneborn: "Sonolastic NP2 ". 3. Tremco: Dymeric 240 - 240 -FC (Class 50). 4. Tremco: Vulkem 227. C. One -part Polyurethane Sealant: Non -sag urethane sealant with movement capability of +/- 25 percent and conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Pecora Corporation: Dynatrol I -XL. 2. Sonneborn: Sonolastic NP 1. 3. Tremco: DyMonic. 4. Tremco: Vulkem 116. D. Color: Custom color to match color of adjacent finish material. If adjacent materials are two different colors, verify color match with Owner's Project Architect. 2.2 (SLNT -2) SELF - LEVELING POLYURETHANE A. Two-part Polyurethane Sealant: Self- leveling with +/- 25 percent maximum movement capability and conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. 1. Pecora Corporation. Urexpan NR -200. 2. Sonneborn: Sonolastic SL2. 3. Tremco, THC 900 -901. 4. Tremco: Vulkem 245. B. Color: Custom color to match color of adjacent finish material if necessary. Provide manufacturer's standard gray on natural concrete floor and sidewalk. JOINT SEALANTS 07900 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2.3 (SLNT -3) NOT USED 2.4 (SLNT -4) SILICONE SANITARY A. Silicone Rubber Sanitary Sealant: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Dow Corning Corporation: 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant. 2. General Electric Company. GE Silicone Sanitary 1700 Sealant. 3. Sonneborn:Omniplus. 4. Tremco: Tremsil 200. 2.5 (SLNT -5) SILICONE BUILDING AND GLAZING SEALANT A. Silicone Rubber Sealant: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Dow Corning Corp.: 999 -A. 2. General Electric: SCS 1200. B. Color: Clear. 2.6 (SLNT -7) POLYURETHANE SEALANT — OWNER FURNISHED A. Polyurethane Roofing Sealant: One - part polyurethane sealant with movement capability of +/- 25 percent and conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Sonneborn: Sonolastic NP1. 2.7 PRIMER A. As recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use, including environmental and other conditions affecting bond of sealant. 2.8 JOINT BACKING A. Backer Rod: Pre - formed, compressible, non - staining, closed cell polyethylene or open cell expanded polyurethane foam rod compatible with the sealant used and acceptable by the sealant manufacturer for the specific application, except as follows: 1. Provide closed cell backer rod with self - leveling sealant SLNT -2 horizontal applications. B. Provide round rod, size as recommended by manufacturer based on width and depth of joint and condition located. 1. Joints up to 1/2" wide, rod shall equal width of joint plus 1/8 ". JOINT SEALANTS 07900 - 2 2. Joints 1/2" wide and larger, rod shall be equal to the joint width plus 1/4 ". 3. Provide bond breaker tape where joint depth does not allow space for backer rod as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. C. Do not use joint backing impregnated with oil, tar, or asphalt. 2.9 SOLVENTS AND CLEANING AGENTS A. As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.10 MIXING A. Prepare and mix caulking materials and sealants according to manufacturer's instructions. Do not thin or adulterate materials. 2.11 WORKING TIME TARGET A. Use two-component sealants within maximum period of time after mixing recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific material and job conditions, and discard sealant not used within this time. 3.1 PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Prior to caulking or sealing surfaces shall be sound, thoroughly dry, clean and free of oil, grease, laitance, rust and other foreign material that would prevent proper adhesion. Concrete and mortar shall be thoroughly cured. B. Complete masonry cleaning and similar operations before surface preparation is begun. C. Clean and prepare joints and surfaces to receive sealants according to sealant manufacturer's instructions. D. Rake and clean out joints to full depth and width. E. Clean concrete, masonry and other porous materials by brushing, grinding, sand blasting or other mechanical means as necessary to provide a sound, clean surface. Remove dust, dirt and loose particles resulting from mechanical cleaning by vacuuming joints or blowing out joints with compressed air. 4 1 • TARGET F. Clean glass, metal and other non - porous surfaces. Remove protective coatings on metal using a solvent that leaves no residue. Use clean white cloths or Tintless paper towels to apply solvent, and wipe surfaces dry with dry cloths or paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. G. Mask joints as necessary to protect adjacent surfaces and to assure clean, sharp line along the joint. Apply masking tape in continuous strips and carefully align with edge of joint. Remove masking immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled. 3.2 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Install joint backing according to manufacturer's instructions in joints to receive sealant and as indicated on Drawings. Use proper size and shape pieces so installed joint backing is compressed approximately 30% and face of foam is at required depth. Do not twist or braid rod stock. Do not puncture skin of rod stock. Carefully roll rod stock into joint without stretching. Prime surfaces according to sealant manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply sealant according to manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Gun -apply sealant unless otherwise noted, using a nozzle of sufficient size to fill joint completely. Caulk wide joints with three passes. Run a bead at each inside corner, and fill joint with a third pass. Tool joints immediately after application of material to insure full contact with adjacent surfaces. Strike off excess material. Provide finished bead flush with adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded material, ridges, and sags. Remove masking, excess material and smears as the work progresses, and leave adjacent surfaces clean and free of sealant and primer. Make joints watertight. P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -4 A. Use SLNT -4 where indicated on Drawings, and for joints at counters, fixtures, equipment and walls in toilet rooms, and food storage, preparation, serving and seating areas requiring sanitary sealant. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -5 A. Use SLNT -5 where indicated on Drawings, and for interior and exterior sealing of metal to metal, including flues, vents, pipes which reach temperatures up to 300 deg F. B. Refer to Section 08800 for installation requirements in glazing. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -7 A. Owner Furnished Roofing Sealant: Refer to Section 07500. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS 07900 - 3 TARGET SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -rated and fire rated steel doors, and frames. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section 04201 - Unit Masonry; for grouting of frames in masonry walls. B. Section 08700 - Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Painting; for field painting, primer and finish. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI /SDI A250.6: Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.8: Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3. ANSI /SDI- A250.11: "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames ". B. American Society for Testing Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 153: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A 653: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 3. ASTM A 1008: Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold- Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low -Alloy and High - Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. 4. ASTM C 476: Specification for Grout for Masonry. C. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 105: Installation of Smoke - Control Door Assemblies (ANSI). D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. A. Comply with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for approval, details of field splices and anchorage. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Fabricate doors and frames to comply with requirements of ANSI A250.8. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Construct fire rated doors and frames according to requirements of UL 10B. Each fire rated door and frame shall bear the appropriate UL labels. B. Fire - Rated Door Assemblies: Comply with positive pressure requirements of UL 10C and NFPA 105. Door assemblies shall bear the UL Label and supplemental "S" positive pressure fire label. C. Provide completed installation to maintain required fire rating of opening. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable manufacturers for Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products. 3. Curries Company. 4. The Kewanee Corporation. 5. Mesker Door, Inc. 6. Republic Builders Products, Inc. 7. Ingersoll -Rand; Steelcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Metallic - Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A60 zinc - iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating designation. B. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 C. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153. E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches. F. Glazing: as specified under Section 08800 — Glazing. 2.3 STEEL FRAMES A. General: Comply with requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricate frames from metallic- coated steel sheet assembled with a mechanical interlock joint, face miter seam "closed and tight ". Weld face seam and full web of frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area. 1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge, (0.067 inch). 2. Material and Finish: Zinc - alloy -iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900. 3. Galvanize internal members and reinforcements. C. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical interlock joint, face miter seam "closed and tight ". Weld face seam of frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area. 1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge, (0.067 inch). 2. Finish: Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900. D. Factory assemble frames in largest sections possible. E. Finished work to be smooth and free from warps and buckles. F. Glazing Stops: Construct removable glazing stops of 16 gauge steel. Factory fit and install stops. Form neat hairline joints. Install stops using screws not over 16" on center with at least two screws per piece. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 TARGET G. Silencers: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 3 at single door strike jambs, 2 at head of pair doors, with mechanical attachment. H. Provide floor clips for frames. Provide jamb anchors spaced not over 30" on center for frames. Furnish temporary spreader bars and bracing. 2.4 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level II, Heavy Duty, Model 1, Full Flush Door. 1. Fabricate with watertight top closure and construct to receive weatherstripping as specified under Section 08700. 2. Material and Finish: Zinc - alloy -iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900. 3. Size: 3' -8" x 7' -0" x 1 -3/4 ". 4. Core: Impregnated kraft honeycomb core. 5. Core: Polyurethane. 6. Face Sheet Thickness: 18 gauge, (0.042 inch). 7. Type V Visionlite, Wire Glass. 8. Rating: 90 min. Fire Rating. B. Interior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level II, Heavy Duty, Model 1, Full Flush Doors. 1. Material and Finish: Cold rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900. 2. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inch. 3. Core: Impregnated kraft honeycomb core. 4. Face Sheet: 18 gauge, (0.042 inch). C. Glazing Stops: Provide for glazed interior lites as indicated on Drawings complying with SDI vision panel designations V, N and G. Construct glazing stops of not less than 18 gauge steel. Fit and install stops in the factory. Form neat hairline joints. 1. Provide frame and stop glazing system for fire rated doors to comply with requirements of UL 10C. ims TARGET 2.5 PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE A. Factory prepare doors and frames for templated hardware specified under Section 08700 - Hardware. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for non - templated mortised hardware, and reinforce for surface applied hardware. Mortise to hairline accuracy with no oversized punching. B. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 for door and frame preparation for hardware. C. Reinforce doors and frames with 8 gauge steel plate at each butt. D. Reinforce for lock front and strike with 16 gauge steel. frames for closers with 12 gauge steel plate and reinforce doors with 12 gauge steel channel. Other reinforcing to be not less than 12 gauge steel. E. Cover mortises in frames with pressed steel mortar boxes. 2.6 FINISH A. Shop Finish: Grind, fill and sand as required to make faces and edges smooth, true and free of irregularities. Chemically clean and phosphate treat to ensure prime paint adhesion. 1. Shop primer: 1 -coat, baked -on rust inhibiting primer. 2. Prime frames under removable glazing stops and prime back side of removable stops. 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Examine substrates, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel doors and frames. 1. Examine rough -in for embedded and built -in anchors to verify actual locations of steel frame connections before frame installation. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non- templated mortised and surface - mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install frames according to ANSUSDI- A250.11. Erect frames plumb, square and true to line. B. Install doors according to DHI. Install with uniform margins at jambs and head. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. B. Remove and replace defective work, including steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. C. Clean grout and other bonding material off steel doors and frames immediately after installation. D. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying primer. E. Galvannealed Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 r f P 1 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Non -rated access doors and frames. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 09900 - Painting; for field painting of access doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit Product Data for approval. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 2.2 ACCESS PANELS PART 2 - PRODUCTS Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Acudor Access Doors. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Milcor. 4. Nystrom. 5. Karp Associates, Inc. A. Models: as indicated or comparable type and model of other specified manufacturers. B. Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: Milcor Style DW or Milcor Fire Rated Access Panel. C. Lock and Hinge Types: 1. Other Panel Locations: Manufacturer's standard screwdriver operated cam lock. 2. Hinge pins for ceiling panels to be non - removable. D. Finish: One coat of factory applied, rust- inhibitive, baked enamel primer containing at least 50% rust- inhibitive pigments over bonderized steel. 3.1 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install access doors according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Upon completion, adjust doors for ease of operation, and leave installation in good operating conditions. END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1 r r • TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Hardware for steel (hollow metal) doors. B. Where items of hardware not definitely or correctly specified are required for completion of work, direct attention to such omission, error, or other discrepancy in writing to Owner, prior to award of Contract, for clarification by A- Change Modification or, furnish such items in the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service intended. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Owner Furnished Items: 1. Construction and Permanent cores for hardware applications. B. Section 08110 — Steel Doors and Frames; for labeled and non - labeled hollow metal doors and frames. C. Section 08305 — Access Doors; for interior and exterior, labeled and non labeled access panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI) and Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156, Door Hardware Standards. 2. ICC /ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI). C. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 3. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 252, Positive Pressure Plane at 40" above sill and UL10C. D. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL): 1. UL, "Building Materials Directory". E. International Building Code, IBCO. F. International Fire Code, IFC. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of a DHI certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, (AHC), detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and fmish of door hardware. 1. Submit (1) complete reproducible copy of Hardware Schedule for approval. 2. Organization: Organize the Hardware Schedule into door hardware groups, in same order as schedule in Part 3, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware group, cross - referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Mounting locations for door hardware. f. Door and frame sizes and materials. g. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building systems. 4. Upon request, furnish Owner's separate contractors with copies of approved Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: Keying will be determined by Owner directly with lock manufacturer. D. Samples: Upon request, submit samples of selected hardware for approval. Indicate on samples, hardware item, base metal, finish, manufacturer's name, type, number, and intended location. HARDWARE 08700 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET E. Templates: Submit hardware templates to door and frame suppliers and others as applicable. Submit templates immediately after Hardware Schedule is approved. HARDWARE 08700 - 2 1 1 II 1 o Hinge Bommer Hager < McKinney Stanley Type 1 5000 1279 T2714 F179 Type 2 BB5000 BB1279 TA2714 FBB179 Type 3 BB5004 BB1168 T4A3786 FBB168 Type 4 BB5006 BB1199 T4A3386 FBB199 ■ 1 1 TARGET F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Comply with requirements of Section 01700 including specific requirements as follows: 1. Maintenance and adjustment instructions for each item of hardware. 2. Catalog pages for each product. 3. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. 4. Parts list for each product. 5. Copy of final Hardware Schedule. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Special installation and adjustment tools. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: Experienced door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a DHI certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, (AHC), available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and OSR about door hardware, electrified door hardware and keying. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with accessibility requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1. 2. Comply with NFPA 101 for means of egress doors. D. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. C. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 2.1 DOOR HARDWARE 2.2 HINGES PART2- PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements of this section and door Hardware Groups indicated in Part 3, Hardware Schedule. B. Provide hardware components that are new, free from scratches, mars and other defects. Furnish hardware complete with accessories of proper size and design required for the purpose intended, including screws, shields, and other anchorage devices necessary for complete installation. A. General: BHMA 156.1, steel or stainless steel material, fabricated to template with flat button tips, non -rising loose steel pins, and beveled or non - beveled inner edge. 1. Non - removable loose pin hinges for exterior outswing doors or as scheduled. 2. Non - ferrous base metal for exterior doors. 3. Ball bearing hinges of proper size and weight for labeled doors. B. Hinge Sizes: 1 -3/4 inch doors / 4 -1/2 inches x 4 -1/2 inches, unless scheduled otherwise. 1. Width of hinges: Sufficient to clear trim. C. Quantities: 1. One pair ( 2 hinges ) on doors 60 inches high or less, 1/2 pair ( 1 hinge) for every additional 30 inches or fraction thereof. D. Type 4 Hinge: Extra heavy, ball bearing, stainless steel. 1. Out -swing exterior doors. 2. When specified in group. E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: HARDWARE 08700 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 F. Geared Continuous Hinges: BHMA 156.26, Grade 1. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and Products: a. Markar FM -2000 Series. b. McKinney MCK -12HD. c. Pemko CFMHD Series. d. Roton 780 -HD Series. G. Edge Mount Continuous Hinges: BHMA 156.26, Grade 1. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and Products: a. Markar FM -300. 1) Electric Cont. Hinge: FM- 300 -CE. b. McKinney MCK- FM300. c. Comparable products from other specified hinge manufacturers. H. Offset Continuous Hinges: BHMA 156.26, Grade 1. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and Products: HARDWARE 08700 - 4 a. b. c. Markar HG -310. McKinney MCK- HG311. Comparable products from other specified hinge manufacturers. 2.3 LIFE SAFETY HOLDER/CLOSERS A. General: BHMA 156.15, automatic releasing mechanism is activated by the following: 1. The operation of an automatic smoke detection system. 2. Upon loss of power, alarm system battery back -up will keep doors open. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. LCN:4040SE. 2. Yale: 400PT. 2.4 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. Cylindrical Locks: BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1, prepared to accept Best interchangeable cores. 1. Best: 93K Series. 2. Yale: 5400LN x 7 pin less core. B. Lever Handle Trim: 1. Best: a. Cylindrical: 15D for 93K Series. b. Mortise: 15J for 35H Series. 2. Provide Manufacturer's Tactile Lever Trim Option (Abrasive Lever) for doors that access hazardous room locations such as Boiler rooms, Electrical rooms, PUC's, EDC's, Compressor rooms, etc. TARGET C. Strikes: 1. ANSI A115.2 type for hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Wrought box type for inactive leaf of pairs of wood doors. 3. Provide lip length sufficient to protect trim, frame, or inactive leaf. D. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Best Access Systems. 2.5 DEADLOCKS, DEADLATCHES A. Mortise Deadlocks: BHMA 156.5, Grade 1 or Grade 2 as applicable. Locks to have Best Interchangeable Core Cylinders. 1. General: a. Best: 38H Series. B. Cylindrical Deadlocks: BHMA 156.5, Grade 1. 1. Best: 83T Series. 2.6 PERMANENT CYLINDERS AND CORES A. Best "Universal Locking System" cylinders for use with seven pin tumbler interchangeable cores. B. Provide cylinders with standard or special cams as required for proper installation with specified lock. C. Provide standard and crush -proof cylinder rings as specified and/or required for proper installation with cylinders. D. When Yale locksets are used, provide 7 -pin throw members specifically designed to be used with Best cylinder cores. E. Owner Furnished Cores: Owner will furnish Best interchangeable cores for permanent installation. 2.7 HEADER AND THRESHOLD BOLTS A. Header and Threshold Bolts: for aluminum sliding and swing doors as specified in Groups. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Adams -Rite: a. Header: 4016. b. Threshold:4015. w a i N r i J ■ Item Ives Door Controls Hager Trimco Manual F.B. FB257N 780F 282D 3915 Dust Proof Strike DP2 82 280X 3910 Auto. F.B. FB31P 842NH 292D 3810 Constant Latch F.B. FB51P 845 293D 3820 x 3810 Item Burns Hager Hiawatha Rockwood Push Bars: 422 130S 1081 -LBP SP47 Push Plates 6 "x16 "x16 ga. 56 30S 20011 70E Door Pulls (SST): 26C 4J 536B 111 Offset Door Pull: 39C 12J 658A BF157 Item ' Stanley Door Pull: 482 - 6 -1/2 ", Zinc Plated 1 1 TARGET 2.8 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUSTPROOF STRIKES A. B. General: 1. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA 156.16, Grade 1. 2. Automatic Flush Bolts: BHMA 156.3, Grade 1. 3. Constant Latch Flush Bolts: BHMA 156.3, Grade 1. 4. Dust Proof Strike: BHMA 156.16, Grade 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: C. Locate center line of top bolt not more than 78" from finished floor. 2.9 DOOR EDGE PROTECTORS, KICK PLATES, ARMOR PLATES AND OWNER FURNISHED CART BARS A. General: BHMA 156.6. B. Door Edge Protectors: Provide non - mortise, "channel shaped" edge protectors fabricated from 0.050" thick BHMA 630 stainless steel. 7/8" - 1-1/4" legs x 1 -3/4" x height of kick plate or armor plate. Mount on lock edges with countersunk stainless steel screws. Match door edge type, square edge indicated in products below. 1. Burns: No. 303. 2. Hiawatha: No. DES -3C. 3. Rockwood: No. 306. 4. Comparable products from other manufacturers. C. Kick Plates: Provide 0.050" thick x 10" high BHMA 630, Type 304 stainless steel plates with four edges beveled unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Width for single doors shall be 2" less than door width on stop side and 1" less than door width on face side. for pairs of doors shall be 1" less than door width on both sides. D. Armor Plates: Provide 0.050" thick x 36" high, BHMA 630 stainless steel plates with four edges beveled unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Width for single doors shall be 2" less than door width on stop side and 1" less than door width on face side. for pairs of doors shall be 1" less than door width on both sides. 1. Note: On fire rated doors armor plates to be maximum 16 inches high to comply with requirements ofNFPA 80. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Burns. 2. Curran Engineering Company, Tel: 800- 643 -6353. 3. Hager. 4. Hiawatha. 5. Trimco. 6. Rockwood Mfg. Co. 2.10 DOOR TRIM A. B. C. General: BHMA 156.6. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 Acceptable Manufacturers and respective product numbers: Hiawatha specified in Groups. Stile Plates: 1" wide x 4- 9/16" high, aluminum plate with 5/8" high vertical letters; "PUSH" and "PULL ". 1. Manufacturer: Trimco /Builders Brass; 793 Custom. 2.11 SWEEPS, WEATHERSTRIPS, AND JAMB GASKETS A. General: BHMA 156.22. 1. Sweep: Clear anodized aluminum trim with neoprene or silicone inserts. HARDWARE 08700 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 TARGET HARDWARE 08700 - 6 2. Weatherstrip /Gasket: Teardrop shape with adhesive strip. Weatherstrip and fire and smoke gasket. 3. Positive Pressure Gaskets: Teardrop shape with adhesive strip. 1 4 to i 4 o 4 1 .r • • 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: C. Provide jamb gaskets as required by code at all rated openings. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. General: BHMA 156.21, mill aluminum units. Reese specified in Groups. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and products: 2.13 FINISHES A. BHMA 156.18, as follows, unless otherwise specified: 1. Hinges: a. Exterior Doors: US32D (630). b. Interior Doors: US 26D (652). 2. Continuous Hinges: Clear anodized aluminum and US32D. 3. Exit Control Locks: Mfr's Standard. 4. Locks: US26D (626). a. Adams -Rite Locks: US28 (628). 5. Closers: AL. 6. Overhead Stops and Holders: US32D. 7. Kick Plates and Armor Plates: US32D (630). 8. Door Edge Protectors: US32D (630). 9. Sweeps: Clear anodized aluminum. 10. Thresholds: Mill aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. Install according to hardware manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements using experienced finish carpenters. Hardware on labeled openings to maintain label. B. Completely fit hardware before fmal coat of paint or other finish is applied, and then remove until final fmish coat is applied. Perform mortises and cutting neatly, and conceal evidence of cutting in finished work. Permanently install hardware after finishing operations are complete and dry. Protect from scratching or other damage. C. Mount door hardware as follows unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. For items not listed, conform to recommended mounting locations of DHI: 1. Lock and Latch Sets: Steel door and frame manufacturer's standard height. 40- 5/16 ". 2. Deadlocks: Center cylinder 48" above floor unless noted otherwise. 3. Deadlatches: Center cylinder 48" above floor unless noted otherwise. 4. Door Holders and Closers: As recommended by the manufacturer for the degree of opening. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, interior side of exterior doors, and room side (including corridors) opposite the main sales floor room 102, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Door Pull: Center 44" above floor. 6. Push Plates: Center 46" above floor. 7. Kick Plates: Mount on push side of door except where indicated for both sides of doors. 8. Armor Plates: Mount on both sides of door leaf unless otherwise noted on the Schedule. 9. Door Edge Protectors: Mounted on lock/latch edge of door, align bottom of edge protector with bottom of armor plates. 10. Door Stops: As near the strike edge of door as possible, or as recommended by manufacturer. Do not mount on cabinets, casework, equipment, or furnishings. 11. Door Stop/Holder (254W): Mount at 12" above fmish floor. 12. Door Viewers: a. Standard: Mount in center of door at 60 inches above fmish floor. b. HDCP: Mount in center of door at 48 inches above finish floor. 13. Trim Protector Bar: Directly below trim to provide 4" clearance from lever in down position. HARDWARE 08700 - 7 Hager NGP . Pemko Reese Sweep 750X 200SA 315CN 323C Weatherstri p /Gasket 726C 5050C S88BL 797B Pos Pressure - 5050C S88BL - .r • • 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: C. Provide jamb gaskets as required by code at all rated openings. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. General: BHMA 156.21, mill aluminum units. Reese specified in Groups. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and products: 2.13 FINISHES A. BHMA 156.18, as follows, unless otherwise specified: 1. Hinges: a. Exterior Doors: US32D (630). b. Interior Doors: US 26D (652). 2. Continuous Hinges: Clear anodized aluminum and US32D. 3. Exit Control Locks: Mfr's Standard. 4. Locks: US26D (626). a. Adams -Rite Locks: US28 (628). 5. Closers: AL. 6. Overhead Stops and Holders: US32D. 7. Kick Plates and Armor Plates: US32D (630). 8. Door Edge Protectors: US32D (630). 9. Sweeps: Clear anodized aluminum. 10. Thresholds: Mill aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. Install according to hardware manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements using experienced finish carpenters. Hardware on labeled openings to maintain label. B. Completely fit hardware before fmal coat of paint or other finish is applied, and then remove until final fmish coat is applied. Perform mortises and cutting neatly, and conceal evidence of cutting in finished work. Permanently install hardware after finishing operations are complete and dry. Protect from scratching or other damage. C. Mount door hardware as follows unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. For items not listed, conform to recommended mounting locations of DHI: 1. Lock and Latch Sets: Steel door and frame manufacturer's standard height. 40- 5/16 ". 2. Deadlocks: Center cylinder 48" above floor unless noted otherwise. 3. Deadlatches: Center cylinder 48" above floor unless noted otherwise. 4. Door Holders and Closers: As recommended by the manufacturer for the degree of opening. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, interior side of exterior doors, and room side (including corridors) opposite the main sales floor room 102, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Door Pull: Center 44" above floor. 6. Push Plates: Center 46" above floor. 7. Kick Plates: Mount on push side of door except where indicated for both sides of doors. 8. Armor Plates: Mount on both sides of door leaf unless otherwise noted on the Schedule. 9. Door Edge Protectors: Mounted on lock/latch edge of door, align bottom of edge protector with bottom of armor plates. 10. Door Stops: As near the strike edge of door as possible, or as recommended by manufacturer. Do not mount on cabinets, casework, equipment, or furnishings. 11. Door Stop/Holder (254W): Mount at 12" above fmish floor. 12. Door Viewers: a. Standard: Mount in center of door at 60 inches above fmish floor. b. HDCP: Mount in center of door at 48 inches above finish floor. 13. Trim Protector Bar: Directly below trim to provide 4" clearance from lever in down position. HARDWARE 08700 - 7 Hager NGP Pemko Reese 5" Saddle 413S 513 271A S405A 6" Saddle 417S 613 272A S406A 5" w/ Gasket 520S 896V 2005AV S483AV .r • • 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: C. Provide jamb gaskets as required by code at all rated openings. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. General: BHMA 156.21, mill aluminum units. Reese specified in Groups. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and products: 2.13 FINISHES A. BHMA 156.18, as follows, unless otherwise specified: 1. Hinges: a. Exterior Doors: US32D (630). b. Interior Doors: US 26D (652). 2. Continuous Hinges: Clear anodized aluminum and US32D. 3. Exit Control Locks: Mfr's Standard. 4. Locks: US26D (626). a. Adams -Rite Locks: US28 (628). 5. Closers: AL. 6. Overhead Stops and Holders: US32D. 7. Kick Plates and Armor Plates: US32D (630). 8. Door Edge Protectors: US32D (630). 9. Sweeps: Clear anodized aluminum. 10. Thresholds: Mill aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. Install according to hardware manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements using experienced finish carpenters. Hardware on labeled openings to maintain label. B. Completely fit hardware before fmal coat of paint or other finish is applied, and then remove until final fmish coat is applied. Perform mortises and cutting neatly, and conceal evidence of cutting in finished work. Permanently install hardware after finishing operations are complete and dry. Protect from scratching or other damage. C. Mount door hardware as follows unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. For items not listed, conform to recommended mounting locations of DHI: 1. Lock and Latch Sets: Steel door and frame manufacturer's standard height. 40- 5/16 ". 2. Deadlocks: Center cylinder 48" above floor unless noted otherwise. 3. Deadlatches: Center cylinder 48" above floor unless noted otherwise. 4. Door Holders and Closers: As recommended by the manufacturer for the degree of opening. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, interior side of exterior doors, and room side (including corridors) opposite the main sales floor room 102, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Door Pull: Center 44" above floor. 6. Push Plates: Center 46" above floor. 7. Kick Plates: Mount on push side of door except where indicated for both sides of doors. 8. Armor Plates: Mount on both sides of door leaf unless otherwise noted on the Schedule. 9. Door Edge Protectors: Mounted on lock/latch edge of door, align bottom of edge protector with bottom of armor plates. 10. Door Stops: As near the strike edge of door as possible, or as recommended by manufacturer. Do not mount on cabinets, casework, equipment, or furnishings. 11. Door Stop/Holder (254W): Mount at 12" above fmish floor. 12. Door Viewers: a. Standard: Mount in center of door at 60 inches above fmish floor. b. HDCP: Mount in center of door at 48 inches above finish floor. 13. Trim Protector Bar: Directly below trim to provide 4" clearance from lever in down position. HARDWARE 08700 - 7 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 14. Padlocks with Chains: Thread chain through eye bolt (carriage type), bolted to the adjacent surface so that bolt head is on lock side of enclosure. 15. Hasps: Install with screws covered by hasp in locked position. 16. Exterior Astragals: Install exterior astragals with non - removable screws. 17. Exterior Thresholds: Set exterior thresholds in full bed of sealant (SLNT -9) specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealing to prevent compression of threshold. Clean excess sealant after installation. 18. Key Cabinet: Mount bottom of box at 42 inches above finish floor. 19. King Pin Storage Rack: Mount top 54 inches above finish floor. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At final completion, adjust and test hardware for function and performance, and leave in good operating condition. Clean to restore original finish. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Exterior Doors: Groups 17 - Exterior Hollow Metal Doors - Single Suffixes: (Example — Group 20 -A) A — Add Armor Plate, Edge Protector And Trim Protector Bar in Lieu of Kickplate C — Add "Holder" Function to Closer — 4041H H — Hurricane Approved Groups K — Add Kickplate L — Add Holder /Stop (254W) in Lieu of Specified Stop T — Add Trim Protector Bar TL- Add Manufacturer's Tactile Lever Trim Option (Abrasive Lever) V — Add Overhead Stop (GJ -90) in Lieu of Specified Stop GROUPS 16 — 27 — EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS — SINGLE GROUP 16: SgI, ext, 1/2 door, deadlock 1 pair Hinges FBB199 3 -1/2 x 3 -1/2 NRP Stanley 1 Deadlock 38H -7K Best 1 Pull 536B Hiawatha 1 Set Weatherstrip 797 Reese GROUP 17: (Compactor Door) Sgl, ext, storeroom function, deadlock, holder /closer HARDWARE 08700 - 8 TARGET b. (outside) (entire perimeter) P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2 pair Hinges 1 Lockset 1 Deadlock 1 Cylinder 1 Closer HARDWARE 08700 - 2 Armor Plate Edge Protector Threshold Sweep Set Weatherstrip as specified with NRP 93K -7D 15D 38H -7L 1E74 4040 SE x 24v AC x Transformer 120v to 24v. as specified as specified S405A 323 797 END OF SECTION Best Best Best LCN Reese Reese Reese Note: Install deadlock cylinder on inside of door, blank outside. Note: Install lockset with locked side to inside of building and "free" side to inside of compactor enclosure. TARGET (see note below) (see note below) 1 TARGET NOTE: THIS SECTION APPLICABLE ONLY FOR PROJECTS REQUIRING NEW COMPACTOR 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing as indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to the following locations: a. Hollow metal doors and sidelights. •� 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout; for fmal cleaning of glass. 1 B. Section 08110 — Steel Doors and Frames 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 A. Conform to GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Comply with safety glazing requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR 1201. REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1, "Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings ". B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM C1036, "Spec for Flat Glass ". 2. ASTM C1048, "Spec for Heat- Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated glass ". C. Consumer Product Safety Commission, (CPSC): 1. CPSC 16CFR -1201, "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials ". D. Glass Association of North America, (GANA): 1. GANA, "Glazing Manual ". 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. B. 1.6 WARRANTY Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Drawings of window track assemblies, including hardware, for approval. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS C. Product Data: Submit Product Data for structural glazing adhesive and accessories. A. Provide a written 10 -year limited warranty from date of manufacture for insulating glass. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Fabricators for Glass: 1. Cardinal Glass Industries. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. Interpane Glass Company. 4. Oldcastle Glass. 5. Pilkington Building Products North America. 6. PPG Industries. 7. Viracon. B. Acceptable Manufacturers for Window Track Assembly and Misc. Trim: 1. Knape and Vogt (K &V), Grand Rapids, MI. 2. Stylmark, Inc., Minneapolis, MN. C. Acceptable Manufacturers for Glazing Materials: 1. Dow Corning. 2. General Electric. 3. Tremco. 2.2 WIRE GLASS (GL - 7) A. GL -7: 1/4 inch thick; ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, q8 quality, m1 diamond mesh, polished wire glass, UL Listed. GLAZING 08800 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Provide colors of glazing materials exposed to view in the finished work as selected from the manufacturer's standard colors. B. Provide glazing materials as follows: 1. Glazing Tape: Tremco 440 Tape. 2. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Dow 999 Silicone Building and Glazing Sealant; GE Silicone 1200 Construction Sealant. 3. Setting Blocks: Neoprene with a Shore A hardness of 70 -90 durometer. Setting blocks shall be not less than 3" long nor more than 8" long. Length shall be such that loading is 15 psi. Setting blocks shall be full width of rabbet where possible. 4. Spacer Blocks: Neoprene with a Shore A hardness of 40 -50 durometer, 1" to 3" long. GLAZING 08800 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of references. B. Accurately cut glass to fit actual openings while maintaining proper clearances. C. Set glass over 6 square feet in area using two setting blocks. Locate setting blocks at quarter points where possible. Where not possible, move both blocks equally toward the edges. Locate setting blocks not closer to edge than 1/8 the glass width or 6 ", whichever is greater. D. Set glass using spacers to insure proper edge clearance and uniform beads of compound. Conform to clearances required by the GANA "Glazing Manual" and the glazing material manufacturer's recommendations. Center glass in glazing rabbets. E. Clean sash rabbets and stops before glazing. Prime rabbets as required by glazing material manufacturer. F. Apply glazing materials according to manufacturer's instructions. G. Install exterior glazing watertight. 3.2 EXTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Glaze hollow metal frame and doors using glazing tape on both sides. Firmly glaze in place with cracks sealed, free of rattles. 3.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Glaze interior hollow metal borrowed light frames and wood and plastic doors using glazing tape on both sides. Firmly glaze in place with cracks sealed, free of rattles. 3.4 SLIDING GLASS WINDOW TRACK ASSEMBLIES A. Install and glaze in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 3.5 CLEANING A. Upon completion of glazing, clean glass and leave free of traces of glazing material. Final cleaning of glass is specified in Section 01700. END OF SECTION TARGET 1 TARGET A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load bearing steel framing and furring for interior wall and ceiling framing. 2. Interior gypsum board. 3. Installation of insulation in conjunction with wall furring. 4. Installation of joint sealants. 1 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing; for exterior steel wall and soffit framing components. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; for wood framing, blocking, and furring. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealing; for joint sealant product specifications. D. Section 08305 - Access Doors; for access panels in gypsum board. E. Section 09900 - Painting; for surface finish. F. Division 15 - Mechanical; for sealing of mechanical penetrations in fire -rated partitions. G. Division 16 - Electrical; for sealing of and electrical penetrations in fire -rated partitions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct gypsum drywall partitions, furring and ceiling systems according to gypsum board manufacturer's current printed specifications. B. Provide products of one manufacturer for each major product type, such as gypsum board or steel studs. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Where a fire resistance rating is required, construct to achieve required fire resistance rating according to applicable UL listed assemblies. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI): B. P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 1. ANSI A118.9, "Cementitious Backer Units ". American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM A641, "Spec for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire ". 2. ASTM A 653/A 653M -03: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 3. ASTM B 221 -02: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 4. ASTM C36, "Spec for Gypsum Wallboard ". 5. ASTM C442, "Spec for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard ". 6. ASTM C475, "Spec for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board ". 7. ASTM C557, "Spec for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing ". 8. ASTM C630, "Spec for Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ". 9. ASTM C645, "Spec for Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board ". 10. ASTM C 754 -00: Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 11. ASTM C 840 -03: Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 12. ASTM C1002, "Spec for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases ". 13. ASTM C 1047 -99: Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. 14. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M -03: Specification for Gypsum Board. 15. ASTM D226, "Spec for Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing ". 16. ASTM E 488: Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 17. ASTM E 1190: Test Methods for Strength of Power - Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. C. Gypsum Association, (GA): GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1. GA - 216, "Recommended Specs for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard ". D. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA): 1. Product Technical Information — ICBO ER4943P. E. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL): 1. UL, "Fire Resistance Directory". 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not tape and finish interior gypsum board when temperature is below 60° F. Maintain the temperature of the room at not less than 60° F for 48 hours before taping and finishing is begun. Maintain 60° F minimum temperature during and after installation. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excess moisture. B. Do not tape and finish exterior gypsum board soffit when air or surface temperature is below 45° F. Maintain 45° F minimum temperature during and after installation. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Steel Studs, Tracks, and Accessories: 1. Clark Steel Framing Industries. 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 3. Marino \Ware; A Division of Ware Industries 4. The Steel Network, Inc. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 2 5. Comparable products from other SSMA members that comply with specified requirements. B. Design is based on the products specified herein. Products of other specified manufacturers are acceptable only where the material and section properties meet or exceed the specified products. 2.2 NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING TARGET A. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40. B. Steel Studs and Track: 1. Manufacturer's standard non -load bearing galvanized steel studs and track for screw application of gypsum board, conforming to ASTM C645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: as indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge). b. Depth: as indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum base metal thickness of track not less than thickness of studs. 3. Where product type, size, or thickness is not indicated, conform to manufacturer's current printed specifications and local code requirements for limiting criteria. 4. Provide studs with pre - punched knock- outs at regular intervals for installation of pipe, conduit and bridging. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge). 2. Backing system for handrails and grab bars to meet ADA code number 36.401, 4.26.3. Supports at least 250 lbs. of point load. D. Cold - Rolled Channel Bridging: C shaped channel with minimum 1/2 -inch wide flanges. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0538 - inch, (16 Gauge). 2. Depth: 1 -1/2 inches. 3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inches, 0.0538 -inch thick, galvanized steel. • 1 TARGET E. Hat - Shaped Furring Channels: 2 -9/16 inch wide with 1 -1/4 inch face. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch or 1 -1/2 inch, as indicated on Drawings. F. Z- Shaped Furring: With slotted or non- slotted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge). 2. Depth: as required to fit insulation thickness as indicated on Drawings. G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge). H. Deflection Track and Firestop System: I. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Fire Trak Corp., Kimball, MN, tel. 800.394.9875. 2. Components: a. "Shadowline" ceiling runner assembly system with 2" leg that will accommodate 1 -1/2" deflection. Assembly to meet UL rating shown on the Drawings. b. Fire Trak Slip Clip: 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge) I. Flexible Track: Flexible framing track for curved wall and bulkhead conditions. Flex -C Arch; arch framing system. 0.0312 inch, (20 gauge) flanges, 24 mil web, size per wall width. 1. Manufacturer: Flex- Ability- Concepts, Tel: 405- 996 -5343. J. Clips, Screws and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard type for attachment of steel studs, track and drywall furring channels. 1. Track Fasteners: Power- driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. a. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. b. Power - Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. 2.3 SUSPENDED CEILING COMPONENTS A. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 gauge wire. B. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch. C. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gauge wire. D. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Post - installed, expansion anchor. 2. Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. E. Carrying Channels: 0.0538 -inch, (16 Gauge) base metal thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1 -1/2 inch. F. Hat - Shaped Furring Channels: as specified above. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Gypsum Company. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2. BPB America Inc. 3. G -P Gypsum Corporation. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. USG Corporation. B. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 4 TARGET N O W M .r Mb TARGET C. Minimum Lengths of Material: Provide material that exceeds ceiling heights as indicated on Drawings. If ceiling height exceeds length produced by acceptable manufacturers, provide maximum length available. D. Regular Type Gypsum Board: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch, unless noted otherwise. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Type X Gypsum Board: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless noted otherwise. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. F. Type C Gypsum Board: 1. Thickness: As required by fire- resistance- rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. G. Flexible Type Gypsum Board: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular - type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. H. Moisture and Mold- Resistant Type Gypsum Board: With moisture and mold - resistant core and surfaces to comply with ASTM D3273. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. G -P Gypsum Corporation: Sheetrock Brand "Humitek" Gypsum Panels. b. National Gypsum Company: XP Wallboard. c. USG Corporation: "DensArmor" Interior Guard Panels. I. Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD A. Cementitious Backer Board: Units complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end -to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thick; to match thickness of adjacent gypsum board. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: P01 RIGHTSIZE T a. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum- coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. J -Trim: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L -Trim: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (Control) Joint: One - piece, rolled zinc with V- shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. e. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats and trim components used. D. Joint Compound for Water Resistant Backing Boards: 1. Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -type, sandable topping compound. 2. Cementitious Backer Boards: As recommended by backer board manufacturer. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Thermal Insulation: as specified in Section 07200. 1. INSUL -3: Perimeter wall insulation m furring. E. Acrylic Latex Sealant: SLNT -3 as specified in Section 07900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine gypsum board materials prior to installation. Reject boards that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. C. General: 1. Construct steel framing as indicated on Drawings in accordance with code requirements and manufacturers current printed specifications. 2. Align framing accurately according to Drawings. Coordinate with work of other trades. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 6 TARGET 3. Install steel studs and furring at 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. a. Install steel studs and furring at 16 inches on center at cement board tile backer and where otherwise indicated. 4. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 5. Provide minimum 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge) studs to limit deflection to L/240 at minimum 5 psf lateral force applied perpendicular to partition. Provide bracing as required at maximum unsupported lengths as recommended by the stud manufacturer to achieve specified maximum deflection. 6. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 7. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 8. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load- bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. D. Partition Framing: 1. Install studs for partitions 16 feet or less in height full height without splices. Where splices are required, lap studs by nesting at least 8" and screw together with two screws in each flange. Securely attach studs to floor and top runners. 2. Non -Fire Rated Partitions Run to Structure: Extend steel stud partitions, constructed in spaces without finished suspended ceilings on both sides of the partition, to structure (beam bottom or roof deck) above. Fill deck flutes above non -fire rated partitions that run to deck with INSUL -6. Securely attach top leg runner to structure not over 24" o.c, inset top channel runner inside leg runner to allow for roof deflection. a. Contractor may optionally provide continuous channel bracing through the topmost cutouts in lieu of top channel runner if acceptable to the stud manufacturer and meets stud manufacturer's design criteria and recommendations. a • TARGET 3. Fire Rated Partitions Run to Structure: Fill deck flutes above fire rated partitions with INSUL -5 and fasten "shadowline" runner track to bottom of deck or beam framing as indicated on Drawings. Install slip clips to track to allow for vertical deflection movement on studs. Install gypsum board as indicated on Drawings. 4. Partitions Not Run to Structure: Terminate steel stud partitions, constructed in spaces with finished suspended ceilings on both sides of partition, at 4" above suspended ceiling, unless otherwise indicated. • • • E. Chase Walls: Construct chase walls with double studs. Brace double studs with one foot high, 1/2" thick gypsum board braces spaced not over four feet on center and screwed to studs with not less than three screws on each side of wall, or brace with 2 -1/2" studs spaced not over four feet on center. F. Partition Reinforcing: 1. Reinforce partitions as necessary to support store fixtures and other items to be mounted on the walls. Provide 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge) metal backing plate reinforcing for attachment of light items to partitions. a. Refer to Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry, for wood blocking. 2. Install supplementary framing, and blocking/backing to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. G. Door Openings: 1. Provide two 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge) studs at all door openings unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Place studs directly against jambs of hollow metal frames, abutting partitions, internal partition corners, and similar locations. Anchor studs to runners with screws or other positive fasteners. 3. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips at hollow metal frames with screws or bolts. Install a runner track with web and flanges bent down at each end across head of hollow metal frames, and screw each flange to vertical studs. 4. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 installation of control joint in finished assembly. 5. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.3 FURRING FOR MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS A. General: 1. Install metal drywall furring channels, vertically and spaced not over 24" on center. 2. Where splices are required, lap furring by nesting at least 8" and screw together with two screws in each flange. 3. Shim and level furring members and insulation as required to provide a true and even surface for gypsum board application. B. Hat - Shaped Furring Channels without Insulation: 1. Attach furring to concrete or masonry walls with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder - driven fasteners spaced not greater than 24 inches o.c. C. Z Furring Members with Insulation: 1. Install insulation board INSUL -3, as specified under Section 07200 - Insulation vertically and hold in place with Z- furring members spaced at 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced not greater than 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw - attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Edge Closure: Provide sheet metal angle, in same thickness as furring, to cover all exposed edges of insulation. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 7 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 D. Optional Furring System for Irregular Wall Surfaces: 1. Provide the following system when interior surfaces of exterior walls are not aligned or flush to the extent that shimming of furring will not produce a flush wall for gypsum board installation. 2. Install steel stud framed wall system inside of furthest projection point of irregular walls surfaces enabling a plumb wall installation. 3. Depth of wall system, thickness of framing members and spacing of connections to exterior wall surfaces as determined by steel stud manufacturers limiting height criteria and applied wall loads. Provide metal backing and bracing as required for applied loads. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED CEILING COMPONENTS A. Securely attach hanger wires to structure above. Space hangers along direction of main carrying channels not over 4 feet on center, and locate hangers not more than 6 inches from ends of carrying channels. B. Space 1 -1/2" main carrying channels not over 4 feet on center. Locate main carrying channels within 6 inches of parallel walls. Keep ends of main carrying channels at least 1 inch away from walls. Install main carrying channels level, true to plane, and at the required elevation with hangers saddle tied. 1. Where hanger spacing must exceed 4 feet on center, use hangers spaced not over 5 feet on center and 2 inch main carrying channels spaced not over 3 feet on center. C. Where main carrying channels are spliced, lap ends not less than 12 inches with channel flanges interlocked, and tie each end of lap with double loops of 18 gauge tie wire. D. Space hat shaped furring channels not over two feet on center across carrying channels. Saddle tie to carrying channels with 18 gauge tie wire at each crossing, or use manufacturer's standard furring channel clips. Locate furring channels 2 inches from parallel walls, and hold ends at least 1 inch away from walls. E. Where main carrying channels or furring channels are interrupted by light fixtures, GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 8 TARGET grilles and registers, or other openings, install additional channels to frame openings. 1. Reinforce framing as necessary to support light fixtures, grilles, registers, and other items mounted in the ceiling. 2. Maximum allowable deflection 1/360 of the span. F. Do not suspend ceiling framing from metal deck, conduit, ductwork or piping except where indicated on Drawings. Where hanger spacing and spans exceed specified spans, use hangers with a larger capacity, larger main carrying channels or additional reinforcing members, hangers, stiffening, or bracing as necessary to support the loads, without exceeding the specified deflection. G. Where ceilings return to a higher ceiling, form vertical surfaces with metal studs suspended from structure above or as detailed on Drawings. Space studs not over 24" on center. Brace studs with diagonal bracing spaced not over four feet on center. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: 1. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 840 for installation of gypsum panels. 2. Install gypsum board with true even surfaces and straight sharp corners. 3. Install gypsum board on ceilings before walls using full length boards where possible. 4. Form joints neatly. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 5. Install gypsum board vertically with end joints over supports on walls and partitions in finished spaces. Install longest board possible to minimize butt end joints. a. Stagger end joints on the same side of a wall. b. Do not allow end joints on opposite sides to occur over the same support. c. Do not locate normal end joints at edge of openings. d. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. TARGET 6. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 7. Install gypsum board on ceilings with end joints over supports, to minimize butt end joints. Stagger end joints of adjacent boards at least 12 ". 8. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. a. At floors maintain 1/2 inch clearance from bottom of panel to floor surface. 9. Accurately locate and neatly cut openings for electrical devices, piping, grilles, and registers, so openings closely fit the devices and are completely covered by plates and escutcheons. B. Mechanical Application of Gypsum Board: 1. Install gypsum board using screws, except where adhesive installation is indicated on Drawings. 2. Fasten gypsum board beginning at the center and work toward the outer edges. Hold board firmly against supports while fastening. Locate fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges. Locate fasteners 3/8" to 1/2" from edge of board. a. Screw gypsum board to steel framing and furring as follows: For walls with gypsum board applied vertically, space screws 8" on center, maximum, along edges and 12" on center, maximum, in the center. For walls with gypsum board applied horizontally, and ceiling construction, space screws 12" on center, maximum. b. Space screws according to the rated design for fire resistive partitions and ceilings. c. Screw gypsum board to wood framing with screws spaced not over 12" on center. C. Material Locations: 1. Regular Type: In locations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: Vertical, horizontal surfaces and where required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies. 3. Type C: Where required for specific fire - resistance -rated assemblies indicated. 4. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies as required. P01 RIGHTSIZE T 5. Moisture and Mold- Resistant Type: Apply to all exterior building wall surfaces. 6. Water Resistant Backing Board: Provide full height water resistant gypsum board in janitor closets, walls, (except toilet rooms) to receive ceramic tile, FRP, and other locations subject to moisture damage. 7. Cementitious Backer Board: Provide cementitious backer board in toilet rooms to four feet above floor, entire room, and water resistant gypsum board above cementitious backer board to ceiling. 3.6 INSTALLATION EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. B. Fasten with corrosion- resistant screws. C. Apply sealant at sheathing perimeter and at interface with other materials. 3.7 SEALING A. Apply acrylic latex SLNT - in exposed locations. B. Seal partition perimeter joints where fire rated and acoustically insulated partitions are shown on the Drawings. Seal joints in backer board occurring behind control joints. C. Seal around pipes, ducts, conduit, and other items penetrating non -rated gypsum board partitions. Seal backs and sides of electrical boxes. D. Seal joints, cut edges, nail and screw heads, and punctures in water resistant gypsum board with a waterproofmg sealant recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. E. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with sealant, SLNT -3. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 9 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 10 TARGET se TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 3.10 PROTECTION B. Control Joints: Install control joints in walls, bulkheads, ceiling, soffits and partitions not over 30 feet on center. Provide at each change of substrate, and above each door jamb as indicated on Drawings except as follows: 1. Control joints are not required in walls which will not be taped, or taped and finished. 2. Locate joints not indicated on Drawings above door frames whenever possible. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following ini locations: 1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. J -Trim: Use at exposed panel edges and where indicated on Drawings. 3. L -Trim: Use where indicated on Drawings or where required by installation. 4. Curved -Edge Comerbead: Use at curved openings. g 1 1 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. Tape and finish gypsum board surfaces exposed to view in finished work. Apply tape only (no finishing) on fire resistive and sound rated partitions occurring above suspended ceilings, and gypsum board surfaces to receive ceramic tile. B. Apply materials strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations. Fill joints with joint compound, embed perforated tape, and apply a skim coat of joint compound over tape. Apply two additional coats of joint compound allowing at least 24 hours between each coat. Fill dimples and imperfections with three coats. Sand each coat, keeping sanding to a minimum to avoid raising nap on drywall board. C. Finish joints to achieve uniformly smooth, true and satisfactory surface to receive paint or other scheduled finish material. D. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. E. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 11 DESIGNATOR SYSTEM MATRIX FOR COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING WEB DEPTH SHAPE FLANGE WIDTH MIN. METAL THICKNESS GAUGE REF 162 1 -5/8 100 1" 250 2 -1/2" S Stud 125' 1 -1/4" 18 mil 0.0179" 25 350 3-1/2" T Track 200 2" 27 mil 0.0269" 22 362 3 -5/8" U Channel 300 3" 30 mil 0.0312" 20 DW 400 4" F Furring 250 2 -1/2" 33 mil 0.0329" 20 STR 550 5-1/2" 600 6" Notes: 1. 20- gauge, non -load bearing "Drywall" stud specified under Section 09250. 2. 20- gauge, Toad bearing stud specified under Section 05400. 3. Industry standard flange width, (125), for both suds and track. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET 3.11 PRODUCT DESIGNATOR SYSTEM A. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA), representing many metal framing manufacturers, has adopted a common designator system that combines the depth, shape, width, and steel thickness, in that order, of a framing section into a single expression. This system has been incorporated into the Drawings and Specifications to align more closely with industry standards. B. The following matrix has been compiled to aid in understanding of this designator system and to allow for a direct reference to the traditional "gauge" indicators. 1. Framing dimensions have been designated by inches and fractions of an inch m 0.001 -inch increments. Use of the term gauge has been replaced with a figure based on the minimum base -metal steel thickness in mils or 1 /1000 of an inch. The Gauge has been retained in the specification for reference. 2. Shape of the framing member has been identified by a letter character: S for stud and joist sections that have flange stiffeners or lips, T for track sections without lips, U for channel studs without lips and for cold - rolled channel, and F for furring channel Other shapes may be added with other letter characters. Some common industry designators include FS for flat strap, L for angle, and PL for plate. 3. Example: A typical framing section can be identified by 362S125 - 18 designating a stud or joist with a web depth of 3 - 5/8 inch, a flange width of 1 - 1/4 inches, and a minimum base -metal steel thickness of 0.0179 inch, comparable to the traditional 25 gauge stud. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -12 END OF SECTION • • TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY A. B. SECTION 09300 TILE 1.2 RELATED ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Provide cooler (and freezer when required) Quarry Tile Floor and floor joint sealant. 2. Miscellaneous accessories. Section 03350 - Concrete Repair Work; for concrete floor finish. Section 07900 - Joint Sealing; for expansion joint sealants and joint backing product specifications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI): 1. ANSI A108.4, "Ceramic Tile Installed with Water - Resistant Organic Adhesives or Water - Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesives ". 2. ANSI A108.5, "Ceramic Tile Installed with Portland Cement Mortar ". 3. ANSI A108.6, "Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical- Resistant, Water - Cleanable Tile - Setting and - Grouting Epoxy". 4. ANSI 118.3, "Chemical- Resistant, Water - Cleanable, Tile- Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water - Cleanable Tile- Setting Epoxy Adhesive ". 5. ANSI A118.4, "Latex- Portland Cement Mortar ". 6. ANSI 118.6, "Ceramic Tile Grouts ". 7. ANSI A136.1, "Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile ". B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM C144, "Spec for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ". 2. ASTM C150, "Spec for Portland Cement ". 3. ASTM C241. "Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot traffic ". C. Tile Council of America, (TCA): 1. TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation ". P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating according to manufacturer's instructions. 2.1 QUARRY TILE PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. QT -1: Quarry Floor Tile; 6" x 6" x 1/2 ", natural clay paver with abrasive unglazed finish. 1. Edge design: Wire cut and ground, square edge. 2. Color: No. 10 Summitville Red. 3. Static Coefficient of Friction Ranges: For Abrasive Surface; Dry 0.80 to 1.0, Wet 0.70 to 0.95. 4. Acceptable manufacturer and product: a. Summitville Tiles, Inc.: Quarry Tile. 5. Grout joint: 3/8 inch wide. 6. Grout color: Hydroment Plus; Delorean Gray. 2.2 LATEX- PORTLAND CEMENT THIN SET MORTAR FOR FLOORS A. Latex - Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar for Floors: Bostik "Hydroment Single -Flex" Multi- Purpose Latex Modified Flexible Thin Set Mortar, premixed. 1. Meet or exceed ANSI 118.4. 2.3 LATEX- PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT FOR FLOORS A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout for Floors: Bostik "Hydroment Plus ", Polymer - Modified Ceramic Tile Grout (Sanded). 1. Meet or exceed ANSI 118.6 and A118.7. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT A. Provide sealant as specified in Section 07900, Color to match adjacent grout color in following locations: 1. Floor Expansion Joints: SLNT -2. 2.5 MIXES A. Latex - Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar: Prepare premixed mortar by mixing with clean, drinkable tap water strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. TILE 09300 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Latex - Portland Cement Grout: Acid resistant grout, mixed with acrylic latex additive. Mix grout strictly according to additive manufacturer's instructions. Do not dilute additive with water. TILE 09300 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install tile according to TCA "Handbook ", ANSI A108.4, and ANSI A108.5. B. Quarry Tile Floors: Install quarry tile on concrete floor of walk -in cooler only by thin -set method using a latex - portland cement mortar; TCA Method F113. Lay tile in stack bond pattern with 3/8" wide joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Thresholds: Install thresholds at door openings. 3.2 JOINTS A. Provide expansion joints 3/8" wide to align with joints in concrete slab and as indicated on Drawings. B. Provide sealant joints at inside corners of wall tile and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. C. Construct expansion joints full depth of tile and mortar bond coat. D. Install joint backing material with top 1/4" below the finished surface of tile except as otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer. Protect joints with paper or other suitable material to keep joint free of mortar, grout, and dirt. E. After grout has thoroughly cured, remove paper, and clean joints by brushing. Sand or lightly grind edges of tile to be in contact with sealant, and thoroughly clean joint. Prime joints and apply sealant according to sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 GROUTING A. Grout tile walls, floors and base with latex - portland cement grout. B. Do not grout tile until tile is firmly set. Completely remove paper, glue, and adhesive before grouting. Properly ventilate and allow sufficient time for evaporation of volatiles from adhesive before grouting. C. Soak or dampen joints of tile to be grouted with latex - portland cement grout as recommended by grout manufacturer. D. Force grout into tile joints, completely filling joints with compacted grout and covering mortar or adhesives. joints of square -edged tile flush with surface. Strike or tool joints of cushion -edged tile to depth of cushion. Fill gaps and skips, and retool. 3.4 CURING A. Damp cure latex - portland cement thin -set installations and grouts containing portland cement for a minimum of 72 hours. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. B. C. END OF SECTION TARGET Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Protection: 1. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed, except as approved by OSR. i TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1.2 RELATED ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Provide suspended metal grid ceiling systems including main runners, cross tees and edge moldings and hold down clips. 2. Provide hanger wires, fasteners, compression struts and accessories required for a complete installation, including seismic bracing as required by local governing code. 3. Clean existing suspension Grid. 4. Replace all damaged tees and runners as required. 5. Remove and replace suspended ceiling system where required for new mechanical and electrical work above existing ceiling. 6. Provide acoustical ceiling panels to match existing. Owner will furnish acoustical ceiling panels for installation under this section. A. Section 01120 - Cleaning of existing suspension Grid. B. Divisions 15 and 16 - Mechanical and electrical components of ceiling system. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C636 for installation of ceiling suspension systems. B. For lateral support of ceiling suspension systems required for seismic bracing, construct the Work as specified herein and in compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations. C. Comply with requirements of ASTM E580 for installation of ceiling suspension systems requiring seismic retraint. D. Comply with applicable codes for Class I, (Class A) flame /smoke ratings for acoustical ceiling materials when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM A641, "Spec for Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire ". 2. ASTM C635, "Spec for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings ". 3. ASTM C636, "Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels ". 4. ASTM E580: Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint 5. ASTM E84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". B. C. 1.5 SUBMITTALS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 Federal Specification, (FS): 1. FS QQ- W -461H, "Wire, Steel, Carbon, Round, Bare and Coated ". Underwriters Laboratories, (UL): 1. UL 723, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Where reflected ceiling plan is not shown on Drawings, submit reflected ceiling plan for approval after coordinating with mechanical and electrical requirements. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical materials until proper temperature and humidity conditions as recommended by manufacturer can be maintained. Interior concrete work, masonry, plastering and other wet operations shall be complete and dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed, and permanent heating and ventilating systems shall be installed and operating where necessary. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS (BY CONTRACTOR) A. ACT -1: Armstrong, Fine Fissured, Humiguard, Mineral Fiber Board, Item # 1729A, 24" x 48" x 5/8 ". 1. Match existing acoustic tile in surrounding area. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 TARGET 1 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM - (BY CONTRACTOR) A. Ceiling Suspension System: Heavy Duty Class grid system meeting requirements of ASTM C635, Heavy Duty when suspended at 4' -0" o.c.; exposed tee -grid, double web, electro-galvanized, cold rolled steel system with 15/16" wide bottom flange. Provide reversible, reusable, and relocatable components to match existing. 1. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel; white (Chicago Metallic No. 01) fmish on exposed surfaces. 2. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with hemmed edge. Factory match suspension system finish. 3. Hold Down Clips: manufacturer's standard. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer's and Products: a. Chicago Metallic; 1200 System. 2.3 HANGER WIRE A. Galvanized steel wire, soft annealed, pre - stretched ASTM A641, minimum twelve gauge. Provide zinc coating not less than FS QQ- W -461H, Class 1. 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install systems according to requirements of regulatory agencies, ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of this section. B. Cooperate with mechanical and electrical trades in locating and spacing fixtures, diffusers, and similar items located in ceiling. C. Lay out pattern according to reflected ceiling plans Where not otherwise indicated, lay out with margins on opposite sides of rooms equal in size and greater than 1/2 tile width. 3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Suspend main runners with not less than 12 gauge wire typical with minimum 9 gauge wire where ceiling to structure above distance exceeds 10' -0 ". Securely attach hanger wires to structure above. Hang wires vertically with no kinks or bends. Space hangers not over 4' -0" on center along main runners according ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION to manufacturer's recommendations. Reinforce as necessary to adequately support suspension system, acoustical material, light fixtures, grilles, registers, and other equipment or furnishings. Install with maximum allowable deflection of 1/360 of span. B. Laterally support ceiling system with 4 wires, minimum 12 gauge, splayed in four directions 90 deg apart, and connected to main runner within 2" of cross runner and to structure above at an angle not exceeding 45 deg from the plane of the ceiling. 1. Place lateral supports 12' -0" o. c. in each direction with the first support located within 4' -0" from each wall. C. Do not hang ceilings from metal deck. D. Do not support suspension systems from conduit, ducts, pipes, or equipment. Where spans exceed recommended or specified spans, furnish larger main runner channels or additional reinforcing members, hangers, stiffeners, or bracing as necessary to support loads without exceeding allowable deflection. No swing hangers are permitted. E. Install edge moldings at walls and vertical projections through ceiling. F. Install s uspension system level, true to plane, and at required elevation and pattern, with fmished surfaces undamaged. 3.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install panels according to manufacturer's recommendations. Place four edges of each panel in firm contact with, and supported by, flanges of runner sections. Check level of system during installation, and maintain a level and true plane. B. Install concealed hold -down clips, spaced 24 inches on center, on cross tees for ceiling tile units within main Entry Vestibules and Cart Storage Areas. 3.4 CLEANING A. Following installation, clean dirt, finger marks and other discolored spots from surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace dirty, discolored, damaged, and improperly installed units. 4. TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 3 10 A. Section 03350 — Concrete Repair Work; for concrete floor patching and finish. B. Section 03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete; for new floor at refrigeration cases. TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Removal of existing VCT flooring material and adhesive. 2. Preparation of substrate surfaces, including either grinding or shot blasting of existing concrete slab. 3. Preparation of substrate surfaces. 4. Provide vinyl composition tile, resilient base, and floor transition strips. 5. Provide adhesives for installation of VCT, resilient base and accessories. 6. Cleaning of surfaces and areas of work. 7. Sealing and finishing resilient flooring. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Comply with applicable codes for Class I per ASTM E648 and smoke rating of 450 or less per ASTM E662. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM): 1. ASTM C109 - "Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or 50 -mm Cube Specimens) ". 2. ASTM E648 - "Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor - Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source ". 3. ASTM E662 - "Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials ". B. Federal Specification, (FS): 1. FS SS -W -40, "Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic ". C. International Concrete Repair Institute, (ICRI). P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 D. Target Floor Care Procedures Manual: "Target/Johnson's Signature Ultra High Speed Floor Care Procedures ". 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 95 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature of spaces to receive resilient flooring above 65° F for at least 48 hours before installation is begun. Store materials in these spaces at this temperature for not less than 24 hours before installation. Maintain 70° F temperature during and after installation. 1.7 VCT PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre - installation conference under provisions of Section 01010 prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Require attendance of: 1. OSR. 2. General Contractor. 3. VCT Flooring Contractor. 4. And other parties directly affecting work of this Section. C. Pre - installation conference agenda: 1. Review of drawings and specifications for application of VCT system. 2. Review proposed application procedures and coordination required with other trades. 3. Review proposed changes and deviations from drawings and specifications. 4. Review specific project conditions. 5. Walk through area to receive work of this section. 6. Review required inspections and coordination, and parties required to be involved. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 7. Record: Names, company affiliations, and telephone numbers and email addresses of all attendees, include this information with meeting minutes. a. During the meeting fill out the "VCT Floor Information Worksheet ". Worksheet follows Section 09650 in specifications. Give a copy from meeting to OSR; and at close -out provide fmal completed copy to OSR to be forwarded to Building Services. D. Pre - installation Meeting Minutes: Contractor to record in writing minutes of meeting. Pre - installation conference minutes to include items discussed, decisions and agreements made, including unresolved issues. Distribute minutes within 5 days of conference to: 1. Target Construction Project Manager. 2. General Contractor. 3. VCT Flooring Contractor. 4. Target's Housekeeping Contractor. 5. And other designated parties. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Save all unused vinyl composition tile and resilient base scraps longer than 2 feet in length for Owner's maintenance purposes. Store where directed by OSR at completion of Work. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 1. Match existing tile surrounding areas of new installation. 2.2 RESILIENT BASE (RB) A. Resilient Base: Vinyl top -set coved base, 6" . 1. Color: Match existing. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer of existing tile. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. VCT Trowel Type Adhesives: 1. Water Based Asphalt Rubber: a. Armstrong, S -700 Water Based Asphalt Rubber Adhesive. b. W. W. Henry, 130 Henry Thin Spread Floor Tile Adhesive. TARGET 2. Water Based Latex: a. Armstrong, S -515 Clear Thin Spread Floor Tile Adhesive. b. W. W. Henry, 430 ClearPro Thin Spread Floor Tile Adhesive. 3. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. W. W. Henry Company, Tel.: 800.232.4832. B. Resilient Base & Accessory Adhesive: As recommended by material manufacturer for specific material, location and intended use. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements, "K -15" self - leveling and "SD -P" trowel application. 2. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., "Levelex ". 3. Mapei, "Ultra/Plan" self - leveling and "Plani/Patch" trowel application. 4. Sonneborn, "Sonoflow ". 5. Substitutions in accordance with requirements of Section 01600. B. Provide portland cement -based latex additive underlayment, minimum 4,000 psi compressive strength after 28 days in accordance with ASTM C109, mixed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide compatible primer, if recommended, by manufacturer. C. Gypsum based or latex, non- cementitious underlayments are NOT acceptable. D. In lieu of specified underlayment provide Ardex Engineered Cements, "K -15" self - leveling underlayment for all interior concrete slabs that have been shot blasted. 2.5 CONTROL JOINT FILLER A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product for Control Joint Filler: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements; Aliquippa, PA. (724) 203 -5000. 2. Product: Ardex SD -F Feather Finish. TARGET 2.6 SEALERS, STRIPPERS, CLEANERS AND FINISH SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johnson Wax Professional, Joseph Rodriguez, Corporate Accounts Manager, 800.535.1765, ext. 9142. 1. Protection Coat Finish: "Signature" Floor Finish System. 2. Stripper: "Bravo" Stripper (non - solvent based). 3. Cleaner: "Stride" Neutral Cleaner. 4. Finish System: "Signature" Floor Finish System. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING VCT REMOVAL A. Move fixtures from area to be re- tiled. B. Remove existing VCT tile by using either: 1. SASE Twister (Propane Powered). 2. SASE Cyclone (Battery Powered). 3. SASE Company, Inc. 4. 26423 79 Avenue South 5. Kent, WA 98032 6. Telephone No. 1- 800 -522 -2606 C. Scrape any additional loose adhesive or floor material from slab. D. Work Boundaries: At the end of each work session the work boundary edge condition must be a defined clean edge. This work may require using hand tools to achieve the required edge condition. Work Boundaries will be established by the Contractor after consultation and approval by the OSR. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation of flooring materials indicates acceptance of substrate. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 3.3 FLOOR PREPARATION FOR GINDING A. After the existing VCT flooring has been removed, prepare the existing floor slab by the following treatment: Grinding. 1. Grinder: SASE 780 Multifunctional Grinder with following attributes: a. Weight: 1,100 lbs (minimum) b. Req'd Power: 220volt, 50amp, 3 phase c. 20 Horsepower (minimum) d. Grinding Width: 30.5 inches e. Grinding Head: Planetary f. RPM: Variable (300 - 1,000) g. Grinding Torque: 70.8Foot Pounds (min) 2. Dust Control: SASE Bull 100 Dust Containment System. Contractor's Option: SASE Bull 3600 Dust Containment System. Selected system must provide: a. Filtering: 3 stage system b. Req'd Power: 220volt, 14amp, 3 phase c. 10 Horsepower 3. Manufacturer: 4. SASE Company, Inc. 5. 26423 79 Avenue South 6. Kent, WA 98032 7. Telephone No. 1- 800 -522 -2606 3.4 FLOOR PREPARATION FOR SHOT BLASTING (OPTION) A. After the existing VCT flooring has been removed, prepare the existing floor slab by the following treatment: Shot Blasting. 1. Shot Blast floor surface to achieve International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guidelines, profile #4. Use size #360 shot to achieve #4 profile. 2. Shot Blaster: SASE T -40 Shot Blaster with following attributes: a. Req'd Power: 220volt, 50amp, 3 phase; or 440 volt, 30 amp, 3 phase. b. 20 Horsepower (minimum) c. Blast Width: 16 inches d. Filtering: 8 filter dust collector 3. Manufacturer: 4. SASE Company, Inc. 5. 26423 79 Avenue South 6. Kent, WA 98032 7. Telephone No. 1- 800 -522 -2606 B. Drill and/or core all inserts in slab that are no longer used, fill the remaining hole with non- shrink grout and allow to cure. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 3.5 UNDERLAYMENT A. Mix and install underlayment and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Prime surface with recommended primer if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. B. C. D. E. F. Fill cracks, holes, and voids in subfloor with underlayment in areas to be covered with resilient flooring. Provide transition of underlayment material at change in floor material thickness. Sand underlayment fill as necessary to eliminate telegraphing through finish floor. Buff entire floor slab beneath resilient flooring as necessary to eliminate telegraphing through finish floor from slab below. In lieu of specified underlayment provide Ardex Engineered Cements, "K -15" self - leveling underlayment, with 3/16" minimum thickness, at concrete slabs that have been shot blasted. 3.6 CONTROL JOINT PREPARATION A. Locate all non - moving control joints in concrete slab in areas to receive VCT flooring and re -cut them and clean out and vacuum all debris in control joint including old existing debris. B. Fill the control joint with joint fill material: Ardex SD -F Feather Finish. Force material down into joint with the edge of a trowel, followed by while crossing the joint at a direction of 45 degrees to the joint. Continue process until the entire joint depth is fully filled with joint fill material. C. Allow joint fill material to set (about 30 minutes), and then proceed with application of flooring material. D. Do not overwater the ARDEX SD -F Feather Finish. Overwatering the product and creating a "flowable" consistency can cause the ARDEX SD -F Feather Finish to contract or shrink during curing. This may cause a concave recess to occur along the length of the joint and allow the joint to telegraph through the VCT. Follow the manufacturer's guidelines for proper mixing and application. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 4 TARGET 3.7 FLOORING PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean surfaces. Prime concrete according to adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install resilient flooring and base to surfaces which are thoroughly cured, dry, broom clean, free of dirt, grease, oil, paint, mortar, drywall joint compound, loose underlayment and plaster droppings. C. Surfaces of concrete shall be smooth, dense, and free of dusting, non - compatible curing compounds, and hardeners. D. Test concrete for excessive moisture content and bonding capability with adhesive according to tile manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.8 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not commence work in any area until the work of other trades, including painting, is completed in that area. C. Sweep or vacuum floor to remove all dirt, dust, debris and surface contaminates. D. Use material in each area or room from same factory batch or color run. E. Firmly adhere resilient flooring to substrate and provide a smooth, even fmished surface. F. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturers application rate. Do not use excessive adhesive. Remove surplus adhesive from finished surfaces immediately. G. Allow adhesive to properly "set up ", if additional air is required to dry adhesive, set fans or blowers to blow away from floor surface so surface contaminates will not be blown into wet adhesive. H. Test adhesive for proper "set ", do not allow adhesive to dry, causing adhesion failure. I. Trowel Adhesive Installation Option: To aid in eliminating adhesive ridges telegraphing on resilient flooring, replace trowel blade every 1,500 s.f. or in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. A. Install flooring square with axis of room. Lay out pattern in accordance with Drawings so resilient flooring at edges of panels are more than 1/2 tile in width, insofar as possible. ■+ Start at center of room or as otherwise determined by the Drawings. Lay with uniform tight joints, accurately aligned, with alternating grain checker board pattern. Cut and fit to walls and partitions. B. Cut flooring neatly at walls and partitions so that flooring joint will be covered by base. Extend flooring neatly into feature strips and edging strips. C. Roll all VCT newly installed tile work with an approved 1001b. steel drum roller in two directions perpendicular to each other. D. Inspect the floor for compliance to physical and visual standards, if compliant proceed with "Protective Coats" (as directed); if non- compliant re -do all required work until VCT floor meets standards for compliance. • 1 i 1 TARGET 3.9 RESILIENT FLOORING 3.10 BASE A. Install with tight butt joints, and top and bottom edges in firm contact with walls and floor. Install base full length without joints insofar as possible. Make no splices within one foot of corners. 3.11 REMODELING CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove excessive adhesive, sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly to remove all construction debris and miscellaneous installation soiling. B. Immediately after sweeping or vacuuming apply at least two protective coats (2,000 s.f. per gal.). Use Signature floor finish (provided and applied by Contractor) for remodel applications. These are "Protective Coats" NOT "Slop Coats" (i.e. Slop Coat - poured directly on tile in a pool and spread evenly). Allow floor to dry thoroughly - approximately 3/4 hour drying time typically between coats; longer time with high humidity and/or low temperatures; shorter time with low humidity and /or high temperatures. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 C. During the next five days clean floor by damp mopping with an approved neutral cleaner, carefully scrubbing black marks and excessive soil. Always follow manufacturer's recommended dilution ratios and application instructions. D. After five days, normal store maintenance may be resumed including the build up of additional coats of wax. STRIPPING IS NOT MANDATORY! If stripping is required to remove excessive dirt refer to "Cleaning or Stripping" instructions in paragraph `B" of "Finishing" Article below. 3.12 FINISHING A. Coordinate and schedule cleaning operations with OSR and Target's Store Team and use Target's Night Maintenance Contractor for final stripping and finishing before turnover day. B. Cleaning or Stripping: 1. Dust mop floor. 2. Cleaning/Stripping: If floor is in good condition use "Cleaning Instructions ", if floor is badly soiled and or scratched use "Stripping Instructions ": a. Cleaning Instructions: 1) Scrub floor with neutral detergent solution, using a single -disc floor machine (360 rpm or less), equipped with a scrub brush or a scrubbing pad (3M blue or green, or equal). Proceed with other instructions. b. Stripping Instructions (for badly soiled or scratched floors only): 1) Strip the protection coat finish, using a single -disc machine and scrubbing device as noted in "Cleaning Instructions" above. Instead of cleaning the floor strip it with an approved non - solvent stripper. DO NO USE a mop - on/mop -off, no-rinse, or no- machine scrub stripper under any circumstances! Always follow manufacturer's recommended dilution ratios and application instructions. ). Proceed with other instructions. 3. Thoroughly rinse floor and allow to dry. C. Finishing: RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1. Follow the finishing procedures for the finish coatings in accordance with the Target floor care procedures manual for a five coat build up application. Always follow manufacturer's recommended application instructions. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 6 END OF SECTION TARGET 1. 1 VCT Floor Information Worksheet At the time of the Pre - Installation VCT Flooring Conference the parties present will fill out this "VCT Floor Information Worksheet ". Fill in all information, if items are left blank they must be filled in and resubmitted before project closeout. Store Name: Store Location: Print Name Date: Sign Name Company Email Telephone No.: OSR: General Contractor: VCT Flooring Contractor: Underlayment Representative: VCT Flooring Tile Representative: VCT Adhesive Representative: Floor Polish Representative: New (or Expansion Remodel) Concrete Floors that receive VCT Flooring: ❑ Yes (Fill out below) ❑ No (skip to Existing Floors Being Re -Tiled questions) Concrete Mix: Water used per cubic yard (noted in lbs.) Concrete Strength PSI: Calcium Chloride Tests: (list here and attach report to this worksheet) ■ ■ Air Temperature at VCT Installation: Floor Temperature at VCT Installation: Relative Humidity (R.H.) at VCT Installation: Floor Prep (fill this out only if new slab requires additional floor prep): . Concrete Curing Agent (Manufacturer & Product): Underlayment ((Manufacturer, Type, & Product): • Adhesive (Manufacturer & Product): . Adhesive set -up time (time between applying adhesive and setting tile): VCT Tile (Manufacturer & Product): • Existing Floors Being Re- Tiled: Calcium Chloride Tests: (list here and attach report to this worksheet) a Air Temperature at VCT Installation: Floor Temperature at VCT Installation: Relative Humidity (R.H.) at VCT Installation: Floor Prep (either grinding or shot blasting): Abatement Prior to this VCT flooring installation (call 612- 761 - 1412 / environmental .questions@target.com): ❑ Yes (if yes, the only acceptable floor prep is shot blasting and self - leveling underlayment) ❑ No (if no, either shot blasting or grinding is acceptable and the accompanying underlayment) Underlayment ((Manufacturer, Type, & Product): Adhesive (Manufacturer & Product): Adhesive set -up time (time between applying adhesive and setting tile): VCT Tile (Manufacturer & Product): si TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 09723 SEAMLESS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Freezer floor coating (SF). 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 03300 - Cast - In - Place Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit material description and installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" square samples of the flooring system in each color and texture specified for approval. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Approved applicator shall have been pre - qualified in each phase of surface preparation and application of the specified flooring system and be certified by the manufacturer to apply same. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered in original manufacturer's sealed containers, with pertinent labels intact and legible. Store materials in protected area at a temperature between 70 degrees F. and 75 degrees F. for a minimum of 72 hours before installation. Keep materials, bags and containers dry. Follow manufacturer's specific instructions and safety practices for storage and handling. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The material and air temperatures shall be in the range of 40 degrees F. to 85 degrees F. during application and cure. B. Maintain a uniform temperature throughout the work area without drafts. Air currents shall be diffused to avoid being blown directly on or across flooring until it is fully cured. Maintain a minimum temperature of40 degrees F. for a period of 1 hour. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 C. The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 percent and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 degrees F. above the dew point. 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Abrasive Freezer Floor Coating: 1. Degussa Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Dr, Shakopee, MN 55379 - Ph: 800- 433 -9517 (formerly Silikal Resin Systems). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Abrasive Freezer Floor Coating: 1. Primer /Sealer: Degadur R41 I. 2. Acrylic Reactive Resin Floor Topping: Degadur 332 SLCQ Resin, 1/8" thick. 3. Top Coats: 2 coats: Degadur 410 Colorless Top Coat Resin. 4. Nominal System Thickness: 1/4" with primer, resin floor toping, broadcast material, and top coats. 5. Sealant: Degadur 332 Flexible Joint Sealant 6. Color: Q8. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION A. General: 1. The concrete in floors to be covered with these materials must have been cured a minimum of 30 days at or above 70 degrees F. and must have less than 7% moisture content. 2. Entire concrete floor shall receive steel shot blast preparation to remove laitance and foreign matter, which may interfere with subsequent bond of flooring. Acid etching is NOT acceptable. SEAMLESS FLOORING 09723 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 a. Shot Blast floor surface to achieve International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guidelines, profile 114. Use size #360 shot to achieve #4 profile. B. Ensure that adequate lighting has been installed to support the surface preparation and application efforts. C. Surface irregularities of 1/32" deep or more will telegraph through to the surface. Use manufacturer's standard recommended filler as directed in manufacturer's installation instructions before applying seamless flooring. D. Grind down ridges and sharp projections as necessary. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply each component of flooring systems in compliance with manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic wearing surface, uninterrupted except at divider strips, sawn joints or other types of joints, indicated or required. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Provide Degadur 332 Flexible Joint Sealant manufactured by flooring manufacturer at all sawcut, control, expansion, and cold joints in concrete slabs. D. Self - leveling (Quartz Body Coat) mix including fine aggregates or fillers over fully cured primer at spreading rates required to produce minimum thickness indicated. Check thickness at frequent and regular intervals by method recommended by manufacturer. Perform early wet broadcast of colored quartz for full resin penetration. E. Top Coat Application: After Colored Quartz Body Coat has cured 1 -hour minimum, apply the 2 clear top coats. 1. First Top Coat: 16 -20 mils, cure minimum 1 hour. 2. Second Top Coat: 14 mils, cure minimum 1 hour before allowing traffic. F. The finished flooring system shall be uniform in color, texture and appearance. Edges that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform and cosmetically acceptable. SEAMLESS FLOORING 09723 - 2 TARGET h 1. The fmished appearance of this flooring system must be similar to the accepted samples and must meet acceptance criteria before fmal acceptance by the Architect. G. Cure flooring materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of curing process. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove material spatters and other foreign substances resulting from the work of this Section. Remove masking and covers carefully to avoid contaminating the surrounding area and damaging the flooring. B. Repair damage resulting from the application and from the cleaning effort. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect flooring materials from damage and wear during construction operation. Where temporary covering is required for this purpose, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for protective materials and the method of their application. Remove temporary covering just prior to cleaning for final inspection. END OF SECTION 1 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Exterior painting systems. 3. Interior painting systems. 4. Surface preparation of existing surfaces. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. B. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum board sample surfaces and surface treatment. Section 09950 - Wall Covering; for wall covering materials. Divisions 15 and 16 - Identification and labeling of mechanical and electrical equipment, valves, pipes, and conduit. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D523: Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. B. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): 1. PDCA P4: Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and Decorating. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Paint: Paint system materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats, and of various degrees of opacity or sheen. B. Sheen: Specular gloss of paint finish as determined in accordance with The Master Painters Institute (MPI), Guide for use in Defining Gloss and Sheen Levels. 1. Flat: refers to a lusterless or matte finish; MPI Classification "Gloss Level 1 ". a. gloss range below 5 units when measured at an 60- degree meter. b. gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 85- degree meter. P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 2. Eggshell: refers to low - sheen finish; MPI Classification "Gloss Level 2 ". a. gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 60- degree meter. b. gloss range between 10 and 35 when measured at a 85- degree meter. 3. Satin: refers to low -sheen finish; MPI Classification "Gloss Level 4 ". a. gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. b. gloss range 35 units minimum when measured at an 85- degree meter. 4. Semigloss: refers to medium -sheen finish; MPI Classification "Gloss Level 5 ". a. gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 5. Full Gloss: refers to high -sheen finish; MPI Classification "Gloss Level 6 ". a. gloss range between 70 and 85 when measured at a 60- degree meter. C. Color: Identified by a number after an abbreviation "C ". (C - X). D. Paint System (PS): Two or more coats of paint, generally consisting of a prime coat and one or more coats of finish paint. 1. Paint system includes surface preparation and required pre- treatment. E. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (MDFT): Specified by minimum dry film thickness in mils, per coat. Where manufacturer's recommendations require greater dry film thickness, or if no MDFT is specified, follow manufacturer's recommendations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include primers and miscellaneous materials. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. a. Indicate each material and cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. b. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification and color number. PAINTING 09900 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 TARGET PAINTING 09900 - 2 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. 1 a i 1 I I • v • • TARGET C. Color Samples: 1. Submit for approval to Target's CPR, (2) two paper- backed samples, standard draw - down type, of each color and sheen combination indicated. Samples will be reviewed for sheen as well as for color. a. Clear or semi - transparent wood fmishes if specified: Submit on wood specified, as a complete system with stain if any. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator's Qualifications: Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Products must meet current local and federal VOC requirements. C. Field Sample Panel: As directed by CPR, paint (1) one wall or other surface to determine acceptability of finish sheen and color. 1. Refer to Section 09250 for sample gypsum board surfaces to be painted. D. Product Identification: Provide manufacturer's product identification on product containers same as that on final material list. In addition, provide color identification, analysis of contents, instructions for application and for reducing (if applicable) on containers. E. Pre - installation Conference: Contractor, installer, CPR, and representatives of other affected trades to meet at Site to review installation procedure, acceptance of substrate surfaces, and coordination with other trades. 1. Schedule meeting at least 1 week before start of installation. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's product identification and the following information. 1. Color Name and Number. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Remove oily rags, waste, etc., every night and take every precaution to prevent fire. 2. Store in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight. P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 3. Protect from the elements and from damage. 4. Store at a temperature of not less than 50 degrees F. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for conditions under which paint systems can be applied, and the following: 1. Maintain ambient temperature above 50 degrees F. during and 72 hours after installation. 2. Apply water -borne paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperature is between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F. 3. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperature is between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F. 4. Do not apply paint in precipitation, fog or mist, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F. above dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. B. Do not apply paint systems in areas where dust is being generated. C. Do not apply coatings until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer. Test with a moisture meter. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish (1) one gallon of each color for all major substrates for use by Owner. 1. Before Substantial Completion of Work, deliver extra materials to Project and store where directed by CPR. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable National Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co., (BM). 2. ICI Paint Stores, Inc., (ICI). 3. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh Paints, (PPG). 4. Pratt and Lambert (P &L). 5. Sherwin- Williams Co., (SW). 6. TK Products, Minnetonka, MN., (TK). PAINTING 09900 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 B. Acceptable Specialty Product Manufacturers: 1. Tnemec Co., (Tnemec). 2. Vanex, Inc., Mt. Vernon, IL., 800.851.7390. (Vanex). 2.2 COLORS A. Match colors pre - selected by Owner as indicated on Drawings and scheduled below: 1. (C -5) Beige: IPS -6 Vanex System # 50- 2106. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another, with factory- applied primers and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's specified paint material of the various coating types that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint - material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Exterior Steel Primer: 1. BM: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer. 2. ICI: "Devflex" 4020 DTM Interior/ Exterior Waterborne Primer. 3. PPG: 90 -712 Series "Pittech" Int/Ext Acrylic DTM Primer. 4. P &L: Z1003 "SuPrime 3" Int/Ext Latex Metal Primer. 5. SW: "Pro-Cryl" Universal Primer B66- 310. 6. TK: TK -27 Primer. B. Exterior Galvanized Steel Primer: 1. BM: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer. 2. ICI: "Devflex" 4020 DTM Interior/ Exterior Waterborne Primer. 3. PPG: 90 -712 Series " Pittech" Int/Ext Acrylic DTM Primer. 4. P &L: Z1003 "SuPrime 3 "Int/Ext Latex Metal Primer. 5. SW: "Pro-CryI" Universal Primer B66- 310. 6. TK: TK -115 Primer. PAINTING 09900 - 4 TARGET C. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: 1. BM: "SuperSpec" Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253. 2. ICI: 1000 -1200 "Dulux Ultra" Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer. 3. PPG: 6-2 "Speedhide" Interior Latex Sealer. 4. P &L: Z8160 "Pro-Hide Gold" Latex Wall Primer. 5. SW: "PrepRite" 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W200. 6. TK: TK -323 PVA Primer. D. Interior "High- Build" Gypsum Board Primer for use with C -9: 1. ICI: 1040 High Build Fill & Seal. 2. PPG: 6-4 Interior High Build Sealer. 3. SW: " PrepRite" High Build Primer Surfacer. 4. TK: TK -Tri-Wall Plus Primer. 5. BM: Comparable product. 6. P &L: Comparable product. E. Wall Covering Primer: 1. BM: "Superhide" Latex Primer/Undercoater 284. 2. ICI: 1020 -1200 "Ultra- Hide" Interior Acrylic Latex All Purpose Primer- Sealer. 3. PPG: 6 -855 "Speedhide" Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. 4. P &L: Z1005 "SuPrime 5" Pre -Wall covering Primer. 5. SW: "PrepRite" Pre- Wallcovering Primer B28W980. 6. TK: TK -368 Primer. F. Interior Wood Primer: 1. BM: "SuperSpec" Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253. 2. ICI: 1020 -1200 "Ultra- Hide" Interior Acrylic Latex All Purpose Primer- Sealer. 3. PPG: 6 -855 "Speedhide" Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. 4. P &L: Z1001 "SuPrime 1 " Int/Ext 100% Latex Primer. 5. SW: "PrepRite" Classic Interior Latex Primer. 6. TK: TK 27 Primer. 2.5 LATEX FINISHES A. Interior Latex Flat: h TARGET 1. BM: 275 Moorcraft "SuperSpec" Latex Flat. ry 2. ICI: 1210 "Ultra- Hide" Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint. 3. PPG: 6 -70 Series, "Speedhide" Interior Latex Flat. 4. P &L: Z8100 "Pro-Hide Gold" Interior Latex Flat. 5. SW: "ProMar 200" Latex Flat, B30W200. 6. TK: TK -309 Heavy Duty Interior Flat Latex. kiJ B. Interior Latex Eggshell: 1. BM: 274 Moorcraft "SuperSpec" Latex Eggshell Enamel. 2. ICI: 1412 "Ultra- Hide" Latex Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel. 3. PPG: 6 -411 Series Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel. 4. P &L: Z8200 "Pro-Hide Gold" Interior Latex Eggshell. 5. SW: "ProMar 200" Latex Eggshell, B20W200. 6. TK: TK -380 Heavy Duty Eggshell Latex. C. Interior Latex Semi - Gloss: 1. BM: 276 Moorcraft "SuperSpec" Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. 2. ICI: 1416 "Ultra- Hide" Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel. 3. PPG: 6 -510 Series Interior Latex Semi - Gloss Enamel 4. P &L: Z8300 "Pro-Hide Gold" Interior Latex Semi - Gloss. 5. SW: "ProMar 200" Latex Semi - Gloss, B31 W200. 6. TK: TK -382 Latex Semi - Gloss. D. Exterior 100% Acrylic Gloss Enamel: 1. BM: M28 Acrylic Gloss Enamel 2. ICI: Dulux 3028 Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish. 3. PPG: "Pitt- Tech" IntlExt High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel. 4. P &L: Z2900 "Enducryl" Acrylic Enamel. 5. SW: DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss B66W100. 6. TK: TK -7002 Acrylic Gloss. 2.6 EPDXY FINISHES A. Interior Epoxy Semi- Gloss: 1. BM: M43S Acrylic Epoxy Semi -Gloss Enamel. 2. ICI: "Tru- Glaze" 4418 Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Coating P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 627 3. PPG: Interior Epoxy Semi Gloss 98 -1 / 98 -100 Series Aquapon Water Base Epoxy. 4. P &L: Z5300 "Tech- Gard" Waterborne Epoxy. 5. SW: "Epo-Plex" Multi Mill WB High Lustre B71 -100. 6. TK: TK -397 Epoxy Semi - Gloss. 2.7 SPECIAL FINISHES A. Interior Quick -Dry Satin Acrylic: 1. Vanex: Break - Through Satin Acrylic. 2. TK: TK -396. 2.8 MIXING A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's instructions without modification. Use premixed paints insofar as possible. Thin only as permitted by manufacturer's label instructions, and avoid unnecessary thinning. B. Primer Tint: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly clean and dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Examine factory finished and primed surfaces to be painted, and verify compatibility of existing material with paint to be applied. 1. Report incompatible or unsuitable materials immediately to CPR in writing. PAINTING 09900 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect surfaces not being painted concurrently, or surfaces not to be painted, property of Owner, and fmished Work of other trades. 1. Remove device plates, escutcheons, and similar removable items before painting. Reinstall items after fmal coat of paint has dried. 2. Apply masking over UL labels and other items that cannot be removed before painting surface. 3. Cover floors and fixed equipment with drop cloths. 4. Remove protective coverings and masking when painting of surfaces is complete. 3.3 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES A. General: 1. Clean and prepare surfaces according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for specific substrate. 2. Mildew Removal: Scrub with approved cleaning/bleaching solution, rinse with potable water; let thoroughly dry. 3. Apply paint only to surfaces which are thoroughly dry, clean, and free of dust and properly prepared to receive intended finish. B. Factory Primed Materials: Fully prime the following factory primed materials with specified primer in Paint System indicated for specific substrate. 1. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Exterior sectional overhead doors. 3. Interior steel columns. PAINTING 09900 - 6 C. Unprimed Ferrous Metals: Clean un- galvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. D. Primed Ferrous Metals: Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire - brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer. TARGET E. Unprimed Galvanized Metal: Clean galvanized surfaces with non - petroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants before priming. Clean and touch up chipped and abraded areas in shop coats with primer before applying specified field coats. F. Wood to be Painted: Sand, as necessary to remove surface defects, and remove dust. 1. Back -prime interior millwork and trim before installation. 2. Fill voids and nail holes with putty after primer is dry. 3. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of wood doors with primer. G. Gypsum Wallboard: Fill minor irregularities in interior gypsum board with spackle and irregularities in exterior gypsum ceiling board with exterior joint compound according to requirements of Section 09250. Sand smooth, level with surface, when dry. Avoid raising nap of paper. Remove dust prior to painting. 3.4 PREPARATION OF EXISTING SURFACES A. Previously painted surfaces: 1. All previously painted surfaces should be completely dry, smooth- sanded, clean and free of dust, dirt, powdery residue, grease, oil, wax or any other contaminants such as flaking or peeling paint before paint application is started. 2. All contaminants should be treated or removed. 3. All defects should be corrected as necessary. 4. Dull glossy old paints by sanding to provide proper "tooth" for new paint system. 5. Patch holes and cracks with an appropriate patching compound and sand smooth prior to priming. 3.5 APPLICATION A. Apply materials according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply each coat at rate recommended by manufacturer for the type of surface and with a dry film thickness not less than that recommended. OW r eid 1 1 TARGET B. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before sanding or applying subsequent coats. Lightly sand each coat of varnish and enamel applied to wood or metal with fine sandpaper and wipe clean with a tack rag before next coat is applied. Avoid cutting through edges. C. Before applying second coat to concrete, touch up hot spots and allow to dry. D. Finish all surfaces of wood and metal doors after fitting as described in paint notes on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK A. Paint mechanical and electrical items as scheduled according to location (exterior or interior) and type of material. Paint small items such as grilles and registers occurring in painted walls and ceilings with same type of finish as wall or ceiling. B. Paint exposed surfaces of mechanical and electrical materials and equipment on exterior of building. Paint ventilators, stacks, vents, louvers, grilles, piping, ductwork and conduit including aluminum and copper. Do not paint completely factory finished items and rooftop gas piping unless specifically indicated. C. Paint exposed surfaces of mechanical and electrical materials and equipment occurring in finished spaces or adjacent to finished surfaces including, but not limited to the following: grilles, registers, piping, radiation, ducts, piping, jacketed insulation, conduit, panels and cabinets. D. Paint security devices, conduit, and accessories on doors to match door color. E. Paint hangers and supports for materials and equipment indicated to be painted. 3.7 PAINTING SCHEDULES - GENERAL A. Painting schedules outline the primary paint systems required. For substrates and conditions not scheduled, provide paint systems recommended by paint manufacturers. Submit proposed paint material product data for approval. B. Location and colors related to paint systems specified herein are indicated on Drawings. 3.8 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (IPS) A. IPS - New - Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, Borrowed Lights, Metal Handrails, Railings, Misc. Ferrous Metal: 1. Primer: 1 coat, Interior Steel Primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Latex Semi - Gloss. B. IPS -6: Existing - Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, Borrowed Lights, Steel Columns; Satin Finish: 1. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Quick -Dry Acrylic; Satin. END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900 - 7 r 1 • w TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-627 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Fiberglass reinforced plastic, (FRP), sanitary wall covering. 3. Installation of Owner Furnished acrylic PVC sheet wall covering. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Owner will furnish acrylic PVC sheet wall covering (Kydex), including matching preformed corners, corner guards, and column wrap, for installation under this section. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealing; for joint sealant product specifications. C. Section 09900 - Painting; for priming of gypsum board to receive vinyl coated fabric wall covering. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic: Conform to applicable code for Class III (Class C) flame /smoke ratings of 200/450 or less when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. B. Acrylic PVC Sheet: Conform to applicable code for Class II (Class B) flame /smoke ratings of 25/40 or less when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM E84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". B. Federal Specification, (FS): 1. FS CCC- W-408, "Wall Covering, Vinyl Coated ". C. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL): 1. UL 723, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". 1.5 SUBMITTALS SECTION 09950 WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Submit for fiberglass reinforced plastic wall coverings. 2. Include adhesive, fasteners and accessories required. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply wall covering when the temperature is below 60 deg F, or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer. B. Before wall covering is commenced each room shall be clean and free of dust, dirt, and debris. Areas shall be well lighted during wall covering operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC, FRP (WC -3) A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.90 inch thick, USDA approved, textured surface wall panels with Class III /Class C fire rating. 1. Flame Spread: <200. 2. Smoke Developed: <450. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Glasteel Inc.: Collierville, TN; Tel.: 800.238.5546; General Purpose Liner Panel; Color: 659, "White ". 2. Kemlite Company. Joliet, IL; Tel.: 800.435.0080; KemLite Glasbord -P; Color: 85, "White ". 3. Kalwall Corporation: Manchester, NH; Tel.: 800.526.1609; Kal -Lite General Purpose Fiberglass Sheeting; Color: 101 - T, "Opaque White ". 4. Lasco Panel Products: Florence, KY; Tel.: 800.626.1220; LascoBoard Sta- Clean; Color: 488, "White ". C. Provide largest standard size material available to minimize joints. D. Provide manufacturer's standard plastic corner, perimeter, and joint molding, and recommended fasteners and adhesive. Match color of fiberglass reinforced plastic sheet. WALL COVERING 09950 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 2.2 ACRYLIC PVC SHEET (K -1) — OWNER FURNISHED A. Acrylic PVC Sheet: 0.040" thick sheet, with matching extruded PVC wainscot trim cap. 1. Manufacturer and Product: C/S Group; C/S Acrovyn. Tel: 800.233.8493. 2. Colors: a. Acrylic Sheet (K - 1): No. 103, "Beige "; Pebblette Texture. b. Wainscot Trim Cap: No. 103, "Beige "; Smooth texture. 2.3 SUBSTRATE CLEANER A. VM &P Naphtha, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 ADHESIVES A. Acrylic PVC Sheet: 1. For non - porous substrates such as metal or plastic, use DAP, Inc., "Weldwood" Non - Flammable Contact Cement. 2. For porous substrates such as gypsum board, plywood or concrete masonry units, use 3M "Fastbond 30 -NF" contact cement, K -Bond contact cement, or Super - Tek "XT- 2000" water -based mastic. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT A. SLNT -4 as specified in Section 07900. Color: Gray or White to match adjacent surface. A. B. WALL COVERING 09950 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not apply wall covering until surfaces to receive wall covering are thoroughly dry, smooth and even, clean and free of dust. B. Clean surfaces to remove dust, dirt, oil, grease and other deleterious materials. 3.2 APPLICATION - GENERAL Apply wall covering according to the manufacturer's instructions. Where resilient base is scheduled, trim wall covering at a point 1/2" below top height of base to permit maximum base adhesion to wall surface. C. Completed installation shall be neat, clean and firmly adhered to the underlying surface. D. Protect floors and adjacent surfaces from damage. TARGET 3.3 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) INSTALLATION A. Install using mechanical fasteners and adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. Lay out to minimize joints. B. Install plastic molding at perimeters, corners, and joints. Install a continuous bead of SLNT -4 in molding channels prior to installation. Seal perimeters abutting other materials with a continuous bead of SLNT -4. C. Remove excess adhesive and sealant from molding channels and face of FRP immediately after installation. 3.4 ACRYLIC PVC SHEET INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1. Verify that wall or column surfaces are dry, free from dirt, grease, loose paint and scale. Follow adhesive manufacturer's instructions for wall surface preparation. Lightly sand gypsum board joints, joint compound and rough spots on walls. Remove dust and prime joint compound with shellac to assure adhesion of adhesive. On painted substrates, test paint adhesion by applying cellophane tape or masking tape and pulling off sharply. If paint comes off, remove remaining paint before installing acrylic PVC sheet. Clean substrate by wiping with substrate cleaner. 2. Bring acrylic PVC sheet into room and store at room temperature of not less than 65 deg. F. for 24 hours before installing. If roll stock acrylic PVC sheet is used, cut panels from roll and allow to lay flat before installing. B. Layout: 1. Outline area to be covered with a chalk line or masking tape to insure a neat installation. When installing acrylic PVC sheet as wainscoting, make sure the sight line at top edge is level. When installing acrylic PVC sheet as full wall covering, make sure vertical edge is plumb. Scribe acrylic PVC sheet at top to fit contour. ■ r j TARGET 2. Install corner guards and caps in conformance with details and manufacturer's instructions, at corners and tops of partitions where indicated. 3. Install column wraps as indicated on Drawings. C. Installation: 1. Install acrylic PVC sheet with textured (rough) surface exposed. Use 1/16" thick gap joint between sheets for 0.040" or thicker sheets. 2. Apply two coats of adhesive to substrate. First coat acts as a sealer for the surface, and shall be allowed to dry thoroughly. Apply with a short-nap roller and cut in corners with a trim brush. Wipe back of acrylic PVC sheet with substrate cleaner, then apply one coat of adhesive. Follow adhesive manufacturer's instructions for amount of adhesive and drying time. 3. Bond the cemented surfaces together within time limits set by adhesive manufacturer, after coats of adhesive have dried properly. If adhesive becomes too dry, recoat and redry as above. Since adhesive bonds immediately upon contact, use slip sheets to prevent accidental bonding. 4. Roll entire surface with a heavy roller to insure complete bonding. Remove masking tape or chalk line and clean up excess adhesive. END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 WALL COVERING 09950 - 3 • MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 1.1 SUMMARY 2.1 CORNER GUARDS SECTION 10010 PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Stainless Steel Corner Guards: 1 -1/2" x 1- 1/2" x 4' -0" long, 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish, adhesive applied. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products: a. American Floor Products, Inc.; Model No. CG -2143. b. Curran Engineering Company, Inc.; Van Nuys, CA; Tel: 800.643.6353; Model No. CE- 210 -505. c. Comparable products from other manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Install specialties according to manufacturer's instructions. Locate as indicated on Drawings. B. Install specialties plumb, true and square, in a d neat, rigid, and substantial manner. C. After erection, clean surfaces. 3.2 CORNER GUARDS A. Mount stainless steel corner guards where indicated on the Drawings according to manufacturer's instructions. Start bottom end of corner guard at floor. B. Screw mount Lexan corner guards at all outside corners covered with vinyl fabric wall coverings and as indicated on the Drawings according to manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10010 - 1 NOTE: THIS SECTION IS INCLUDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. IT COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT AND WORK. A. This section applies to furnishing walk -in cooler and freezer boxes for Non -Super Target Stores, Including delivery and warranty. In general walk -in boxes consist of insulated panels, alignment strips, seismic re- enforcement parts, trim, lighting accessories, fasteners, pre -hung low temperature insulated door sections with door heaters, hardware, thermometer, electrical junction boxes, and conduits 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". B. NSF- National Sanitation Foundation. C. USDA United States Department of Agriculture. D. ASTM- American Society of Testing • Materials. E. UBC- Uniform Building Code. F. BOCCA. G. State of Wisconsin Material Approval. 0 TARGET SECTION 13040 STOCKROOM WALK IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. PART 1 - GENERAL Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for material and equipment. C. Section 01700 - Project Closeout. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. UL approved panel. UL approved electric. NSF 7 approved construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.7 WARRANTY P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 A. Comply with requirements of Section 01300, Submittals, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide complete Shop drawings, installation instructions and parts lists, to the General Contract no later than 2 weeks prior to the under floor "A" change issue deadline. 1. Room arrangement, dimensions, and other physical features. 2. Layout and identification of all enclosure components. 3. Itemized list of all equipment provided and a list of work required for field installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Freight to jobsite shall be included in manufacturer's price. B. Schedule delivery of walk -in box enclosure components to job site and coordinate installing contractor as directed by Owner or Owners Site Representative (OSR). A. The manufacturer shall warrant walk -in box insulated panels against defective materials for a period of five years from date of grand opening. B. Hardware and electrical components shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from date of grand opening. C. Manufacturer at his, own expense must immediately correct defects of any kind due to faulty workmanship, materials or shipping. Warranty shall not apply to injuries or damages occurring after grand opening due to "Act of God ", fire, violence, abuse, or carelessness of separate Contractors or Agents of the Owner; however, Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs necessary to keep equipment in operating condition without voiding manufacturer's warranty or relieving manufacturer of responsibilities during warranty period. STOCKROOM WALK -IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS 13040 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -627 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer for Walk -in Cooler/Freezer Boxes subject to compliance with the specifications is National Cooler. Contact information is as follows: Chase Faulder Kysor Panel Systems 4201 North Beach Street Fort Worth, TX 76137 Phone: 800.633.3426 x6357 E -mail: cfaulder @kysorpanel.com 2.2 GENERAL A. Walk -in Coolers shall be wood frame 3 'h" thick panel with foamed in place UL listed class 1 urethane non - cfc insulation, metal pans, cam lock fasteners on wall sections and lag down lids. Walk in Freezers shall be wood frame 5 "or greater thickness panel with foamed in place UL listed class 1 urethane non -cfc insulation, metal pans, cam lock fasteners on wall sections and lag down lids. 1. Urethane shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke not more than 450 when tested in the maximum thickness intended from use in accordance with ASTM84. 2. Urethane shall have flash and self - ignition temperatures of not less than 600 °F and degrees F respectively. 3. Thermal conductivity (k) of not more than .125 BTU/hr /ft / °F/ in. 4. Overall heat transfer coefficient (U) of not more than .030 BTU/Hr ft B. 26 Ga. Stucco Galvanized or 26 Ga. Stucco White enamel, or Plywood wall and ceiling finishes as noted on the Target Cooler Drawings. C. Floors: 1. Where the Freezer /Cooler is a single unit and the freezer is accessed thru cooler: Provide Quarry Tile floor in cooler and sealed concrete in the freezer, unless otherwise specified. STOCKROOM WALK -IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS 13040 - 2 TARGET D. Provide thermal break threshold between cooler and freezer (where applicable) and between stock room and freezer or cooler when each has a separate door from the stockroom, heated door jambs and heated pressure relief vents, light switches, and 2 Y2" dial thermometer, to be provided and installed as noted on Target Cooler Drawings. E. 11 Ga. Galvanized steel threshold on all pallet doors. F. Walk in Cooler and Freezer doors shall be in- fitting type with 18" high treadbrite kick plates interior and exterior. G. Kason door hardware approved for walk in cooler and freezer doors. 1. 3'x7' doors- 2- #1245 Hinges, 1 -K56 Latch. 2. 4'x7' doors- 3- #1245 Hinges, 1 -K56 Latch. 3. 5'x8' doors- 3- #1277 Hinges, 1 -K55 Latch. H. Manufacturer to provide and install Square D brand switch, model 9007C543B2 at top of walk in freezer door to operate refrigeration solenoid and evaporator coil fans I. All walk in doorjambs to have 1" x 1" 18Ga Stainless steel jamb guard on interior and exterior jambs with exterior header. J. Common walls between walk in coolers and freezers to be a minimum of 5" thick panels as described in "A" above. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION TARGET • • r SECTION 15010 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section applies to commercial and other duty refrigerant containing appliances and systems. It is a supplement to construction contract Documents, standard requests for proposals, service agreements or other purchasing documents for these types of equipment, providing the minimum refrigeration related requirements necessary for Target to maintain compliance with 1990 Clean Air Act (CAA). Examples of equipment covered include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Under Counter Refrigerators and Freezers. 2. Self- Contained Refrigerated Display Cases. 3. Refrigerated Prep Tables. 4. Chilled Beverage Dispensing Machines. 5. Soft Serve Ice Cream Freezers. 6. Ice Machines. 7. Electric Water Coolers. B. In general this Section requires that suppliers of refrigerant containing appliances and systems provide necessary labeling and documentation, comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations, and follow Target's procedures. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 15440 — Plumbing Fixtures. B. Section 15690 — Refrigerant Containing Equipment Tracking Form. C. Section 15691 — Service Refrigerant Tracking Form. D. Purchase agreements for store and food service equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ARI: "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". B. UL: "Underwriters Laboratories Inc.' ". 1.4 DEFINITIONS P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 A. Comfort Cooling — Cooling systems used to condition spaces for human comfort. B. Commercial Refrigeration — Cooling systems utilized for preservation of perishable goods or merchandise. C. Other Refrigeration — Cooling systems which remove heat from a utility and do not fit in comfort or commercial categories. Examples are drinking fountains and ice makers. D. OSR — Target On -Site Representative. 1.5 DESIGN AND LABELLING REQUIREMENTS A. Appliance or system shall be approved as a complete assembly and bear appropriate UL labels. B. Appliance or system shall be tested to appropriate ARI standard. C. Appliance or system shall utilize one of the following Non -ozone depleting refrigerants: 1. R -404a. 2. R -134a. 3. R -410a. D. Appliance or system must have a manufacturers' name tag mounted in an esthetically acceptable visible location that does not require disassembly or relocation of machine when installed for store use. (Field relocation or installation of duplicate name tags will be at manufacturers' expense.) E. At a minimum manufacturers' name tag must provide the following information: 1. Manufacturers' Name. 2. Manufacturers' Equipment Model Number. 3. Manufacturers' Serial Number. 4. Date of Manufacture. 5. Type of Refrigerant Contained in Refrigeration Circuit. 6. Quantity of Refrigerant Contained in Refrigeration Circuit. F. Manufacturers' name tag on equipment to be installed out doors shall be metal stamped or engraved tags permanently attached to unit with mechanical fasteners. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 15010 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Equipment manufacturers, sales representatives, transfer agents, installing contractors or service providers shall, as directed by this specification section, submit to Target, completed copies of Target Refrigerant Containing Equipment Tracking Forms (Refer to Section 15690), Installation Operation and Maintenance Manual, and if applicable a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document; at the time when appliance or system is shipped to job site. (These documents are to be electronic format, NO Hard Copies!) Submit to: Target Refrigeration Operations Fax Number (775)- 371 -5385 B. If installation or start-up of appliance or system requires addition of refrigerant or activities with a reasonable risk for release of refrigerant, then a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document must be submitted. C. Submit completed copies of Target Service Refrigerant Tracking Form, (Refer to Section 15691) and Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document for each occurrence when refrigeration components of appliance or system are serviced during warranty period. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers are responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment and shall employ skilled craftsmen. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufacturers are responsible for protection and preservation the refrigerant charge during shipping, delivery, and handling. Refrigerant charge should be isolated in a protected part of the refrigeration circuit; exposed refrigerant containing parts shall be protected with a crate, and clear and simple handling instructions available at project site. B. Manufacturers shall coordinate special handling or rigging requirements with OSR or General Contractor, minimum 3 weeks prior to delivery. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine location of installation for inherent or obvious likely scenarios which could cause a release of refrigerant. Examples include but not limited to the following: 1. Unprotected refrigerant containing components located such that they could be physically impacted by carts, and falling objects. 2. Unsecured appliances which could easily knocked off a counter or tipped over. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigerant containing appliances and systems in accord with manufacturers' written instructions. B. Do not make connection or install assemblies shipped loose that will obstruct visibility of manufacturer's name tag. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 15010 -2 T ■ 3.3 REPAIRIRESTORATION A. Maintenance, repair, and cleaning work covered by these Contract Documents, which could impact refrigerant containing components of appliance or refrigeration system must comply with the following: 1. Technician performing work must have a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. 2. A Service Refrigerant Tracking Form, (Refer to Section 15691) must be filed whenever refrigerant is added or removed from a refrigerant containing device, (whether it is planned or unplanned). 3. Manufacturers' written troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair procedures are to be closely followed. 4. Work which could impact refrigerant containing components of appliance or system shall be performed in a manner that complies with EPA requirements governing refrigerants. 5. Only manufacturers' approved replacement parts, cleaning solutions, and other compounds are to be used in maintenance and repair procedures. 1 1 TARGET 6. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building with refrigerant still residing in appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process, refrigerant transferred to an approved contractor owned reclaim cylinder, and if appropriate, a dry nitrogen holding charge installed prior to piece of equipment going out of building. 3.4 EQUIPMENT TRANSFER A. A Refrigerant Containing Equipment Tracking Form, (Refer to Section 15690) must be filed whenever a refrigerant containing device is transferred from one Target facility to another. B. Form must indicate which facility the asset came from and which facility it has been moved to, along with appliance's make, model, and serial number. C. Contractors, Transfer Agents, or Freight Companies transferring refrigerant containing assets as part of a their scope of services, are responsible to submit a Target Refrigerant Tracking Form for instances of refrigerant loss which occurs while refrigerant containing appliances or systems are in their possession. 3.5 EQUIPMENT RE -SALE A. Outside contractors are forbidden to re -sell assets on Target's behalf. Resale of Target, owned refrigerant equipment must be handled through Target Asset Recovery, (contact asset.recovery@target.com). 3.6 EQUIPMENT DISPOSAL A. Contractors shall only dispose of Target owned refrigerant containing assets when directed by the contract documents or with the approval of the OSR. B. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building or be placed in a trash container with refrigerant still residing in the appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process, and transferred to an approved contractor owned reclaim cylinder. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 C. A Refrigerant Containing Equipment Tracking Form, (Refer to Section 15690) must be filed whenever refrigerant is removed from a refrigerant containing device for disposal. D. Technician performing work must have a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. END OF SECTION MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 15010 - 3 TARGET s 1 SECTION 15020 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 1.1 WORK INCLUDED PART 1 - GENERAL A. Perform all demolition, removal and restoration to complete the mechanical work under the Contract. Relocate or reuse existing materials and equipment as directed in the Contract Documents. Salvage the material and equipment the Owner wishes to save. Dispose of all other materials and debris. B. The Drawings generally show the extent of demolition, removal and relocation, but they cannot show all the work, or all conditions and details that will affect the progress of the work. Examine the Project site. Determine existing conditions. Become familiar with the Project requirements before bidding the work. C. General Requirements: 1. Complete the work using workers skilled in the required trades. If necessary, sublet the work to the appropriate subcontractors. Restore material in every respect, including the removal of visual defects in exposed fmishes in a manner approved by the Architect. Engage specialists in at least the following trades as necessary: a. Exposed concrete finishes. b. Exposed masonry and stonework. c. Waterproofing and vapor barriers. d. Roofing, flashing and accessories. e. Exterior wall systems. f. Interior exposed finishes and casework where, in the Architect's judgment, the mechanical Contractor will not be able to achieve an acceptable match. 2. Coordinate and schedule the work with the Owner to avoid any disturbance or disruption of the Owner's operations. Perform any work that will affect the Owner's operations at times acceptable to the Owner. If necessary, do the work in stages to avoid disruption. Since the final schedule must be worked out between the Owner and the Contractors, assume for the sake of the bidding that all this coordination can be done without overtime work. Coordinate work with other trades prior to commencing demolition. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Where the work affects the structure, exercise extreme care to protect the structure and its occupants. Take particular care when working near occupied areas. Employ or subcontract competent, qualified structural engineers and construction specialists to develop appropriate and responsible techniques for doing the work. Provide temporary shoring and supports when required. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all structural loads down to sound bearing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVABLE MATERIALS A. Salvable Materials to be Reused in the Work: 1. Remove salvable materials to be reused or relocated and move them to the new location. If the new location is not ready to receive these materials, store and protect them from damage until the new location is ready. 2. Remove, clean and preserve all materials that are to be reused, or are needed to match existing work. Exercise extreme care in removing these materials to avoid damaging them or making them unsuitable for reuse. Replace all damaged materials shown, tagged or required for reuse with equivalent, matching materials. B. Salvable Materials to be Stored by the Owner: 1. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials or equipment he wishes to keep. Carefully remove these items and protect them from damage. Store them in an area designated by the Owner. 2. Consult the Owner about any salvage he wishes to keep and about his general standards for salvaging the materials and equipment removed from the Project. 3. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvaged materials is not part of this Contract. Remove the salvable materials from the Project site and place them in a storage area designated by the Owner. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 15020 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, and support for the execution of the work and the protection of persons and property. Always provide the appropriate supports and protection, and always use proper methods to prevent collapse, settling or other damage. Obtain responsible designs so the supports will be adequate for the loads they carry. Supports must properly distribute their loads to lower levels or to sound bearing. B. Provide temporary coverings and enclosures to prevent damage to existing spaces or to parts of the building that are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent weather damage and to avoid abnormal heat loss. Prevent weather damage by scheduling the work at the envelope according to weather conditions. C. Provide temporary dust enclosures above and below the ceilings to separate the construction site from the rest of the building. Also provide temporary air filters and ductwork to contain construction dust within the construction area. general contractor will provide hinged doors at access points through temporary enclosures. The general contractor will seal temporary and permanent doors with tape or other suitable materials during demolition work. Keep them sealed until the dust has settled. 3.2 DEMOLITION AND CUTTING A. Mechanical Demolition: Demolish and remove existing mechanical construction as shown on the Drawings and as required to accomplish the work. Where new work is adjacent to existing construction and when existing construction must be replaced, remove just enough existing construction to complete the work under the Contract. At no additional cost to the owner, remove and replace existing construction that was to remain but that is damaged during the work. B. Cutting Concrete: Cut openings through concrete by core drilling or sawing. Never cut openings in concrete with a hammer -driven chisel or drill without written authorization from the Architect. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 15020 - 2 TARGET C. Other Work: Never endanger or damage the work of other trades. If the work of other trades must be altered to accommodate the mechanical work, review the proposed alterations with the installer of work and comply with installer's recommendations to minimize damage. Where necessary, engage the original installer to make the required changes. D. Clean demolition areas and remove the debris from the site at the end of each day's work. Transport debris in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not permit the burning or storage of debris at the site. Keep all construction areas broom clean. Keep all adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. 3.3 UNANTICIPATED MECHANICAL WORK A. If the demolition work exposes concealed mechanical services (such as piping or ducts), immediately inform the Engineer of the additional cost to the Project to remove or retire the unanticipated work. Begin this additional demolition only after receiving approval from the Owner for the additional costs. B. Remove or reroute unanticipated mechanical services under direction from the Engineer. Reconnect them to maintain the Owner's operations. Abandon services in place where they will be concealed inside floors or walls, but disconnect them from their sources and cap them in place. Leave no "dead end" services concealed in the fmished work. 3.4 DEMOLITION SCOPE OF WORK A. General 1. The selective demolition of the building list many individual components and systems to be removed and also to be saved. The list of items to be saved is inclusive and need not be added to, but the list of items to be removed is partial and all demolition work dealing with that demolition type are intended to be part of that work. a. Mechanical demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of mechanical demolition, and mechanical type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 b. Electrical demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of electrical demolition, and electrical type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. c. General demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of general demolition, and general type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. Note any demolition items that do not typically fall into a particular group's responsibility will be the responsibility of the general demolition contractor. B. Refrigeration 1. Remove above floor refrigeration piping as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Remove refrigeration piping on the roof as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Remove refrigeration system condensing units on the roof as indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 15020 - 3 - TARGET 1 r • SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Basic materials and methods for the following mechanical systems: a. Plumbing. b. Fire Protection. 2. Accessories required for a complete installation. 3. Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 - Submittals: General requirements for submittals. C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for material and equipment. D. Section 01700 - Project Closeout: Final cleaning, operating instructions and maintenance manuals, and other project closeout requirements. E. Section 02220 — Trench Excavating and Backfilling: Requirements for excavation and backfilling. F. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Specification of concrete materials and installation of embedded items. G. Section 07840 - Firestopping. H. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Sealing around pipes and ducts penetrating gypsum board partitions. I. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation. J. Section 15300 - Fire Protection. K. Section 15410 — Plumbing Piping Systems. L. Division 16 - Electrical work for mechanical installations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products that contain software or hardware components that are date sensitive to be certified as fully tested and compliant with date ranges from 1900 to 2099. This compliance is for operational date related functions including leap years. Include certification with submittals. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Comply with applicable seismic zone requirements. Perform work so that seismic movement can be tolerated. Systems affected by seismic movement include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Support of mechanical equipment and piping. b. Pipe sleeves through walls. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI B16.14, " Standard Fittings." B. ASTM E 814, "Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops ". C. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers." D. NEC, "National Electrical Code." E. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturers Association." F. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems ". G. UL, `Building Materials Directory". 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. B. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. Submit Type (A) shop drawings, (B) product data, (C) samples, (D) test reports, (E) certificates, (F) calculations and (G) installation details according to following schedule: BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Equipment and Materials Submittal Type Calking and Sealants B, G Clean Outs B Floor and Funnel Drains, and Floor Sinks B Hangers and Supports B Insulation Materials B Piping Identification B Sprinkler System (Components) A, B, C, D, E, F Trap Primers B C. D. E. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional specific requirements. Submit installation details with UL test number for sealing pipe penetrations through fire -rated walls. One week prior to turn over e-mail completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet to: refrigerant .trackingna,target.com. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Layout of equipment, pipes, ducts, and accessories is diagrammatic unless specifically dimensioned. B. Coordinate work with other trades and separate contractors to avoid interference of Work indicated and to secure maximum headroom. C. Refrigerant Containing Asset Tags: 1. 45 days prior to store turn over, HVAC contractor to contact Marking Services Inc, (MSI) to validate and coordinate Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags. (800)- 234 -0135 or www.markserv.com. 2. Coordinate tag delivery, refrigerant data acquisition, and installation of asset tags with (MSI). PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Michigan Hanger Co. Inc. 2. Grinnell. 3. Cooper B- Line ® , Inc. B. Conform to ANSI/MSS SP58. Construct hanger assembly of corrosion resistant galvanized steel, except provide copper plated hangers supporting uninsulated copper piping. Provide hangers as follows: BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 1/2" to 6" 8" and up Uninsulated copper piping Adjust Ring, Swivel Loop Clevis Ring Copper plated Michigan Hanger 401 101 C. Pipe Clamps: Metal heavy duty insulated pipe clamp with EPDM gasket. 2.2 CALKING, SEALANTS, AND SLEEVES A. Silicone Calking: Provide calking with oakum joint filler for use in sleeve applications. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. GE "SCS 1000 Series ". b. Pecora "864 ". TARGET B. Fire -Rated Sealant: Provide UL- listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. Manufacturers and Products listed below are acceptable for use with piping in specific applications and are subject to requirements of Section 07840 - Firestopping. Refer to Section 07840 for other applications not covered here. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow "3 -6548 RTV Foam ". b. Flame Stop "V". c. GE "Pencil 851 ". d. 3M "CP -25 ". C. Perlite/Thermafiber safing insulation combination may be used on uninsulated pipes through fire -rated walls, when installed according to ICBO Report 2331. Manufacturers and Products listed above are acceptable for use with piping in specific applications and are subject to requirements of Section 07840 - Firestopping. Refer to Section 07840 for other applications not covered here. D. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Thunderline Link - Seal ® : a. Model LS Link -Seal complete with Model CS or WS wall sleeves. 1) Below grade installation provide 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. 2) Above grade installation use dichromatic plated bolts and nuts. E. Refer to Section 07900 for other joint sealant work. kut TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 it p 1 1 2.3 FASTENERS A. When using screws or bolts for fastening mechanical equipment to treated lumber, fasteners must be exterior grade with electroplated zinc coating and color - pigmented topcoat layer. Coatings provide resistance against corrosive properties of pressure treatment chemicals present in wood. 2.4 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Moore. 3. Seton. 4. Marking Services Incorporated. B. Piping Identification: 1. Provide semi -rigid, snap -on plastic identification markers. Provide direction arrows approximately 6- inches long and 3/4 -inch wide, and lettering 1 -inch high. 2. At Contractor's option, the following alternate method may be used: Identification of piping to be accomplished by stenciling black letters on a yellow background. Stencil letters using black stenciling paint and stenciling brushes, minimum 1 -inch high. Indicate direction of flow by stenciling a 6 -inch black arrow on a yellow background. 3. Use following abbreviations to identify piping: Combination Waste and Vent CWV Condensate Drain CD Cold Water CW Refrigerant Return RR Refrigerant Supply RS Sanitary Sewer SANS 2.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Magnetic and manual starters, disconnects, power wiring and electrical accessories are specified in Division 16, unless otherwise noted. 2. Control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 16, unless otherwise noted. 3. Starters furnished as specified in Division 16, unless otherwise noted. 4. Wiring, conduits, and electrical equipment not shown on Drawings which are part of packaged unit design and are necessary for proper operation of such packaged equipment are specified in Division 15. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Run piping and ductwork in most direct, straight, and mechanical manner, properly graded. Offsets in vertical pipe will be allowed only when necessary to avoid conflicts with other trades. Allow for freedom of movement of the piping during expansion and contraction without springing at pipe connections. Properly group piping with other pipes. Route pipes and ductwork as closely as possible to that shown on Drawings. OSR reserves the right to make slight changes in runs to avoid interference with other work or structural conditions without extra charge by the Contractor. Exercise particular care in coordination with installation of sprinkler system. B. Install equipment and materials according to manufacturer's recommendations unless contract Documents specifically call for a variance. 1. Installation Documentation: Available on -site for review. C. Provide clearances to allow proper servicing and maintenance of items installed under this contract. Mechanical contractor is responsible for coordinating proper clearance requirements with other contractors and maintaining them throughout construction. 3.2 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS A. Firmly hold equipment, ducts, and piping in place using hangers, supports, and anchors. Design hangers and supports to support weight of equipment, duct, pipe, fluid, and insulation, and provide adequate side bracing to prevent swaying. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 Steel Pipe Size Hanger Rod Dia. Max. Spacing 6' -0" 1/2" 3/8" 3/4" to 1" 3/8" 8' -0" 1 -1/4" to 2" 3/8" 10' -0" 2 -1/2" to 3 -1/2" 1/2" 12' -0" 4" to 5" 5/8" 12' -0" 6" 3/4" 12' -0" 8" to 12" 7/8" 12' -0" 15" to 20" 1 -1/8" 12' -0" Pipe Size Hanger Rod Dia. Max. Spacing 5' -0" 1/2" to 3/4" 3/8" 1" to 1 -1/4" 3/8" 6' -0" 1 -1/2" to 2" 3/8" 8' -0" 2 -1/2" 3/8" 9' -0" 3" 1/2" 10' -0" 4" 1/2" 10' -0" 5" 5/8" 10' -0" 6" 3/4" 10' -0" 8" 7/8" 10' -0" P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Locate supports or hangers adjacent to joints, couplings, and fittings. In addition to above hangers and supports, support piping at each offset or change of direction, at ends of branches, at base of riser pipes, in immediate vicinity of valves and heavy accessories, and along piping as required to prevent sags, bends or vibration. - C. Provide vertical adjustment to maintain required pitch for proper drainage and to allow for expansion and contraction of piping. Provide hangers for insulated pipe large enough to encompass insulation, including insulation support shields. D. Support piping, ductwork, and equipment, from structure. Support only from top chord of bar joists. DO NOT support from other equipment or roof deck. Connect hanger at bar joist top chord panel point; that is, the point at which the vertical or angular member of bar joist is attached to top chord. Coordinate hanger locations between trades so as not to exceed a maximum allowable load of 100 lb, unless approved otherwise by Structural Engineer, to joist panel point. Locate panel point loads at least 6 feet from other panel point load on same joist. Provide necessary steel to span between joists to locate hangers properly. If these conditions cannot be met, notify Architect. E. Provide galvanized strap hangers for ducts 35- inches and less in width bolted to angle stiffeners or secured to sides of duct. Support ducts 36- inches and more in width with trapeze hangers formed of rod and angle iron under ducts. Space ductwork hangers in accord with SMACNA standards, except as indicated in the preceding paragraph when locating panel point loads on same joists. F. Provide stays on vertical lines of ducts consisting of galvanized steel straps anchored to building structure (not roof deck) at points necessary for proper support and alignment. G. Adequately side -brace ductwork to prevent swaying. H. Support hubless piping on both sides of joints, couplings and fittings. I. Where groups of three or more pipes occur, they may be supported with trapeze hangers using two hangers as specified with a capped pipe cross member. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 J. Increase size of hanger rods supporting trapeze hanger as required to handle added weight of multiple pipes. K. Subject to weight restrictions per hanger, support horizontal piping with spacing as follows (except gas piping on roof and fire protection piping): 1. Steel pipe: 2. Copper tubing: TARG t 3. PVC and or ABS pipe: Follow manufacturer's recommendations for material and service temperature. Maximum hanger spacing shall not exceed 4' -0 ". 4. Cast iron pipe: Provide 10' -0" maximum spacing with a minimum of one (1) hanger per section close to joint and barrel. Provide one (1) hanger at changes in direction and branch connections. L. Support fire protection sprinkler system piping as required by latest edition of NFPA 13. M. Vertical Piping: Provide stand -out hangers 12' -0" O.C. and at every pipe joint. N. Plumbing Walls: 1. Small plumbing piping in walls may be supported from steel waste and vent piping with wej -it "Adjusto-Spacer System" components in lieu of other hangers and components. 3.3 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Conform to requirements of Section 02220 for excavating and backfilling. B. Provide necessary excavating for work and backfill excavations. Provide uniform bearing for pipes. Do not place work on frozen ground. Do not undermine or damage bearing of column, wall, or other structural footings. Excavations below footings shall not be deeper than one -half the horizontal distance from such footings or foundations. Backfill only after work to be covered has been inspected, tested as required, and approved. 4 1 • fi p TARGET 2. Separate steel support components including metal wall studs from copper piping with plastic tape. 3.4 CHASES, SLEEVES, AND OPENINGS A. General: 1. Place sleeves in walls, floors, and other locations and verify that appropriate trade leaves chases, sleeves, and openings where required. In case of failure to do so, cut and patch chases and openings necessary, at no additional expense to Owner. B. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Provide sleeves through slabs, walls, and partitions, 1/2 -inch greater in inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. Provide domestic hot and cold water pipe sleeves 1/2 -inch greater in diameter than pipe insulation. 2. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe Link -Seal Model CS HDPE thermoplastic sleeves through interior concrete masonry unit partitions extending through full thickness of wall, and flush with finished surfaces. Seal spaces between piping and sleeve, and between sleeve and wall with silicone calking. Sleeves are not required through gypsum board partitions where escutcheon plates are provided to cover opening around pipes, except on insulated pipes through fire -rated partitions. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Install Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves through exterior building walls above and below grade. Install flush with finished surfaces and calk between sleeves and pipe with oakum and silicon calking to provide a watertight joint. Seal spaces between sleeve and wall with silicone calk of color approved by OSR are not required on neat core drilled holes. Link -Seal with Model CS HDPE thermoplastic sleeves may be used in lieu of above. 4. Install schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves through above grade floor slabs in exposed areas (such as offices). Extend sleeves 1/2 -inch above fmished floor surface, except sleeves for piping larger than 2- inch to extend 6- inches above floor. Seal spaces between pipe and sleeve, and between sleeve and floor with silicone calking flush with top of sleeve to make a watertight joint. Link - Seal with Model CS HDPE thermoplastic or Model WS steel sleeves may be used in lieu above. 5. Install sleeves through floor slabs on grade for concealed piping and terminate 1/2- inch above fmished floor surface (chases, pipe spaces and within walls or partitions). Install sleeves 6- inches above finished floor surface for exposed piping in Marking and Stock room areas. Construct of 22 gage galvanized iron or Schedule 40 PVC. Seal with silicone calking. Link -Seal with Model CS HDPE thermoplastic or Model WS steel sleeves may be used in lieu of above. 6. For sleeves sealed with silicone calking, pack space between pipe and sleeve with oakum and install approximately 1 -inch depth of silicone calking. C. Fire - Rated Penetrations: Where chases, sleeves, and openings penetrate fire rated walls, seal opening around pipes or other penetrating elements with foamed fire rated sealant as specified. Galvanized steel sleeves are required on insulated pipes through fire -rated partitions. 1. Fire sealant for insulated pipes: Intumescent type. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and UL testing for wall assembly. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 D. Escutcheons: Install escutcheon plates on exposed piping through floors, walls, or ceiling in finished areas, except within closed cabinet work. 3.5 PIPES OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Do not run mechanical ductwork and piping through electrical equipment rooms including: telephone room, switchgear room, transformer room, and elevator equipment room. The only exceptions are mechanical services (fire protection, HVAC) serving the room which are acceptable by local codes. B. Do not install mechanical piping above panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, switchboards, motor controllers or other electrical equipment in accord with Article 110 of latest edition of NEC. 3.6 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed piping within building and piping in accessible concealed spaces, such as above lay -in ceilings and access panels. Identify contents and direction of flow at not more than 30 foot intervals, whenever a pipe turns 90 degrees, whenever a pipe passes through a wall (both sides), and other locations for ease of maintenance. 1. Identify exposed sprinkler lines in backroom areas indicating by number which sprinlder zone they correspond to. B. Install Owner furnished Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags as follows: 1. Aquire and submit refrigerant tracking data, and install tags on new HVAC equipment. 2. Review prototypical list, furnished through MSI, for new refrigerant containing HVAC equipment and provide feedback to MSI. 3. Owner furnished asset tagging kit provided through (MSI) to contain the following: a. Verified MS -215 asset tags and stainless steel self locking braided wire fasteners necessary to mark new refrigerant containing HVAC equipment. b. A comprehensive refrigerant asset tag installation instruction guideline, with pictures and examples. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 6 c. An electronic spreadsheet template, (Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet), for recording and submitting equipment refrigerant data as requested. 4. Refrigerant tracking data spread sheet must be filled in completely, leaving no blanks. Complete one line for every new piece of refrigerant containing equipment added and one line for each independent circuit in an appliance with multiple circuits or systems. 5. HVAC contractor must follow up directly with (MSI) to resolve tag discrepancies that are discovered during refrigerant inventorying and tagging process. It is the HVAC contractor's responsibility to insure that refrigerant containing HVAC equipment gets recorded and properly tagged, and to re -tag improperly tagged equipment, or re -survey equipment not originally inventoried at no additional cost to Target. 3.7 TOUCH -UP A. Touch -up pre - fmished and pre -primed equipment items to match existing factory finish. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment where set to prevent breakage, misuse or disfigurement. Cover pipe and duct openings to prevent entry of debris. Immediately cover openings in equipment upon uncrating or receipt at the job site until permanent connection is made. 3.9 SYSTEM START -UP /OPERATION/ INSTRUCTION A. Prior to start-up, equipment be fully lubricated, charged, filled, and otherwise prepared according to manufacturer's recommendations. TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. After system installations have been completed and connections made, systems to be operated, adjusted, calibrated and balanced to provide the specified performance. Air systems final testing, adjusting, and balancing to be provided by Owner as specified in Section 15993. Contractor, and manufacturer of various items of equipment, to fully instruct Owner's designated operating personnel on operation adjustment and maintenance of each system and equipment. • 1 1 1 1 1 1 END OF SECTION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 7 j w • 1 1 1 z 1 1 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermal insulation and accessories for the following systems: a. Plumbing piping. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. B. C. D. SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION Section 01090 - Reference standards. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. Section 07840 - Firestopping. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods; for submittals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers and Products listed in this Section are acceptable for use in specific applications and are subject to requirements of Section 07840 - Firestopping. Refer to Section 07840 for other applications not covered here. Provide insulation systems with composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation) flame and smoke hazard ratings as tested by ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding the following: 1. Flame Spread - 25. 2. Smoke Developed - 50. 3. Smoke Developed - 150 (for insulation in concrete masonry unit walls). B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, and jackets and facings for fittings to have same component ratings listed above. C. Materials or their shipping cartons or packages to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed specified requirements. Duct liners to be stenciled with "Meets NFPA 90A Requirements ". 1.4 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL A. ASTM E 84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". B. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ". C. NFPA 255, "Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". D. SMACNA "Flexible Duct Performances and Installation Standards ". E. UL 723, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". F. NAIMA "A Guide to Insulated Air Duct Systems ". 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. PART2 PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Insulation Materials: 1. Armacell. 2. Certainteed. 3. IMCOA. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Knauf. 6. Nomaco K -Flex. 7. Owens- Corning. 8. Trubro, Inc. (Molded Vinyl Insulation). 9. Unifrax. B. Adhesives, Cements, and Accessories: 1. Chicago Mastic. 2. King Chemical. 3. Ryder. 4. Saran. 5. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing). 2.2 JACKET AND FACING DESCRIPTIONS A. Type GVB: Glass cloth, white factory sizes, beach puncture, 150 oz. in. /in/tear, tensile strength 1001b per inch width, mullen burst 300 psi, with Saran Vapor Barrier. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms. Jacket "sizing" of mildew- resistant vapor barrier mastic, void of wheat paste. Schuller "AP" or Owens- Corning "ASJ" factory applied jackets are also acceptable. B. Pre - molded Fitting Covers: Pre - molded insulated fitting covers. Provide required rivets, staples or tacks, vapor barrier adhesive and tape, and other accessories. Schuller Zeston. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 1 Pipe Size Shield Length 6" and smaller 12" 8" thru 12" 16" Over 12" 20" P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 2.3 GLASS FIBER INSULATION (TYPE A) A. External wrap glass fiber insulation having factory- applied vapor barrier facing with an average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.24 (BTU - inch/hour /sf/deg. F) at a mean temperature of 75 deg F rated for 40 deg to 250 deg F, 0.75 pcf density. 2.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION (TYPE D) A. Continuous Tube Insulation: Armacell "AP /Armaflex" Elastomeric Thermal Insulation. 2.5 CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC INSULATION (TYPE E) A. Closed Cell Insulation: Average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.28 (Btu- inch) /(hour -sq. ft. -deg F.) at a mean temperature of 75 deg F.; rated for minus 40 deg F. to 220 deg F., 6.0 pcf, flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke density rating not to exceed 50. 2.6 CLOSED -CELL POLYOLEFIN FOAM INSULATION (TYPE F) A. Closed Cell Polyolefm Foam Insulation: Average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.24 (BTU inch) /(hour -sq. ft. -deg F.) at a mean temperature of 75 deg F.; rated for minus 324 deg F. to 210 deg F., 1.5 pcf, flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke density rating not to exceed 50. 2.7 INSERTS AND SHIELDS A. Inserts: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation, of equal thickness to adjoining insulation, with vapor barrier where required. Wooden blocks or dowels are also acceptable. B. Shields: 16 gage galvanized steel for pipe sizes 4 -inch and smaller and 14 gage for pipe sizes over 4 -inch. Provide the following shield lengths: C. Prefabricated thermal hanger shields are acceptable in lieu of inserts and metal shields. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 2 2.8 RELATED ACCESSORIES A. Strap Banding: Galvanized steel bands, 1/2- inch wide by 0.015 -inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire Banding: Galvanized annealed steel wire, gauge as indicated. C. Wire Anchors: Welded steel studs, clips, and angles as required. D. Twine Banding: Three -ply jute twine. E. Finishing Cement: Asbestos free cement; Ryder "Thermokote No. 1 ". F. Exterior Exposed Seam Sealer: Hardcast tape with field applied aluminum paint finish. G. Interior Jacket Seam Sealer and Adhesive: Chicago Mastic No. 17 -465, King Chemical No. 19- 113FR. 3.1 GENERAL PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install insulation continuous through wall, floor, and ceiling openings, and through sleeves. B. Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces. C. Extend insulation full thickness through hangers, protected at hanger point by inserts and metal shields. D. Install metal shields around lower half circumference of insulation. Provide inserts not less than 2- inches longer than metal shields and of same thickness as insulation. Fasten metal shields to pipe insulation with duct tape. E. Seal joints as recommended by manufacturer. F. Use insulation only for its intended purpose, for example, duct wrap used for rainwater conductors will be rejected. 3.2 CONDENSATE PIPING AND DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Insulate condensate piping from pump to drain with Type A, Type E, or Type F insulation. B. Finish Type A with factory- applied jacket. Seal factory- applied jacket and end laps. Apply adhesive to two surfaces. No staples are permitted. TARGET 1 b 1 1 1 1 PIPING Type Size INSULATION Type Thickness Domestic Cold Water All A 1" E 3/4" F 1" Condensate All A 1" E 3/4" F 1" Domestic Water under slab All D 1/2" E 1/2" F 1/2" koi TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 rd Er 1 ■ t 1 C. Finish fittings, valve bodies, and flanges for piping 4 -inch and smaller with finishing cement to thickness of adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate piping over 4 -inch and water meters with mitered pipe insulation segments secured with twine or 19 gage wire banding with one coat of finishing cement. D. When finishing cement is dry, cover with 4 oz. glass cloth jacket (Type GVB) and two coats of sizing. E. Pre - molded covers are acceptable for fittings and valves in exposed areas only if approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. Secure covers over insulation and tape joints as recommended by manufacturer. F. For pipes running underground or in masonry walls, use 1/2 -inch thick flexible elastomeric tube or closed -cell polyolefm foam insulation. Seal joints with adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. G. Install Type E as recommended by manufacturer. Seal joints with recommended adhesive. H. Install Type F as recommended by manufacturer. Seal joints with recommended adhesive. 3.3 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE END OF SECTION MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 3 liter TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1- GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Design, provide, and test automatic sprinkler system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. C. Section 09900 - Painting; for field painting. D. Section 10520 - Fire Protection Specialties; for portable fire extinguishers. E. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods; for submittals and installation requirements. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire protection system begins at connection to existing fire sprinkler system piping located within the building. B. Areas within building have been classified according to occupancy hazard existing therein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Provide fire protection systems installation in accord with latest edition of NFPA 13 "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems ". B. FM Global Compliance: Provide fire protection equipment and materials in accord with latest edition of FM Global Approval Guide. Provide FM label on each product. C. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection equipment in accord with latest edition of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory. D. Requirements of Regulating Agencies: 1. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accord with regulations of local fire department or fire marshal. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NFPA 13: Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. NFPA 24: Standard for Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. C. NFPA 25: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water -Based Fire Protection Systems. D. NFPA 291: Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment Directory. G. Factory Mutual Insurance Company (FM Global): FM Approval Guide. H. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Technical Advisory Bulletin: "Extended Coverage Ordinary Hazard (ECOH) Sprinklers ", January 1995. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 2. Perform work of this section in accord with laws, ordinances, and regulations in effect at job site, as well as these specifications and reference standards listed herein. When contract documents call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality or higher standard than required by above rules and regulations, provisions of Contract Documents to take precedence over said rules and regulations. Furnish without extra charge, additional material and labor when required for compliance with said rules and regulations, whether or not mentioned in Contract Documents. A. Comply with Section 01300 and 15050, except as otherwise specified herein. B. Product Data: 1. Submit equipment brochures and catalog cuts to provide a complete description of items to be furnished. 2. Where manufacturer specifications and directions are referred to in specifications, submit such printed specifications and directions before work is commenced. C. Fire Protection System Drawings: FIRE PROTECTION 15300 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1. Submit fire protection drawings at a scale approved by Owner. Draw subdivisions of total building plan identically as shown on mechanical drawings. Include with fire protection sprinkler system drawings pipe hanging and support details. 2. Drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings include, but are not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, hanger locations, hanging weights, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. 3. Drawings of fire protection systems in rooms with exposed structure (stock rooms) to include locations and elevation of ductwork including fabric duct systems. Locate sprinlders so as not to be obstructed by ductwork and mechanical equipment. 4. Fire protection system drawings to be prepared and certified by a qualified professional engineer with expertise m fire protection design and licensed in state in which project is located. Where acceptable by the State, a qualified NICET Registered Designer may prepare and certify the hydraulic calculations. It is contractor's responsibility to determine State requirements for certification of drawings. 5. Approval Drawings: Prepare approval drawings of fire protection systems indicating pipe sizes, pipe locations, fittings, shutoffs, equipment, and similar information. Submit to agency having jurisdiction for approval. D. Hydraulic Calculations: 1. Hydraulic calculations to be prepared and certified by a qualified professional engineer with expertise m fire protection design and licensed in state in which project is located. Where acceptable by the State, a qualified NICET Registered Designer may prepare and certify the hydraulic calculations. It is sprinlder contractor's responsibility to determine State requirements for certification of calculations. 2. Sprinkler system demand to be based on the simultaneous operation of: a. Ceiling sprinkler system with largest water flow demand. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 - 2 b. Hose stream allowance. 3. Hydraulic calculations to be based on a minimum 10 psi safety factor below city water supply. E. Certificate of Installation: Submit fully executed test certificates to Global Risk Consultants Corporation prior to Global Risk Consultants Corporation's final inspection and approval, in accord with requirements of NFPA 13. Submit copies of each test certificate to OSR. F. Record Drawings: 1. Provide and keep up -to -date an accurate "As Built" record of work installed. Show type, size, elevation, and location of features of the system, and clearly indicate changes or deviations from original Contract Documents. 2. Upon completion of Work, submit a set of drawings showing changes as noted on record drawings to OSR. G. Submittal Procedures: 1. Submittals to OSR: Submit one set of system drawings along with one copy of hydraulic calculations and one copy of equipment brochures to OSR for review. 2. Submittals to Mechanical Engineer: Do not submit to Project Mechanical Engineer. Project Mechanical Engineer will receive one set of reviewed shop drawings from GRC for review of conformance to drawings and specifications and to forward additional comments to Contractor and OSR via a letter. 3. Submittals to other agencies: Submit automatic fire protection sprinlder system drawings and calculations to other agencies having jurisdiction including the local Fire Marshal. Forward one copy of each transmittal letter for the submittals to OSR. 4. Do not proceed with installation of work until the fire protection sprinkler system drawings, hydraulic calculations, water supply data and product data are approved by Global Risk Consultants Corporation, Project Structural Engineer, and other agencies having jurisdiction including the local Fire Marshal. b TARGET • 1 1 1 1 s 1 1.7 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Review complete drawings and specifications of other trades before installing work. After checking, consider work of other trades and coordinate work to obtain the best arrangement of equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and other construction. B. Inform OSR of points of conflict between trades, so that conflict may be properly resolved. Installed work which interferes with work of other trades to be removed and reinstalled at Contractor's expense when so directed by OSR. C. Contractor to fully inform himself regarding peculiarities and limitations of spaces available for installation of materials furnished under this Contract. Although location of equipment may be shown on Drawings in certain positions, Contractor to be guided by architectural details and conditions at job site, and to position equipment so it is easily accessible for service and maintenance. 2.1 ABOVE GRADE SPRINKLER PIPING 2.2 2.3 DRAIN PIPING A. B. SPRINKLERS B. Accessories: PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Conform to NFPA 13 for piping, fittings, and methods of joining. Piping and tubing to be UL/FM listed and approved by local codes. Pipe: Schedule 40, galvanized steel. Fittings: Cast iron, drainage pattern, standard weight, screwed. A. Provide UL and FM listed, unless otherwise noted, sprinklers conforming to NFPA requirements for intended use. Temperature ratings, orifice size and type noted on Drawings. 1. Storage Areas: Extended Coverage Area Density Sprinkler, 25.2 K- Factor, 165 deg, 1 -inch NPT, natural brass finish. Tyco Fire Products Model EC -25, Sprinkler Identification Number TY9128. No substitutions allowed. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1. Sprinkler Guards: Welded steel wire. 2.4 HANGERS A. Comply with Mechanical Pipe Hanger Details (Sheet M1), Structural Details, and NFPA 13. See Mechanical construction drawings for hanger types and spacing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING AND SPRINKLERS A. General: 1. Install piping and sprinklers according to approved Shop Drawings. 2. Locate symmetrically with architectural elements. B. Piping and Equipment: 1. Provide concealed piping for pendent and concealed sprinklers. Install piping concealed in finished areas, unless noted to be exposed. Locate horizontal piping above ceilings and locate vertical piping behind walls or in shafts. 2. Support piping and equipment with hangers and supports according to NFPA 13 and details in Mechanical Construction Documents. C. Sprinklers: 1. Install sprinklers in accord with sprinkler listing and manufacturer's recommendation. a. Install Tyco EC -25 sprinklers using FM Global Approval criteria. 2. Location in Unfmished Areas: Coordinate with work of other trades and meet requirements of NFPA 13 and local governing codes. 3. Dry Pendent Sprinklers: Locate in walk in coolers and freezers. a. Cut penetration in freezer /cooler ceiling and provide recessed escutcheon in freezer /cooler ceiling. b. Install dry pendent sprinklers with Tyco dry sprinkler freezer seals in accord with manufacturer's instructions, except for sealant. c. Sealing of pipe penetrations through freezer /cooler panels and of Tyco dry sprinkler freezer seal to top of cooler /freezer panel to be done in Refrigeration Contract. FIRE PROTECTION 15300 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 4. Provide sprinkler guards in areas without suspended ceiling where sprinklers are within 7' -0 of floor and in locations where sprinklers might be subject to damage. 5. Match existing sprinklers in areas being remodeled unless noted otherwise in this Specification Section or on Drawings. 3.2 PROTECTION OF FINISH A. Protect fmish parts of construction Work against damage during construction until final acceptance. Cover materials and equipment, in storage and during construction to prevent marring or damage to finished surfaces, and keep moving parts clean and dry. 3.3 CLEANING AND FINISHING A. Clean equipment and piping of iron cuttings and other foreign substances. B. Remove cement, plaster, dirt, and foreign substances that accumulate during installation. Remove grease and oil spots with cleaning solvent. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Regularly inspect work and deliver certificates of approval to OSR. Do not cover up or enclose work until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by required authorities. Should work be enclosed or covered before such inspection and test, uncover work and make repairs with like materials necessary to restore work damaged thereby to its original condition, without cost to Owner. B. Hydrostatically test piping at not less than 200 psig or 50 psig above static pressure in excess of 150 psig for a period of not less than two hours. Inspect pipe joints while system is under test pressure and correct visible leaks to the satisfaction of OSR. If necessary, piping to be dismantled and reassembled with use of new pipe or fittings. No calking or makeshift method of temporary repair of defective work will be permitted. Repeat tests until line or system receives approval of OSR FIRE PROTECTION 15300 - 4 C. Test Acceptance: Acceptance of tests performed on systems not to relieve Contractor from liability for property damage to building resulting from leakage or ruptured piping during warranty period. Repair such damage promptly and properly, including refinishing or replacing of damaged components or adjacent areas upon notification from Owner. This requirement pertains only to piping, joints, connections, equipment and workmanship represented by the systems as fmally accepted, and not to extensions or revision made by others during warranty period. 3.5 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance of fire protection system will be made after completion of Work resulting from the fmal inspection, and after receipt of a formal letter of acceptance from the authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 11 1 oni A. Section Includes: 1. Domestic cold water system. 2. Piping identification. 3. Piping testing. 1 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical • Engineers ". B. ASPE, "American Society of Plumbing Engineers ". C. UL, "Building Materials Directory". D. ANSI B31.1, "Piping and Piping Systems ". E. ANSI B36.10M, "Pipe, Steel ". F. ANSI/MSS SP58, "Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Support." G. ASTM B 88, "Spec for Seamless Copper Water Tube ". 1 1 1 TARGET STORES P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. C. Section 02205 - Earthwork/Building Area: Requirements for excavation and backfilling. D. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods; for: 1. Basic Materials and Methods. 2. Submittals. E. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation. H. ASTM D 1527, "Spec for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 ". I. ASTM D 1785, "Spec for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ". J. ASTM D 2235, "Spec for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ". K. ASTM D 2321, "Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe ". L. ASTM D 2564, "Spec for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ". M. ASTM D 2661, "Spec for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ". N. ASTM D 2665, "Spec for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ". O. AWS, American Welding Society S. FS DD- G- 541(B), "Glass, Laboratory." P. IAMPO IS 9, "Standard For the Installation of PVC Building Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings ". Q. NCPWB, "National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: 1. Welding of piping joints shall conform to ANSI B31.1. 2. Welders shall be certified by NCPWB or other reputable and recognized agency, using welding procedures set forth in ASME Boiler Construction Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications ". B. Quality Marking: Manufacturer's name or mark shall be attached to each length of pipe, fitting, fixture, and device installed in piping systems. C. Piping System Tests: 1. Perform tests of piping systems as specified in individual sections. Test piping before concealing. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 TARGET STORES 2. Acceptance of tests performed shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for property damage to building resulting from leaking or ruptured piping during guarantee period. Property damage shall be promptly and properly repaired, including refinishing or replacing of damaged components or areas upon notification from Owner. This requirement shall pertain only to piping, joints, connections, equipment and workmanship represented by systems as finally accepted, and not to those extensions or revisions that may be made by Owner during guarantee period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY WASTE PIPING A. Below Grade: Provide one of the following in accord with local codes. 1. Centrifugally cast service weight cast iron with lead oakum joints, neoprene compression joints, or M.G. coupling with stainless steel bolts. 2. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2665 and D 2564 respectively. 3. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661 and D 2235 respectively. B. Above Grade: Provide one of the following in accord with local codes. 1. Cast iron soil pipe with lead and oakum or neoprene compression joints 2. Schedule 40 galvanized steel with cast iron drainage fittings. 3. No-hub type cast iron pipe and jointing system. 4. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2665 and D 2564 respectively. 5. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661 and D 2235 respectively. 6. Seamless Copper type K hard temper conforming to ASTM B88 2.2 VENT PIPING A. Below Grade: Provide one of the following in accord with local codes. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 - 2 1. Cast iron pipe with lead and oakum joints, neoprene compression joints, or M.G. coupling with stainless steel bolts. 2. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2665 and D 2564 respectively. 3. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661 and D 2235 respectively. B. Above Grade: Provide one of the following in accord with local codes. 1. Cast iron soil pipe with lead and oakum or neoprene compression joints. 2. Schedule 40 galvanized steel with standard cast iron fittings. 3. No-hub type cast iron pipe and joint system. 4. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2665 and D 2564 respectively. 5. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661 and D 2235 respectively. 2.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Below Grade - 2 -1/2 -inch and Smaller: Type "K" copper, ASTM B88, with flared fittings, 150 psi rating or greater. B. Above Grade: 1. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper or bronze fittings with solder joints in accord with code and Article on "Installation, Copper Tubing" in Part 3 - Execution of this Section. 2. If allowed by local code, mechanically formed tee fittings as created by T -Drill are an acceptable method of installation. Joints created in this manner to be installed/brazed in compliance with code and manufacturer's instructions and Article on "Installation, Copper Tubing" in Part 3 — Execution of this Section. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) T -Drill Industries, Inc. 1740 Corporate Drive Suite 820 Norcross, GA 30093 770.925.0520. 6 1 TARGET STORES 3. If allowed by local code, Copper Press Fittings are an acceptable method of installation. Joints created in this manner to be installed in compliance with code and manufacturer's instructions and Article on "Installation, Copper Tubing" in Part 3 — Execution of this Section. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Viega 17545 Daleview Dr. Lakewood, OH 44107 877.620.0016. 2) Ridge Tool Co. 400 Clark Street Elyria, OH 44035 800.519.3456. b. Material: Copper press fittings to conform to material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O -rings for copper press fittings to be EPDM. 2.4 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM A. General: Refer to Section 15050 for hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. B. Trap Primers: Provide trap primers as required by governing codes to maintain trap seal at floor drains and floor sinks. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Josam. b. Sioux Chief c. Sloan. d. Smith. e. Zum. 2. Applications: a. Installed on 1/2 -inch supply line at a plumbing fixture: Provide Josam Model No. 88250 Trap Seal Primer Valve with integral vacuum breaker and gasketed access cover. Install primer valve upright according to manufacturer's recommendations. b. Installed on 1/2 -inch branch line off of a larger water main. Provide pressure drop activated brass trap seal primer, UPC/IAPMO listed, and ASSE certified to ASSE Standard 1018. Branch line must tee off of top of water main as recommended by trap primer manufacturer. 3. Trap Primer Connectors: In lieu of providing for a 1/2 -inch primer tapping integral to floor drain, provide a trap seal primer connector which is a waste pipe section mounted below floor drain with a 1/2 -inch brass compression fitting tap attached to it. 1/2 -inch tap will receive plumbing line coming from trap primer. Trap primer connector to be equal to Josam 88400 or connector may be field fabricated. Connector tapping must maintain a minimum 2- inches above P- trap seal level or as required by code. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Condensate Drain Piping: 1. Type "M" hard drawn copper. 2. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D2665 and D2564 respectively. 2.6 SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM FIXTURES A. Floor Drains, Funnel Drains, Floor Sinks and Cleanouts: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Josam. MIFAB. Smith. Wade. Watts. a. b. c. d. e. f. Zum. 2. Provide heavy cast iron drains as scheduled on Drawings. B. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanouts with access covers. a. Approved Josam models: 1) Finished floor - Series 56000 Nickaloy top. 2) Wall - Series 58600 -15 chrome plated with vandal- resistant screw. 3) Unfinished floor and under carpet - Series 56040 -2 bronze. 4) Tiled floor - Series 56020 square Nickaloy top. 2. Provide carpet markers at floor cleanouts where carpet will be installed. 3. Unfinished Areas: Provide cleanout tee and plug of same material as piping. C. General: Refer to Section 15050 hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 D. Traps: Provide "P" traps as required in fixture drains, floor drains without integral traps, and other points indicated on Drawings or as required by local codes. Provide traps of same material as lines in which they are installed. NOTE: THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH IS NOT A PART OF SECTION 15410, IT IS INCLUDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. IT COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED DUPLEX SUMP PUMP 2.7 DUPLEX SUMP PUMP A. System: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Little Giant. 2. As scheduled on drawing. NOTE: THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH IS NOT A PART OF SECTION 15410, IT IS INCLUDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. IT COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONDENSATE PUMP 2.8 CONDENSATE PUMP A. System: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Little Giant 2. As scheduled on drawing. 2.9 PIPING INSULATION A. Refer to Section 15250 for insulating materials for systems specified in this Section. 2.10 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. 2.11 VALVES A. Refer to Section 15050 for piping identification for systems specified in this Section. General: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. J. k. 1. Apollo. Crane. Hammond. James Bury. Jenkins. Lunkenheimer. Nibco. Phelps Dodge. Powell. Stockham. Williams Hager. Milwaukee Valve. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 - 4 m. Jomar International. n. Other manufacturers as shown on Drawings. 2. Manufacturer's name and model, figure or drawing number specified are for identification of type, quality and construction. 3. Select valves for not less than 150 lb. water working pressure at 200 deg F, and for compatibility with working pressure of pipe and with fittings attached. Select valves designed for installed service. 4. Valves 2 -inch and smaller to have screw or solder end connections. Valves 2-1/2 - inch and larger to have flange end construction. 5. Valve tags are not required. B. Valve Service Schedule: 1. Shut off valve for: Cold and hot water Ball valve 2 - inch and smaller C. Valves - Water 1. Ball valve: Bronze body, two-piece type chromium plated bronze ball, lever handle, screwed or solder, Teflon seats and seal, full port, 4001b. WOG minimum at 175 deg F. Acceptable lanufacturer; Apollo Phelps Dodge Nibco Hammond James Bury Milwaukee Model 70 Original Polaris T580/T585 BV711 TBV712T Style A BA- 125/155 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION TARGET STORE A. Cold Water Service: 1. Connect to existing water piping as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Distribution: a. Provide water distribution system inside building including connection to fixtures and equipment as indicated. 3. Trap Primers: Provide access panels for trap primers concealed in walls. Trap primers require periodic maintenance and must be accessible. Iwo TARGET STORES 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Provide pipe anchors and guides where needed to prevent excessive movement of piping and excessive strain on piping and equipment connections. Provide expansion loops and offsets in piping as required to prevent excessive strain or pipe displacement between anchors, at piping take -off, and at equipment connections. B. Connect piping to apparatus and equipment with flanges, unions, and similar devices to permit easy removal. Provide unions on inlets and outlets of apparatus and equipment having screwed or soldered connections, 2- inch and smaller. C. Isolate dissimilar metal piping materials using dielectric unions, except where valves are used. Isolate copper piping from ferrous building elements with plastic tape. D. Install PVC, CPVC or ABS plastic pipe according to ASTM D2321. Install expansion offsets or approved expansion joints as required by local codes. E. Where welded pipe connections are allowed, Bonney "Weldolets" or "Threadolets" may be used in place of welding tees. F. Ream piping up to 2 -inch inclusive after cutting. G. Blow out piping sections with compressed air or otherwise clean internally immediately prior to installation into pipe line. H. Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign material. 3.3 INSTALLATION, COPPER WATER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Solder Joints: 1. Type L: Make joints using 95 -5 tin - antimony (no lead) solder and Nokorode® soldering flux paste as manufactured by RectorSeal® (Ph: 800 - 231- 3345). An approved substitute solder is Silvabrite 100 ®, 95.6 percent tin, 4 percent copper, 0.4 percent silver as manufactured by Wolverine Joining Technologies, LLC (Ph: 800 - 225- 2130). P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Mechanically Formed Tee Fittings: Form in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out tube surface to form an outlet having a height of not less than three times thickness of branch tube wall so as to comply with American Welding society lap joint weld. 1. Device: Fully adjustable as to insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of joint. 2. Notch branch tube to conform with inner curve of run tube and press two dimple /depth stops into branch tube (one 1/4 -inch atop the other). This is to insure penetration of branch tube into tee is of sufficient depth for brazing and that branch tube does not obstruct flow in main line tube. 3. Dimple/Depth Stops: In line with run of tube. 4. Second Dimple: 1/4 -inch above first and to serve as a visual point of inspection. 5. Braze mechanically formed tee fittings in accord with Copper Development Association's Copper Tube Handbook using BCuP filler metal. Note — Soft soldered joints will not be permitted. 6. Contractor assumes responsibility for joints being installed in accord with code and manufacturer's instructions. 7. Mechanically formed tee fittings: Listed in accord with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.5c, IPC, IMC, UPC, UMC, IAPMO, NSPC, ASTM F 2014 -00, and ASPE Data Book, Volume 4. C. Press Connections: 1. Make copper press fittings in accord with manufacturer's installation instructions. a. Fully insert tubing inserted into fitting and mark tubing at shoulder of fitting. b. Check Fitting alignment against mark on tubing to assure tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in fitting. c. Press joints using tool approved by manufacturer. 3.4 SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Provide a complete continuous waste and vent plumbing system as shown on Drawings. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1. Provide soil, waste, and drain pipe cleanouts at foot of stacks, at every change in direction, where indicated on Drawings, and as required by governing codes. B. Floor Drains, Funnel Drains and Floor Sinks: 1. Set floor drains with strainer top level with fmished floor surface. Verify floor finishes and elevations with Architectural Drawings and Specifications before commencing work. 2. In food service area, locate floor drains, funnel drains, and floor sinks where indicated on mechanical drawings. C. Vents: 1. Provide 4 -inch diameter vent pipe from a point 12- inches below roof where 4 -inch roof penetrations are required. Where required by local code, provide approved Frost Jacket flashing assembly. Provide single counter flashing over flashing sleeve and pipe with adjustable clamp to provide tight closure over sleeve. 2. Locate vents, cut holes in roof deck and furnish flashing sleeve to roofing trade before roofing work is started. 3.5 SUMP PUMPS A. Follow manufacturer's published instructions and details for installation of sump pumps and accessories. B. Wire split system condensing unit controls to pump controller to shut down the compressor upon high water alarm. Wire according to split system manufacturer's instructions. C. Install cover based on Manufacturer's published instructions and based on drawings. D. Locate control panel on top of grocery style cases and connect wiring from pumps and floats to panel provided by others. 3.6 CONDENSATE PUMP A. Follow manufacturer's published instructions and details for installation of condensate pumps and accessories. B. Wire split system condensing unit controls to pump controller to shut down the compressor upon high water alarm. Wire according to split system manufacturer's instructions. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 - 6 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TARGET STORES: A. General: 1. Contractor shall test piping systems after erection and before concealing or covering. Test as required by code and as specified herein. Materials or workmanship found faulty shall be immediately replaced or repaired and sections or systems re- tested. 2. Perform tests in presence of governing authorities and OSR. B. Plumbing Tests: 1. Plumbing tests shall be not less than the following: 2. Test water pipes at a pressure at least 50 psig higher than normal working pressure, but in no case at a pressure less than 125 psig, for a period of 2 hours. 3. Sanitary and vent pipes, air pressure of 5 psig for a period of 15 minutes. 4. Perform final air test when plumbing work is finished, according to governing code requirements. 5. No plumbing system, or part thereof, shall be covered or concealed until such work receives approval of OSR and governing authorities requiring tests. C. Water Piping Sterilization: Upon completion of cold and hot water systems, sterilize systems with chlorine before placing in operation. Provide a chlorine dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Following a contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush chlorinated water from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.02 parts per million. Valves in water lines being sterilized to be opened and closed several times during sterilization period. Comply with governing code requirements. END OF SECTION 1 TARGET SECTION 15600 BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1 SUMMARY A. . PART 1 - GENERAL Section Includes: 1. This Section covers work and responsibilities associated with installation and commissioning of Owner supplied refrigeration equipment. It is only to be awarded to a Target pre - qualified refrigeration contractor. 2. Full extent of refrigeration work is indicated by Drawings, Schedules, this Specification Section, and those Sections listed as related items to this Section. 3. In general, description of work and responsibilities of refrigeration contract includes but is not limited to installation, start-up, and commissioning of refrigeration systems and display cases, evaporator coils, condensers or condenser /compressor units, and interconnecting refrigerant piping, condensate drains, and field installed refrigeration controls. 4. In addition it includes minor items necessary to the installation which may not specifically be mentioned in Contract Documents. Such items include, but are not limited to, screws, shims, anchors, escutcheons, brackets, pipe sleeves, sealants, flux, glue, and changes due to unforeseen obstructions. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 00700 - General Conditions. B. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. D. Section 01700 - Contract Close Out. E. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor requirements. F. Section 15607 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. G. Section 15610 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 H. Section 15615 - Installation of Walk -in Cooler and Freezer Boxes. I. Section 15620 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. J. Section 15630 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. K. Section 15641 — Installation of Grocery Display Cases. L. Section 15645 — Installation of Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. M. Section 15661 - Installation of Roof -top Condenser /Compressor Units. N. Section 15682 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. O. Section 15691 — Service Refrigerant Tracking Form. P. Section 15696 — Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report. Q. Division 16 — Electrical. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 13040 — Stock Room Walk -in Coolers and Freezers. B. Section 15644 — Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. C. Section 15660 — Outdoor Condenser /Compressor Units. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Refrigeration contractor - contractor with specific skill, knowledge, equipment, and manpower to competently and completely install a complete and working supermarket refrigeration system as described in these documents and accepted industry standards. B. Owner - Target Corporation, 1000 Nicollet Mall, Minneapolis, MN 55403. C. Target OSR - Target On -Site Representative. 1.5 REFERENCES A. IEEE, " Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ". B. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". C. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA -70 ". BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 15600 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 D. NEMA, `National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". E. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Building Materials Directory." F. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". G. EPA, "Environmental Protection Agency ", Title VI, Clean Air Act. 1.6 DRAWINGS AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. These Contract Documents are supplied and owned by Target Corporation. B. Drawings accompanying Specifications are diagrammatic in nature and due to small scale, it is not possible to indicate each individual pipe, offset, fitting, and accessory required. They indicate sizing for refrigerant piping mains and overall piping routings in space allotted. C. Carefully examine Drawings and Specifications, becoming thoroughly acquainted with available information and installation requirements. Then, as required, complete refrigerant piping design and adapt work to jobsite conditions at no additional cost to Target Corporation. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Refrigeration submittals to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group must be marked with store reference number and shall be sent to the following: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant Target Property Development 1000 Nicollet Mall, TPN 1025 Minneapolis, MN 55403 Telephone: (612)-761-5369 Fax: (612) 761-3321 C. In general, fax submittals and follow -up with mailed hard copy. (Submittals which are electronic in nature may be e- mailed as directed with no follow -up.) BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 15600 - 2 1. Minimum of two weeks prior to handling of refrigerants on Target's behalf, ensure that technician refrigeration certification information is recorded, current, and accurate on Target's web -based refrigerant tracking tool. http: / /proactrefriq.ersus.com /Droact re frigerant/ 2. Submit to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group the following documents: a. A completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet, including data for new refrigerant containing equipment installed as part of project. (Refer to Section 15610). b. A completed Service Refrigerant Tracking Form for each event when refrigerant is added to or removed from a refrigerant containing appliance, unit or system as part of a warranty repair. (Refer to Section 15691). c. Prior to Turnover day and manufacturers' (Case or Compressor Rack) field service engineers arriving on site for operational reviews, submit the completed Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report Form. (Note: If this form, properly completed, is not received as instructed the Contractor is responsible for costs associated with a second trip by that manufacturer's, (Compressor Rack or Case) field service engineer which is attributed to incomplete work.) D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Prior to Grand Opening provide a complete set of As Built Drawings to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prior to accepting, inspect materials or Owner furnished equipment. Materials which are found to be damaged, defective or unsuitable for intended service shall not be accepted. Report immediately to General Contractor and OSR, Owner furnished equipment found to be damaged or unacceptable. • • i r 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Refrigeration contractor shall provide a suitable means of securing and protecting all tools, materials, and equipment associated with refrigeration installation, during construction period. C. Contractor shall maintain on site, MSDS sheets for all materials, compounds, and chemicals stored at job site. 1.9 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING, AND COORDINATION A. Sequence, schedule, and coordinate all refrigeration installation and start-up activities so as to allow the over all project to be constructed in an orderly manner. B. Send a representative to weekly project meetings as required by General Contractor or OSR. Attendance as directed is required irregardless of whether or not contractor has a crew on site. C. Purchase materials and arrange deliveries in a timely manner so not to delay project. This may include taking early deliveries and off site storage of items which might be in short supply. D. Coordinate with General Contractor for location and availability of on site storage space. E. Notify, coordinate, and correspond with all legal authorities having jurisdiction for required inspections of the refrigeration system and piping during the installation process. F. Coordinate with refrigeration energy management system (REMS) integrator Pre - Start-up activities minimum of 30 days prior to required site visit. G. Coordinate and confirm system start- up dates with compressor rack manufacturer for Compressor Racks Performance Assessment activities minimum of 30 days prior to required site visit. H. Coordinate and confirm equipment start-up dates with refrigerated case manufacturers for Refrigerated Case Performance Assessment activities minimum of 30 days prior to required site visit. I. Coordinate and confirm dates with commissioning agent to review completed installation minimum of 30 days prior to requested site visit. 1.10 REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Obtain required permits and licenses for installation of refrigeration systems, piping, and equipment prior to start of project. B. Assign a competent project superintendent or foreman with a minimum of five years experience installing supermarket refrigeration systems. It shall be responsibility of that person to supervise daily activities associated with installation work; serve as field contact representative and review installati on documents for discrepancies. This superintendent or foreman shall not be changed during project without permission from Target OSR, or unless there is a termination of employment. C. Successful installation of grocery refrigeration systems is a complex process involving many trades, skill sets, and activities. This must be done fully and correctly. None are to be slighted or thought to be less important. Refrigeration scope of work includes accomplishing the following: 1. Receiving, unloading, and setting grocery cases in their proper locations straight and level. (Note: This can include both refrigerated and non - refrigerated cases along with all case wedges and cap displays supplied by case manufacturers, Refer to GR Series Drawings.) 2. Securing, bolting, buckling, sealing, and trimming out cases free of blemishes. 3. Installation of case condensate drains independently routed, concealed under cases, properly sloped and trapped, in direction of flow to their designated hub drains or floor sinks. 4. Setting condensing units in their proper locations level, and anchoring them to building structure. 5. Receive, unload, and erect walk -in cooler and freezer boxes. 6. Hang evaporator coils level and tight to ceiling. Route condensate drains tight to walls properly trapped and slope in direction of flow to a hub drain or floor sink. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 15600 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 7. Installation of refrigerant detection systems in walk -in coolers and freezers. 8. Installation of walk -in box liquid control valves. 9. Installation of walk -in cooler and freezer thermostats, door switches, and alarm systems. 10. Installation of interconnecting refrigeration piping between cases, condensers evaporator coils and racks; clean and free from leaks with proper slopes, traps, and sizes. 11. Installation of refrigeration piping insulation as specified. 12. Properly sealing and restoring vapor barriers for penetrations into walk -in boxes and cases. (Including electrical, alarm, communication, and sprinklers). 13. Correctly labeling and tagging refrigeration system equipment and piping as specified. 14. Removing and properly disposing of shipping materials, crating, skids, and other construction debris associated with refrigeration system installation. 15. Submitting required regulatory submittal forms in a timely manner, carefully and completely filled out. 16. Systematically and thoroughly verifying refrigeration system control functions, sensor calibrations, and reviewing construction activities for quality and completeness. Properly preparing refrigeration equipment for operation as part of formal Acceptance Inspection Review. 17. Thoroughly and systematically pressure test refrigeration systems, carefully evacuating and installing oil as required, and refrigerant charges, while maintaining compliance with regulations governing the handling of refrigerants. 18. Operationally verifying performance of refrigeration racks as part of formal "Refrigeration Compressor Rack Performance Assessments ". 19. Operationally verifying performance of refrigerated cases, as part of formal Refrigerated Case Performance Assessment. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 15600 - '4 1A c3 r rr 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide full warranty coverage and perform required service for equipment installed as part of this Contract, for a period of 90 days after Grand Opening or total completion date. B. Include labor, parts, travel, and refrigerant for repairs to covered equipment. C. During warranty period refrigeration service, maintenance, and repair work shall be m accord with Section 15602, including applicable administrative and work processes as appropriate to the respective situation. D. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to obtain necessary replacement parts that carry an OEM warranty. E. Target Corporation shall not be responsible for additional cost associated with repair or replacement of equipment during warranty period. F. Prior to award of contracts for installation, notify Target Refrigeration Operations Group of intentions to sub - contract warranty service coverage for warranty period. ( refrigeration .operationsatarget.com) G. Target shall interpret acceptance of refrigeration installation contract without notification of intentions to sub - contract warranty service coverage as conformation of self performance. H. Installing contractors may only sub - contract warranty service coverage to Target approved Service Contractor, with prior written approval of Target Refrigeration Operations. I. Work orders for warranty refrigeration service work will only be issued to installing refrigeration contractors of record, and it will be their responsibility to direct sub - contracted work and resolve warranty payment issues. J. Ten working days prior to end of warranty period, installing contractor shall coordinate and accompany a Target appointed representative or servicing contractor on a handover walk through inspection of applicable refrigeration equipment. h h 1 TARGET 1.12 COMMISSIONING A. Refrigeration commissioning process is comprised of three formal parts: Pre - start-up testing, performance verification, and validation activities. Document pre- start-up testing on "The Pre - Start-up Review Form" or "Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report". Performance verification phase is when systems are made operational and performance reviewed by a commissioning agent and, for SuperTarget stores, equipment manufacturer's representatives with assistance from refrigeration contractor. Formally document these performance reviews on the following and submit to Target: 1. Commissioning agent's formal workbook report. B. (Note: Target will not consider these activities complete until forms are accepted complete by Target Refrigeration Operations.) C. Utilize and complete Target Pre - Start-up Report Form or Refrigeration Acceptance Report as a guide to accomplish the following: 1. Systematically check refrigeration and energy management system installations for quality and completeness, record equipment information on Pre-start-up Review form. 2. Test calibration and adjustment of sensors and control valves. 3. Properly prepare refrigeration system for start-up by performing initial maintenance activities. D. Supply technicians, tools, testing instruments, and materials necessary to perform activities described in Refrigeration Compressor Rack Start-up Report, under supervision of Compressor Rack manufacturer's factory field service representative. E. Supply technicians, tools, testing instruments, and materials necessary to perform activities described in Refrigeration Case Start-up Report, under supervision of refrigerated case manufacturer's factory field service representative. F. Supply technicians, tools, testing instruments, and materials necessary to adjust refrigeration equipment as directed by refrigeration commissioning agent. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANTS AND OILS A. Refrigerants: As specified on Drawing Sheet R1, and certified to meet ARI 700 standard (latest edition), for chemical purity. Deliver refrigerants in original containers. B. Refrigeration Oil: Approved for use by compressor manufacturer, with refrigerant and compressors for the application: 1. R404A: a. Copeland Ultra 22CC. b. Mobil EAL Arctic 22CC. c. ICI Emkarate RL 32CF. d. Thermal Zone 22CC. 2. R22: a. 3G oil. 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PRE - START -UP A. Document all pre - start-up information on "Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report", refer to Section 15696. B. Check all electrical connections at rack. Turn main breaker off and verify that no power is present at all three legs with a meter. Verify tightness of all electrical connections. C. Check main power voltage across each supply leg at the compressor rack. Voltage must be within 10 percent of required. D. Check control voltage. E. Energize system for 24 -hours in advance of starting any compressor. F. Verify cleanliness of evaporator coils. G. Verify proper expansion valve installation. H. Verify that evaporator and condenser fans are clear of debris. I. Verify evaporator fan operation. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 15600 - 5 POJ IGl fT$IZE T-0627 TA1MT J. Verify that case, walk -in cooler, and walk -in freezer doors close properly and are closed. Verify operation of case lights and switches. Verify that door seals are not damaged. Verify high and low pressure control settings. Verify that field wiring connections have been completed. O. Verify condenser pressure fan cycling control operation, if used. P. Verify temperature set - points. Q. Verify alarm set - points. R Verify defrost schedule. S. Verify that compressor discharge service valve is fully open. K. L. M. N. 3.3 CHARGING THE SYSTEM A. Use only appropriate refrigerant for system as indicated in manufacturer's documents and R Series Drawings. Notify Target OSR immediately of any discrepancy. B. Add refrigerant to system through a liquid line drier in charging line. C. Charge refrigerant from factory drums only. Track number of full drums, weigh partial drums, and obtain sign off by OSR or a General Contractor's representative. D. One week prior to turn over, e-mail completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet to refrigerant.trackingAtarget.com, refer to Section 15610. E. Grade and quantity of oil to be added to a system must follow factory recommendations. F. After 24 and 48 hours of operation, verify refrigerant charge and oil levels within system and adjust as needed. G. When refrigeration systems are charged to proper levels, refrigerant cylinders and opened containers of refrigeration oil are to be removed from job site. No refrigerant is to be stored on site after Store Turnover Date or during warranty period. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 15600 r 6 3.4 PARTIALLY COMPLETED WORK A. Owner may take possession of completed or partially completed portions of work although time allotted for completion of work may not have expired. Taking possession of work shall not be deemed acceptance of any work that has not been completed within terms and Specifications of Contract Documents. 3.5 START UP A. Follow manufacturer's published start up procedures. B. Test and adjust controls to provide a refrigeration system operating to Target's design Specifications. C. Provide qualified service technicians, necessary tools, and any other supplies required by manufacturers' field service representatives or commissioning agents to perform commissioning activities identified in these refrigeration Drawings and Specifications. D. Charge and run refrigeration systems for 3 days prior to turnover to Target for merchandising or stocking. E. Start walk -in coolers and freezers prior to refrigerated cases. F. Keep refrigerated case lighting off until refrigeration has been operating for 24 hours. G. Keep refrigeration alarm system off during start-up. H. Activate refrigeration alarm system 24 hours prior to delivery of food. 3.6 STORE TURNOVER DAY A. Finish with work and provide Target with complete and operating refrigeration systems on Store Turnover Day. B. It is understood that temperatures, and valves may need to be adjusted, and control strategies modified as cases are loaded with product and conditions within store environment change. 3.7 OPENING DAYS A. Have mechanic on job site from 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. during both "soft" and "grand" opening days. ■i TARGET P01 RIGHTSi T -0511 3.8 PROJECT CLOSE OUT A. Refer to Section 01700 Contract Closeout. B. Provide "walk through" and general system and alarm training to approved store personnel prior to store opening. END OF SECTION BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 15600 - 7 • TARGET SECTION 15601 ▪ SURPLUS REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT ASSET RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS NW r MI PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to new or used refrigeration equipment or parts which Target identifies suitable for re -use or transfer to another location. B. This Section also provides guidelines and direction for demolition and disposal of Target owned refrigeration equipment as identified in scope of work for a Right- Sizing Project. C. Items eligible to be managed through this process include: 1. Walk in cooler/ freezer box evaporator coils. 2. Condenser /compressor units. 3. Air cooled condensers. 4. Evaporative condensers. 5. Refrigeration compressor racks. 6. Refrigerated display cases, either self - contained or remote condenser. 7. CPC brand refrigeration controls and accessories. D. Equipment types or parts not specifically called out above are not covered by this Section. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 — Reference Standards. B. Section 01700 — Project Closeout: Final cleaning, operating instructions and maintenance manuals, and other project closeout requirements. C. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. D. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. E. Section 15610 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ARI: "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute." P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. UL: "Underwriters Laboratories Inc ®". 1.4 CONTACT INFORMATION A. Target Asset Recovery. (asset.recoveryatarget.com) B. Target Refrigeration Engineering. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Minimum of two weeks prior to handling of refrigerants on Target's behalf, ensure that technician refrigeration certification information is recorded, current and accurate on Target's web -based refrigerant tracking tool. http: / /aroactrefria.ersus.com /Droact refrig erant/ B. A completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet, with data for each piece of refrigerant containing equipment which is transferred or removed from site, (Refer to Section 15610). 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigeration contractors are responsible for the Quality Assurance of their refrigerant handling practices, reclaim equipment, and shall employ skilled craftsmen. Refer to Sections 15600 and 15602. B. Reclaim refrigerant in accord with EPA requirements and ARI standards. 1.7 DEMOLITION WORK INCLUDED A. Perform all demolition, removal, and restoration to complete refrigeration work under the Contract. Relocate or reuse existing materials and equipment as directed in Contract Documents. Salvage components and equipment the Owner wishes to save. Dispose of other materials and debris as directed in this Section. B. Drawings generally show extent of demolition, removal and relocation, but they cannot show all work, or all conditions and details, that will affect progress of work. C. Lists of items to be salvaged should be considered complete but lists of items to be disposed of should be considered general in nature and many not necessarily list every item out individually. SURPLUS REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT ASSET RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 15601 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 D. Examine project site to determine existing conditions, become familiar with project requirements before bidding work. E. General Requirements: 1. Complete work using workers licensed to handle refrigerants and skilled in required trades, if necessary, sublet work to appropriate subcontractors. 2. Restore material in every respect, including removal of visual defects in exposed finishes in a manner approved by project Architect, utilizing appropriate specialists as necessary to repair and replace utilities, building elements, finishes and decor. 3. Coordinate and schedule work with Owner to avoid any disturbance or disruption of Owner's operations. 4. Perform work that will affect Owner's operations at times acceptable to Owner, if necessary, do work in stages to avoid disruption. 5. Since final schedule must be worked out between Owner and Contractor, assume for sake of the bidding that this coordination can be done without overtime work. 6. Coordinate work with other trades prior to commencing demolition. 7. When work affects structure, use extreme care to protect structure and its occupants. 8. Take particular care when working near occupied areas, employ or subcontract competent qualified structural engineers and construction specialists to develop appropriate and responsible techniques for doing work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Contractors, transfer agents, and freight companies are responsible for protection and preservation of refrigerant charge during their handling, shipping, storage, and delivery of refrigerant containing equipment. Isolate refrigerant charge in a protected part of refrigeration circuit; protect exposed refrigerant containing parts with a crating: 1. Secure accessories, covers, and trim for shipment. 2. Take digital photo of equipment to show general condition and send photo to Target Refrigeration Engineering. 3. Move equipment to location for easy pick up by a freight company. Relocate from roof or sales floor and place in back room of store near loading dock. 4. Note missing parts, pieces, or damage and send information to Target Refrigeration Engineering. 5. Shrink wrap equipment. 6. Set and band equipment on pallet. 7. Remove shelves from refrigerated cases and palletize and shrink wrap. B. Transfer Agent or Freight Company shall coordinate special handling or rigging requirements with OSR or General Contractor, minimum three weeks prior to delivery. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVABLE COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A. Salvable refrigeration components and equipment to be reused in Work: 1. Remove salvable components or equipment to be reused or relocated and move them to new location. If new location is not ready to receive these materials, store and protect them from damage until new location is ready. 2. Remove, clean and preserve components or equipment that to be reused, or are needed to match existing work. Exercise extreme care in removing these items to avoid damaging them or making them unsuitable for reuse. Replace damaged parts as directed, for reuse with equivalent, matching materials. B. Salvable components or equipment to be stored by Owner: 1. Owner will identify existing refrigeration components and equipment to keep. Carefully remove these items and protect from damage. Store in an area designated by Owner. 2. Cleaning or restoration of Owner's salvaged components and equipment are not part of this Contract, relocate salvable items to an Owner designated area of project site. SURPLUS REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT ASSET RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 15601 -2 TAR 1 1 TARGET a 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Technicians performing work must have a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. Refer to Section 15602 for Refrigerant Management Processes. 3.2 ASSET RECOVERY PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Refrigeration contractor /General Contractor Responsibilities for Asset Recovery: 1. Pump refrigeration system down and remove refrigerant from equipment if applicable. 2. Disconnect existing refrigeration equipment. 3. Solder pipe closed. 4. Charge equipment with dry nitrogen to 15 psig. 5. Completely fill out and submit Target Refrigerant Tracking Form. 6. Contact Target Asset Recovery to schedule pick -up of leftover equipment. Provide the following information at that time: a. Manufacturer. b. Model number. c. Serial number. d. Description of equipment including approximate size and weight. e. Digital picture of equipment. 7. Allow 5 days for pick -up of equipment. 8. Obtain Bill of Lading (BOL) from Target Asset Recovery and affix to each item to be shipped. B. Target Asset Recovery responsibilities: 1. Send BOL to Contractor. 2. Schedule pick up and delivery of leftover refrigeration equipment. 3. Incur all charges for shipping. 4. Manage inventory list and inventory of leftover refrigeration equipment. C. Refrigeration Equipment Vendor responsibilities for managing recovered assets: 1. Download store specific Construction Documents from Prolog Web. 2. Continually obtain updated copies of Target's Recovered Asset List. (Contact Target Asset Recovery to obtain a listing of current available inventory). 3. Compare store specific equipment needs with Asset Recovery inventory list. 4. Make equipment selections from Asset Recovery Inventory list first, and build new equipment to meet needs of project. 5. Notify Target Asset Recovery of need to relocate equipment. 6. If document change is required due to re- configuration of case layout, vendor shall notify Target Refrigeration Engineering. 3.3 EQUIPMENT RE - SALE P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Outside contractors are forbidden to re -sell assets on Target's behalf. Resale of Target owned refrigerant equipment must be handled through Target Asset Recovery. (Contact asset.recovery@target.com). 3.4 EQUIPMENT TRANSFER A. Submit a Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet must be submitted whenever a refrigerant containing device is transferred from one Target facility to another. Sheet must indicate which facility asset came from and which facility it has been moved to, refer to Section 15610. B. Contractors, agents, or freight companies transferring refrigerant containing assets as part of a their scope of services are responsible to submit a Target Service Refrigerant Tracking Form (Section 15691) for instances of refrigerant loss which occurs while refrigerant containing appliances or systems are in their possession. 3.5 EQUIPMENT DISPOSAL A. Contractors shall only dispose of Target owned refrigerant containing assets when directed by contract documents or with approval of OSR. B. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building or be placed in a trash container with refrigerant still residing in appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process, and transferred to an approved contractor owned reclaim cylinder. C. Submit a Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet whenever refrigerant is removed from a refrigerant containing device for disposal, refer to Section 15610. SURPLUS REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT ASSET RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 15601 - P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3.6 REFRIGERATION DEMOLITION A. Contract Documents may not always identify full extent of temporary protection required to protect ongoing store operations and merchandise during demolition and restoration activities. Coordinate full extent of necessary temporary protection with Target's project manager prior to submitting a bid, including the following: 1. As necessary, provide temporary shoring and supports as required and approved by a structural engineer. Place supports, permanent or temporary, to carry structural loads down to sound bearing. 2. As necessary, provide temporary coverings and enclosures to prevent damage to existing spaces or to parts of building that are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent weather damage and to avoid abnormal heat loss, prevent weather damage by scheduling work on envelope according to weather conditions. 3. As necessary, provide temporary dust enclosures above and below ceilings to separate construction site from rest of building. Also provide temporary air filters and ductwork to contain construction dust within construction area. B. Demolition and Cutting: 1. Demolish and remove existing refrigeration equipment and insulated boxes as shown on Drawings and as required to accomplish work. 2. Where new work is adjacent to existing construction, and when existing construction must be replaced, remove just enough existing construction to complete work under Contract. 3. At no additional cost to Owner, remove and replace existing construction that was to remain but that is damaged during work. 4. Cut openings through concrete by core drilling or sawing, never cut openings in concrete with a hammer -driven chisel or drill without written authorization from Architect. TARGET Ir 5. Never endanger or damage work of other trades. If work of other trades must be altered to accommodate refrigeration work, review proposed alterations with installer of work and comply with installer's recommendations to minimize damage. 6. Where necessary, engage original installer to make required changes. 7. Clean demolition areas and remove debris from site at end of each day's work. 8. Transport debris in a manner that prevents spread of dust, do not burn or store debris at project site. 9. Keep construction areas broom clean. 10. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. C. Unanticipated Work: 1. If demolition work exposes concealed utility services (such as piping, ducts, or electrical conduits), or other building conditions which must be addressed, immediately inform OSR. Begin this additional demolition only after receiving approval from Owner for the additional costs. 2. Remove or reroute unanticipated utility services under direction from project Engineers and maintain Owner's operations with minimum interruption. 3. Disconnect services from their sources and cap them in place, leave no "dead end" services concealed in finished work. 4. Abandon services in place where they will be concealed inside floors or walls. D. Refrigeration Demolition Scope of Work: 1. Coordinate work with other trades as necessary to complete the following: a. Remove refrigerant from refrigeration systems prior to doing demolition work. Refer to Section 15602 for Refrigerant Management Processes. b. Remove above floor refrigeration piping. c. Remove refrigeration piping on roof. d. Abandon under floor refrigeration piping. Cap off below finished floor. END OF SECTION SURPLUS REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT ASSET RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 15601 - 4 TARGET SECTION 15602 REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section applies to both non - warranty and warranty service requests and describes administrative and execution activities as well as parts and materials supplied by authorized servicing contractors engaged in refrigeration service, repair, and maintenance work as directed by Target Corporation through its work order process. B. Activities, supplies, and responsiveness levels described within this Section are minimum levels of performance expectations. Services described in this Section shall be responsibility of contractor including but not limited to, labor, testing materials, parts, travel time, parking fees, permit fees, and equipment necessary to fulfill these contractual obligations. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 15607 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. B. Section 15620 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. C. Section 15630 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. D. Section 15682 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. E. Section 15691 — Service Refrigerant Tracking Form. F. Section 15697 — Service Rate Agreement. G. Section 15698 — Target Proposal Form. 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS, CODES, AND REGULATIONS A. The following Standards, Codes, and Regulations shall apply to both overall Service Agreement and any specific work orders issued as part of this agreement: P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1. ARI 700 - 1993 "Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standard for Refrigerant Purity ". 2. ASHRAE 15 - (Latest Edition) "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". 3. ASHRAE 34 - (Latest Edition) "Designation and Safety Classifications of Refrigerants ". 4. ASME B - 31.5 "Refrigeration Piping ". 5. ASME, "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII ". 6. ATSM, "American Society for Testing and Materials, (various standards)" . 7. EPA, "Environmental Protection Agency regulations as applied to Handling and Recycling Refrigerants, Section 608; and Stratospheric Ozone Protection, Title 5 ". 8. IMC - (As adopted by local jurisdiction having authority), "International Mechanical Code ". 9. NFPA 70 — (Latest Edition) "National Electrical Code ", (NEC). 10. NSF- 7, "National Sanitation Foundation Standard for Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers ". 11. OSHA, "Occupational Safety & Health Administration regulations as applicable and appropriate for the work being performed." 12. UL, "Underwriters Laboratory standards as applied to electrical devices and wiring; and Standard 207, for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories ". 13. UMC- (As adopted by local jurisdiction having authority), "Uniform Mechanical Code ". 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. BSOC: Target, Building Services Operations Center. B. LOD: Lead On Duty C. LOS: Level of Services D. NTE: Not to exceed price. E. NNTE: New or revised not to exceed price. F. STL: Store Team Lead. G. Maximo: Computer software package Target utilizes for asset management and work order application. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 H. Equipment: Defined as physical part of refrigeration system of building or facility, both interior and exterior, including, without limiting the foregoing, the following: 1. Condenser /compressor units. 2. Evaporator coil units. 3. Refrigerated display cases. 4. Parallel compressor racks. 5. Condensing units. I. Compressor Racks and Condenser /Compressor Units: Includes compressors, piping, valves, filter, driers, wiring, controls, flex connections, isolation devices, insulation, clamps and hangers, fans, motors, lamps, switches, alarm horns, relays, contactors, and mechanical and electrical safety devices. J. Compressors: Includes mechanical and electrical operational and safety devices, isolation devices and adjoining piping. K. Condenser: Includes control devices, coils, housings, fan motors and blades, screens, piping, water towers, and adjoining piping. L. Evaporator coils: Includes control devices, coils, housing, drain pans and adjoining piping. M. Refrigerated Display Cases: Includes coils, cabinets, housings, covers, drain pans, condensate piping, evaporator fans, fan kits, air diffusers and grills , temperature sensors, electronic controls devices, power and control wiring, piping, valves, metering devices, case lighting systems, glass doors, door hardware, defrost and anti -sweat heaters and case trim. Where applicable these also include produce misting systems and floral case hydroponics systems. N. Walk - in Coolers, Freezers and Prep Rooms: Includes, evaporator coils, housings, drain pans, drain lines, temperature sensors, electronic controls devices, power and control wiring, piping, refrigerant detection systems, alarm system devices, valves, metering devices, piping, fan motors, defrost heaters, low temperature insulated doors, double action cooler doors, door hardware, thermometers, and insulated panel systems. O. Electrical Controls: Includes control devices and wiring, contactors, relays, fuses, solenoids, and safety devices. Q. R S. T. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 2 TARGET P. Temperature and On/Off Controls: Includes devices and wiring, thermostats, Refrigeration Energy Management Systems (REMS), controls, devices and modules, and temperature sensors. Remote Control Panels: Includes lamps, switches, alarm horns, and relays. Exhaust/Make up/Transfer Fans: Includes motors, dampers, grills, and electrical controls. Reclaim Coils: Includes piping, valves, metering devices, insulation, hangers and clamps. Ice Machines: Includes compressors, wiring, controls, fans, motors, lamps, switches, controls, drains, relays, contactors, cabinet parts, storage bins, and mechanical and electrical safety devices. U. In - Store Refrigeration Alarm/Monitoring Systems: Includes all panels, relays, circuit boards, switches, alarm devices, pilot lights, power and signal wiring, and sensors. 1.5 WORK ORDERS A. Target will define scope of work for each individual request of services through issuance of a work order. Contractor is not to proceed with execution of any procurement of parts and materials or engineering and field activities until they have received a mutually agreed upon work - order. B. Target will issue work orders via e-mail or facsimile machine. Consider these copies same as originals. C. Scope of work described in a work order shall cover maintenance, repair, installation and other services related to mechanical and electrical equipment as defined in Article 1.4. It may not necessarily identify labor; materials, replacement parts, consumable supplies, and equipment required to complete work. D. Only perform work pursuant to a written work order received. E. Each work order shall be issued with a pre - determined maximum value or NTE. Prior to commencement of work, review NTE for a given work order and in conjunction with rate agreement determine if NTE is sufficient for described scope of work. s TARGET F. G. H. rio r 1.6 PROPOSALS Notify Target and submit an alternative proposal prior to proceeding, if it is believed that NTE on a given work order is insufficient to cover work described on work order. (Refer to article 1.6 for Proposals). Target may cancel, re- issue, or amend work orders as necessary to cover additional costs identified in submitted altemative proposals. Commencement of work under a work order constitutes contractor's acknowledgement that work order and Drawings, Specifications and other documents relating thereto are sufficient for completion of work described in work order. I. If in execution of a work order it is discovered that additional scope needs to be added to a work order, notify Target immediately and submit an alternative proposal, (Refer to Article 1.6 of this Section). Demonstrate that discoveries were unforeseeable and shall not proceed with work toward additional scope items until work orders can be revised or re- issued. Work can still proceed as applicable and valid against existing approved work order scopes. J. Target may cancel a work order in whole or part without cause, in which case Target's liability shall be limited to cost of that portion of work order fully and properly performed prior to cancellation. K. Target reserves the right to make changes in a work order. If such change causes an increase or decrease in cost or time required for performance of a work order, immediately notify Target. L. If warranted, Target shall issue a revised or supplemental work order which contains an equitable adjustment in maximum cost or performance schedule. Any claim by for such an adjustment must be approved by Target before proceeding with such change. A. A proposal is required and must be submitted for occurrence when projected cost of services exceeds individual work order or required scope of services needs to be expanded beyond that identified on original work order. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Prepare proposals for total project scope or total projected cost. (Note: Original NTE plus cost increase for new or additional scope equaling NNTE). C. Complete proposals and submit on Target Proposal Form, refer to Section 15698. Attach additional pages if more space is needed to provide sufficient level of detail. D. Proposal approval will be communicated by one of the following methods: 1. Verbal: If immediate approval is required to resolve an emergency situation, contact BSOC, 1- 888 - 888 -0304, verbally and if requested immediately follow -up request with a FAX or electronic copy. Written proposals must be received within 1 business day. 2. FAX or Electronic: If approval is required in the next 24 -48 hours, submit your proposal via facsimile machine or electronic copy. E -mail: refrigeration .proposals(aiTarget.com; Fax: (775)- 908 -1535. 3. Electronic: If repairs are not pressing (such as planned maintenance in nature or proposed replacement) submit proposals by electronic. Proposals must be received within 2 business days. E. Base all invoice pricing for labor, equipment use, delivery expenses, and mark -ups on rate agreement sheets for complete duration of contract period. 1.7 COMMUNICATIONS AND SERVICE TICKETS A. Store Management Communications: 1. Service technicians must check in with store management, at Guest Services Desk, defined as Store Team Leader (STL) or Lead on Duty (LOD), upon entering and leaving store or job site daily. B. Building Services Operation Center Communications: 1. BSOC is staffed, 24 hrs per day, 7 days per week, by technicians and supervisors to assist stores and contractors in resolving Refrigeration and Refrigeration Energy Management System (REMS) problems. 2. BSOC is Target's authorized agency to issue work orders /purchases orders, authorizations, approvals, and proposals. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Utilize phone numbers listed on work orders /purchases orders for verbal and FAX communication with BSOC. 4. Upon completion of a work order /purchase order call 1- 888 - 888 -0304 and follow closing prompts to close work order. This must be done as soon as work order is completed. C. Refrigeration Service Tickets: 1. A service ticket form must be completed and distributed for each individual work order. This applies to warranty and non- warranty work. (Note: Only one service ticket is required per work order). 2. Service ticket must contain the following information on the form prior to obtaining store management authorization and signature: a. Work Order Number. b. Store Number. c. Description of Work: 1) Summarize description of work performed by Unit number. d. Refrigerant Activity: 1) Indicate refrigerant activity that took place at store. e. Labor Hours Utilized: 1) Dates of service performed. 2) Hours of service performed. 3) Labor Type: Category of service performed. f. Materials and Sub - Contractors Utilized: 1) Unit number. 2) Description and make. 3) Part number and quantities. 4) Taxable or Non - taxable Items. (Note: Cost extensions do not have to be completed prior to obtaining store authorization, but must be completed prior to billing.) 3. Record service technician notes and comments on Refrigeration service tickets. Service technicians are not to utilize, maintain or record operating conditions in any un- official note books left in unsupervised locations around a store, including mechanical and electrical rooms. 4. Within one business day. FAX a signed copy of service tickets to Refrigeration Operations, 775- 370 -9168. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 4 TARGET 1.8 INVOICING PROCEDURES A. Invoice Target within 30 days for work performed. Billing shall include the following: 1. Single invoice broken down by work order numbers. 2. Invoicing must include the following information: a. Target work order number. b. Target purchase order number. c. Target site identification number, (Store Number). 3. Lien waivers for work orders in excess of $5000. (Note: The only acceptable condition is pending "Receipt of payment from Target Corporation ") 4. Base invoice pricing for labor, equipment use, delivery expenses, and mark -ups on rate agreement sheets for complete duration of contract period. 5. Work order back -up assembled in order indicated. This includes but is not limited to the following: a. White original copy of service tickets, minimum of one worksheet for each work order, breaking down labor, materials and sub - contractors cost, and including a store authorization signature for each work order and technicians recommendations. Notes: 1) Taxes, if applicable should be listed at sub -total of labor and material sections. b. A refrigerant tracking authorization number corresponding to each service ticket listing installation or reclaim of refrigerant as part of work scope. B. Target will not accept billing for services which is beyond 5 months from completion of services. 1.9 CONTRACTOR REQUREMENTS A. Employees: 1. Provide qualified skilled technicians and installers to assigned projects and service calls. rr • j • • a i TARGET 2. Train contractor's employees in the following: a. Safe use of tools utilized to complete work assignments. b. Applicable safety programs in place for protection of affected parties, contractor employees, Target employees, and Target's guests. These programs many originate from either contractor or Target. c. Technical skills necessary to service, install, and work around Target's refrigerant containing appliances and systems. d. Abide by proper conduct, protocols, and work rules set forth by Target Corporation to govern activities in Target's facilities. e. Abide by proper business practices and processes necessary to conduct business with Target Corporation. 3. Furnish employees with a company photo identification card or badge, which must be presented when registering in facilities visitor log. 4. Supervision and operationally support contractor's employees while they are working in Target facilities. 5. Target reserves the right to restrict contractor employees from working in Target facilities when deemed appropriate. B. Licenses and Permits: 1. When applicable, obtain necessary installation permits and arrange inspections associated with work assignments. 2. Maintain necessary applicable business and contracting licenses for each location assigned. C. Refrigerant Management: 1. Authorized servicing contractors working on Target owned equipment which contains a refrigerant shall comply with Target's Corporate refrigerant management practices as described in Part 3 of this Specification and fulfill their responsibilities as identified in Target's Corporate Refrigerant Management Plan and summarized as follows: a. Maintain on file in Target's refrigerant tracking data -base the following information: 1) Company Name. 2) Mailing address. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3) Telephone number. 4) E -mail address. 5) Primary contact person. 6) A Scope of Service Listing, (Site's Serviced, Type of Equipment Serviced). 7) List of qualified Service Technicians. 8) List of registered reclaiming machines, by manufacturer and serial number. 9) A validated PDF copy of Refrigerant Handling Certificates each qualified Service Technician listed. 10) A PDF copy of EPA registration certificate for each listed refrigerant reclaim machine. b. Access Contractor data section of Target's Refrigerant Tracking Web - site and up -date company data on file: 1) Contractor's company name. 2) Mailing address. 3) Telephone number. 4) E -mail address. 5) Primary contact person. c. Communicate up -dates to lists of qualified service technicians and registered reclaim machines to Target's refrigerant tracking vendor in writing. Up -dates must be accompanied by copies of their respective certificates. d. Up -date technician and reclaim • equipment files at a minimum of 48 hrs prior to dispatching technician or unit to a Target facility. e. Only utilize technicians whose names and refrigerant handling certificates are on file in Target's data base to dispense refrigerant to Target owned equipment. (Note: Target will not pay invoices which include adding or reclaiming refrigerant done by or with a non - roster reclaim machine or employee.) f. Target's Refrigerant Tracking Vendor shall validate and up -date contractor files or notify contractors of certificate non - compliance within 24 hours of receiving documents. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 7TARE`C 2. Authorized servicing contractors shall be responsible for reporting changes, additions, or reclaims to refrigerant charge quantity of Target owned piece of refrigerant containing equipment. D. Response Times: 1. Maintain a 24 hrs per day, 7 days per week monitored telephone line. 2. Maintain a fax machine or electronic mail site capable of receiving work orders 24 hrs per day, 7 days per week. 3. In cases of emergency service requests, contractor's responding technician shall contact BSOC operations at 888 - 888 -0304 and confirm dispatch within 30 minutes of the original telephoned request for service. 4. Provide qualified service technician on site at store authorized to service within 2 hrs of original telephoned request for service. 1.11 SUB - CONTRACTORS (Note: Target will recognize and allow for extenuating circumstances such as but not limited to weather and traffic if notified appropriately and promptly.) 5. If contractor can not respond to a request for emergency service due to extenuating circumstances, they must notify BSOC operations at 888- 888 -0304 within 30 minutes of original telephoned request for service so that an alternate service provider can be pursued. 1.10 RATE AGREEMENTS A. Utilize rate agreement sheet in Specification Section 15697 to provide pre - established pricing for labor, equipment usage, delivery expenses, and cost mark -ups for each store to be serviced. This pricing must be valid for entire duration of contractor's service agreement with Target for respective stores. A. Sub - contractors must be approved in advance by Target Refrigeration Operations Department. B. Sub - contractor must agree to and abide by all terms and conditions of Target Corporation Building Services Refrigeration Maintenance /Service Scope of Work and this Specification Section, 15602. 1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 -6 C. Primary contractor will be responsible for notifications, billings, dealings, and communications with sub - contractor. A. Planned Maintenance: 1. Planned Maintenance Work Orders a. Target will issue a work order approximately thirty days prior to requesting a planned maintenance inspection to be completed. Frequency of inspections may vary between two and four times per year. Actual quantity will be established by work orders. b. NTE amount on work order is for total store's inspection, not for an individual unit. If additional maintenance or repairs are required above NTE amount, submit a proposal describing additional services required, Refer to Article 1.6. c. Actual time spent performing planned maintenance procedures on individual units may vary based on size age and other factors. Actual cost of total inspection shall be NTE of work order. d. If a planned maintenance inspection can not be completed within thirty days allowed, BSOC must be notified. 2. Planned Maintenance Survey and Inspection: a. Scope of inspections will be determined by a planned maintenance checklist. Refer to accompanying checklist sections or service levels identified on planned maintenance work order. b. Planned maintenance checklists are intended to be guidelines and should not take precedent over seasonal conditions, which are required to prevent damage to Target's equipment. c. Panned maintenance forms are available electronically in an Excel spreadsheet format and must be completed and submitted electronically to Target Refrigeration Operations Department. Refrigeration .OperationsATarget.com p B. Emergency Service: 1. Emergency service work conditions shall apply when issued work order identifies conditions as such and issuance is immediately followed up with telephone contact. 0 1 TARGET d. Additional work or parts required after a Planned Maintenance Survey shall be submitted in accord with Target proposal process to Target Refrigeration Operations Department. Refer to Article 1.6. e. Planned Maintenance Schedule: 1) Super Target: 2 major PM's (complete survey), 2 times per year and 2 minor PM's (checklist inspection), 2 times per year. 2) Mini - Racks, (G. Stores): 2 major PM's (complete survey), 2 times per year. 3) Single Condensing Units, (P and G Stores): 2 major PM's (complete survey), 2 times per year. C. System Modifications: 1. System modification work conditions shall apply with a work order issued directing a specific refrigeration system adjustment or modification with limited scope of services, or requesting a proposal for such work. 2. Timing and scheduling for system modification type work order shall be coordinated on a case by case basis. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supply parts, materials, and equipment which meet the following general requirements: 1. Electrically operated devices and electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL. 2. Provide certified brazers for assignments that require install or repairs for refrigeration piping, joints, or specialties. • 3. Refrigeration valves and specialty devices shall be compliant with UL standard 207 or the ASME pressure vessel code as appropriate. 4. Sealants, finishes, and materials utilized of repairs or installations, which could be considered to come into contact with food products, shall comply with NSF -7. 1 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 13. Utilize and submit to Target a documented quality assurance process which is capable of the following: 1. Verification of qualification for technicians and installers. 2. Verification of quality standards and appropriateness for parts, materials, and equipment actually installed. 3. Verification that corrective actions taken were appropriate for the conditions. 4. Service tickets that accurately and with appropriate level of detail reflect work performed. 5. Invoices shall be timely and accurate. C. Target reserves the right to audit contractor quality assurance programs without prior notice. 1.14 WARRANTIES A. Servicing contractor shall provide full warranty coverage for all work performed in response to a work order. This warranty shall extend for a period of 30 days from date of acceptance of by Target as signed off on Service Summary Form and cover misdiagnosis of issues, workmanship, and defective parts or materials. B. Full warranty coverage for purposes of this agreement means that contractors are responsible for cost of all equipment or system damages related to defects in their misdiagnosis of issues, workmanship, or defective parts and materials. Examples include but are not limited to the following: 1. Loss of refrigerant and oil charges. 2. Damage to electrical and controls devices. 3. Contamination of components and systems. 4. Cosmetic damages to display cabinets, store fixtures, and store finishes. C. Contractor shall pass on to Target manufacturers parts and materials warrantees which extend beyond 30 days and shall be responsible to administer those warrantees. These activities can include but are not limited to the following: 1. Ordering and obtaining replacement parts and materials. 2. Return of defective parts and materials. 3. Required administrative functions such as logistics and scheduling coordination, and all documentation of conditions and circumstances. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 7 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 D. Contractor shall respond to requests for correction of warranty issues in a manner appropriate to the scenario. 1. Within 24 hours for issues which will not directly impact store operations. 2. Within 2 hours for conditions considered emergency. 3. At soonest possible opportunity which can be coordinated with store operations in cases where store operations will be impacted. E. If servicing contractor fails to respond to emergency calls or fails to perform required repairs during warranty period, Target Corporation shall have the right to have repairs performed by another contractor. In this event, original servicing contractor shall pay Target Corporation all associated costs in repair of equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES A. Provide fasteners, anchors, hangers, and supports as required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work as requested by a work order, which meet requirements of Target Specification Section 15607, "Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors ". B. Provide piping insulation materials as required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work as requested by a work order, which meet the requirements of Target Specification Section 15620, "Commercial Refrigeration Insulation ". C. Provide pipe, fittings and brazing materials as required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work as requested by a work order, which meet the requirements of Target specification section 15630, "Commercial Refrigeration Piping ". 2.2 COMPONENTS, REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES, PARTS, AND CONTROLS A. Replacement compressors: New or fully remanufactured by an approved re- builder of the original manufacturer. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 8 2.3 ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES A. Provide equipment and material listed by UL or ETL. B. Thermoplastic- insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5, UL 83, ANSI/ASTM B3. C. Rubber- insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3, UL 44, ANSI/ASTM B3. TARGET. B. Replacement Parts: New with same standard ratings, functional capabilities, and require no additional system modifications. In general provide parts by same manufacturer unless otherwise directed by Target. C. Target recognizes that during emergency service circumstances used parts, parts by less desirable manufacturers, and minor system modifications may be required to return systems to operation. In these instances repairs are viewed as temporary and BSOC must be notified at 888 -888 -0304 to coordinate follow up activities. 2.4 REFRIGERATION ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A. Refrigeration Energy Management System (REMS) controls devices and replacement parts shall be manufactured by Computer Process Controls (CPC) of Kennesaw, GA. B. Target's approved REMS integrator is Energy Management Consultants (EMC): 1550 LaFollette Street Fennimore, WI 53809 Phone: 608 - 822 -3550 Fax: 608-822-3847 Contact: Kevin Kenney or Pete Adam C. Provide as necessary, exact replacement parts, Refer to Specification Section 15681, "Refrigeration Compressor Rack Controls" and Section 15683, "Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls" for an approved listing of components. 2.5 CLEANERS, SEALANTS, AND SERVICE SUPPLIES A. Provide appropriate calking and sealants required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work, as requested by a work order, by the following: 1 1 TARGET Irw r ry Elk 0 0 t 1 1. Butyl Rubber Sealant — one component multipurpose calk intended for stable joints, temperature range minus 20 deg F to 150 deg F. Bostik, Chem -Calk 300 or equal. 2. SLNT -4 - Sanitary clear silicone rubber sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant or equal. 3. "Versi- Foam" by Universal Foam Systems Inc. or equal. 4. Permagum. 2.6 REFRIGERANTS AND OILS A. Provide refrigerants as required of type indicated on equipment name tag and certified to meet ARI 700 standard (latest edition), for chemical purity. Deliver refrigerants in original containers. B. Provide refrigeration oil as required from an unopened container of type listed in equipment installation records. 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify refrigerant and oil types for each system serviced. Clean up of contaminated refrigeration systems due to technician en shall be at contractor's expense. 3.2 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Maintenance, repair, and cleaning work which could impact refrigerant containing components of an appliance or refrigeration system must comply with the following: 1. Technician performing work must have a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. 2. A refrigerant Tracking Form must be filed or where applicable Target's web -based refrigerant tracking tool utilized, whenever refrigerant is added or removed from a refrigerant containing device, (whether it is planned or unplanned). 3. Manufacturers' written troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair procedures are to be closely followed. 4. Perform work which could impact refrigerant containing components of appliance or system in a manner that complies with EPA requirements governing refrigerants. 5. Only manufacturers' approved replacement parts, cleaning solutions, and other compounds are to be used in maintenance and repair procedures. 6. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building with refrigerant still residing in appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process. Transfer refrigerant transferred to an approved contractor owned reclaim cylinder and, if appropriate, install a dry nitrogen holding charge prior to piece of equipment going out of building. B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping, components, or control devices as required to eliminate leaks. 3.3 INSTALLATION P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 0627 A. Install all replacement parts in accord with manufacturer's documented instructions. B. Compressor Replacement: Include installation of a new contactor, liquid line drier /filters, oil filters and suction filters, and perform an oil test. Note oil test results on HVAC and Refrigeration service summary report. In addition, include installation of refrigeration system isolation devices on each side of compressor if not already provided on existing system. C. Refer to the following Specification Sections as applicable for installation requirements related to refrigeration hangers, supports, fasteners, insulation, and piping: 1. Section 15607, "Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors." 2. Section 15620, "Commercial Refrigeration Insulation." REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Section 15630, "Commercial Refrigeration Piping." 3.4 REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT PROCESSES A. Refrigerant and Oil Handling: 1. Refrigerant is not to be brought on site or stored on site in operating Target store without an accompanying refrigerant handling certified technician, and no unused or reclaimed refrigerant is to remain on site after that technician leaves site. 2. Comply with all federal, state, and local laws and regulations governing handling and use of regulated refrigerants and oil. Obligations include, but not limited to, the following: a. Pay costs associated with disposal of refrigerant that cannot be reclaimed due to mixing of refrigerants or improper handling. b. Size recovery/recycling equipment to system tonnage being serviced to minimize billable labor expenses. c. Provide and maintain recovery/recycling equipment as part of labor rate identified in Section 15697. d. Provide name, address, and phone number of refrigerant and oil purchasing vendors and refrigerant distillation vendors that contractor will utilize in conjunction with service provided by this Contract. Contractor must notify Target, within 24 hours, of modifications to these vendors. e. Do not leave used refrigerant overnight at store. f. On -site transfer of same type refrigerant between systems is acceptable except in cases of known system contamination. Validate refrigerant types and test for contamination prior to transfer of refrigerant. Limit recovery effort to refrigerant isolated between refrigeration system isolation devices. g- B. Refrigerant Reporting: 1. Authorized servicing contractors shall access contractor reporting section of Target's refrigerant tracking web -site, within 24 hrs of occurrences and input the following information: a. Site name and store number, (T- XXXX). b. System tag number for piece of equipment serviced. c. Maximo work order number. d. A clearly defined description of reason for adding refrigerant. e. A precise description for location of leak. f. Statement regarding status of leak repairs. Description of how leak was repaired. Detailed description of leak repair verification method. i. Name of servicing contractor. j. Name of technician of record. k. Quantity and type of refrigerant added. 1. Description of method for determination of refrigerant quantity added. m. Model and serial number for refrigerant reclaim equipment used. n. Quantity and type of refrigerant reclaimed. o. An explanation of why refrigerant was removed from system. Description of operational status of equipment at current time or time of repair. 2. Upon successful completion of filing a refrigerant report web -based refrigerant tracking tool shall provide contractor a payment authorization code to include on respective invoice which covers adding or reclaiming refrigerant as a line item. g. h. p. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 10 Tyr (Note: Target will not pay invoices which include adding or reclaiming refrigerant to a refrigerant containing piece of equipment without, a payment authorization code clearly indicated on invoice.) TARGET to 3. For stores not set -up on Target's web - refrigerant tracking tool, authorized servicing contractors shall utilize Service Refrigerant Tracking Form, (Reference Section 15691) to report occurrences adding or reclaiming refrigerants within 24 hours of event. Invoices will not be paid without this form. 4. Target reserves the right to audit authorized servicing contractors' refrigerant inventory records and billings as they pertain to Target for compliance with Target's Corporate Refrigerant Management Plan. 5. Authorized servicing contractors shall as requested assist Target in periodic audits of web -based refrigerant tracking tool. Activities could include but are not limited to submitting report documents, measuring responses, and participating in process verification exercises. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repairs which require opening of a refrigerant circuit or some portion there of shall be pressure tested and properly evacuated when practical. Refer to Specification Section 15630. B. For instances where formal pressure testing and evacuation processes as described in Specification Section 15630 are not possible, effectiveness for repairs shall be verified by 2 different methods with a minimum of 24 hours of equipment operation between tests. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Verify proper adjustment of all valves and control devices which are associated to refrigeration system or circuit worked on. B. Verify proper rotation or alignment of all rotating devices which could have been impacted by work performed. C. Provide all labor and supplies necessary to clean and restore areas affected by their work to match surroundings or Target's standards. D. Remove and properly dispose of replaced parts, equipment, and packaging materials. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 E. Properly reassemble all equipment cabinets and guards. If necessary replace missing fasteners and weather seals. Report damage to equipment cabinets or guards which require follow up attention. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent store fixtures and building finishes from damage during course of work activities. B. Provide required safety equipment and barriers, as applicable to the work to be performed, necessary to protect contractor's employees, Target team members, and Target guests. END OF SECTION REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 15602 - 11 TARGET •w • • rr ■ p SECTION 15603 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS (OWNER FURNISHED) 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section describes required vendor administrative activities and responsibilities along with related internal Target Design, Procurement and Construction Processes which impact supply of Owner Furnished refrigeration equipment. These activities, responsibilities, and processes include, but are not limited to, administrative requirements, engineering support services, scheduling, project proposals, purchase orders, Target change processes, communication protocols, product documentation requirements, and equipment modification change management processes. B. This Section applies to Owner Furnished equipment sections as listed in the Related Items Article of this Specification Section. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 13040 — Stock Room Walk -in Coolers and Freezers. B. C. D. 1.3 DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL Section 15601- Surplus Refrigeration Equipment Asset Recovery. Section 15644 — Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. Section 15660 - Outdoor Condenser /Compressor Units (Owner Furnished). A. Prolog Web: A secure web -based SQL database tool, which Target uses to share and manage Construction Documents. B. CHANGE Manager: Web based software tool used by Target to initiate, communicate and manage building, equipment, or fixture changes during design and construction phases of projects. Change requests are issued in one of three formats as follows: 1. "D" CHANGE - An electronic document communicating an Architectural or Engineering design change affecting multiple projects. "D" CHANGES identify impacted design disciplines, describe change scope, contain necessary supporting attachments, (drawings, sketches, cut sheets, and specification modifications), and are typically distributed to store design teams for project specific adaptation. Vendors should not receive or react to "D" CHANGES. 2. "A" CHANGE - An electronic document communicating an Architectural or Engineering change to a specific project. "A" CHANGES identify impacted construction trades and equipment providers, describe the change scope, contain necessary supporting attachments, (drawings, sketches, cut sheets and specification modifications), and are issued to the field. Vendors should receive "A" CHANGE documentation from project General Contractors. 3. "S" CHANGE - An electronic document communicating a store fixture or building change, which is issued by Store Planning. An "S" CHANGE may or may not require an "A" CHANGE for implementation. Vendors will receive "S" CHANGE information from Procurement. Vendors must confirm whether or not an "S" CHANGE or "A" CHANGE will be implemented on a project -by- project basis with each General Contractor or refrigeration contractor before proceeding. C. Original issue Construction Documents are posted on Prolog Web. However, changes to such documents are not posted on Prolog Web. Vendors must obtain "A" CHANGE documentation from project General Contractors. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Target identifies projects by store number, and schedules projects by cycle. For new stores the grand opening date defines the cycle. Stores will fall into March, July or October cycle. For example, stores that will open in March of 2007 are identified as a March 07 projects. Likewise, a store opening in July of 2007 is identified as a July 07 cycle store. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 15603 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Remodel projects are also identified by cycle. Projects that will be considered substantially complete in March of 2007 will be designated as Cycle 1/07. C. Special projects and retrofit timelines will be communicated as applicable. D. Vendors shall manage their equipment delivery dates to accommodate Target's project schedules for each cycle of their sourcing agreement. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Communication of Target documents including Purchase Orders and Change Orders shall take place through e-mail, phone, or fax. Vendors are required to have systems in place to support each. B. Vendors shall be responsible to download project specific Construction Documents from Prolog Web. C. Vendors shall include as part their scope of services the following communications infrastructure and activities: 1. Assign one individual as primary administrative contact person for duration of program, and provide name, address, phone numbers, and e-mail address for named individual. 2. Complete Target training session outlining use of Prolog Web, Prolog Manager, and CHANGE Manager as requested by Target. 3. Maintain proper computers and software to completely communicate with Prolog Web, Prolog Manager, and CHANGE Manager. 4. Download drawings and information using Adobe Acrobat and Micro-station software programs. 5. Properly manage procurement and delivery of required parts, components, and pieces for vendor provided equipment. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 15603 2 1.6 ENGINEERING SUPPORT SERVICES A. Assign an engineering contact, to provide technical support for program and provide name, address, phone numbers, and e-mail address for named individual. Responsibilities shall include development and support of design documents, tracking changes, and rapid response to questions from Target personnel. (Target requires direct access to this individual with an intermediary.) 1.7 SUBMITTALS TARGET • A. Assemble, organize, and submit manufacturers' required submittals as requested in applicable Specifications Sections which cover provided refrigeration equipment and forward to General Contractors, refrigeration contractors, and Target. 1.8 WARRANTY Submit to: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant Target Property Development 1000 Nicollet Mall, TPN 1025 Minneapolis, MN 55403 Telephone: (612)- 761 -5369 Fax: (612) 761 -3321 B. Record Documents: 1. At end of each construction cycle, Vendor shall assemble, organize, and submit manufacturers' required record documents as requested in applicable Specifications Sections for provided refrigeration equipment and forward to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group. Record copies of documents described above, for each type of refrigeration equipment provided during the cycle and accompanied by a related stores matrix. (These documents are to be electronic format on a CD. PDF and CAD files are required, NO Hard Copies!). A. Vendor shall administer and serve as primary point of contact for warranty issues of equipment supplied under their purchase agreement. r., TARGET rr lit w 2.1 DESIGN DOCUMENTS • 1 1 B. In general, refrigeration equipment warranties shall cover against defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one year from date of Owner's acceptance (Grand Opening) or as specifically directed, refer to Sections 15640, 15644, and as applicable 15660. C. Refrigeration equipment warranties for remodel, retro-fits, and right- sizing projects shall start up on Target's documented acceptance of installation. D. Manufacturer must immediately correct, at their expense, defects due to faulty work or materials appearing during period from shipping through start-up to acceptance by Owner. E. Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs necessary to keep equipment in operating condition without voiding manufacturer's warranty or relieving manufacturer of responsibilities during warranty period. F. Manufacturer shall be financially responsible during warranty period for replacement of defective parts and workmanship. Coordinate directly with repairing contractor of record for delivery of material, reimbursement of expenses, and providing technical support as necessary. G. Manufacturer must immediately correct, at their expense, defects due to faulty work, materials, or shipping damage appearing during period from shipping through Turnover Day. H. Warranty shall not apply to injuries or damages occurring after Owner acceptance due to "Act of God ", fire, violence, abuse, or carelessness of separate contractors or agents of Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS A. Designs and applications covered by referenced purchase agreements shall not be changed or modified without written agreement between both parties. B. Provide Target Engineering with design documents showing piping, electrical schematics, and component specifications as listed in appropriate Specification Section. C. Provide cut sheets showing footprint and end view or section view for each piece of equipment. Example: Vendor shall provide a drawing showing footprint of a condenser /compressor unit, and a drawing showing layout of components within unit. A section view of individual components is not required. D. Vendor provided design documents shall be signed and submitted to Target Engineering. Target Engineering shall sign the submittal and return to vendor to signify agreement on design. E. Target shall assign a fixture number or an equipment number to each piece of equipment. Requirements to be met prior to creation of fixture number include definition of attributes such as: 1. Weight. 2. Physical dimensions. 3. Electrical requirements. 4. Mechanical requirements. 5. Refrigeration requirements. 6. Refrigerant requirements. 7. Model number. 2.2 VENDOR PRODUCT CHANGES P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Vendor shall not substitute, revise, change, or otherwise modify an agreed upon piece of equipment or process without written agreement from Target. Substitutions or changes affecting attributes listed in Article 2.1E shall require issuance of a new fixture number. B. Vendor shall review proposed changes with Target Engineering, and Target Procurement to determine appropriateness of change and cost of change. C. Component changes - altercates as listed in appropriate Specification Section may be provided by vendor at their option. D. Submit UL/NSF and similar listings - documentation to Target Engineering showing that UL/NSF or similar ratings have been maintained throughout change. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 15603 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 E. Mid -cycle changes to design shall not be allowed without written permission from Target. 2.3 TARGET DRIVEN CHANGES A. During construction, design and equipment requirement may change due to a variety of reasons. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. Change requests are communicated to design teams and to field through "D" CHANGE, "S" CHANGE and "A" CHANGE documents. Store Design Team has authority to implement or deny a change request. Change requests are issued by Target to General Contractor. General Contractor is to distribute change requests to installation contractors. Vendors will also receive copies of "S" CHANGES from Procurement. It is vendor's responsibility to verify implementation of "S" CHANGE with Contractor. Vendor may also receive notification of required and approved changes from GC/ Installation Contractor. Provide Target Procurement with a revised quotation within 5 days of confirming the change with the field. Provide Contractor and Procurement with revised ship /delivery date within one week of receiving change request. Make every effort to accommodate changes without affecting requested delivery date. In general, change will occur in accord with schedule outlined in Target Change Windows documentation. Installation contractor shall coordinate all changes with equipment vendor. Changes that impact equipment more than 21 days prior to shipment shall cause shipment to hold for re -work or redistribution. M. For changes received less than 21 days before previously agreed upon and scheduled ship date, vendor should contact Target Procurement and Target Engineering to discuss ramifications of change and agree upon a plan of action. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 15603 - 4 TI GET N. Changes that involve transferring or changing equipment after equipment delivery shall be managed by Vendor. This includes arranging shipment of replacement equipment, and managing redeployment of existing equipment, refer to Section 15601. O. Transfer of leftover, used, or incorrect equipment shall be managed by Target Asset Recovery, refer to Section 15601. 2.4 PARTS MANUALS A. Provide electronic parts manuals to Target Refrigeration Engineering. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES A. For new construction and remodel projects Target shall post prototypical drawings, equipment schedules and designs on Prolog Web for each cycle of stores. Special projects and retrofit projects are not available via Prolog Web. Documents for these projects will be forwarded via email, fax, or mail. B. Project Engineer shall post store specific Construction Documents for each new and remodel project on Prolog Web. C. Download store specific Construction Documents from Prolog Web. D. Compare prototypical drawings to store specific drawings. Vendor shall also determine if required equipment is within scope of purchasing agreement equipment design. E. Before building or shipping equipment, compare store specific equipment needs with Recovered Asset list on Target Asset Recovery website. Use equipment from asset recovery list before building new equipment. F. Documents that are revised by "A ", "D ", or "S" CHANGES are not posted to Prolog Web. CHANGES are communicated through change process outlined in Article 2.3. G. If discrepancy exists, vendor shall contact Project Engineer. Vendor shall also contact Target Procurement if situation will affect requested delivery date. ■ yr TARGET M 1 t 3.2 PROPOSALS A. Review construction documents and develop a written quotation to price equipment covered in their purchase agreement. B. Proposal shall be sent via email to assigned Procurement Sourcing Specialist. 3.3 PURCHASE ORDERS A. Target shall issue a purchase order for equipment after receipt of proposal unless pricing or design discrepancies are identified and communicated to vendor. 3.4 COORDINATION ACTIVITIES A. Contact General Contractor/Installing Contractor to schedule preliminary ship /delivery date. Vendor shall obtain date in writing from contractor. B. Confirm delivery dates with General Contractor/Installing Contractor for equipment 10 days prior to shipment. C. Requested changes in delivery dates shall be confirmed via email or FAX. D. Confirm equipment requirements and sizing with General Contractor/Installing Contractor. E. Vendor shall keep copies of written correspondence. F. Vendor shall immediately notify Target Procurement of an event that may cause a delay in shipment. 3.5 DELIVERY SCHEDULE A. Coordinate delivery of equipment with General Contractor/Installation Contractor. B. Equipment vendor shall provide Target Engineering and Target Procurement with an electronic copy of an updated equipment delivery schedule each Friday during active shipping period. Schedule shall be in Microsoft Excel. Show fields as listed below: 1. Store Number. 2. Construction Cycle. 3. Address. 4. City. 5. State. 6. Delivery Date. 7. Field Contact Person. 8. Site phone number. 9. Field Contact Date. END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 10. Written confirmation from field received. 11. Written confirmation of ship date sent. 12. Target purchase order number. 13. Factory Order Number. 14. Equipment Revision Number. 15. Notes to document any changes. 16. Drawing date. 17. Change Numbers. 18. Fixture or equipment numbers of all equipment. 19. Model and serial numbers of equipment. 20. Model and serial numbers of refrigeration compressors if applicable. 3.6 CONSTRUCTION CYCLE CLOSE -OUT PROCESS A. At end of each construction cycle vendor shall submit the following to Target: 1. Store Number. 2. Construction Cycle. 3. Address. 4. City. 5. State. 6. Delivery Date. 7. Field Contact Person. 8. Site phone number. 9. Field Contact Date. 10. Written confirmation from field received. 11. Written confirmation of ship date sent. 12. Target purchase order number. 13. Factory Order Number. 14. Equipment Revision Number. 15. Notes to document any changes. 16. Drawing date. 17. Change Numbers. 18. Fixture or equipment numbers of equipment. 19. Model and serial numbers of equipment. 20. Model and serial numbers of refrigeration compressors if applicable. 21. Bill of Materials numbers. 22. PDF copies of final bills of material related to individual projects. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 15603 - 5 r • • p 1 TARGET SECTION 15607 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SUPPORTS, HANGERS, AND ANCHORS 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 — B. Section 15600 — Refrigeration R C. Section 15630 — Piping. PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section includes hangers, embedded concrete anchors, fastening devices, and supports for refrigeration piping and equipment. B. Specific applications are identified on Drawings and related items. C. Administratively the work of this section governed by the requirements of Section 15600 and is to be the responsibility of the Refrigeration Contractor. Reference Standards. Basic Commercial equirements. Commercial Refrigeration 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL "Underwriters Laboratories Inc ®, "Building Materials Directory ". B. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". C. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". D. MSS, "Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hanger assemblies as required, consisting of pre - manufactured components which are UL approved or comply with MSS SP -69 and SP -58. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Seismic Requirements: 1. Adapt prototypical support, hanger, and anchor designs called out in these Documents to meet specific site seismic requirements for project. These may include but are not limited to the following: a. Additional bracing and fasteners. b. Restraint cabling. c. Providing seismic design drawings, certifications and calculations as required by local authority having jurisdiction. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment roof supports with General Contractor. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide as part of overall project installation warranty coverage, refer to Sections 15600. 2.1 MATERIALS PART 2- PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 0627 A. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex -head, track bolts, and self locking nuts. B. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. C. Hanger Rods: ASTM A 36 hot rolled steel with cut coarse threads. D. Individual Hangers: Adjustable Swivel Ring type with copper finish and plastic coating, B- Line B3170CTC series. E. Strut mounted cushion clamp assemblies as manufactured by Hydra -Zorb or B -Line. Galvanized powder coated 1008 -1010 carbon steel clamps with projection welded studs, pre - molded DuPont Hytrel cushions and nylon insert locknut. REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS 15607 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 F. Bolted metal framing systems, (Unistrut or B- Line) shall consist of channels fittings and hardware as defined in the Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Standard Publication MFMA -1. 1. Channels shall be cold formed 12 gage. ASTM A 570, grade 33 low-carbon steel and painted with electrodeposited epoxy base paint. 2. Channel accessories shall be ASTM A 635 steel and painted with electrodeposited epoxy base paint. G. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. H. Roof top pipe support systems, C -Port rubber and steel curbs as manufactured by Cooper B- Line Inc: 1. Wood blocking or equipment supports, internal to building: Fire treated and at a minimum meet the following: a. Criteria set forth in NER -577 as published by National Evaluation Service. b. Flame spread rating 25 or less when subjected to ASTM E -84 burn test of 30 minutes. c. Re -dried to a maximum of 19 percent (Lumber) or 15 percent (Plywood) moisture content, in conformance with UL Follow -up Service Procedures Files R16519 (Lumber) or R18401 (Plywood) and procedures outlined in Osmose Standard FP -00 for fire retardant treated wood. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Attach hangers and supports directly to building structure or masonry. Do not attach hangers or supports to roof deck, suspended ceilings, drywall, or other sheeting materials. REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS 15607 - 2 TARGET B. Attach hangers and pipe supports only to bar joist top chords, with-in 3- inches of panel points. (Panel point is where vertical or angular member of joist is attached to top chord). 1. Coordinate hanger locations between trades so that a maximum allowable load of 100 lbs to single joist panel point is not exceeded. 2. Locate panel point loads a minimum of 6- feet from other loads on same joist. 3. Provide necessary supplemental steel to span between joists where hanger locations do not match -up with building structure. 4. Notify OSR if these conditions cannot be met. C. Install mechanical - anchor fasteners in concrete after it has completely cured and in accord with manufacturer's published instructions. Do not install anchors in slabs less than 4 inches thick. D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and accommodate normal expansion and contraction due to changes in temperature. E. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading or stresses from movement are not transmitted to connected equipment. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for the smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes specified. Refer to refrigeration details on "M" or "R" Drawing Sheets. H. Install hangers and supports with vertical adjustment to provide indicated pipe slopes and maintain pipe deflections as allowed by ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping ". I. Coordinate locations for roof top piping supports with building structure. J. Provide hangers for insulated pipe sized to encompass insulation including support shields. Pipe Size Hanger Rod Dia. Max. Spacing 5' -0" 1/2" to 3/4" 3/8" 1" to 1 -1/4" 3/8" 6' -0" 1 -1/2" to 2" 3/8" 8' -0" 2 -1/2" 3/8" 9' -0" 3" 1/2" 10' -0" 4" 1/2" 10' -0" 5" 5/8" 10' -0" 6" 3/4" 10' -0" 8" 7/8" 10' -0" • TARGET rr Ns ur A. Construct corrosion resistant galvanized and • painted hanger assemblies that conform to MSS SP -58. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified by Drawings or this Section. C. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structures, in compliance with MSS SP -69 and SP -89. 1 1 let 1 ■ 1 1 K. In addition to, or coordinated with typical hanger and support spacing required by schedule in Part 3.7 of this Section, locate hangers at the following: 1. Adjacent to joints, couplings and fittings. Refer to Section 15630 distance requirements. 2. At each offset or change of direction. 3. At ends of piping branches. 4. At base of risers. 5. In immediate vicinity of valves or other heavy refrigeration system accessories. 6. As required to prevent sags, bends, or vibration. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and achieve the indicated slope of piping. B. Remove sharp edges and burrs from refrigeration system hangers and supports. C. Remove signs of surface corrosion on hangers and supports and restore finishes with touch up paint or galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Copper Tubing: Subject to weight restrictions according to hanger, support horizontal piping with spacing as follows: P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Increase hanger rod size as required for trapeze hangers to handle added weight of multiple pipes and space hangers to accommodate smallest pipe size of group. END OF SECTION REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS 15607 - 3 TARGET SECTION 15610 COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices for refrigeration systems and their respective components, including pipe markers, system identification labels, and asset tags. B. Pipe markers valve tags and system identification labels are to be furnished and installed as part of this scope of services. C. Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags are to be Owner furnished and contractor installed. Refrigeration contractor is responsible for acquisition and submission of refrigerant tracking data and installing asset tags on new commercial refrigeration equipment, food service appliances, domestic refrigerators, and electric water coolers installed as part of project. (This includes equipment which has been provided or installed by other sub- contractors.) D. Related Items: 1. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. 2. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. E. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 15600 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL A. ASME — "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". B. ASTM — "American Society for Testing and Materials ". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size, length of color field, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering or concealing. B. Install identification devices prior to installation of drop ceilings or other concealment. C. Refrigerant Containing Asset Tags: 1. 45 days prior to store turn over, refrigeration contractor shall contact Marking Services Inc, (MSI) to validate and coordinate Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags. (800)- 234 -0135 or www.markserv.com. 2. Coordinate tag delivery, refrigerant data acquisition, and installation of asset tags with (MSI), General Contractor, and other applicable sub - contractors or vendors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. One week prior to turn over e-mail completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet to: refrigerant .tracking(2target.com. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide as part of overall project installation warranty coverage refer to Sections 15600. B. Warrant completeness and accuracy of data submitted for refrigerant tracking. C. Warrant installation of tags and labels for a period of one year. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Marking Services Inc. 2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Provide MS -970 coiled polyester pipe labels designed to comply with ASME A13.1 -1996. Colors are to be black characters on a yellow or white background. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 15610 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Provide Engraved Plastic - Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic- resin - laminate engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine sub core, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening: 1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 2. Thickness: 1/16 -inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8- inches in length, and 1/8 -inch for larger units. 3. Fasteners: Self - tapping, stainless steel screws or contact -type, permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. C. Provide 2 -inch round MS -215 type valve tags 125 mil thickness with stainless steel grommets, black print on a white background and stainless steel braided wire fasteners. D. (Owner furnished) Refrigerant Tacking Asset Tags, approximately 1 x 2 3/4 inches in size, of the following types as directed. 1. Target approved laser - etched multi color anodized aluminum tags with the appropriate permanent adhesive, (3M, #467 for non - plastic surfaces and #9471 for plastic surfaces). 2. Target approved MS -215 type tags as available through MSI Marking Services Inc. (800)- 234 -0135. 3. Tags are to contain the following information: a. Bull's -eye logo. b. Target asset identification number. c. A scannable bar -code containing asset identification number. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify Conditions: Examine areas where work is to be performed. Identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 15610 -2 TARGET 3.2 REFRIGERANT CONTAINING ASSET TRACKING AND TAGGING PROCESS A. Owner furnished asset tagging kit provided through (MSI) shall contain the following: 1. Verified self adhesive asset tags necessary to mark new food services appliances, refrigeration equipment, refrigerators, and electric water coolers. 2. Verified MS -215 asset tags and stainless steel self locking braided wire fasteners necessary to mark new compressor/ condensing units, walk -in box evaporator coils, refrigeration compressor racks, heat re -claim storage tanks, and condensers. 3. A comprehensive refrigerant asset tag installation instruction guideline, with pictures and examples. 4. A set of store fixture drawings. 5. An electronic spreadsheet template, (Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet), for recording and submitting equipment refrigerant data as requested. B. Fill in refrigerant tracking data spread sheet completely, leaving no blanks. Complete one line for every new piece of refrigerant containing equipment added and one line for each independent circuit in an appliance with multiple circuits or systems. C. Follow up directly with (MSI) to resolve all tag discrepancies that are discovered during refrigerant inventorying and tagging process. Insure that all refrigerant containing equipment gets recorded and properly tagged, and re -tag improperly tagged equipment or re- survey equipment not originally inventoried at no additional cost to Target. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces prior to applying self - adhesive labels, tags, or signs. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Mark each refrigerant suction and liquid pipe at the following three locations with a pipe label that identifies line type, refrigerant, direction of flow and circuit number: 1. Adjacent to roof -top condenser /compressor units or compressor rack. 2. Midpoint of each horizontal piping segment above ceilings. 4 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Point where a pipe enters into a case or walk -in box. B. Provide 3 "x5" engraved plastic - laminate sign on each condenser /compressor unit that identifies the system number, refrigerant type, initial refrigerant charge quantity, and name, address, and phone number of installing contractor. C. Install a framed schematic depicting field installed portion of refrigeration systems adjacent to REMS refrigeration control panels. D. Install an engraved plastic - laminate sign to lead fixture of case line up, adjacent to manufacturer's model and serial number tag on interior surface of case indicating refrigeration system or circuit number. E. Record equipment data and install an (Owner Furnished), laser- etched asset identification tag, as directed by asset tagging instruction guide for each new refrigerant containing display case, refrigerator, food serve appliance, and electric water cooler. (This includes equipment not necessarily installed by Refrigeration Contractor.) F. Record equipment data and install an MS -215 type asset identification tag mechanically fastened with self locking stainless steel braded wire fastener, as directed by asset tagging instruction guide, for each air cooled condenser, condenser /compressor unit, walk - in box evaporator unit, and compressor rack system. G. Mark each field installed refrigeration stop valve with a tag that clearly identifies its function and valve number. Coordinate numbering with condenser /compressor unit manufacturer's numbering sequence. ▪ 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Relocate refrigeration identification devices that become visually blocked by work of this • or other Divisions. B. Clean faces of identification devices and frames of valve charts. • END OF SECTION a 1 COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 15610 - 3 TARGET A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handing, and erecting Owner Furnished walk -in cooler and freezer boxes, refer to Section 13040. B. Administratively the work of this section governed by the requirements of Section 15600 and is to be the responsibility of the Refrigeration Contractor. • 1.2 RELATED ITEMS r 5 s • • 1 SECTION 15615 INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. Section 15620 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. C. D. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 13040 — Stock Room Walk -in Coolers and Freezers. 1.4 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL A. ASTM, "American Society of Testing Materials ". B. NSF, "National Sanitation Foundation ". C. USDA, "United States Department of Agriculture ". D. UL "Underwriters Laboratories Inc ®", "Building Materials Directory ". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigeration contractor is responsible for vapor barrier integrity of walk -in cooler and freezer boxes erected as part of their contract and shall employ craftsmen with a minimum of 5 -years experience installing similar cold storage units, to assemble insulated panel enclosures and seal utility or hanger penetrations. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide necessary labor, materials, and equipment to receive, unload, handle and store, Owner furnished walk -in cooler and freezer box panels, trim, and other associated items. B. Examine and inventory items provided. Report damaged or missing items to General Contractor or OSR C. Store components for walk -in coolers and freezers in a clean dry location above floor with sufficient support to prevent sag, warp, or deflection of panels and trim parts. D. Prior to assembly, protect components as necessary from damage, moisture, soiling, and theft during storage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Assist with layout of and review installation of special cooler and freezer floor slabs with General Contractor. B. C. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply joint sealing materials at temperatures above or below manufacturer's recommendations or to damp or frosted surfaces. 1.9 WARRANTY P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Consult with Division 16 contractor to layout conduit penetrations through walk -in cooler and freezer box insulated panels. Consult with fire protection contractor to review sprinkler piping penetrations through walk -in cooler and freezer box insulated panels. A. Provide warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 15600 and 15602. B. Over and above general warranty provisions referenced above, guarantee vapor tight integrity of all insulated panel joints, floor-to- wall, wall - to-ceiling, and utility penetrations, for a period of 3 years from date of grand opening. INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 15615 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide sufficient quantities of calking to seal walk -in cooler and freezer boxes as required by "M" Drawing Sheets and this Specification Section. 1. Butyl Rubber Sealant — one component multipurpose calk intended for stable joints, temperature range minus 20 deg F to 150 deg F. Bostik, Chem -Calk 300 or equal. 2. SLNT -4 - Sanitary silicone rubber sealant conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant or equal. (Note: Calking not provided by Walk -in Box Manufacturer.) B. Provide sufficient quantities of urethane foam insulation material to seal walk -in cooler and freezer box penetrations as required by "M" Drawing Sheets and this Specification Section. 1. "Versi- Foam" by Universal Foam Systems Inc. or equal. 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Walk -in boxes are not to be erected until after roof is on building and area is dry. B. Verify that cooler and freezer walk -in box floor slabs are stable, smooth, and level prior to installing alignment strip. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to pouring of concrete floor slabs for walk -in cooler and freezer boxes work with General Contractor to accurately locate and layout walk -in freezer insulated floor and recessed cooler floor. (Reference the "S" and "M" Drawing Sheets). INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 15615 -2 TARGET- 0 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Sweep floor and layout outside dimensions of box with a chalk line. Refer to M Drawing Sheets for establishing perpendicular lines. Then measure half wall thickness to find center line of wall panel layout. 2. Shim alignment strips to level and secure with 20 gage reinforcing angles, straight and level to floor slabs and thermal isolation blocking, at center line of wall panel layout using 2 -inch powder activated anchors for coolers and 3 -inch deck screws for freezers. 3. Prior to application of sealants and calking, wipe down or clean surfaces. 4. Apply butyl calking, utilizing a pneumatic caulking gun to attain a continuous and consistent 1/2 -inch bead on insulated panels and floor slabs as indicated on "M" Drawing Sheets to achieve complete vapor seal at joints. 5. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to panel joints as directed on the "M" Drawing Sheets and finish so as to eliminate harborages. 6. Refer to Section 15620 as it applies to sealing penetrations, including those made by other trades. B. Wall Panels: 1. Assemble wall panels, including pre - mounted door section, in order and manner indicated on manufacturer's shop drawing, installation instructions, and "M" Drawing Sheets. 2. Install panels true, plumb, and in alignment. 3. Cam lock panels together and install vinyl plugs in cam lock access holes. 4. Foam gaps under or between panels. C. Ceiling Panels: 1. Assemble ceiling panels in order and manner indicated on manufacturer's shop drawing, installation instructions, and "M" Drawing Sheets. 2. Align and position ceiling panels so that they line up flush with wall panels. 3. Lag screw ceiling panels to wall panels, cam lock ceiling panels together, and install vinyl plugs in cam lock access holes. 3.3 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 4. , Install top cap trim covering accessible edges. to 1 1 1 1 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust pre -hung cooler and freezer doors for proper seal and operation. Include strikes, latches, hinges, sweeps and closers integrator. B. Verify function of vacuum breaker vent, door heaters, and lighting. C. Touch- up scratches and abrasions to pre - finished facing paint or gel coat to match factory applied finish. D. Remove protective covering and strippable films just prior to turnover day. E. Clean out walk -in boxes and dispose of construction debris and un -used parts upon completion of box assembly. END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 15615 - 3 TARGET Iq in a mg j • • 1 SECTION 15620 COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section provides requirements for installed insulation systems on refrigeration equipment and piping. Work to be performed shall include, but necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Insulation of refrigeration suction and sub- cooled liquid piping. 2. Sealing and adjacent insulation of conduits and piping which penetrate walk - in cooler and freezer boxes, including those installed by other trades. B. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 15600 and is responsibility of Refrigeration Contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS • A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 15600 - Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. D. Section 15607 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 15610 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". B. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association" C. UL "Building Materials Directory". D. OSHA, "Occupational Safety & Health Administration. ". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to General Contractor as necessary copies of manufacturer's MSDS sheets for materials, solvents, and adhesives which are to be brought on site as part of installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Contractors and manufacturers shall utilize only skilled installers specialized in installation of closed cell elastomeric foam insulation materials on piping systems. B. Material shall conform to specified ASTM Standards where applicable, principally ASTM C534. C. Contractors and manufacturers shall conform to OSHA and other published practices for installation of insulation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship insulation materials and accessories (such as adhesive and coatings) to job site in marked, unopened containers as received from manufacturer. Identify boxes with manufacturer's stamp or labels indicating hazard characteristics of products and a lot number allowing traceability back to manufacturing date. B. Store materials at job site in a proper manner, which does not damage, deface, or otherwise reduce their serviceability. Store highly flammable solvents, adhesives, and coatings in compliance with OSHA requirements. Store materials, which are susceptible to weather damage, in a weatherproof environment and store materials with manufacturer's identification attached. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Contractor or manufacturer shall be responsible for ensuring that temperature and other environmental conditions are favorable for installation of insulation materials. B. Site conditions and sequencing: 1. Contractor or manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination and cooperation with other trades so that work is performed with minimum interference and conflict. Particular attention must be given to heat tracing and pressure testing procedures prior to installation of insulation materials. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 15620 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1.8 WARRANTY A. 2. Contractor or manufacturer shall be prepared to staff project as necessary to match schedule needs. Work shall be completed in a timely manner, subject to activities of others. Provide as part of overall project installation warranty coverage refer to Sections 15600 and 15602. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Flexible closed cell elastomeric tubular or sheet insulation which conforms to minimum requirements specified by ASTM -0534. Material shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less, a smoke development rating of 50 or less as tested in accord with ASTM -E84 for thickness up to 1 -inch and water vapor transmission rate of 1 perm -inch or less as tested in accord with ASTM -E96. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Aerocel. 2. Armacell. 3. Nomaco K -Flex. B. Pre - fabricated Insulation fittings by one of the following manufacturers subject to requirements of this Section: 1. F & D Manufacturing and Supply Inc. Phone (540) -586 -6111 or (919) -612 -0001; www.fdmanufacturing.com 2. PAK -LITE Inc; Phone (770)- 447 -5123 or (919) - 563 -1097; www.pliusa.com 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Glue: A contact adhesive specifically formulated for bonding insulation materials which provides a moisture resistant permanent bond between applied materials. Must form a non- flammable material when dried and is approved for use with insulation materials to be installed: 1. Armaflex 520 and 520 BLV Adhesive. 2. Aeroseal Adhesives. 3. Nomaco K -Flex R -320, R -620 or R -373 Contact Adhesive. B. Insulated pipe support systems in conjunction with Section 15607, shall be by one of the following: COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 15620 - 2 2.3 FINISHES 1. Insulation couplings as manufactured by Klo-Shure. Contact information 248 -373- 6250 or website www.klo-sure.com. 2. Armafix insulated inserts as manufactured by Cooper B -Line Inc. A. Protective Coatings: White Speedline PVC fitting covers and jacketing, 800 -551 -9759 or website www.speedlinepvc.com. 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Do not apply insulation covering pipe or fitting joints until after pressure testing affecting those joints has been completed and approved by authority having jurisdiction. B. Do not apply insulation until all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of dirt, grease, moisture or other impurities such as corrosive cleaners and dust. Seal refrigerant pipe openings while installing insulation to prevent foreign material from entering tubing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Insulation work shall be performed by trained installers regularly engaged in insulation trade. B. When necessary cut insulation with a knife, do not tear. C. Install piping insulation continuous through sleeves and penetrations (walls, partitions, roofs, ceilings, and floors). D. Completely seal seams, butts, and ends to retard moisture vapor from entering system. Glue joint types with approved products. (Do not tape insulation joints.) E. Vapor stop exposed ends and every 12 feet by applying approved contact adhesive to outside surface of piping and inside surface of insulation, and secure to piping. 1 (deg F) Piping and Refrigerating Specialties Temperature Piping Up to 2" dia. Piping 2" to 4" dia. Piping 4" to 6" dia. Sub - cooled Low Temp. Liquid Lines 1/2" Suction above + 25 deg F Freezer Condensate Piping 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" Suction +10 deg F to +25 deg F 3/4" 1" 1" Suction -10 degF to +10 deg F 1" 1" 1 - 1/4" Suction -30 degFto -10 deg F 1 -1/4" (1 "in Sales Area) 1 -1/4" (1 "in Sales Area) 1 -3/8" (1 "in Sales Area) TARGET 10 • 1 • 1 F. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves with same insulation thickness as adjacent piping. G. Cover elbows, "P" traps, and Tees with prefabricated insulation fittings of mitered tubular sections, manufactured by an approved fabricator. H. Insulate valves to a point just below seal cap or packing gland. Seal insulation to valve body with contact adhesive. I. Insulate refrigerant suction and liquid lines as described in insulation schedule in Article 3.4.A: 1. Glue seams to prevent condensation from forming. 2. Slide on insulation whenever possible and do not slice lengthwise unless unavoidable. (This statement applies only to act of physically applying insulation materials to sections of straight pining and does not contradict requirements for mitered insulation fittings.) 3. Insulate valves and devices installed in suction lines with thickness described previously. Devices include and are not limited to EEPRs, suction filters, and isolation valves. 4. Protect refrigerant piping insulation outdoors, from unit connection point to a point 6 inches inside of pipe box. Apply proper size Speedline PVC fitting covers and jacketing for all insulated piping and seal per the manufacturers' instructions with solvent weld adhesive process. 5. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with local and state codes. 6. If condensation appears to be excessive, Target reserves the right to review the application. If the installation is found to be incomplete or unsatisfactory the installer will be required to re- insulate at their cost. J. Refer to Section 15610 for installation of pipe labels and tags. K. Install piping and insulation in such a manner to provide for a properly functioning system. Reinstall an installation that is deemed unacceptable by Target at installer's expense. L. Penetrations: P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1. After utility piping, (refrigeration, fire protection, drains, and electrical conduits) has been completed into cooler and freezer walk -in boxes, seal, fill, and trim all penetrations both interior and exterior. 2. Seal and insulate unit cooler hanger rod penetrations. M. Insulate conduits and utility piping which penetrate walk -in cooler and freezer boxes for distance of 18 inches from outside skin of box. N. Insulate equipment hanger systems which penetrate walk -in cooler and freezer boxes. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Provide the following minimum insulation thicknesses: (Note: Thicknesses listed are minimums and greater wall thickness may be used at installers discretion) 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Maintain a neat and orderly work area and remove scrap, waste, or debris resulting from work on a weekly basis, and upon completion of work. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 15620 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 TARGET END OF SECTION COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 15620 4 TARGET • • • r 1 1 SECTION 15630 COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section includes installation of the following: 1. Halocarbon refrigeration piping. 2. Relief vent piping. 3. Refrigerant oil and charge. 4. Condensate drain piping from refrigerated equipment. B. Section also includes the following Commissioning activities: 1. Pressure testing. 2. Evacuating. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 — Submittals. C. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. D. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. E. Section 15607 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. F. Section 15610 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. G. Section 15620 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". C. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". D. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". E. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ". F. AWS, "American Welding Society". P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 G. UL "Underwriters Laboratories Inc ®" "Building Materials Directory". 11. EPA, "Environmental Protection Agency", Title VI, Clean Air Act. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Reference Section 15600 for Refrigeration Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation materials shall be new and without defect. Workmanship shall be of highest quality. If requested, refrigeration contractor shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to, material test reports, packing slips, material data sheets, employee qualification and training documentation records, brazed joints, insulation mock ups, leak testing, and electrical function testing records. B. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards and regulatory requirements. Including but not limited to provisions of the following: 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 -2001, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". 2. ANSI/ASME Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ASME B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." 3. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: Provide safety (pressure relief) valves complying with ASME code and stamped with appropriate code symbols. C. Refrigeration contractor and manufacturers are responsible for quality of brazing done by their organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 15630 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store refrigeration pipe and fittings in a clean and dry location, minimum of 1 -foot above surrounding floor or grade. Receive fittings and store in closed containers or cartons, and store copper piping with rubber end plugs in place. Do not install copper tubing left uncapped for more than one day as refrigeration piping. B. Deliver brazing materials, flux, solvents, glues, sealants, insulation materials, lubricants, oils, and refrigerants required to complete refrigeration installation and store on job site in manufacturer's original packaging or crating with labeling intact and fully legible. C. Maintain on site, MSDS sheets for materials, compounds, and chemicals stored at job site. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide as part of overall project installation warranty coverage refer to Sections 15600 and 15602. 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Pressure Control Hoses: Factory assembled SEC99B Ultra Tube Armored Tubing as manufactured by Johnson Controls. (No home -made hoses are acceptable.) B. Refrigeration piping: Dehydrated, hard drawn ACR type L seamless copper tubing. Manufactured in accord with ASTM B 88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B 280. Use type K copper where required by State or Local Codes. C. D. PART 2- PRODUCTS , Walk - in Evaporator Coil Condensate Drain Piping: Type L seamless copper tubing manufactured in accord with ASTM B 88. Copper Fittings: ASME- B16.22 wrought. copper steamlined pattern or forged brass, only long radius elbows. No 45 degree fittings are allowed. E. Changes in Direction: Achieve through use of a tubing bender for piping 5/8 -inch OD and less. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 15630 - 2 Piping Transitions: Use factory- fabricated fittings. No crimping, swedging, or stab -in connections allowed. Branch Connections: Make with either fittings or with use of a Tee puller. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification Bag -1 (Silver). Case Condensate Piping: ASTM D -1785 schedule 40 PVC piping made from plastic compounds conforming to ASTM D -1784. PVC Fittings: Schedule 40 socket type, ASTM D -2466. Made from plastic compounds conforming to ASTM D -1784. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION TARGET A. Refer to Sections 15600 and 15607 for pipe support spacing, excavating and backfilling, and other installation related requirements. B. Accurately measure, and cut refrigeration piping to length with a tubing cutter. Do not use a hacksaw or abrasive type cutter on refrigeration piping. C. Ream cut ends to full diameter, and remove burrs created during cutting process. D. Remove oxides and surface soil from pipe ends and fitting cups with abrasive cloth, abrasive pads, or properly sized fitting brush. E. Carefully assemble all joints prior to brazing, inserting tube all way into the fitting cup, firmly against stop. F. Install piping with sufficient flexibility to allow for expansion and contraction due to temperature fluctuations inherent in operation of these types of refrigeration systems. rr TARGET • G. Use extreme care to keep refrigerant piping clean and dry. Keep piping sealed when not working directly at a specific location or joint. Do not leave open refrigerant piping ends unattended during installation process! Visibly inspect pipe and fittings prior to assembly. Swab as necessary with alcohol soaked cloth to remove dirt, filings, or visible moisture. H. Braze joints in refrigerant piping with suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent silver. Flush piping during brazing process with dry nitrogen to prevent excess oxidation and scaling. Target reserves the right to inspect refrigeration system for oxidation. I. Target may, at their discretion require refrigeration contractor or equipment manufacturer to remove up to 5 joints from their refrigeration system or equipment to inspect for oxidation. If 1 joint is found to have excessive scaling, additional joints shall be removed. If 4 joints are found to be oxidized, responsible entity shall re -work all joints at their expense. J. Protect affected valves and control devices during brazing process by disassembling and removing heat sensitive parts or use of heat shields. K. Install piping to prevent vibration and undue strain on pipe and fittings. Refer to Section 15607 for pipe hanger and support spacing and in accord with details in the "R" or "M" Drawing Sheets. L. Provide cushioned pipe clamps for vertical risers over 6 feet in height as detailed in "R" Drawing Sheets. In general, clamps are not required on horizontal piping. However, there may be special conditions which dictate requirement to clamp horizontal piping. M. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner with horizontal runs sloped continuously downward toward compressor room at a rate of 1 inch per 20 feet. N. Support bends within 10 inches of bend. O. Oil Traps: 1. Required at base of suction risers exceeding 6 feet in length. 2. Intermediate traps required every 15 feet for vertical suction riser. P. Q. R. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Inverted trap required at top of each suction riser. Size vertical risers with a minimum gas velocity of 1000 feet per minute. Size liquid lines with less than 2 deg F change in saturation temperature and a liquid velocity of less than 300 fpm. Size suction lines with a horizontal gas velocity greater than 500 feet per minute and pressure drop not to exceed a change in saturated refrigerant temperature of 2 deg F. S. Suction headers to have individual circuits entering top of header. T. Control Tubing: 1. Install tubing such that there is sufficient slack. Avoid stretching and sharp bends. Properly support tubing away from contact with sharp or abrasive objects. 2. Always connect control tubing to refrigeration system or components through a service valve. 3. Remove breakaway Schrader valve depressor. 4. Do not over torque flare nuts. U. Liquid headers to have individual circuits exiting side or bottom. V. Correct piping deemed by Target Refrigeration Department, to be installed incorrectly at refrigeration contractor's expense. W. Braze copper - to-steel, brass - to-steel or steel - to-steel joints using solder with minimum of 45 percent silver content. X. OSR or GC shall visually inspect refrigerant piping and insulation prior to being covered. Y. Refer to Section 15620 for installation of refrigeration piping insulation and Section 15610 for identification markers and tags. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 15630 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to concealing joints with insulation or piping in walls, floors, or ceilings clean and test in accord with ANSI/ASME B 31.5, "Refrigerant Piping ". These sections of piping must be provide entirely leak -free and remain pressurized until their final connection is made. B. Pressurize piping to minimum of 300 psig and physically test all joints with a soap solution. Piping must hold pressure for minimum of 24 hours prior to concealing. Do not release pressure until making final connections. C. Verify that concealed piping is still pressurized to 300 psig holding pressure prior to making final equipment connections. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 15630 - 4 TARGET 1 6 Y 1 1 1 J 1 TARGET Nil r 1 • 1 3.4 PRESSURE TESTING A. Prior to charging a refrigeration system perform a complete system pressure and leak test in accord with ANSI/ASME B 31.5, "Refrigerant Piping" and the following protocol: 1. Minimum 2 weeks prior to testing notify OSR and Target Refrigeration Engineer by fax. Also, Target Engineering must have on file, a copy of refrigerant handling license for responsible technician. (Refer to Article 1.5, "Submittals ", of this Section.) 2. Isolate electronic pressure transducers and relief valves. 3. Systematically pressurize each individual branch with suction and liquid line isolation valves closed. Increase pressure on branch to 15 psig with an approved tracer gas. Increase pressure on branch to 150 psig for low side and 300 psig for high side with dry nitrogen. Inspect accessible joints with an approved leak detection device. 4. Systematically pressurize each refrigeration component and piping to 15 psig approved tracer gas. Raise pressure to 150 psig for low side and 300 psig for high side with dry nitrogen, and leak check each joint whether mechanical or welded with an approved leak detection device. 5. Repair detected leaks and re- pressurize. 6. Entire low side of system must hold 150 psig and high side of system must hold 300 psig for minimum of 24 -hours prior to purging. 7. Upon successful conclusion of test, reduce pressure on system to 0 psig using approved and legal methods. 3.5 EVACUATION PROCEDURE A. Evacuate system with a vacuum pump specifically designed and manufactured for vacuum duty, with a capacity of at least 8 cfm, and with an ability to pull a vacuum of 1500 microns or less. B. Connect pump to both high side and low side of refrigeration system with at least 3/8 -inch copper tubing. C. Open valves unless unit contains a factory charge of refrigerant. D. E. F. G. H. I. 3.6 OSR ADJUSTING AND CLEANING END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Evacuate system to an absolute pressure not exceeding 1500 microns. Increase pressure on entire system to 2 psig using a non -CFC refrigerant. Repeat steps D and E three times. Evacuate to 500 micron and hold for 24 hours. Verify vacuum procedure and test with Target Break final vacuum with refrigerant to be used in final charge of system. A. Maintain a clean and orderly work area. On a weekly basis remove from jobsite scrap, waste, and debris resulting from refrigeration related work. B. On completion of refrigerated work, remove tools, equipment, excess materials, scrap, waste, and other debris resulting from work, and clean walk -in coolers /freezers, roof areas adjacent to condensers, and refrigeration compressor house, to meet Target's standards. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 15630 - 5 SECTION 15641 INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES r 1 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS Engineers ". PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section covers work associated with receiving, unloading, handling, setting, installing, field assembly, start-up, and adjustment for Owner furnished grocery display cases. B. Work related to installation of grocery display cases which is not part of refrigeration scope and therefore not included as part of this Section is installation and termination of power wiring and conduits for case heaters, lighting, and fans. A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. D. Section 15607 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 15610 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. F. Section 15620 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. G. Section 15630 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. H. Section 15682 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. I. Division 16 — Electrical. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AIEE, "American Institute of Electrical Engineers ". B. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". C. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical E. ASTM, "American Society for testing and Materials ". F. NSF, "National Sanitation Foundation ". G. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA -70 ". Ii NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". I: UL "Underwriters Laboratories Inc ® ", "Building Materials Directory". 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide necessary labor, materials and equipment to receive, unload, and move into place, Owner furnished grocery display cases, (both refrigerated and non - refrigerated). B. Handle, lift, move, and set refrigeration equipment, cases, trim parts, or other grocery display accessories in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and use extreme care in a manner which will not damage or reduce serviceability of item. C. Refrigeration contractor shall be held liable for damage to Owner furnished refrigeration equipment, cases, trim parts, or other grocery display accessories, which are covered by this Section, during installation. 1.5 WARRANTY 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Provide as part of overall project installation warranty coverage. Refer to Sections 15600 and 15602. A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify plumbing, electrical, and refrigeration locations pertaining to refrigerated display cases prior to pouring of concrete floors. Notify OSR or General Contractor immediately of any coordination issues. INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES 15641 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 C. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing for transporting equipment and final location to verify that they are free of interferences, comply with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance. D. Verify condition of floor slabs and location of all refrigeration related stub ups prior to setting refrigerated display cases. Check slopes, fmishes, and surface conditions. Mark locations of underground drain pipes, chases, and conduits. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide labor, material, and equipment necessary to receive and move Owner furnished grocery display cases and case accessories to interior of store. Report detected damages to General Contractor and Target OSR immediately. B. Unpack cases, case wedges, and end cap displays. Remove shipping tape, supplemental shipping brackets, and properly dispose of shipping materials, crating, skids, and waste. C. Position, level, align, anchor, calk joints and assemble case line -ups as according to manufacturer's published instructions and in locations specified on Construction Drawings D. Assembly of case line -ups includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Remove and replace access panels. 2. Apply manufacturer supplied sealants between cases and gaskets. 3. Buckle together cases, case wedges and end cap displays. 4. Install case, close -off panels, trim parts, fan kits, bumpers, color band parts, raceway covers, and kick plates, as shown in "GR" and "R" or "M" Drawing Sheets. E. Provide case condensate lines of matching or larger size than factory provided trap on each fixture. Route condensate lines as shown in the "R" or "M" Drawing Sheets and install in compliance with local plumbing codes. F. Provide interconnecting refrigeration suction and liquid piping between refrigerated display cases and refrigeration compressor racks or condenser /compressor units, as indicated in Section 15630 and shown in "R" or "M" Drawing Sheets. INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES 15641 - 2 G. Refer to Section 15620 for installation of mechanical insulation materials and practices. H. Refer to Section 15682 for termination of low voltage control wiring. I. Refer to Section 15600 for commissioning of refrigeration equipment. J. Install Owner furnished produce misting systems in wet produce cases in accord with manufacturer's published instructions. Systems include a base controller, timer, drain tube, an expansion tank, and mister bars with nozzles. (Note: RO water piping provided to cases by plumbing contractor.) K. Adjust glass -doors for proper fit and swing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Install grocery display cases according to manufacturer's published installation manuals, both case specific and general (UL/NSF). 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of construction debris from cases. In addition vacuum out cases. B. C. D. TARO E1 1 Final cleaning of cases, and installation and adjustment of shelving are responsibility of Target. Refer to Section 15610 for installation of asset identification tags and other required identification markings. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve superheat as required to obtain proper coil operation. END OF SECTION 1 1 TARGET SECTION 15644 WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) a • m B • 1 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section applies to walk -in cooler and freezer box evaporator fan coil units, including coils, cabinets, fans, motors, refrigeration valves, and control devices. Walk -in box evaporator coils shall be supplied as part of a compressor rack or compressor /condenser unit purchase agreement. B. Installation of walk -in cooler and freezer box evaporator fan coil units is not covered in this Specification Section, refer to Section 15645. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 — Submittals. D. E. C. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. Section 15603 — Refrigeration Equipment Coordination Requirements (Owner Furnished). Section 15645 — Installation of Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Mechanical Sheet R1- Refrigeration Schedule. B. AIEE, "American Institute of Electrical Engineers ". C. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA -70 ". E. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". F. NSF, "Nation Sanitation Foundation ". G. UL "Building Materials Directory". H. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". I. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ". 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Turnover Day: 1. New stores, Remodel Stores - Target published date signifying end of construction. 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - date that construction is completed and department is turned over to Target for merchandising. B. Grand Opening: 1. New and Remodel Stores - Target published date that store officially opens or re-opens to public 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - Date that construction and merchandising are complete and department opens to public or to Target for general use. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. B. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. Manufacturer shall provide field coordination documents and record documents as described herein: 1. Field Coordination Documents: a. Submit 5 copies of the following coordination shop drawings to project General Contractor within 5 working days after agreement on equipment delivery date: 1) Hanging and lifting instructions. 2) Dimensioned general arrangement and elevation drawings showing piping connection locations. Including information about expansion valve and distributor. 3) Complete Installation and Operating, (I & 0) Manuals, (Reference Section 01700). 4) Electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. 2. Record Documents: a. Refer to Section 15603. 1.6 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBLITIES P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. These Specifications and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both provide information necessary to manufacture and supply walk -in box evaporator coils. It is responsibility of evaporator coil supplier to study these documents, utilize information contained to verify selection of units listed, order equipment, and ship as required. WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 15644 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Supplier shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 15603. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Evaporator Coil Units: UL listed and have a UL label permanently affixed. B. Evaporator Coil Unit Capacities: Rated in accord with ARI Standards. C. Materials: New and without defect. Workmanship of highest quality. If requested manufacturer shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to engineering design sheets, full shop drawings, brazed joints, leak testing, and electrical function testing. Manufacturers are responsible for application and design of individual components. D. Manufacturers are responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment. Target and Refrigeration Contractors are not responsible for modifications or alterations in field due to manufacturer defects or errors. E. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards, and regulatory requirements. Including, but not limited to, provisions of the following: 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15- 2001, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." F. Equipment manufacturer is responsible for quality of brazing done by its organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide sufficient blocking and crating to protect units from damage during shipping. B. Ship units with 50 psig holding charge of dry nitrogen. C. Coordinate shipping and delivery with project general or refrigeration contractor. D. Provide necessary instructions for unloading, handling and hanging to project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 15644 - 2 1.9 SELECTION CRITERIA A. This Specification provides design criteria, operating condition requirements and required components for refrigeration equipment associated with procurement of walk -in cooler and freezer evaporator coils. Equipment manufacturer shall utilize this information to select, layout, and arrange necessary and required refrigeration system components, in a cost effective manner to maximize operating efficiencies. B. Suction Temperature Requirements: 1. Walk -in cooler and freezer evaporator coils must be capable of providing capacities and suction temperatures as indicated on Drawing Refrigeration Schedule. C. Select evaporator coils utilizing no more than a 12 deg F temperature difference. D. Defrost: 1. Walk -in cooler evaporator coils: Off time, (air) defrost. 2. Walk -in freezer boxes evaporator coils: Electric defrost. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide as part of a refrigeration compressor rack or condenser /compressor unit purchase agreement, Refer to Section 15603. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. General: 1. Provide factory assembled and tested, low profile or low velocity type unit coolers as listed on the Drawing Refrigeration Schedule, suitable for use with non CFC and HCFC refrigerants by one of the following, manufacturers and subject to compliance with Specifications: a. b. c. d. Century. Heatcraft, (Bohn). Krack. Russell. TARGET M 10 h 1 1 1 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 kid • 2.2 FABRICATION A. Unit Casings: 1. Design units for flush mounting against a ceiling and comply with applicable NSF requirements, with a textured aluminum casing, independently baffled fan sections and low throw plastic fan guards. 2. Units shall have aluminum drain pan sloped to a single drain point, on back side. 3. Provide electric pan heaters on units designed for electric or hot gas defrost. B. Coils: 1. Provide staggered seamless copper tube, aluminum fm coil and distributor, circuited for the direct expansion refrigerant. (Refer to Refrigeration Schedule for refrigerant and defrost types.) Fin spacing shall be 6 fms per inch for units in spaces above 32 deg F and 4 fins per inch for units in spaces at or below 32 deg F. 2. Sporlan balanced port expansion valve and distributor to be manufacturer selected for the specific application and factory mounted. 3. Provide a factory installed refrigeration service valve on suction outlet connection of each coil. 4. Ship coils with a 100 psig holding charge of nitrogen. 5. Provide as required, on units equipped for hot gas defrost, a factory mounted thermal expansion valve bypass check valve and suction check valve. C. Fans and Drive Motors: 1. Provide direct drive evaporator fan assemblies pre -wired to a terminal strip as follows: a. Fan motors to be, (208/230 volt 1 phase for evaporator coils with electric defrost elements, 115 volt 1 phase for off time defrost evaporator coils), high efficiency PSC type with permanently lubricated ball bearings. b. Fan blades to be balanced, low noise type, constructed of heavy gage aluminum paddles mechanically attached to a plated steel hub. D. Controls: A. 1. Provide factory mounted Ranco 060 -100, - 35 to 95 deg F adjustable fan delay stat, with contact rating of 17 amps at 240 volts, for units equipped for defrost. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY Pipe and Fittings: 1. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner to prevent vibration, pipes rubbing against other pipes or other objects, and undue strain on pipes or fittings. 2. Properly support coil tubes by tube sheets. 3. Braze coil tubing joints with suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent silver. Braze Copper- to-brass joints with solder of not less than 30 percent silver content. During brazing bleed dry nitrogen through piping to prevent excess oxidation and scaling. B. Refrigeration Valves and Specialties: 1. Solder or braze components according to manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Install controls, components, and valves in locations and positions where they are serviceable and not easily damaged. C. Power and Control Wiring: 1. Wiring within evaporator cabinet: Pre made wiring harnesses with molded water tight receptacles for each electrical device and in conformance with NFPA -70. 2. Mark wiring with numbers for identification every 6 inches. 3. Control wiring: 18 AWG or larger. 4. Electrical devices, (motors, heaters, valves and switches): Factory wired with plug -in connections to terminal strips for simple field connection. 5. Neatly tie and support control wiring inside of equipment cabinet and protect wiring form abrasions. 6. Make electrical wiring terminations according to electrical industry standards utilizing UL approved devices. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABELING AND TAGGING A. Clearly affix labels to evaporator coil units displaying the following at a minimum: 1. Manufacturer name and address. WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 15644 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 0627 TARGEC 2. Evaporator coil unit model number. 3. Evaporator coil unit serial number. 4. Evaporator fan power voltage. 5. Evaporator fan FLA. 6. Defrost heater power voltage. 7. Defrost heater amps. B. Provide caution or warning signs as needed. C. Provide control wiring schematic with legend. 3.3 FINISHES AND CLEANING A. Remove burrs, metal shavings, excess brazing materials, grease, and residues of fabrication. Apply touch up paint to marks, scratches, and blemishes. B. Thoroughly blow out each coil circuit before pressure testing. 3.4 MANUFACTURING QUALITY CONTROL A. Leak check each evaporator coil unit, pressure test to 250 psig, and evacuate prior to shipment. Ship refrigeration systems leak free. B. Target reserves the right to audit and witness manufacturing quality control, if there are repeatable significant workmanship or component issues. END OF SECTION WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 15644 - 4 ■ SECTION 15645 INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handing, hanging, installing, and start-up of Owner furnished • walk -in box evaporator units. INV TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. 1.3 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. D. Section 15607 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 15610 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. F. Section 15620 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. G. Section 15630 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. H. Section 15682 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. I. Division 16 — Electrical. A. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ". B. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". C. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". E. ASTM, "American Society for testing and Materials ". F. NSF, "National Sanitation Foundation ". G. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA -70 ". H. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". I. 1.6 WARRANTY A. B. C. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 UL "Underwriters Laboratories Inc g '", "Building Materials Directory". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSUASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". B. National Electrical Code (NEC) pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. C. ANSI/ASME B 31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with OSR or General Contractor and provide labor and equipment necessary to receive and unload. B. Inspect units upon arrival. Do not install damaged units or components. C. Provide labor, tools, and materials necessary for unloading, moving and lifting according to manufacturer's published instructions. A. Provide as part of overall project installation warranty coverage refer to Sections 15600 and 15602. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 HEAT TRACE FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Heat Cable: Rated for 5 watts per foot at 50 deg F, self - regulating factor of at least 90 percent, UL listed XL -Trace as manufactured by Raychem Corporation. Components: Power connections, end splices, splices and tee kits manufactured by Raychem Corporation. Thermostatic Controls: Raychem model AMC -F5, fixed 40 °F set point, line sensing type thermostats. INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 15645 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing of moving equipment, and final location to verify that they are free of interferences, comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Locations of equipment on Drawings are approximate. Field verify exact locations before roughing in piping and electrical work. C. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Visually inspect all box panel joints for tightness, paying special attention to door gaskets, floor, and ceiling joints. Report gaps to OSR immediately. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Accurately layout, mark, and drill hole necessary holes in walk -in box panels. Cut holes only with drill bits and hole saws. B. Cut holes only as large as required to accommodate pipes, hanger rods, and conduits. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Hang or mount evaporator coils plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and drawings, refer to Section 15607. B. Remove and dispose of crating, un- necessary support legs, or shipping materials. C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances so as to not restrict air flow. D. Support piping separately so that piping is not supported off evaporator coil units. Refer to Section 15630 for installation of refrigeration piping. E. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to be factory mounted. Refer to Section 15682 for termination of low voltage control wiring. INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 15645 - 2 TARGET' F. Install interconnecting refrigeration suction and liquid piping between Walk -in cooler /freezer evaporator coils and refrigeration compressor racks or condenser /compressor units, as shown in "R" or "M" Drawing Sheets. G. Refer to Section 15620 for installation of mechanical insulation materials and practices. H. Install walk -in cooler /freezer refrigerant sampling intake devices, shown in "R" or "M" Drawing Sheets, and as necessary interconnecting tubing back to refrigerant detection units. I. Condensate lines for walk -in coolers /freezers: 3/4 -inch copper with traps. Install in compliance with local plumbing codes. J. Provide heat trace wrap for condensate drain lines in all walk -in freezer boxes operating below 32 deg F. K. Fit condensate lines in walk -in coolers /freezers with a union to facilitate cleaning of condensate line and removal of evaporator coil drain pan. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test evaporator units and associated piping in accordance with requirements of Section 15630. Defer to local code requirements if more stringent. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove crating, un- necessary support legs, or shipping materials. B. Touch up scratches on surfaces to restore corrosion resistance. C. Refer to Section 15610 for installation of identification labels and tags. D. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve superheat as required to obtain proper coil operation. 3.6 START -UP A. Evacuate evaporator units and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. Refer to Sections 15630 and 15600. B. Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. TARGET C. D. • E. Provide written start-up reports identifying valve positions, controls and, electrical testing results and defrost settings. Refer to Section 15600. Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place evaporator units in full operation. Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for condensing units agree with manufacturer's data. END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 15645 - 3 TARGET SECTION 15660 OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section applies to outdoor condenser /compressor units, including compressors, coils, cabinets, electrical devices, fans, motors, refrigeration specialties, and control devices. B. Installation of outdoor condenser /compressor units is not covered in this Specification Section, refer to Section 15661. A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 — Submittals. C. Section 01700 — Contract Closeout. D. Section 15603 — Refrigeration Equipment Coordination Requirements (Owner Furnished). E. Section 15661 — Installation of Out door Condenser /Compressor units. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Drawing Refrigeration Schedule. B. AIEE, "American Institute of Electrical Engineers ". C. ARI, "Air conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA -70 ". E. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". F. UL "Building Materials Directory". G. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". H. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ". 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Turnover Day: 1. New stores, Remodel Stores - Target published date signifying end of construction. 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - date that construction is completed and department is turned over to Target for merchandising. B. Grand Opening: 1. New and Remodel Stores - Target published date that store officially opens or re -opens to public. 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - Date that construction and merchandising are complete and department opens to public or to Target for general use. 1.5 SUBMITTALS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Comply as applicable with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Manufacturer shall submit field coordination documents and record documents as described herein: 1. Field Coordination Documents: a. Submit 5 copies of the following coordination shop drawings to project General Contractor within 5 working days after agreement on equipment delivery date: 1) Rigging and lifting instructions. 2) Dimensioned general arrangement and elevation drawings showing piping connection locations. 3) Unit piping and instrument diagrams, (Internal unit piping schematic). 4) Complete Installation and Operating, (I & 0) Manuals, (Reference Section 01700). 5) Electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 2. Record Documents: a. At end of each construction cycle manufacturer shall submit to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group, record copies of documents described above, for each unit type supplied during cycle and accompanied by a related stores matrix. (These documents are to be electronic format on a CD. PDF and CAD files are required, NO Hard Copies!) Submit to: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant Target Property Development 1000 Nicollet Mall, TPN 1025 Minneapolis, MN 55403 Telephone: (612) -761 -5369 Fax: (612) 761 -3321 1.6 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBLITIES A. These Specifications and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both provide information necessary to manufacture and supply condenser /compressor units. It is responsibility of condenser /compressor unit manufacturer to study these documents, utilize information contained to verify selection of units listed, fabricate equipment, and ship as required. B. Manufacturer shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 15603. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Condenser /Compressor Units: UL listed and have a UL label permanently affixed. B. Condenser /Compressor Unit Capacities: Rated in accord with ARI Standards. C. Materials: New and without defect. Workmanship of highest quality. If requested manufacturer shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to engineering design sheets, full shop drawings, brazed joints, leak testing, and electrical function testing. Manufacturer is responsible for application and design of individual components. OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 2 TARGET' D. Manufacturer is responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment. Target and refrigeration . contractors are not responsible for modifications or alterations in field due to manufacturer defects or errors. E. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards, and regulatory requirements. Including but not limited to provisions of the following: 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15- 2001, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." F. Equipment manufacturer is responsible for quality of brazing done by its organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of outdoor condenser /compressor units to jobsite, freight allowed and prepaid. B. Provide sufficient blocking and crating to protect units from damage during shipping. C. Ship units with 50 psig holding charge of dry nitrogen. D. Coordinate shipping and delivery with project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. E. Provide necessary instructions for unloading, handling, and hanging to project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. 1.9 SELECTION CRITERIA A. This Specification provides design criteria, operating condition requirements and required components for the refrigeration equipment associated with procurement of condenser /compressor units. Equipment manufacturer shall utilize this information to select, layout and arrange necessary and required refrigeration system components, in a cost effective manner to maximize operating efficiencies. 1 TARGET B. Design equipment, anchorage, and restraints according to applicable seismic or high wind design requirements of store location and provide necessary documentation as required by building code and building authority having jurisdiction. C. Suction Temperature Requirements: 1. Condenser /Compressor Units: Capable of providing capacities suction temperatures as indicated on Refrigeration Schedule. D. Condenser Design Requirements: 1. When ASHRAE 0.4 percent design for outdoor ambient is less than 100 deg F, use 100 deg F ambient, and when 0.4 percent ASHRAE design for outdoor ambient is 100 deg F or higher, use 110 deg F ambient. 2. For counties in AZ, CA, NV, and UT, identified as areas of ultra high outdoor ambient design temperatures, consult Target Refrigeration Engineering and use 125 deg F ambient. 3. Design temperature difference of 9 to 11 deg F on low temperature system. 4. Design temperature difference of 14 to 16 deg F on medium temperature system. E. Defrost: 1. Walk -in freezer boxes and low temperature cases: Electric defrost. 2. Walk -in cooler boxes and medium temperature cases: Off time, (air) defrost. F. Other Design Requirements: 1. Select compressors based 40 deg F return gas temperature for low temperature units and 50 deg F for medium temperature units. 2. Do not take sub - cooling credit in compressor selection process. 3. Target reserves the right to review and potentially reject compressor selections. 4. Design for proper elevation above sea level of specific store location. 1.10 WARRANTYS A. Provide consistent with overall equipment purchase agreement, refer to Section 15603. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: PART 2 PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 0627 1. Provide factory assembled and tested, UL listed, outdoor condenser /compressor units as listed on Refrigeration Schedule, by the following, manufacturer and subject to compliance with Specifications: a. Heatcraft, (Bohn). 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Cabinet: 1. Provide a heavy gage galvanized steel base with legs lifting lugs and structural mounting rails to support compressor, condenser coil, electrical panel, and other required refrigeration specialties. Cabinet panels and top cover shall be galvanized steel or heavy gage aluminum, properly prepped and painted a Target approved tan to match other rooftop equipment. 2. Provide an integral oversized NEMA 3R rated outdoor electrical enclosure with 25 prercent un -used space to accommodate future devices. 3. Provide coated steel OSHA approved fan guards which totally enclose rotating parts of condenser fan and maintain separation from other unit components. 4. Provide a standard factory bolt on hail guard with units for field installation. (Note: Snow legs not required as an option.) B. Compressors: 1. Provide Copeland K body semi hermetic reciprocating or hermetic scroll (ZF series for low temperature applications and ZB series for medium temperature applications) type compressor with internal motor protection, Sentronic oil failure controller, and suction and discharge service valves for isolation. 208/230 volt 3 phase high efficiency motors. 2. Provide crankcase heaters, oil coolers, and cylinder head fans as required for specific application by compressor manufacturer. C. Condenser Coil: 1. Provide copper tube aluminum fm condenser coil with maximum 10 fins per inch. OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 2. For projects to be installed within 15 miles of a coast line, provide a protective coating on tubes and fms to protect against salt -water air in accord with manufacturer's recommendation. OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 4 TARGET D. Fans: lit 1. Provide direct drive condenser fan assembly pre -wired to condenser control panel: a. Fan motors to be PSC, 208/230 volt, high efficiency with internal thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated ball bearings. b. Fan blades to be low noise type constructed of heavy gage aluminum paddles mechanically attached to a plated steel hub. E. Primary Power Devices: 1. Provide Bussmann fuse blocks. 2. Provide Square D contactors with auxiliary contacts. 3. Provide a Square D non -fuse electrical service disconnect. MO i F. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pressure control hoses: Factory assembled SEC99B Ultra Tube Armored Tubing as manufactured by Johnson Controls. (No home -made hoses are acceptable.) 2. Refrigeration Piping: Dehydrated, ACR type L seamless copper tubing. Manufactured in accord with ASTM B 88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B 280. Use type K where required by State or Local Codes. 3. Fittings: ASME -B 16.22 wrought copper steamlined pattern or forged brass. a. Only long radius elbows. b. 45 degree fittings: Not allowed. 4. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification Bag -1 (Silver). G. Mechanical Insulation: 1. Flexible closed cell elastomeric tubular or sheet insulation which conforms to minimum requirements specified by ASTM -C 534. a. Material: flame spread rating of 25 or less, a smoke development rating of 50 or less as tested according to ASTM -E 84 for thickness up to 1 -inch and water vapor transmission rate of 1 perm -inch or less as tested in accord with ASTM -E 96. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Aerocel. b. Armaflex. c. Nomaco K -Flex. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Glue: Contact adhesive specifically formulated for bonding insulation materials which provides a moisture resistant permanent bond between applied materials. Forms a non - flammable material when dried and is approved for use with insulation materials to be installed. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Valves: 1. Service Valves: a. Forged brass body packed valves with seal caps and appropriate connections, as manufactured by Henry or Superior. (Note: Schrader fittings not allowed.) 2. Dual Valve Assemblies: a. Dual relief valve assembly consisting of a Henry series 92 forged brass a- way valve, (2) Henry rupture disc assemblies with indicator gage and pressure switch, and (2) Henry or Mueller 450 lb. relief valves. 3. Isolation Valves: a. Full port ball valves constructed of forged brass bodies, extended copper connections, seal caps, and multiple stem seals. S3pecifically designed for halocarbon refrigerants with position and flow direction indicators, suitable for working pressures of 500 psig and temperatures ranging from minus 40 deg F to plus 300 deg F. b. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Mueller. 2) Sporlan. 3) Superior. 4) Henry. B. Refrigerating Specialties: 1. High Pressure Receiver: a. ASME certified and inspected pressure vessels with a National Board Tag for shells larger than 6- inches diameter. b. Vessels compliant with UL -207, (Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical) for shells smaller than 6- inches diameter. c. Vessels: Rated for 450 psig at 150 deg F and manufactured by Standard Refrigeration or equivalent. 2. Suction Accumulator: OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 5 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 a. ASME certified and inspected pressure vessels with a National Board Tag for shells larger than 6- inches diameter. b. Vessels compliant with UL -207, (Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical) for shells smaller than 6- inches diameter. c. Vessels: Rated for 450 psig at 150 deg F and Manufactured by Henry or equivalent. 3. Suction Line Filter: a. Sporlan replaceable core type suction line filters with RPE -48 -BD cores. Shell to be compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non- electrical. 4. Liquid Line Filter Drier: a. Sporlan replaceable core type liquid line driers with RCW-48 high water capacity cores and secondary filters. Shell to be compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non- electrical. 5. Liquid Line Sight glass: a. Sporlan see all liquid line sight glass. 6. Low Ambient Control Valves: a. Sporlan LAC series head pressure control valve in conjunction with an auxiliary OROA drain leg check valve. C. Control Devices: 1. Low Pressure Control: a. Johnson P170AB12, 1/2 -inch — 80 psig adjustable pressure switch. 2. High Pressure Control: a. Johnson P170DA1, 50— 450 psig manual reset pressure switch. 3. Suction Pressure Transducer: a. CPC part number 800 -2200, 0 — 200 psig transducer. 4. Discharge Pressure Transducer: a. CPC part number 800 -2500, 0 -500 psig transducer. 5. Pumpdown relay. 6. Defrost relay. 7. Defrost contactors. 8. Low ambient fan cycling controls. 9. Crankcase heater relay. 10. Receiver heater relay. OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING TARGET 1 A. Support structure: 1. Design condenser /compressor unit cabinet structure to properly support refrigeration system components, (compressors, condenser coil, fan assemblies, vessels, valves, control boxes, and piping), with minimum deflection. 2. Arrange supports to facilitate long -term serviceability and compressor accessibility, support piping, and not restrict access to valves and other control devices. 3. Compressor vibration isolation mounts: Spring mounts for semi - hermetic compressors and rubber pads for scroll compressors. 4. Cabinet: Include necessary accessories to protect condenser coil from hail damage and prevent driving rain or snow from entering unit. 5. Where applicable design support structure, anchorage, and restraints according to seismic design requirements of store location and provide necessary documentation as required by building code and building authority having jurisdiction. B. Refrigerating Specialties: 1. Receiver: a. Size receivers such that pump -down or total liquid storage capacity, at 80 percent of total vessel volume can store system charge along with a seal charge which approximates 10 percent of vessel volume. (Assume 100 ft. refrigerant piping and refer to Drawing refrigeration schedule for case coil refrigerant charge quantities.) b. Provide properly sized brazed connections, (No threaded connections!), for the following: 1) Refrigerant inlet. 2) Refrigerant outlet. 3) Safety relief. c. Heat and insulate liquid receivers for condenser /compressor units. ra TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 rr 2. Suction Accumulators: a. Size suction accumulators based on the following: 1) Sufficient size that pressure drop at full load does not exceed 1/2 deg F. 2) Accumulator is capable of returning liquid at an acceptable rate through full range of refrigeration loading. 3) Locate suction accumulator at same elevation as compressors and down stream of suction filter. 3. Filter Driers: a. Size suction line filters to accommodate the unit's design capacity, with maximum pressure drop not to exceed 1 psig. Locate suction line filter up stream from suction line accumulator. b. Locate liquid and suction filter -driers in piping such that debris cannot fall into piping during core removal. 4. Sight Glasses: a. Provide a sight glass in main liquid line down steam of liquid line filter - drier. b. Locate sight glasses only in horizontal piping sections with glass in a vertical orientation, visible from front or end of unit. C. Electrical Mechanical Valves and Switches: 1. Solenoid Valves: a. Normally closed liquid line valve, sized for full capacity of unit, with a pressure drop of no greater than 1 psig. 2. Pressure Switches: a. Provide high and low pressure switches. D. Refrigeration Valves: 1. Angle and Inline Check Valves: a. Provide as required to make a complete and working system. 2. Service Valves: a. Provide at the following locations: 1) Compressor oil pump. 2) Each connection point where a pressure switch or pressure transducer is required. 3) At inlet and outlet of refrigerant filter drier and strainer. 4) In discharge line off compressor 5) On receiver. 3. Isolation Valves: a. Provide at the following locations: 1) Suction inlet and discharge outlet of the compressor. 2) Each inlet and outlet connection to liquid receiver. 3) At suction connection to unit. 4) At outlet of liquid line filter drier. 5) As required in addition to locations already identified to isolated control valves. 4. Dual Relief Valve Assemblies: a. Provide for pressure vessels which have an ASME National Board Tag. E. Pipe and Fittings: 1. General: a. Plan Piping as follows: Allow adequate spacing with minimum number of fittings to accommodate insulation thicknesses and arranged so that normal inspection and servicing of unit components is not hindered. Do not obstruct view of sight glasses and name plates. 2. Suction Piping: a. Size refrigeration suction piping such that total pressure drop from compressors to field connection points does not exceed 2 deg F, inclusive of control valves, valves, and applicable refrigerating specialties. 3. Liquid Piping: a. Size liquid refrigerant piping from high pressure receiver to have a pressure drop of no greater than 2 psig per 100 ft. of equivalent length of pipe. b. Size liquid refrigerant piping from condensers to high pressure receiver such that velocity does not exceed 100 ft. per minute. 4. Provide mechanical insulation on suction piping, suction filters, and suction accumulator. 5. Provide mechanical insulation on liquid receiver. F. Hangers, Supports, and Fasteners: 1. Provide brackets, hangers, and self - locking fasteners as required to mount and secure refrigeration system component. G. Unit Controls Functions: OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 7 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 TAR G C 1. Condenser /compressor unit to have sufficient stand alone controls capabilities to independently protect and control compressor, cycle the condenser fan, and operate head pressure control valve. 2. Wire the following other controls devices to a terminal strip for external control by facilities third party Refrigeration Energy Management System: a. Liquid line solenoid valve. b. Defrost contactor. c. Compressor crankcase heater. d. Liquid receiver heater. 3.2 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY A. Compressors: 1. Piping shall not interfere with removal and installation of compressor bodies or compressor heads. 2. Vibration eliminators are required on both discharge or suction lines at compressor. 3. Ship compressors dry with NO OIL. B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner to prevent vibration, pipes rubbing against other pipes or other objects, and undue strain on pipes or fittings. 2. Support bends within 10 inches of bend. 3. Braze joints in discharge, suction, and liquid lines with suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent silver. Braze copper - to-steel, copper - to-brass, brass - to-steel, or steel-to- steel joints with solder of not less than 30 percent silver content. Bleed dry nitrogen through piping during brazing to prevent excess oxidation and scaling. C. Mechanical Insulation: 1. Insulation work: Performed by trained installers regularly engaged in insulation trade. 2. Install insulation according to manufacturer's recommended procedures and practices. 3. Do not apply insulation until surfaces are clean, dry, and free of dirt, grease, moisture, or other impurities such as corrosive cleaners and dust. Seal refrigerant pipe openings while installing insulation to prevent foreign material from entering tubing. OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 8 4. Completely seal seams, butts, and ends to retard moisture vapor from entering system. Tape and glue seams with approved products. 5. Vapor stop exposed ends by applying approved contact adhesive to pipe surface and insulation with adhesive and securing open ID's to the pipe. 6. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves with same insulation thickness as adjacent piping. 7. Fabricate elbows of mitered tubular sections or sheet sections. D. Mechanical Identification: 1. Equip receivers and accumulators containing refrigerant with a permanent label designating type of refrigerant within vessel. E. Refrigeration Valves and Specialties: 1. Solder or braze components according to manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Install controls, components, and valves in locations and positions where they are serviceable and not easily damaged. 3. Ship solenoid valves for walk -in coolers and freezers loose for field installation. 4. Equip each compressor to be equipped with oil failure and high pressure controls. F. Electro Mechanical Switches: Provide control hoses as required from pressure controls to compressor. G. Relief Valves: Mount relief valve assemblies in accessible locations above refrigerant liquid levels and according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Hangers, Supports, and Fasteners: 1. Utilize only cushion type clamps to secure refrigeration piping. 2. Torque nuts to manufacturer's recommendations. I. Power and Control Wiring: 1. Route wiring within condensing unit and outside electrical panel in water -tight conduit and in conformance with NFPA- 70. 2. Mark wiring with numbers for identification every 6- inches. 3. Control Wiring: 18 AWG or larger. 4. Provide terminal strips for field connections. 5. Neatly tie and support control wiring inside of panels and equipment cabinets, protect wiring from abrasions. 6. Make electrical wiring terminations according to electrical industry standards utilizing UL approved devices. • • 1 s 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 9 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3.3 EQUIPMENT LABELING AND TAGGING A. Clearly affix labels to outside of condensing unit displaying the following at a minimum: 1. Manufacturer name and address. 2. Condensing unit model number. 3. Condensing unit serial number. 4. Main power voltage. 5. MCA (Minimum Circuit Ampacity). 6. MOPD (Maximum Overcurrent Protection Device). 7. Control power voltage. 8. Compressor model number. 9. Compressor serial number. 10. Compressor RLA. 11. Compressor LRA. 12. Condenser fan FLA. 13. Defrost heater amps, if used. 14. Caution or warning signs as needed. C. Clean out control panels remove excess wire, fabrication debris, metal shavings, and un- necessary devices. Ensure that wiring and control diagrams are protected with plastic laminate, clean, legible, and fully adhered to cabinet surfaces. 3.5 MANUFACTURING QUALITY CONTROL A. Leak check and pressure test each condenser /compressor unit to 450 psig and evacuate prior to shipment. Ship refrigeration systems leak free. B. Target reserves the right to audit and witness manufacturing quality control, if there is repeatable significant workmanship or component issues. END OF SECTION OUTDOOR CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15660 - 10 TARGET" ■ w 3.4 FINISHES AND CLEANING A. Paint compressor heads or bodies with refrigerant type in respective colors: 1. R 404a heads: Orange. 2. R-22 heads: Lime green. B. Remove burrs, metal shavings, excess brazing materials, grease, and residues of fabrication. Apply touch up paint to marks, scratches, and blemishes. 1 TARGET SECTION 15661 INSTALLATION OF ROOF -TOP CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handling, setting, installing and starting up of Owner furnished air cooled roof -top condensing units. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration. C. D. E. F. G. H. Section 15602 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Requirements. Section 15607 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. Section 15610 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. Section 15620 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. Section 15630 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. Section 15682 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. I. Division 16 — Electrical. 1.3 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERIAL A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ". C. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA -70 ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". B. National Electrical Code (NEC) pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. 1.6 WARRANTY P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 C. ANSI/ASME B31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with Owner or site supervisor and provide labor and equipment necessary to receive and unload condenser /compressor units. B. Inspect units upon arrival. Do not install damaged units or components. C. Rig units for unloading, moving, and hoisting according to manufacturer's published instructions. A. Provide as part of overall project installation warranty coverage, refer to Sections 15600 and 15602. 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing of moving equipment, and fmal location to verify that they are free of interferences. Comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Locations of equipment on Drawings are approximate. Field verify height of curbs and supports to insure adequate clearance above roof decks, ( minimum 10 inches), and exact locations before roughing in piping and electrical work. C. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation of roofing membrane, coordinate and verify placement of condensing unit support rails and piping penetration boxes with General Contractor. INSTALLATION OF ROOF -TOP CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15661 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install and anchor condensing units plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and Drawings. Refer to Architectural Drawings for detail and to Section 15607. (When necessary add treated wood blocking to curbs to maintain minimum clearance above roof.) B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Refer to Section 15610 as applicable for installation of refrigeration equipment labels and tags. D. Refer to Section 15620 as applicable for installation of mechanical insulation. E. Support piping separately so that it is not supported off equipment piping connections. F. Refer to Section 15630 as applicable for installation of refrigerant piping. G. Install devices and cabinet parts furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to be factory mounted, such as hail guards. H. Refer to Section 15682 for termination of low voltage control wiring. I. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram to Division 16 Contractor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test condensing units and associated piping in accord with the requirements of Section 15630. Defer to local code requirements if more stringent. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of crating or shipping materials associated with condensing units. B. Touch up scratches on surfaces to restore corrosion resistance. 3.6 START -UP A. Evacuate condensing units and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. Refer to Sections 15630 and 15600. B. Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. INSTALLATION OF ROOF -TOP CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 15661 - 2 C. Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place condensing units in full operation. D. Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for condensing units agree with manufacturer's data. E. Provide written start-up reports identifying valve positions, controls test, electrical test results, air and water flow. Refer to Section 15600. END OF SECTION TA ,tGleT 1 1 • 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 SECTION 15682 FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section covers refrigeration contract responsibilities related to work associated with mounting control devices and terminating low voltage control wiring to Owner furnished refrigeration equipment, control panels, and sensing devices, including the following: 1. Cooler and freezer refrigerant leak detection alarm panels. 2. Door open alarm panels. 3. Liquid line solenoid valves. 4. Front office alarm panels. 5. Refrigerated display case REMS panels. 6. Cooler and freezer evaporators. 7. Condenser /compressor units. B. This Section does not include power wiring or installation of control wiring. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 15600 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. B. Section 15607 — Refrigeration Systems Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. C. Section 15610 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. D. Division 16 - Specifications for electrical components and their installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Local and national applicable codes and standards. B. NEMA — `National Electric Manufacturer's Association ". C. NECA — "National Electrical Contractors Association ". D. UL — "Underwriter's Laboratory". E. NEC — "National Electric Code ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ensure that refrigeration system controls have been installed properly and in accord with applicable referenced standards. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate on site project refrigeration controls activities of REMS integrator, electrical contract, compressor rack manufacturer, and case manufacturer. B. Coordinate with REMS integrator for delivery of control panels, low voltage wire and cabling, and other related loose refrigeration system control devices. C. Furnish copies of refrigeration controls, installation documents, including drawings, diagrams, manuals, and related memos to Division 16 electrical contractor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Receive and distribute to appropriate contractors, Owner furnished control panels, low voltage wire and cabling, and other related loose refrigeration system control devices. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. RC Drawing Sheets, which depict refrigeration controls design, are provided by REMS integrator: Energy Management Consultants, LLC 1550 LaFollette Street Fennimore, WI 53809 Ph: 608 - 822 -3550 www.emccontrols.com B. Division 16 electrical contractor shall install control wiring between refrigeration components. C. Final connection of control wires and communication cabling to display cases evaporators, condensers, compressor units, remote refrigeration control panels, and temperature sensors, is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. D. REMS integrator shall provide low voltage cable, control panels, loose input devices, and enclosures for REMS system. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide same warranty conditions for control system installation as refrigeration system. Refer to Section 15600 for requirements. FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS 15682 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify that proper control wiring bundles and cabling have been pulled into place for each refrigeration system component. Refer to RC Drawing Sheets. 3. Prior to starting termination process, verify that that each control conductor is in good condition by testing continuity. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Consult with Division 16 electrical installer to ensure that there is complete understanding regarding electrical requirements, (power and control), for each refrigeration component. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Terminate refrigeration control wiring and communication cabling according to RC Drawing Sheets. B. Refer to Section 15607 for supports, hangers, and fasteners. C. Strip conductor insulation as prescribed by manufacturer of terminator. D. Tighten connections to ensure maximum surface contact between terminals. E. Neatly tie and support control wiring inside of panels and equipment cabinets, and protect wiring from abrasions. F. Tightly twist stranded conductors prior to insertion to terminals. Do not allow loose individual strands at terminal lugs. G. Splice control wiring only in junction boxes, equipment cabinets, and control panels. Do not splice control wiring in conduits or raceways. H. Maintain isolation of shielded circuits when splicing coaxial type cables. FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS 15682 - 2 I. Provide labor and tools necessary to terminate all low voltage sensor wiring for display case supply and return air temperature sensors at both cases and control panels. J. Mount and connect wiring to walk -in cooler /freezer box door switches, both at switches and control panels. K. Mount and connect wiring to walk -in cooler /freezer box temperature sensors, both at sensors and control panels. L. Mount and connect cabling or sample tubing to walk -in cooler /freezer box leak detection devices and detection panels, both at devices and control panel or detection unit. M. Provide labor and tools necessary to terminate communication cabling between remote control panels, alarm panels, condensers, and compressor units. N. Pull communication cabling in continuous strands with no splices. O. Review power wiring connections to compressor racks, condensers, condenser /compressors, and evaporator coils. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Maintain a neat and orderly work area and remove scrap, waste, or debris resulting from work, and upon completion of this work. B. Verify that refrigeration controls related identification labels and tags are in place and legible upon completion of work. Refer to section 15610. C. Install covers on control panels and protective enclosures when installation and commissioning activities have been completed. END OF SECTION 1ARGET 1 Ir 1 s TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Refrigeration Service Provider: Address: City, State: Phone/Fax: Contact or Work Order #: Equipment ID Information Manufacturer: , Model #: Serial #: Tag ID, if available (See picture for example): 1 Refrigerant Added Quantity Type Manufacturer Refrigerant Recovered Quantity Type Recycler a Form completed by: / / Print Name Signature Date Refrigerant Handling License # 1 1 SERVICE REFRIGERANT TRACKING FORM This form shall be completed by a Certified Refrigerant Handling Technician and submitted for every occurrence when refrigerant is added to or removed from Target owned refrigerant containing equipment. This form shall be faxed to the number below prior to leaving the store. Contact Target Environmental Services (800 - 587 -2228) with any questions. Fax completed form to (775 - 371 - 5385). Store Number: Store Location: Reason for Service? 0 T1471AC000101 1 1111 11 111 11111 1 II 111111111H Refrigerant Type: , Listed Refrigerant Charge: Service Description (Include the specific location of any leak identified) ❑ Planned Maintenance ❑ Unplanned Maintenance ❑ Equipment Disposal ❑ Refrigerant Conversion Recovery Inches Refrigerant Leak Found Test Method Date: Leak Repaired Follow -up Test Method Date: SERVICE REFRIGERANT TRACKING FORM 15691 -1 System No. Mfg. Unit Model No. Condensing Unit Serial No. Fixture No. Compressor Model No. Compressor Serial No. CU -1 Bohn BZT045L6C ZF13K4E CU -2 Bohn BZT055L6C ZF15K4E CU -3 Bohn BZN060L6C ZF18K4E CU -4 Bohn BSNO20M6C KAK020E Yes or No Description Units set per Section 15661, 6 ft minimum clearance on all sides; attached and level on designed curbs; and all supplied cabinet accessories properly installed, (hail guards and snow legs)? Refrigerant piping per section 15630, ACR tubing; 15% silver brazing filler metal; long radius fittings; inverted traps at tops and bottoms of risers; and no unnecessary traps? Refrigeration piping insulation per Section 15620, thickness as specified, (Article 3.4); mitered iron TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 This form shall be completed by the Refrigeration Contractor and acknowledged by the Target OSR. All installation procedures are found on the Construction Documents or in the project Specifications. This form shall be faxed to the number below no later than one week before store turn over. Contact Refrigeration Operations at (612- 307 -6507) or (612 - 307 -5947) with any questions. Fax completed form to 775 - 370 -9168 or 612- 307 -6960. Print Name Signature Date Refrigeration Service Contractor (if different from above): Address: City, State: Phone/Fax: Contact: General Contractor: Address: City, State: 1 Target OSR: REFRIGERATION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION Store Number: Store Location: Refrigeration Contractor: Address: City, State: Phone/Fax: Contact: Form completed by: Print Name Signature Section 2 Refrigeration Rooftop Compressor /Condensing Units Condensing Unit Date REFRIGERATION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION 15696 -1 Yes or No Description Model Cooler /freezer box is fully assembled and in good condition, floor slabs have necessary thermal breaks, panel joints are sealed, door fits tight, door latch is properly adjusted and all box penetrations sealed with adjacent piping and conduits insulated per Section 15620? Fixture No. Evaporators attached properly to cooler or freezer? A03 Condensate piping installed per the drawings and Section 15630, mounted tight to walls, with proper slopes and traps, heat traced and insulate in freezers, and necessary air gaps. BML -220 Refrigerant piping per section 15630, ACR tubing; 15% silver brazing filler metal; long radius fittings; inverted traps at tops and bottoms of risers; supported as indicated on drawings; valves installed properly; and no unnecessary traps? Hand valves installed as indicated on drawings and liquid line solenoid valves field installed in piping, directly above walk -in cooler /freezer boxes? A04 Refrigeration piping insulation per Section 15620, thickness as specified, (Article 3.4); mitered fittings; and walk -in box penetrations properly sealed? ADT -130 REMS panels mounted per drawings, evaporator power and control wiring work, including unit, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? Temperature sensors mounted, wired as shown on drawings and calibration tested to an accuracy range of plus or minus 1 /2 °F. ? Yes or No fittings; and acceptable UV protection installed? Model Refrigerant piping properly routed, and supported per Section 15607, with pipe supports within 10 in of each change of direction, and risers properly clamped, (refer Section 15620 for insulated clamps)? Fixture No. Roof penetrations for both refrigerant piping and conduits are properly through sealed pipe boxes, per drawings? A03 Compressor/ condensing units and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled per Section 15610, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, marked for refrigerant type and system number, and requested data submitted? BML -220 Ambient temperature sensor installation is complete, located as indicated on drawings and properly shielded? Refrigeration power and control wiring work, including unit ground cabling, completed, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? A04 120 volt service receptacles wired and operational? Yes or No Description Model Einstein equipment is installed and operational. Fixture No. All sensors are installed and operational. A03 Remote alarm panel is installed in Guest Services and operational. BML -220 Einstein PBX extension is connected to landline and operational. Network cable (data cable) is connected to Einstein Panel and operational. A04 Network cable (data cable) is connected to network jack in control room and operational. ADT -130 Energy Management Consultant (EMC) at 608 - 822 -3550, ext 0 has been contacted to verify system is operational. Alarm Back -up verification with the alarm contractor is completed. Combination temperature/ humidistat installed in market area per the drawings. System No. (A01) Make Model Serial Fixture No. Expansion Valve Model No. A03 Bohn BML -220 A04 Bohn ADT -130 P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 0627 ao Section 3 i 1 r 1 Section 4 Walk -in Cooler and Freezer Eva orator Coils Refrigeration System Controls REFRIGERATION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION 15696 - 2 TARGET System No. Fixture No. Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Number of Doors Expansion Valve Model No. A01 YE0978 Tyler P5FGN5 Evaporator coils and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled per Section 15610, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, system number tag installed, and requested data submitted ?. 5 A01 YE1022 Tyler P5FGN3 3 A02 YE0983 Tyler P5NGN4 4 A02 YE0984 Tyler P5NGN3 3 A02 YE1022 Tyler P5FGN3 3 Yes or No Open Door Alarm Panels and switches installed and operational? Leak detection alarms and transducers installed as indicated on drawings and operational? Power wiring for heat tapes, door frame heaters and threshold heaters complete with all wire terminations verified tight and electrical covers in place. End panels on evaporator coils are installed. Evaporator thermal expansion valves are adjusted and functioning in proper super heat ranges. Evaporator coils and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled per Section 15610, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, system number tag installed, and requested data submitted ?. Yes or No Description There are no unreported signs of damage, (exterior or internal) which was observed during installation process or missing parts? Cases installed per the fixture plan and Section 15641, properly aligned and verified level, buckled kg TARGET IMO Imo Cases Idg ✓ 1 ■ i r P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Section 5 Sales Floor Refrigerated Cases REFRIGERATION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION 15696 - 3 rw p 1 ■ 1 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 REFRIGERATION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION 15696 - 4 TARGET together tight and fully sealed with no gaps with all pull up bolts properly tightened, all access covers re- installed? Installation of all applicable trim, bumper and color brand parts, raceway covers, kick- plates and close -off panels is complete, (Refer to details drawing M15)? Refrigerant piping per section 15630, ACR tubing; 15% silver brazing filler metal; long radius fittings; inverted traps at tops and bottoms of risers; valves installed properly; and no unnecessary traps? Case condensate pan drain piping installation is complete and verified free of obstructions, with minimum '/ "per foot pipe slope in the direction of flow, no pipe size reductions and water seals in place? Refrigeration piping insulation per Section 15620, thickness as specified, (Article 3.4); mitered fittings; and sealed to top of cases? Case lighting operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and shipping tape removed from fluorescent lamps? Case glass doors have been checked and adjusted for alignment, seal and swing? Anti -sweat heaters are operational with all wire terminations verified tight and electrical covers in place? Case fans are operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and fan bracket bolts checked for tightness? Case temperature sensor wiring is complete to the supply and return air stream sensors of each case, with all wire terminations verified tight, control points checked, and electrical covers in place? REMS panels mounted per drawings, and not visible from sales floor. Each case supply and return air sensor temperature calibration has been tested and is with an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2°F? Fan kits are installed on top of cases, as detailed on drawings and secured to cases and partitions? All plug -in electrical have been checked for positive seal? Cases and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled per Section 15610, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, system number tag installed, and requested data submitted ?. rw p 1 ■ 1 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 REFRIGERATION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION 15696 - 4 TARGET SERVICE RATE AGREEMENT Emergency Service and Planned Maintenance: TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1. Labor to be billed at the following time and material rates: $ per hour, per man for straight time (mechanic). $ per hour, per man for straight time (worker). $ per hour, per man for overtime, defined as follows: Monday - Friday, after 4:30 PM per hour, per man for holidays, defined as follows: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day $ per hour, per man, for coil cleaning. No travel time will be allowed for contract work, emergency work, preventive maintenance inspections or scheduled trips. 2. At no time will truck, equipment, trip or mileage charges be allowed. 3. Contractor provided materials to be billed at cost plus % up to $1000 and cost plus above $1000. (Cost plus example: $100.00 net cost plus 20% or $100.00 x 1.20 = $120.00.) 4. Refrigerant provided to be billed at cost plus %. 5. Labor and materials provided by sub - contractor(s) to be billed at cost plus %. (Example: crane services, motor re- builders, roofing, etc.) 6. Freight and delivery expenses to be billed at cost. TARGET CORPORATION CONTRACTOR By: By: Name: Richard Wurtz Name: Title: Manager Title: Refrigeration Operations SERVICE RATE AGREEMENT 15697 - 1 System /Circuit No. of Hours Rate /Hour Total System /Circuit No. of Hours Rate /Hour Tot at Hermetic Compressor $ $ Evaporator Fan Motor /Blade $ $ Semi - Hermetic Compressor $ $ Condenser Coil $ $ Contactor /Relay $ $ Evaporator Cal $ $ Circuit Breaker /Discon nect $ $ Clean Condenser Coil $ $ System Clean up $ $ Temp. Sensor $ $ Rack Oil & Filter Change $ $ Case Trim /Case Bumpers $ $ EPR/ESR Valve $ $ Reach In Door $ $ CPR Valve $ $ Door Hardware /Gas kets $ $ TX Valve $ $ Anti-Sweat Heater $ $ Headmaster Valve $ $ Case Lighting Ballast $ $ LL Solenoid Valve $ $ Other: $ $ Crank Case Heater $ $ Other: $ $ Condenser Fan Motor /Blade $ $ Other: $ $ Sub Total: $l f { Labor Tax ( %) I• Contact Representative: Target Store # • Phone # Work Order # Has work been completed per verbal approval from Target? Estimated Completion Date: • Description of work completed to date: Et r • • • • • t 1 TARGET TARGET REFRIGERATION PROPOSAL (Note: This proposal form is only for refrigeration service work during a warranty period, which is not covered or only partially covered by the installation warranty.) Contractor: Proposed Labor Required: Date: P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 TARGET REFRIGERATION PROPOSAL 15698 -1 Unit # Part Description Size Qty Cost Tax % Mark Up Total $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ Sub Total $ Material Tax ( %) $ Freight $ Proposed Total $ P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 r.r leg INF Description of Proposed Work / Additional Comments: • 1 1 r Compressor Replacement Data (Existing Compressor): Manufacturer: TARGET REFRIGERATION PROPOSAL 15698 - 2 Model No. Serial # TARGET Proposed Materials /Subcontractors (Unit cost should not include Tax and indicate $0 for warranty or Target provided Parts.) Fax Proposals to (775)- 908 -1535 or E -mail to refrigeration. prosals @target.com ,.; TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 r SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.1 SUMMARY 1.4 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section includes 1. Demolition. 2. Maintaining existing equipment in service until new equipment operational. 3. Recycling of lamps and ballasts. 1.2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet requirements of latest edition of NEC and other national, state and local regulations that may apply. B. Where requirements indicated in the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes and standards, the Contract Documents take precedence. C. Fluorescent lamps and ballasts removed from all Target Corporation facilities must be recycled. Lamps and ballasts cannot be thrown in the trash. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Excavation, trenching, backfill and compaction requirements - Section 02220. B. Concrete mix requirements - Section 03300. C. Finish painting - Section 09900. A. Load Current and Voltage Measurement B. Certificate: Submit certificate in accordance with Section 01300, stating that electrical tests have been completed. 1.5 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT POWER AND CONTROL WIRING A. Motors and equipment provided under Divisions 2, 11, 13, 14, and 15: 1. Provide power wiring from power source to motor or equipment through its controller as indicated on Drawings. 2. Make electrical connections at power source, controller and motor or equipment. B. Motor and equipment controllers and control devices, Sections in Division 15: 1. Provide controllers for every motor or piece of equipment unless indicated otherwise in Contract Documents. 2. Control devices and control wiring: Provided under Sections in Division 15 unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. Motor and equipment controllers, control devices and control wiring, Sections in Divisions 2, 11, 13 and 14: Provided under Sections of Divisions 2, 11, 13 and 14 unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2.1 GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Provide equipment and material listed by UL or ETL. B. Identification: 1. Identify equipment with manufacturer's nameplate. 2. Indicate manufacturer's name, address, model number and electrical ratings. 2.2 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Six inch wide polyethylene tapes permanently colored yellow for electric and orange for telephone with wording indicating type of service and "Caution ". 2.3 LAMP AND BALLAST RECYCLE CONTRACTOR A. Mercury Waste SolutionsNoss Lighting is Target Corporation's national contractor for lamp and ballast recycling. 1. Contact: Terry Horstman. 2. Telephone: 800 B. All recycling must be coordinated through MercuryNoss 3.1 INSTALLATION A. PART 3 - EXECUTION General: 1. Install equipment with space allowed for removal, repair and modifications. 2. Conduits: a. Arrange conduits routed through insulating panels of refrigerated panels to minimize size of openings. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 b. Seal conduits with approved fittings and sealants. B. Existing Equipment: 1. Make modifications to existing equipment as indicated on Drawings and in Specification Sections. 2. Maintain uninterrupted electrical service to existing areas under modification. C. Inserts and Sleeves: 1. Install inserts for fastening equipment to new concrete work during construction of building in locations approved by the Architect. 2. Use expansion bolts for fastening equipment in existing construction or when inserts have been improperly located. 3. Install sleeves for conduits one inch and larger when penetrating poured concrete walls, floors, or precast panels. 4. Seal sleeves with three hour rated fire retardant silicone sealant. D. Access Panels: 1. Install access panels in least obtrusive location or as approved by Architect for concealed conduit, boxes, wiring, and electrical equipment requiring accessibility. E. Shop Painting: 1. Clean shop or factory fabricated or field built equipment not galvanized or protected and paint one shop coat of primer before delivery to site. Repaint scratches or bends. 2. Do not paint nameplates, labels, tags, stainless steel or chromium- plated items such as shafts, levers, handles, trim, and strips. F. Protection of Work: 1. Protect equipment and fixtures with tarpaulins, drop cloths, barricades as required. 2. Replace damaged equipment with new equipment. G. Housekeeping Pad: 1. Install concrete housekeeping pad for each piece of floor mounted equipment. 2. Size pad 4 inches high and 4 inches beyond equipment length and width. 3. Pour pad level and score top from front to back on 18 inch centers with parting tool. 4. Chamfer exposed edges. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 2 Balancing and Testing: 1. Balance circuits under full load conditions and record final full load phase current measurements. 2. Measure and record full load current and voltage at main switchboard and each distribution panel and panelboard. 3. Prepare current and voltage measurements in tabular form. 4. Test each feeder by means of megohm insulation tester (megger). Correct circuits showing less than one megohm resistance. 5. Test motors and motor control equipment and replace overload elements that operate at excessive temperatures. I. Excavating and Backfilling: 1. Excavate, trench, backfill and compact for electrical work conforming to Project requirements. Do not cover conduit or other work before inspection and approval. 2. Install identifying underground warning tapes 12 inches below grade, directly above, and continuous with underground cable or conduit. H. 3.2 FLUORESCENT LAMP AND BALLAST RECYCLING A. Order shipping containers by calling Terry Horstman at Mercury/Voss (1- 800 - 776 - 8677). 1. Allow 3 -5 business days for delivery of containers. 2. Containers will not be shipped unless the following information is provided: a. Accurate count of lamps needing shipping containers. b. Accurate count of ballasts needing shipping containers. c. Store number and address. d. Construction/remodel project code. e. On -site contact person, phone number, fax number and e-mail address. Store shipping/receiving hours. Special drop -off instructions. g. TARGET B. Package the fluorescent lamps and ballasts using the following procedures: 1. Lamps a. Fill lamp boxes completely with fluorescent lamps. b. Securely tape every box closed on all seams. c. Write quantity of lamps on the end of each box. I . TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 d. Stack boxes on pallets approximately 4 feet high (never exceed 5 feet high). `.i e. Write total quantity of lamps on the outside of each pallet. f. Tightly wrap entire pallet with stretch •+ wrap (minimum of 10 revolutions). • a i • • ■ im ■ D i BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 TARGET 2. Ballasts a. Place ballasts into 55- gallon open top steel drums. b. Secure drum lid tightly with ring and bolt. c. Write quantity of ballasts on the top of each drum. d. Place drums on a pallet (4 drums per pallet) - if pallet is not strong enough place 2 drums on middle of each pallet. e. Write total quantity of ballasts on the outside of each pallet. f. Tightly wrap each pallet with stretch wrap (minimum of 10 revolutions). 3. Unused Packaging a. Return unused packaging containers with the materials to be recycled. They should be shrink - wrapped on the pallets with full boxes or drums. C. Ship the pallets by calling Terry Horstman at MercuryNoss (1- 800 - 776 - 8677). 1. Pallets cannot be picked up unless the following information is provided: a. Accurate count of lamps ready to be picked up. b. Accurate count of ballasts ready to be picked up. c. Amount of unused packaging. d. Store number and address. e. Construction/remodel project code. f. On -site contact person, phone number, fax number and e-mail address. g. Store shipping/receiving hours. h. Special pick -up instructions. i. Equipment available for loading pallets. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 4 r., TARGET r A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings. 3. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 4. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 5. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 6. Non - metallic conduit and fittings. 7. Metal -Clad (MC) Cable. 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 02205 - Earthwork/Building Area: Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities within building area. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit installations. C. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D. Section 07840 - Firestopping. E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Sealing around conduit penetrating non -fire rated gypsum board partitions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1, "Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc - Coated ". B. ANSI C80.3, "Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc - Coated ". C. ANSI C80.5, "Rigid Aluminum Conduit ". D. ANSI/NEMA F3-1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies ". E. NEMA RN -1, "PVC Extemally- Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing ". F. NEMA TC2, "Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC -40 and EPC -80) ". G. NEMA TC 3, "PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing ". H. UL, "Building Materials Directory". P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. C. PVC Externally Coated Conduit: NEMA RN- 1; rigid steel conduit with external galvanized surface. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. 2.2 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: Galvanized steel, UL 1242. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB-1; use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit. 2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS A. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB-1; steel, compression or set screw type. 2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: FS WW -C 566; steel. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB-1. 2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: UL File 52123 galvanized steel flexible conduit with UL 360 PVC jacket. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA F13-1. 2.6 RIGID NON - METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. 13. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. CONDUIT 16111 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 2.7 EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION COUPLINGS A. Expansion and deflection couplings: UL 467 and UL 514; accommodate 0.75 inch deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction; allow 30 degree angular deflections; watertight, corrosion- resistant and compatible with rigid conduit or IMC. 2.8 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable iron. 2.9 SEALANT A. Refer to Section 07840 - Firestopping for approved manufacturers and requirements for firestopping systems and products. Products selected are to be based on tested UL designs. 2.10 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Corrosion Resistant Coatings: Asphaltic base liquid; Koppers Bitumastic 50. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT A. Size as indicated on the Drawings; where size not shown, base on N.E.C. tables for conductors being installed. Use 3/4 inch trade size minimum for branch circuit home runs to panelboards, for conduits installed below grade and floor slabs. Minimum size for any conduit work is 1/2 inch trade size. B. Arrange conduit to maintain 8' -0" minimum headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Rack horizontal runs of exposed conduit in stockrooms and shipping/receiving area above bottom chord of bar joists. D. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. E. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues and heating appliances. Maintain minimum 2 inch clearance between conduit and bottom of roof deck. CONDUIT 16111 - 2 TARGET F. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using one -hole galvanized straps with clamp backs, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, bolted split stamped galvanized hangers, or UL listed hanger. G. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit. H. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; ream and de -burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Provide a bushing on conduit stubbed out into accessible ceiling space. D. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. E. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90- degree bends between boxes. F. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. G. Use hydraulic one -shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit 1 -1/4 inch and larger. H. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. I. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. J. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. K. Install expansion fittings where conduit crosses building expansion or seismic joints. L. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls, provide pipe sleeve two sizes larger than conduit; seal opening around conduit with fire rated sealant. TARGET M. Where conduit penetrates waterproofed foundation walls or floors, provide waterproof sleeves with waterproofing materials compatible with the waterproofing system being installed on surface being penetrated. N. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof membrane with flashing by roofing contractor. P. Apply a continuous even coat of corrosion resistant coating on metallic conduit in contact with soil. Row R Wipe rigid non - metallic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for period recommended by the manufacturer. O. Do not cast conduit within floor slabs. Q. Tape wrap or bitumastic paint to coat rigid steel factory elbows for bends in rigid metallic conduit runs below grade longer than 100 feet or which have 3 or more bends within the first 100 feet. S. Provide backfill material in accordance with Section 02205 for conduit installed in soil. T. Seal conduits penetrating partitions separating spaces with more than a 30 °F temperature differential. U. Route conduits to minimize penetrations of cooler /freezer panels. 3.3 CONDUIT USES PERMITTED A. Underground Secondary Service Entrance Installations from Transformer to Building: Rigid steel conduit; Plastic- coated rigid steel conduit; Schedule 40 plastic conduit. B. Branch Circuit or Feeder Installations Underground: Rigid steel conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Schedule 40 plastic conduit. C. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit; Intermediate metal conduit. D. Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Liquidtight flexible conduit in lengths not to exceed 18 inches. 3.4 CONDUIT USES NOT PERMITTED END OF SECTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 E. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or rigid aluminum (2" trade size minimum) conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Electrical metallic tubing. F. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel where subject to physical damage and below five feet above floor in loading dock area; Intermediate metal conduit; Electrical metallic tubing. G. Connections subject to Vibration: 1. Dry Locations: Provide flexible metal conduit for connections to transformers, motors, emergency generator and other vibrating equipment. 2. Wet locations: Provide liquidtight flexible conduit. H. Food Service Beverage Line Chase: Schedule 40 plastic conduit; Electrical metallic tubing. I. MC Cable: Permitted in lieu of conduit and wire in accordance with section 16120.3.3. A. Branch Circuit installations underground not permitted unless noted otherwise. CONDUIT 16111 - 3 V Ire rr A. Section Includes: ■+ 1. Building wire. 2. Cable. 3. 4. .r IWO TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS B. C. D. SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE • PART 1 - GENERAL Wiring connections and terminations. Installation of manufactured wiring system. A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Owner will furnish manufactured wiring system for installation under this section to interconnect low voltage distribution system (600 volt maximum) to Sales Floor lighting system and power and communication poles. Section 16111 - Conduit. Section 16112 - Surface Raceways. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. E. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. F. Section 16511 - Lighting Fixtures. G. Section 16512 - Lighting Fixtures Installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. B. C. D. ANSUASTM B3 - Annealed Bare Copper Conductor. ICEA — Insulated Cable Engineer's Association. NEMA WC 3 - Rubber- Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic- Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. G. UL 83 - Standard for Safety of UL 44 - Standard for Rubber - Insulated Wires and Cables. Thermoplastic- Insulated Wire and Cable. H. UL 1569 - Metal -Clad Cables. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under the provisions of Section 01300. B. Certificates of insulation megohmeter tests. Submit test results to OSR. 2.1 BUILDING WIRE PART 2 - PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Thermoplastic- insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5, UL 83, ANSUASTM B3. B. Rubber - insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3, UL 44, ANSUASTM B3. C. Conductors: Copper, 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN or XHHW, stranded conductor. D. Alternate Conductors ( #6 and larger): Stabiloy aluminum alloy (AA -8000 series alloy), 600V insulation Type XHHW -2, compact stranded conductors. E. Control Circuits: 14 AWG Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN; multi- conductor cable: color coded. F. Metal -Clad (MC) Cable: A factory assembly of one or more conductors each individually insulated and enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocking tape, or a smooth or corrugated tube. UL 1569. 1. Conductors within MC cable: stranded, see C. above. 2.2 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper, solid conductor, 600 volt insulation, rated 60° C, individual insulated conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper solid conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60° C, individual insulated conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. 2.3 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEM A. Manufactured Wiring System: Pre -wired flexible metal conduit assemblies furnished by Owner. WIRE AND CABLE 16120 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 TARGET to 2.4 EMS & REMS LOW VOLTAGE CABLES A. Energy management system and Refrigeration energy management system control cables are 18 AWG 2 pair (18/2), 4 pair (18/4), 6 pair (18/6), or 8 pair (18/8) plenum cables furnished by EMS Contractor and installed by electrical contractor. B. Electrical contractor to leave tagged wire ends at each junction for connection by EMS Contractor. 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. Switch legs are not considered control wiring. B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 150 feet. C. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. D. Place no more than 6 current carrying conductors in the same raceway unless indicated on Drawings. E. Neatly train and lace or tie wiring inside boxes, equipment, cabinets, and panelboards. F. Make conductor lengths for parallel conductors equal. G. Use 90° C. wire for feed through wiring in channels of continuous row fluorescent fixtures. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 6 AWG and larger wires. B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Swab raceway system installed underground, 1 -1/4" and larger, with sponge and drawstring before installing conductors. WIRE AND CABLE 16120 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Permitted Uses: Locations where not subject to physical damage. 1. CL2P and CL3P Plenum Cables: For EMS /low voltage cables in plenum ceilings. 2. MC Cables: a. Connection to light fixtures per NEC requirements. b. Wiring within store fixtures (i.e. from power poles or floor boxes to receptacles or light fixtures). c. Wiring within un- fumed columns. 3. Bare stranded conductors may be used for grounding purposes in accordance with the NEC. B. Not Permitted Uses: 1. Direct burial or in concrete. 2. Bare wires; except CL2P and CL3P; In plenum ceilings must be in conduit. 3. AC cable. 4. MC cable as homerun connections to panelboards. C. Support exposed cables not m raceways above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not support cable from ceiling suspension system. Include bridle rings or drive rings. Support cables at intervals not exceeding 6 feet. D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.4 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured wiring system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use UL listed spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables longer than 6 feet from structure. Include bridle rings or drive rings. C. Do not support manufactured wiring system cable or components from ceiling suspension system. 3.5 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps for conductor size 8 AWG. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. ti. 1 TARGET B. Use split bolt connectors for splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. C. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. D. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. E. Terminate spare conductors with wire nuts and electrical tape. 3.6 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Mechanical screw type connectors. 1. Connectors: a. Dual rated (AL7CU or AL9CU). b. UL listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. c. Sized to accept aluminum conductors of specified ampacity. 2. Remove insulation from the required length of conductor using suitable stripping tool. 3. Wire brush conductor and apply a UL listed joint compound. 4. Tighten the connection per connector manufacturer's recommendation. 5. Wipe off excess joint compound. B. Mechanical compression type connectors. 1. Connectors: a. Dual rated (AL7CU or AL9CU). b. UL listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. c. Sized to accept aluminum conductors of specified ampacity. 2. Lugs: a. Marked with wire size, die index, number and location of crimps. b. Color- coded. c. Lug barrel: Factory pre - filled with a UL listed joint compound. 3. Remove insulation from the required length of conductor using suitable stripping tool. 4. Wire brush conductor. 5. Crimp the connection per connector manufacturer's recommendation. 6. Wipe off excess joint compound. C. Termination to Aluminum Bus P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 1. Prepare a mechanical connection conforming to A. or B. above. 2. Hardware: a. Bolts: Anodized alloy 2024 -T4 and conforming to ANSI B18.2.1 and to ASTM B211 or B221 chemical and mechanical property limits. b. Nuts: Aluminum alloy 6061 -T6 or 6262 -T9 and conforming to ANSI B18.2.2. c. Washers: Flat aluminum alloy 2024 - T4, Type A plain, standard wide series conforming to ANSI B27.2. 3. Lubricate and tighten the hardware per the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Termination to Copper Bus 1. Prepare a mechanical connection conforming to A. or B. above. 2. Hardware: a. Bolts: Plated or galvanized medium carbon steel; heat treated, quenched and tempered equal to ASTM A -325 or SAE grade 5. b. Nuts: Heavy semi - finished hexagon, conforming to ANSI B18.2.2, threads to be unified coarse series(UNC), class 2B. c. Washers: Steel, Type A plain, standard wide series conforming to ANSI B27.2. d. Belleville conical spring washers: Hardened steel, cadmium plated or silicone bronze. 3. Lubricate and tighten the hardware per the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Termination to Equipment Not Equipped for Termination of Aluminum Conductor. 1. Prepare a compression connection using an adapter UL listed for the purpose. 2. Provide an insulating cover over adapter body. 3. Terminate the adapter to the equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall field inspect and test installation as follows: 1. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. 2. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. WIRE AND CABLE 16120 - 3 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 TARGET WIRE AND CABLE 16120 - 4 3. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment conductors. Verify proper phasing connections. 4. Test each feeder by means of a megohmeter insulation tester. Impress a voltage of no less than 500 volts DC upon the circuit being tested. Correct insulation deficiencies that show an insulation resistance of less than one megohm. Test with conductors connected to their respective terminals with switch or circuit breaker in the "off' position. END OF SECTION TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 rl 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 REFERENCES 2.1 OUTLET BOXES SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: bu+ 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. 2. Floor boxes. 3. Pull and junction boxes. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner - supplied equipment. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete slabs. A. INN B. C. D. Section 08305 - Access Doors: Wall and ceiling access doors. E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Sealing around boxes penetrating gypsum board partitions. F. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring. G. Section 09680 - Carpeting. H. Section 16111 - Conduit. I. Section 16112 - Surface Raceways. J. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. K. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices. L. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork. A. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. UL, "Building Materials Directory". PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch knockouts. B. Cast Boxes: Shallow for column mounting, deep for other applications; hubless with 1/2 inch NPS threaded holes as required; gasketed cover. 2.2 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor Boxes for Installation in Cast -In -Place Concrete Floors: Fully adjustable, shallow, concrete - tight, cast iron with partitions or barriers in boxes for use with multiple services, threaded 3/4 inch NPS hubless conduit entrance (2 per compartment minimum). 2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel with cover plate. B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger Than 12 Inches (300 mm) in any dimension: Hinged cover enclosures. C. Cast metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 6, flat - flanged, surface- mounted junction box, UL listed as raintight. Cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. Provide traffic covers where applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in Sales Floor fixtures with Owner's fixturing and electrical drawings prior to rough -in. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Section 08305. D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. BOXES 16130 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Do not install boxes back - to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6 -inch separation. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that are connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of box. E. Use multiple -gang boxes where two or more devices are mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. 3.3 FLOOR BOX INSTALLATION A. Set boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. Plug boxes to prevent entrance of concrete. BOXES 16130 - 2 G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, backsplashes, and similar fixtures. H. Position outlets with respect to luminaire locations shown on reflected ceiling plans. I. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately position to surface finish. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. K. Align wall- mounted outlet boxes for switches and similar devices plumb and true with building lines. L. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations and wet locations. M. Label cover of box with panelboard and circuit numbers located within the box. TARGET B. Use cast iron floor boxes for installations in slab on grade. 3.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. END OF SECTION TARGET SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES 0 r 1.1 SUMMARY C. D. E. PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Wall switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Device plates and box covers. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES A. FS W -C -596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet. B. FS W -S -896 - Switch, Toggle. C. NEMA WD 1 - General - Purpose Wiring Devices. D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific- Purpose Wiring Devices. E. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. F. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Wiring Devices. B. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. Leviton Manufacturing Co, Inc. Pass & Seymour, Inc. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.5 INTERIOR WEATHERPROOF ACCESSORIES P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 0627 2.2 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall switches for Lighting Circuits: FS W -S -896; AC specification grade quiet snap switch with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes at 120 or 277 volts AC. Handle: Gray. B. Pilot Light Type: Clear lighted toggle. C. Keyed Switches: AC specification grade Cam - lock style rated 20 amperes at 120 or 277 volts AC. 2.3 RECEPTACLES A. Convenience and Straight -blade Receptacles: FSW- C -596. B. Locking -Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5. C. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA Type 5- 20R, gray face. D. Receptacles fed from panel LPE -1, Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings, ivory plastic face. E. GFI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter. F. Surge Suppression Receptacle: Duplex receptacle, NEMA Type 5 -20R, ivory in color. Meet UL 498 and UL 1449 standards. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Satin fmish stainless steel. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. C. Utility Cover Plate: Stamped galvanized steel. D. Surface mounted boxes in finished areas: Satin finish stainless steel to match box dimensions. A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. B. Weatherproof coverplates with polycarbonate lift cover. C. Seal -tite elastimer connector cover. WIRING DEVICES 16141 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down. B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 4 inches above backsplash, center line dimension, grounding pole on bottom, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. C. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Drawings. D. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. Label panelboard and circuit number on front of plate. E. Install weatherproof plates where exposed to weather and otherwise as indicated. Label panelboard and circuit number on back of plate. F. Install utility plates on surface mounted outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and above accessible ceilings. Label panelboard and circuit number on plate. G. Align devices and covers plumb and true with building lines, flush with walls, frames, floors and ceilings. H. Device plates shall cover entire wall opening. WIRING DEVICES 16141 - 2 END OF SECTION TARGET SECTION 16180 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT w A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner- supplied equipment. B. Owner will furnish line voltage thermostats for installation under this section, as specified rr in Section 15950 - Controls and Instrumentation (Owner - Supplied). TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections. 2. Electrical connections to Owner- supplied equipment. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS C. 1.3 REFERENCES A. B. 2.1 LUGS PART 1 - GENERAL Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. NEMA WD 5 - Specific - Purpose Wiring Devices. UL, "Building Materials Directory". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field verify equipment rating with manufacturer's nameplate data. Adjust feeds, fuses or overcurrent protectors as required to comply with code requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ILSCO. 2. Teledyne Penn- Union. 3. Burndy Corporation. B. Compression Type: Seamless, one - piece, copper; size for conductor applied to. C. Connections to Set Screw Lugs: Pin type compression fittings for use on conductor sizes #2 AWG and larger with barrels filled with conductive paste. 2.2 CRIMP - ON TERMINALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Distributor Industries. 2. 3M Company. 3. Thomas- Betts. B. Crimp on insulated for conductor ranging #14 through #10 AWG, flanged fork or ring tongue style. 2.3 CONNECTORS, SPLICES & TAPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Distributor Industries. 2. OZ Gedney. 3. ILSCO. 4. Burndy. B. Compression or setscrew type, insulating cover for use on conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller. C. Compression type or split bolt connectors with insulating covers for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger. 2.4 WIRE CONNECTORS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Distributor Industries. 2. Ideal Industries. 3. 3M Company. B. Conical spring type with plastic or nylon insulating outer shell, color coded to denote wire size, for conductor sizes #14 through #10 AWG. C. Butt compression style insulating crimp splices for conductors smaller than #14 AWG. 3.1 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Bus Connection: Use compression lugs, bolt to bus bars using cap screws, lock washers and nuts of material electrically compatible with bus, for connections to switchboard and main distribution panelboards only. B. Set Screw Lug Connection: Install pin type compression fitting of similar construction as compression lugs. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16180 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 C. Terminations to Motors: Use crimp -on connectors for motor terminations from stranded conductors and where terminal lugs are not provided at connection point. Use ring- tongue terminals wherever possible. D. Use crimping tool supplied by manufacturer of connector to install on conductor. Do not remove conductor strands or over -size terminators. Apply insulating tape over exposed conductor surfaces to 150% of the conductor insulating material. E. Strip conductor insulation as prescribed by the manufacturer of the terminator. Use conductive paste where required for dissimilar materials or as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Tighten connections to ensure maximum surface contact between terminals. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16180 - 2 TARGET 1r r., TARGET v fto 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit and equipment supports. 2. Fastening hardware. • 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner- supplied equipment. Section 16111 B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Section 16426 Section 16441 Installation. Section 16461 Installation. Section 16471 - Section 16485 - Section 16511 - Section 16512 - 1.3 COORDINATION 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Beeline. 2. Kindorf 3. Unistrut. - Conduit. - Switchboards Installation. - Disconnect Switches - Dry Type Transformers Panelboards Installation. Contactors. Lighting Fixtures. Lighting Fixtures Installation. A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. ▪ 1.5 REFERENCES A. APA, "American Plywood Association ". B. UL, "Building Materials Directory". PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. C. D. 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Plywood Boards: APA C -D or C -D Plugged, Group 2, Exposure 1. Provide fire retardant treated material, pressure impregnated with Osmose "Flameproof' or Koppers "NON -COM ", and bearing a UL label indicating fire hazard classification of 25 or less, or an FR -S Classification. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using bolts, beam clamps, and spring steel clips. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors in solid masonry walls; self - drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. C. D. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 12 gauge galvanized or painted steel, "U" section, 1 -1/2" square nominal in section. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to support equipment. Provide corrosion resistant finish. Threaded Rod: Zinc plated steel, 3/8" diameter. minimum, sized to support load required with safety factor of 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION Do not secure materials to architectural wall panel system except at steel studs as approved by architect. DO NOT FASTEN SUPPORTS TO PIPING, DUCTWORK, MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, OTHER CONDUIT, OR ROOF DECK. E. Do not use powder - actuated anchors. F. Do not drill through structural framing members, except as shown for receptacle, telephone, temperature sensor and AN devices in columns. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T-0627 TARGET H. Install free - standing electrical equipment on concrete pads four inches high and overlapping equipment footprint by two inches on all sides. I. Install surface- mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off wall, or on 3/4 inch plywood backboards. J. Install plywood backboards over gypsum board or directly to stud framing as indicated. Fasten to studs with self-tapping screws according to APA recommendations. K. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush - mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. L. Support equipment and fixtures from the top chord of bar joists. Connect hanger at bar joist top chord panel point; that is, the point at which the vertical or angular member of bar joist is attached to the top chord. Provide steel channels or rigid conduit to span between joists for locating hangers properly. EMT conduit may be used in place of rigid to support a row of strip light fixtures that is 8'- 0" in length or less. Exception: where spacing of fixtures require the use of screw eyes. 1. Note: DO NOT support equipment, conduit, or fixtures from the roof deck. M. Locate panel point Loads at least 6 feet from any other panel point load on the same joist. 1. Note: DO NOT exceed a maximum allowable load of 88 lb. to any joist panel point. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 -2 END OF SECTION System Designation Tape Color Fire Alarm Red Telephone Blue EPOS and Network Orange Security Yellow Television Distribution Green Temperature Control White TARGET wo 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section Section Section Section Section 1.3 SUBMITTALS 2.1 MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Wire and cable markers. 3. Conduit color coding. Section 16111 - Conduit. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. Section 16130 — Boxes. Section 16141 — Wiring Devices. 16425 - Switchboards. 16440 - Disconnect Switches. 16460 - Dry Type Transformers. 16470 - Panelboards. 16480 - Motor Control. A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic white letters on a black background for equipment on normal utility power system; white letters on a red background for equipment on emergency or standby power system. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. C. Tape: 3/4" wide vinyl adhesive backed marking tape, color as specified herein. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to dead -front barrier recessed panelboards in fmished locations. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.3 BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Label box cover with the panelboard(s) name and circuit numbers contained within. 3.4 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/8 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 3.5 COLOR CODING A. Use colored tape to identify systems in conduit and outlet box interior as follows: 1. Install tape in 3 inch bands at each end of conduit. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 TARGET 2. Apply two stripes of tape within each outlet box for low voltage systems. B. Paint fire alarm system junction and pull box covers red. 3.6 DEVICE LABELING A. Label wiring devices with the panelboard's name and circuit number. 1. Install label on exterior of device cover plate. a. Exception: Install label on interior of device coverplate for weatherproof locations. 2. Use clear tape with black lettering. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2 1 liar TARGET kw ,, 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. B. NEMA PB 2 - Dead Front Distribution Switchboards. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 16425 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Main switchboard distribution devices. A. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. B. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. C. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. D. Section 16426 - Switchboards Installation. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Distribution devices for the switchboards shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dimensional Coordination: 1. Verify that dimensions for switchboard do not exceed space provided. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. 1.7 DELIVERY A. Deliver and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Coordinate delivery with Contractor. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Westinghouse 2. Listed compatible components. B. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated heavy duty type, quick - make, quick - break, load interrupter, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening ront cover with switch in the ON position. Handle lockable in the OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses only except as indicated on the Drawings. Fuse types as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. END OF SECTION SWITCHBOARDS 16425 - 1 SWITCHBOARDS INSTALLATION A. Section Includes: '-' 1. Installation of Contractor - furnished switchboard distribution devices. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS B. Install devices per manufacturer's instructions. A. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. B. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. C. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. D. Section 16425 — Switchboards. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 16426 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Bidding Requirements: Forward copies of the One Line Diagram, Switchboard Elevation, and Specification Section 16425 to suppliers prior to submitting bid. Any modification to switchboard due to noncompliance with this requirement will be performed at Contractor's expense. B. Dimensional Coordination: 1. Verify that dimensions for switchboard device(s) do not exceed existing space provided. 1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Switchboards shall be furnished as part of the work of Section 16425. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Review shop drawings and product data, provided by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with manufacturer. B. Store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. 3.1 INSTALLATION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION SWITCHBOARDS INSTALLATION 16426 - 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY, NOT A PART OF DIVISION 16. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. No Substitutions. PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Disconnect switches. 2. Fuses. 3. Enclosures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. UL 198C - High- Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Square D a. Contact: Michele Wells or Tom Sarkis. Square D / Schneider Electric 9220 Bass Lake Road #230 New Hope, MN 55428 (763)543 -5500 FAX: (859)372 - 1861 michelelwells@us.schneider-electric.com thomas. sarkis eus.schneider- etectric.com C. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Horsepower rated, heavy duty type; quick -make, quick - break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses only and reject all others. D. Non - fusible Switch Assemblies: Horsepower rated, heavy duty type; quick -make, quick - break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. E. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; Type 1 for interior and type 3R for exterior locations. 2.2 FUSES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann. 2. Gould - Shawmutt. 3. Littelfuse. B. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: UL 198E, Class RK5 sized as indicated on Drawings. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 RMS amperes. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION DISCONNECT SWITCHES (OWNER FURNISHED) 16440 - 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 SECTION 16441 DISCONNECT SWITCHES INSTALLATION •� 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL 198C - High- Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 0 r 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Disconnect switches. A. Section 16440 - Disconnect Switches (Owner Furnished). 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Disconnect switches shall be furnished as part of the work Section 16440. B. Disconnect switches shall be installed by Division 16 Contractor. 3.1 INSTALLATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings and required by governing codes. Mount at 48" above fmished floor unless noted otherwise. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. END OF SECTION DISCONNECT SWITCHES INSTALLATION 16441 -1 ,,,,, TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 SECTION 16450 PART 3 - EXECUTION imd SECONDARY GROUNDING 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. IOW 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Power system grounding. 2. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground each separately- derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe or nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member. B. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non - current - carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. • 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete set of marked up prints as record drawings to indicate installed location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel, 5/8 inch diameter, minimum length 20 feet. B. Ground Clamp: Water pipe connection, bronze two piece with serrated jaws, lug sized for grounding electrode conductor. C. Connectors, Compression Type: Bronze or copper, pretreated with conductive paste, sized for conductors to which applied. D. Connectors, Exothermic Weld Type: Powder actuated weld. Bond made through exothermic reaction producing molten copper from premixed copper oxide and aluminum powder. Form bond in mold or crucible. END OF SECTION SECONDARY GROUNDING 16450 - 1 Rating Class ` ; Rise(DegreeiC) 15-750 220 150 16 . TARGET r 1.1 SUMMARY • 1 SECTION 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY, NOT A PART OF DIVISION 16. 1.3 PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Dry type two winding transformers. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 16111 - Conduit. B. C. D. E. F. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. Section 16461 - Dry Type transformers Installation. REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code B. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications C. NEMA TP1 — Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers. D. NEMA TP2 — Efficiency Test Procedures for Dry Type Transformers E. UL 1561 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide transformers of sizes and type as scheduled on Drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Include outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, KVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, sound level, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise. 1.6 DELIVERY A. Coordinate delivery with Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D - Type EE 1. Contact: Michele Wells or Tom Sarkis. Square D / Schneider Electric 9220 Bass Lake Road #230 New Hope, MN 55428 (763)543 -5500 FAX: (859)372 -1861 mchele. wells @us.schneider- electric.com thomas. sarkis (a�us.schneider- electric.com B. No Substitutions. 2.2 DRY TYPE TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS A. Dry Type Transformers: NEMA ST 20; factory- assembled, air cooled dry type transformers; ratings as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows: C. D. Case temperature shall not exceed 50 degrees C rise above 40 degrees C ambient at its warmest point. Winding Taps 1. Transformers Less than 15 KVA: Two at 2.5% below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding. 2. Transformers 15 KVA through 300: Two at 2.5% FCAN; four at 2.5% FCBN. 3. Transformers 500 and larger: Two at 2.5% FCAN; Two at 2.5% FCBN E. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. F. Basic Impulse Level: 10 KV. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 16460 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 G. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap. H. Mounting: Transformers 75 KVA and less shall be suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting; transformers larger than 75 KVA shall be suitable for floor mounting. I. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded. J. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20; Type 2. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. K. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration - absorbing mounts. L. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 16460 - 2 TARGET !r 1 Nor mei TARGET SECTION 16461 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS INSTALLATION 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of dry type two winding transformers. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 16111 - Conduit. B. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. ,,,, C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. D. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. E. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. F. Section 16460 - Dry Type Transformers (Owner Furnished). 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Dry-type transformers shall be furnished as part of the work of Section 16460. B. Dry-type transformers shall be installed by Division 16 Contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Review product data submitted under provisions of Section 01300. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. C. Store in a warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to keep out dust. Handle transformers using only lifting eyes and brackets provided for that purpose. Protect units against entrance of rain, sleet, or snow if handled in inclement weather. 3.1 INSTALLATION P01 RIGHTSIZE T - 0627 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Set transformer plumb and level. B. Use flexible conduit, 2 ft minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure. C. Use vibration isolating pads to isolate transformer from building structure. D. Install floor mounted transformers on 4" high concrete housekeeping pad. Secure to pad with expansion anchors, 1/2" diameter minimum, with 2 -1/2" minimum embedment. E. Provide seismic restraints where required by local codes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer. B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. END OF SECTION DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS INSTALLATION 16461 - 1 TARGET P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 IWO •+ 1.1 SUMMARY mmt 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.5 SUBMITTALS SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY, NOT A PART OF DIVISION 16. PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. Section 16471 - Panelboards Installation. Section 16485 - Contactors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. B. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. C. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide panelboards of sizes and type, with overcurrent protective devices and contactors as scheduled on Drawings. A. Submit shop drawings and product data for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes. 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish keys to Owner. 2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: B. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type. C. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1. D. Cabinet Size: Nominal 5 -3/4 inches deep, 20 inches wide. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1. Square D NQOD NF. a. Contact: Michele Wells or Tom Sarkis. The Square D / Schneider Electric 9220 Bass Lake Road #230 New Hope, MN 55428 (763)543 -5500 FAX: (859)372 -1861 mchele. wells (aus.schneider- electric.com thomas. sarkis (aus.schneider- electric.com 2. No Substitutions. 120/208 V 3Ph.4W 277/480 V. 3 Ph. 4 W Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed continuous piano hinges, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. Refer to drawings for mounting type. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide copper ground bus in all panelboards. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 18,000 amperes RMS symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards. Provide Panelboards complete with contactors where indicated on panelboard schedule. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. PANELBOARDS (OWNER FURNISHED) 16470 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Panelboard schedules are shown on Drawings. B. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS (OWNER FURNISHED) 16470 - 2 TARGET r 4 `i TARGET SECTION 16471 PANELBOARDS INSTALLATION 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. B. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. C. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. "•' D. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. E. Section 16470 - Panelboards (Owner Furnished). •r 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. D. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Install panelboards of sizes and type, with overcurrent protective devices and contactors as scheduled on Drawings. B. Panelboards shall be furnished as part of the work Section 16470. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Review shop drawings and product data for equipment and component devices submitted under provisions of Section 01300. 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish keys to Owner. 3.1 PREPARATION PART 2- PRODUCTS 3.2 INSTALLATION (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Coordinate wall construction for flush mount panelboards with other trades to ensure proper wall thickness and framing. A. Panelboard schedules are shown on Drawings. B. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. C. Height: 6' -6" to top of panelboard. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Indicate load types and areas served using Owner's room designations. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Stub 2 empty one inch conduits to accessible location above ceiling out of each recessed panelboard. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS INSTALLATION 16471 - 1 TARGET 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 RELATED ITEMS SECTION 16480 MOTOR CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Manual motor starters. 2. Magnetic motor starters. 3. Combination magnetic motor starters. A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner - supplied equipment. B. Section 15780 — Mechanical Equipment (Owner Furnished Information). C. Section 15850 - Air Handling Equipment. • • D. Section 16111 - Conduit. E. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. F. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. G. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. H. Section 16440 - Disconnect Switches. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. B. NEMA ICS -6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed Switches. E. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices, and switching and overcurrent protective devices. C. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section 01300. D. E. P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MOTOR STARTERS A. Allen Bradley. B. General Electric. C. Square D. D. Cutler - Hammer/Westinghouse. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. NEMA ICS 2; size M -O, single pole, AC general - purpose Class A manually operated non - reversing full- voltage controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with overload relay, red pilot light, auxiliary contacts, and toggle operator. B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general - purpose Class A manually operated, 1 or 2 pole, full- voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator. C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1B. 2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general- purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Full Voltage Starting: Non - reversing type. MOTOR CONTROL 16480 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 C. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. D. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on Drawings. E. Control Transformer: Integral with starter, providing 120 volt control power. F. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; bi- metal. G. Control Device: Hand-Off-Auto selector switch, spring return to "OFF" from hand position. If indicated, provide "ON -OFF" push button, mounted in cover. H. Indicator Lights: Red jewel pilot light on cover, illuminated while motor is running. I. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for interior use and Type 3R where subject to moisture or on building exterior. J. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure. K. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field convertible contacts in addition to seal -in contact. 2.4 FUSES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann. 2. Gould - Shawmutt. 3. Littelfuse. B. Fuses: UL 198E, Class RK5; dual element, current limiting, time delay, one -time fuse, 600 volt or 250 volt as indicated on the Drawings. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 RMS amperes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to motor and equipment schedule on Drawings for items requiring motor control equipment. B. Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install fuses in fusible switches. D. Select and install heater elements in motor starters to match installed motor characteristics. MOTOR CONTROL 16480 - 2 E. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage /phase rating. F. Provide nameplate on each starter indicating motor served. END OF SECTION TARGET TARGET INF 1.1 SUMMARY 1.4 SUBMITTALS SECTION 16511 LIGHTING FIXTURES (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY, NOT A PART OF DIVISION 16. PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Interior luminaires and accessories. 2. Lamps. 3. Ballasts. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Ceilings. B. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. C. Section 15950 - Controls and Instrumentation: Energy management system for lighting control. (Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner- Supplied Information.) D. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. E. Section 16512 - Lighting Fixtures Installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C82.1 Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. B. ANSI C82.4 - Specifications for High- Intensity- Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type.) C. NEMA LE 2 - H -I -D Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS -NC) Ratings. D. UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture. E. UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures. A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include outline drawings, lamp and ballast data, support points, weights, and accessory information for each luminaire type. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Provide lighting fixtures and power equipment with UL ratings and labels complying with UL 57. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery to site as directed by Owner. B. Protect from damage when shipped from factory using means recommended by manufacturer and approved by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. Lighting Fixtures: Provide type and quantity of lighting fixtures indicated on the drawings. B. Fluorescent Luminaires: Provide with hinged door frames and positive acting spring- loaded latches. Provide doors capable of latching from either side, field convertible. Provide lenses where indicated of 100 percent virgin acrylic, 0.125 inch thick. C. Recessed Fluorescent Luminaires: Provide trim type and accessories required for installation in ceiling system installed. 2.2 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. Enclosures: Complete with gaskets to form weatherproof assembly. B. Provide low temperature ballasts, rated for use at temperatures to -20 degrees F for exterior locations. 2.3 LAMPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. OSRAM/Sylvania. 3. Philips. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Lamps required for Owner supplied lighting fixtures will be furnished by Owner. Lamps for Type A series lighting fixtures will be factory installed. C. Provide lamps for luminaires and lamp holders which are not Owner supplied. LIGHTING FIXTURES (OWNER FURNISHED) 16511 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 D. General Use Incandescent Lamps: Rough service, inside frosted type, shape, size, and wattage as shown on Drawings, rated 130 volts. E. Fluorescent Lamps: Lamp color as shown on Drawings, all by same manufacturer. F. HID Lamps: Lamp color, burning position, and type as shown on Drawings. 2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance Transformer a. Electronic (T8) - Standard family. b. Electronic High Output 800 MA - VEL- 2S110. c. Electronic Programmed start — Mark 5 series (for occupancy sensor locations). 2. Universal Lighting Technologies: a. Electronic (T8) B4321277. b. Electronic High Output 800 MA B2110SR277. c. Electronic Programmed start — Accustart series (for occupancy sensor locations) 3. Valmont: a. Electronic (T8) E432P1277. b. Electronic High Output 800 MA E296SH277F 4. For Compact Fluorescent Ballasts: a. Robertson. b. Advance. c. Universal Lighting Technologies. 5. Substitutions under provisions of Section 01600. B. ANSI C82.1; high power factor type. Use low energy type where possible with lowest noise criteria available for the type. C. Provide ballasts with Class P thermal protection. 2.5 HID BALLASTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance. 2. General Electric. 3. Universal Lighting Technologies. B. HID Ballast: ANSI C82.4; selected by luminaire manufacturer. C. LS -NC Rating: NEMA LE 2; equal to or less than ratings listed in Table C -1. LIGHTING FIXTURES (OWNER FURNISHED) 16511 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. As shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION TARGET TARGET LIGHTING FIXTURES INSTALLATION r' 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 16512 PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Owner- supplied luminaires and accessories. 2. Lamps. 3. Ballasts. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Owner will furnish certain lighting fixtures as scheduled on Drawings for installation under this section. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Ceilings. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. Section 16111 - Conduit. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. Section 16130 - Boxes. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. Section 16511 - Lighting Fixtures (Owner Furnished). 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C82.1 - Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. B. ANSI C82. 4 - Specifications for High- Intensity- Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type.) C. NEMA LE 2 - H -I -D Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS -NC) Ratings. D. UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture. E. UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Receive and store Owner Furnished equipment and protect against damage under provision of Section 01600. 2.1 LAMPS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. OSRAM/Sylvania. 3. Philips. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Lamps required for Owner Furnished lighting fixtures will be furnished by Owner. Lamps for Type A series lighting fixtures will be factory installed. C. Provide lamps for luminaires and lamp holders which are not Owner Furnished. D. General Use Incandescent Lamps: Rough service, inside frosted type, shape, size, and wattage as shown on Drawings, rated 130 volts. E. Fluorescent Lamps: Lamp color as shown on Drawings, all by same manufacturer. F. HID Lamps: Lamp color, burning position, and type as shown on Drawings. 2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance Transformer a. Electronic (T8) - Standard family. b. Electronic High Output 800 MA - VEL- 2S110. c. Electronic Programmed start — Mark 5 series (for occupancy sensor locations). 2. Universal Lighting Technologies: a. Electronic (T8) B4321277. b. Electronic High Output 800 MA B2110SR277. c. Electronic Programmed start — Accustart series (for occupancy sensor locations) 3. Valmont: a. Electronic (T8) E432P1277. b. Electronic High Output 800 MA E296SH277F 4. For Compact Fluorescent Ballasts: a. Robertson. b. Advance. c. Universal Lighting Technologies. 5. Substitutions under provisions of Section 01600. LIGHTING FIXTURES INSTALLATION 16512 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. ANSI C82.1; high power factor type. Use low energy type where possible with lowest noise criteria available for the type. C. Provide ballasts with Class P thermal protection. 2.3 HID BALLASTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance. 2. General Electric. 3. Universal. B. HID Ballast: ANSI C82.4; selected by luminaire manufacturer. C. LS -NC Rating: NEMA LE 2; equal to or less than ratings listed in Table C -1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in Owner- Furnished luminaires and lamp holders, and Contractor- supplied fixtures. B. Support surface - mounted luminaires directly from building structure, from ceiling grid T structure or provide auxiliary support laid across top of ceiling Ts as required by fixture weight or size. Fasten to T using bolts, screws, rivets, or approved ceiling framing member clips. Verify T's will support fixture weight. Refer to Drawings for additional mounting requirements. C. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Fasten to T using bolts, screws, rivets, or approved ceiling framing member clips. Do not impair the lift -out feature of lay -in ceilings. Do not cut ceiling T's without specific permission from OSR. 3.2 FIELD PAINTING A. Refer to Drawings for fixtures to be field painted according to requirements of Section 09900. 3.3 RELAMPING AND CLEANING A. Re -lamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires. B. Touch up luminaire at completion of work. LIGHTING FIXTURES INSTALLATION 16512 - 2 3.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. As shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION TARGET i r,,, TARGET 1 SECTION 16951 OCCUPANCY SENSORS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY, NOT A PART OF DIVISION 16. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sensors. 2. Brackets. 3. Power packs. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. B. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL, "Building Systems Directory". 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.5 A. Occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate conditions of space utilization and irregular work hours and habits. WARRANTY A. Repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non- conforming and returned to the supplier. B. Commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. C. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year. 1.6 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. Section 16952 - Occupancy Sensors Installation. A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300, Submittals. 2.2 MATERIALS A. PART 2 - PRODUCTS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 B. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. C. Submit interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. D. Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements. 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Watt Stopper, Inc. 1. Ceiling sensors: a. CX- 105 -4: For sub -aisle in stockroom, marked with Green arrow. b. CX- 105 -3: Wide long aisle sensor, marked with Orange arrow. c. CI- 205 -1: 360 degree ceiling sensor. d. Mounting brackets for installation on light fixtures. 2. Wall Sensors: a. WA- 200 -W: dual voltage wall switch sensor. 3. Power and Slave Packs: a. Al20E -P: 120 volt. b. A277E -P: 277 volt. 4. Low Temperature: a. CB -100: Use in freezers as indicated on plans. 5. InteliSwitch: a. TS -200: 120/277 volt digital time wall switch. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. Wall Sensors: 1. Capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet. 2. Accoinmodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts at 277 volts and shall have 180° coverage capability. OCCUPANCY SENSORS (OWNER FURNISHED) 16951 - 1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 3. Utilize Zero Crossing Circuitry which increases relay life of sensor and increases sensor's longevity. 4. No leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto /Off mode, for safety purposes. 5. Have voltage drop protection. B. Passive Infrared sensors: 1. Utilize custom ASIC specifically designed for PIR sensors which provides high immunity to false triggering from RFI (walkie talkies) and EMI (electrical noise on the line), superior performance, and greater reliability. 2. Have a multiple segmented Lodif Fresnel lens, in a multiple -tier configuration, with grooves -in to eliminate dust and residue build -up. 3. Where specified, Passive Infrared and Dual Technology sensors shall offer daylighting foot - candle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting. C. Dual Technology sensors: 1. Corner mounted to avoid detection outside the controlled area when doors are left open. 2. Consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for occupancy detection. D. Sensors: 1. Capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads. 2. Coverage: Remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans. 3. Readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity. Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering. 4. Provide a bypass manual override on each sensor in the event of failure. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. 5. Ultrasonic operating frequency. Crystal controlled to within plus or minus 0.005% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross -talk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable. OCCUPANCY SENSORS (OWNER FURNISHED) 16951 -2 6. Provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and that the unit is working. 7. Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options. Sensors utilizing separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not acceptable. 2.3 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE A. Control Units: 1. Externally mount through a 1/2" knock- out on a standard electrical enclosure for ease of mounting, installation and future service. 2. An integrated, self - contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low - voltage power. 3. Provide power to a minimum of two (2) sensors from each control unit. B. Relay Contacts: Ratings of: 1. 13A - 120 VAC Tungsten. 2. 20A - 120 VAC Ballast. 3. 20A - 277 VAC Ballast. 2.4 - CONTROL WIRING A. Control wiring between sensors and controls units: Class II , 18 -24 AWG, stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable. 2.5 ENCLOSURES A. Sensors: UL rated, 94V - 0 plastic enclosures. PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION TARGET lr 4' i,. TARGET SECTION 16952 OCCUPANCY SENSORS INSTALLATION 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Relocation of existing sensors. 2. Installation of Owner furnished sensors, brackets, power packs. 3. Include labor, materials, tools, appliances, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary to the installation of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. B. Section 16111 - Conduit. C. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. D. Section 16130 - Boxes. E. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices. F. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. G. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. H. Section 16951 - Occupancy Sensors (Owner Furnished). 1.3 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL A. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate conditions of space utilization and irregular work hours and habits. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. B. C. Commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year. 1.6 SUBMITTALS P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit operating instructions and manuals under provisions of Section 01700. 1. Lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. 2. Submit interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. 3. Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Components shall be UL listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet state and local applicable code requirements. 1.8 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Proper adjustments to assure owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system. 3.1 INSTALLATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). 2. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic, use tables, installation conditions, and manufacturer's recommendations to finalize locations. OCCUPANCY SENSORS INSTALLATION 16952 -1 P01 RIGHTSIZE T -0627 a. Check with Engineer if another sensor type is required prior to ordering and installing. 3. Install additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room. a. To order additional sensor equipment contact Target Purchasing at 1 -612- 761 -1462. B. When installing brackets and power packs prior to the sensor installation, connect the red and blue low voltage wires (from the power pack) together to force "on" the power pack so that the fixtures operate until the sensors are available. C. The stockroom motion sensors control individual aisles or rows locally. D. Provide, at the site, the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems. 3.2 SETTINGS A. Sensor time delays and sensitivity are pre -set at the factory. 1. Adjust time delay from the preset 10 minutes to 16 minutes for non - partitioned employee restrooms. B. Upon completion of the installation, verify adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble -free occupancy -based lighting control system. END OF SECTION OCCUPANCY SENSORS INSTALLATION 16952 - 2 TARGET 10 -02 -2007 GARY PETERSON 60 E PLATO BL, #300 ST PAUL MN 55107 RE: Permit No. M07 -007 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Dear Permit Holder: City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director In reviewing our current records the above noted permit has not received a fmal inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the International Building Code and/or the International Mechanical Code, every permit issued by the Building Division under the provisions of this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days. , Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: Call the City of Tukwila Inspection Request Line at 206 -431 -2451 to schedule for the next or final inspection. This inspection is intended to determine if substantial work has been accomplished since issuance of the permit or last inspection; or if the project should be considered abandoned. If such determination is made, the Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. Extension requests must be in wiiin- and provide satisfactory reasons why circumstances beyond the applicants control have prevented action from being taken. In the event you do not call for the above inspection and receive an extension prior to 11/04/2007 , your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, 'fer Marshall, Permit Technician xe: Permit File No. M07 -007 h.4nn .Cnnthrontvr Rnnlovard Gfiie BIM • T,,l i,11 LIf h inninn 0171 D0 a DR...... en.c we • 711 _ r____ nn .n. Thank you for all of your help in this process. Thank you, Lance Leonard Estimator S.D. Deacon Coip. of Washington 0: 425 -284 -4000 C: 206- 251 -0329 www.deacon.com Jennifer Marshall - RE: Target (T -627), M07 -007 E'w;KIr _n •' .u:.S w i=:.4}_J.'.NCeE' 2i5ZT.MZ'r tMtfZRni'r.i `iin...'.7ir'., 4.VEaZ .'w'T Z .'M.. '>.J=.2-MVA 'uS 6AXgt..' .- From: "Lance Leonard" <lance.leonard @deacon.com> To: "Jennifer Marshall" <Marshall @ci.tukwila.wa.us> Date: 11/01/2007 1:13 PM Subject: RE: Target (T -627), M07 -007 CC: "Lance Leonard" <lance.leonard @deacon.com> Jennifer - Would you be able to forward this request for extension to Mr. Benedicto? We are scheduled to complete the installation of a sensor requested by the Fire Marshal next week. If you are not able to forward this request please let me know and indicate where I need to send it. From: Jennifer Marshall [ mailto :jmarshall @ci.tukwila.wa.us] Sent: Wednesday, October 17, 2007 9:55 AM To: Lance Leonard Subject: Target (T -627), M07 -007 40_e4tite/ >go eial4 a- 07-08 Page 1 of 1 The permit is good through 11/04/07. If the inspection will be called for by then, then nothing needs to be done. If you will be unable to call for inspection by that date, then you need to submit a request for extension letter to our Building Official, Bob Benedicto. That letter should include reasons as to why the extension is needed and an expected finish date. If you have further questions, let me know. «Jennifer t�fi b 01,0 was eur ACTIVITY NUMBER: M07 -007 DATE: 01 -18 -07 PROJECT NAME: TARGET SITE ADDRESS: 301 STRANDER BL X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: 2 01 Bui g l7'vision Public Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: �- 'PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP 611 A-Ut C- 2'/.0 Fire Prevention Structural ❑ Incomplete ❑ Planning Division Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 01-23-07 Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUT NG: Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 DATE: DATE: C DUE DATE: 02-20-07 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions IA Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date DEACON, STEVEN D 01/01/1980 SMITH, RICHARD 01/01/1980 DEACON, DONNA J 01/01/1980 GALASH, STEPHEN J 01/01/1980 Washington State Department of Labor and Industries General/Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L &I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. License Information License Licensee Name Licensee Type UBI Ind. Ins. Account Id Business Type Address 1 Address 2 City County State Zip Phone Status Specialty 1 Specialty 2 Effective Date Expiration Date Suspend Date Separation Date Parent Company Previous License Next License Associated License SDDEACW 108NT S D DEACON CORP OF WASHINGTON CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR 601259893 CORPORATION 2375 130TH AVE NE #200 BELLEVUE KING WA 98005 4252844000 ACTIVE GENERAL UNUSED 8/30/1990 6/20/2008 DEACOCCOI 1 JB AXIONCS995KJ Bond Information Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date https: // fortress. wa. gov /lni/bbip /printer.aspx ?License= SDDEACW 108NT 04/13/2007 SHEET INDEX ARCHITECTURAL AO Al A2 A3 COVER SHEET FREEZER /COOLER PLANS, DETAILS, AND NOTES PARTIAL ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS COMPACTOR PLANS, DETAILS AND NOTES MECHANICAL MI M2 RI R2 R3 R4 R5 FREEZER /COOLER MECHANICAL PLAN MECHANICAL DETAILS REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PLAN AND SCHEDULES REFRIGERATION PIPING AND TRIM PLAN REFRIGERATION DETAILS REFRIGERATION DETAILS REFRIGERATION CONTROLS . . F, . Permit No. Li - P Plan review approval is subject to errors Approval cr c_nst uction documents the violation cr cr cccerze.d code or of approved F.::i Cr, = end cond:iraa"s BY I1hib1 ' 11 1 and omission& does not authorize ordinanc3. Receipt is acknowledged, - \ City of Tukwila '\ BUILDING DIVISION ELECTRICAL El E2 E3 FREEZER /COOLER ELECTRICAL PLAN ELECTRICAL DETAILS AND COMPACTOR POWER PLAN SPECIALTY LIGHTING /POWER PLAN ii A S ���� REQUIRED �� E IT IeChanr� .L decb ical a Plumbing Gas Piping City of Tukwila BUILDING' DIVISION i"`o c Wr:µ shall be made to the scope c 7 . T - .11. sn =tn prior elaproval of • -- 721 [' =::: _-:D C71.-'�'11: PACT:: 11 ‘,..:i i c :- a F.2 `'zn submittal ca:l ritzy inc u::e c.:ic::L:o;.::l p:zn unrizan fees. TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOUS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 • SITE /BUILDING INFORMATION SITE ZONING C -P FIRE ZONE OR DISTRICT EARTHQUAKE ZONE ZONE 3 BUILDING OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION M (B-2 EXISTING) BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TYPE 2 -N BUILDING ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA UNLIMITED FLOOR AREA (FULLY SPRINKLERED) 113,588 SF ACTUAL - BUILDING SPRINKLED BUILDING ALLOWABLE HEIGHT 2 STORIES - 55' -O' MAX I STORY W /MEZZANINE, 45' -10' TOTAL HEIGHT ACTUAL OCCUPANT LOAD FOR EXITING 2,996 OCCUPANTS - REQUIRED 3,767 OCCUPANTS - PROVIDED TOTAL EXIT WIDTH AND NUMBER OF EXITS 710.2" REQUIRED EXIT WIDTH (TOTAL) 4 EXITS REQUIRED 79I PROVIDED EXIT WIDTH (TOTAL) 10 EXITS TOTAL CODES BUILDING CODE 2003 IBC W /STATE AMENDMENTS LOCAL JURISDICTION CODE TITLE 16 TUKWILA MUNICIPAL CODE HANDICAPPED CODE 2003 IBC W /STATE AMENDMENTS MECHANICAL CODE 2003 IMC W /STATE AMENDMENTS PLUMBING CODE 2003 UPC W /STATE AMENDMENTS FIRE / LIFE SAFETY CODE 2003 IFC W /STATE AMENDMENTS ELECTRICAL CODE 2002 NEC W /STATE AMENDMENTS ENERGY/ GAS N/A HEALTH / FOOD SERVICE SEATTLE KING FOOD CODE 1 A &E PROJECT TEAM PROJECT MANAGER: ARCHITECTURAL: STRUCTURAL: MECHANICAL: ELECTRICAL: THOMAS WARNER GARY PETERSON DARUSH SAKIZADEH JOHN BRISON ANDREW ERDMANN TBC TBC TBC NR NR 651- 209 -2802 651- 209 -2852 651- 209 -2830 651- 644 -2400 651- 644 -2400 1 0: \62506 \Target \55000 \20_CAD \T0627 South Center \A \AO.dgn The Benham Companies, Inc. 60 East Plato Blvd Suite 300 St. Paul, MN 55107 P01 RIGHTSIZE MATERIALS nn nn nn no m _nn 1111 1111= 1111=IIII°IIII =111 = 1111= 1111= 1III°1111= IIII =11t IIII = IIII =II I I= 1111 =II11= 111117- 111 =IIII =IIII =IIII =IIII =IIE IIII =II II= 1111 1111 -IIII =III I= = III= Ul=111 =IIII= 111=II ♦ ♦+tit EARTH CONCRETE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (CMU) BRICK GYPSUM CORE BOARD WOOD FINISH PLYWOOD GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER. GROUT. EXT SHEATHING iTITTI11111111111111111 111I1I11111 BATT /BLANKET INSULATION BOARD INSULATION, EXPANSION MATERIAL STEEL QUARRY TILE. CERAMIC TILE, CEILING TILE CARPET WOOD SHIM PARTICLE BOARD SYMBOLS 1/111111 11111111 0 o x O G Q 0 6 X LIGHT FIXTURE LIGHT FIXTURE EXIT SIGN LINEAR AIR DIFFUSER SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER RETURN AIR REGISTER OR GRILLE SPRINKLER HEAD - FLUSH CONCEALED SPRINKLER HEAD - SEMI- RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD - UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD - PENDANT SPRINKLER HEAD - IN RACK SPRINKLER HEAD - HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL OPENINGS IN ROOF /WALL /FLOOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER - TYPE I FIRE EXTINGUISHER - TYPE 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER - TYPE 3 $(USER) DRAFTING SYMBOL -rI AO DISCIPLINE /SHEET NUMBER APPROVAL 12/212006 o ------- + EL= I00'-0° SPOT ELEVATION 202 GRID LINE AND BUBBLE SECTION DETAIL - SECTION NUMBER/ SHEET NUMBER r 1 PLAN DETAIL - DETAIL NUMBER/ J SHEET NUMBER ELEVATION NUMBER/ SHEET NUMBER OWNER SUPPLIED ITEM REVISION SYMBOL BID PACKAGE ITEM NUMBER — ADDENDUM OR BULLETIN NO. KEY NOTE ROOM NAME / ROOM NUMBER (ROOM NAME DOES NOT APPEAR WITH ROOM NUMBER IN ALL CASES) DOOR NUMBER WALL /PARTITION TYPE WINDOW TYPE REQUIRED ABBREVIATIONS A A A/C AB AC ACT AD ADDL AFF AGO ADJ ALT ALUM ANT APPROX ARCH ATM ATS AUTO AWG B B/O BAT BD BET BG BKR BLDG BLKG BM BN BRG BTM BTU BTUH C C CANT CAP CB CCT CCTV CFM CFH CIRC CJ CL CLG CLR CMT CMU CO COL COMM COMP COMPR CONC COND CONF CONN CONST CONT CONTR CORR CPT CR CRT CT CTR CU CUH CW Ampere Air Conditioning Anchor Bolt Alternating Current. Acoustical, Air Conditioner Acoustical Tile, Actual Area Drain Addi!iuiiul Above Finished Floor Aggregate Adjustable, Adjacent Alternate Aluminum Antenna Approximately) Architectural Automatic Teller Machine Automatic Transfer Switch Automatic American Wire Gage Bottom of Battery Board Between Below Grade Breaker Building Blocking Beam Boundary Nailing Bearing Bottom British Thermal Unit British Thermal Unit Per Hour Conduit Contilever Capacity Circuit Breaker, Catch Basin Circuit Closed Circuit Television Cubic Feet per Minute Cubic Feet Per Hour Circulation Control Joint Centerline Ceiling Clear Empty Conduit Concrete Masonry Unit. Concrete Block Cleanout Column Communication Compactor Compressor Concrete Condensate Conference Connection Construction Continuous, Continuation Contractor Corridor Carpet Cosh Register Cathode Ray Tube Current Transformer, Ceramic Tile Center, Contractor Copper, Condensing Unit Cabinet Unit Heater Cold Water D DB DBL DC DEG DEPT DET DF DIA DIFF DIM DISC DISP DIST DIV DN DR DTL DWG DWL E EA EAT EDC EER EF EFS EIFS EL ELEC ELEV EMBED EMERC EMS EN ENCL EPOS EPS EC) EQUIP ESP EW EWC EXH EXIST EXP EXT EWH F F FA FACP FAF FCW FD FDN FFE FG FIN FIXT FL FLA FLEX FL0 Flange FLUOR Fluorescent FPI Fins Per Inch FR FS FT FTG FUT FVNR F VS Dry Bulb Double Direct Current Degrees Department Detector Drinking Fountain Diameter, Diagonal Diffuser Dimension Disconnect Dispenser Distribution Division Down Door Detail Drawing Dowel Each Entering Air Temperature Electrical Distribution Center Energy Efficiency Ratio Exhaust Fan Exterior Finish System Exterior Insulation Finish System Elevation Electric(al) Elevator Embedment, Embedded Emergency Energy Management System Edge Noiling Enclosure (Enclose) Electronic Point of Sale Exterior Point System Equal Equipment External Static Pressure Each Way Electric Water Cooler Exhaust Existing Expansion, Expanded Exterior Electric WallHecter Fuse(d), Fixture Number Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Control Panel Forced Air Furnace Filtered Cold Water Floor Drain Foundation Finished Floor Elevation Full Glass Fintsh(ed) Fixture Floor Full Load Amps Flexible Frame For Side Foot Footing Future Full Voltage Non- reversing Fixed Vinyl Strip G G Gas Piping, Ground GA Gauge, Gage GAO/ Galvanized GC Garden Center GEN General CFI Ground Fault Interrupt GIH Gravity Intake H000 GL Glass. Glazing GLU -LAM Glued Laminated Timber GND Ground GPM Gallons Per Minute GR Grade GRV Gravity Relief Vent GYP Gypsum GYP BD Gypsum Board H H H/C HB HDBD HDCP HDWR HID HK HM HOA HOR HP HPS HR HT HTG HTR HV HVAC HW HYD ICC ID IN INCAND INFO INSUL INT INV IPS ISOL JAN J -BOX JBE JG JST JT K KCMIL KIT KLF KO KSI KV KVA KW KWH High Hardware Cloth Hose Bib Hardboard Handicapped Hardware High Intensity Discharge Hook Hollow Metal Hand Off Automatic Horizontal Horsepower High Pressure Sodium Hour Height Heating Heater High Voltage Heating /Ventilating/ Air Conditioning Hot Water Hydrant Interior Construction Coordinator Inside Diameter Inch, Intermediate Nailing Incandescent Information Insulation Interior Invert Interior Paint System Isolation (Joint) Janitor Junction Box Joist Bearing Elevation Joist Girder Joist Joint Kydex 1000 Circular Mll5 Kitchen Kips per Lineal Foot Knockout Kips per Square Inch Kilovolt Kilovolt Amp Kilowatt Kilowatt Hour L L LAT LAV LB LLH LLV LOC LT LTG LV LVR M MACH MAINT MAN MATL MATV MAX MBH MCB MD5 MDSE MECH MEMB MET MFR MGMT MGR MH MIN MISC MM MO MOT MSS MT MTD MTL N N N/A NC NF NIC NO NOM NR NS NTS 0 OA OC OFF 0H OPER OPNG OPP O5R OWN P PB PCP PENET PIV PL PLC PLF PLM PLYWD Length, Angle Leaving Air Temperature Lavatory Pound Long Leg Horizontal Long Leg Vertical Location Light Lighting Low Voltage Louver Machine Maintenance Manual Material Master Antenna TV Maximum 1000 BTUH Per Hour Main Circuit Breaker Main Distribution Switchboard Merchandise Mechanical Membrane Metal Manufacturer Management Manager Manhole Minimum. Minute Miscellaneous Millimeter Masonry Opening Motorized) Manual Motor Starter Switch Empty, Mot Mount (ing) (ed) Metal Neutrol Not Applicable Normally Closed Near Face, Non Fused Not in Contract Normally Open. Number Nominal Nelson Rudie Near Side, Non -Slip Not to Scale Outside Air, Overall On Center, Center to Center Office Overhead Operations Opening Opposite Owner's Site Representative Owner Pole Pushbutton Precast Wall Panel Penetration Post Indicator Valve Plate Power Line Carrier Pounds per Lineal Foot Plastic Laminate Plywood PN PNL PO5 PP PREFIN PREP PRV PSF P5I PT PURCH PVC PWR R RA RB RCPT RD REC RECD REF REFR REINF REOD RET RF RFG RM RO RPM RTU RV RVS RWC S SCHED SD SENS SERV 5F SHT SIM SLNT SLR SND SNR SF' SPA SPEC SPK SO 55 SST STD STIFF STL STOR STR STRUC SUP SW SWBD SWGR SYM SYS Panel Nailing Panel Point of Sale Power Pole Prefinished Preparation Power Roof Ventilator Pounds per Square Foot Pounds per Square Inch Porcelain The Purchased Polyvinyl Chloride Power 0 QTY Quantity R Rodius, Riser Return Air Resilient Base, Vinyl Base Receptacle. Receptacles Roof Drain Recessed Received Reference Refrigerator Reinforce (ing) (ed) Required Return Vinyl Composition Tile, Resilient Floor Roofing Room Rough Opening Revolutions per Minute Rooftop Unit Roof Vent Rolling Vinyl Strip Rain Water Conductor Schedule Storm Drain Sensible Service Service, Square Foot (age), Supply Fan Sheet Similar Sealant Sealer Sanitary Napkin Dispenser Sanitary Napkin Receptor Static Pressure, Spare Space (ed) (ing) Specification(s) Speaker Square Sanitary Sewer. Start-Stop Stainless Steel Standard Stiffener Steel Storage Starter Structure (al) Supply Switch Switchboord Switchgeor Symmetrical System T T T & G T -STAT T/0 TBC TD TEL TEMP TF TFE TG THD TPH TRANSF TSP TV TYP U UG UH UL UNO UR UTIL V V VA VAC VAV VB VCR VDC VEL VERT VEST VM VOL VTR W W W/ W/0 WB WC WD WG WH WHM WP WT WWF OTHER CL Thermostat Tongue and Groove Thermostat Top of The Benham Companies Towel Dispenser, Traffic Door, Towel Disposal Telephone Temper ure, Temporcar y Transfer Fon Top of Footing Elevation Transfer Grille Threaded Toilet Paper Holder Transformer Total Static Pressure Television Typical Underground Unit Heater Underwriters Laboratory Unless Noted Otherwise Urinal Utility Vent Piping Volt Ampere Volts Alternating Current Variable Air Volume Vapor Barrier Video Cassette Recorder Volts Direct Current Velocity Vertical(ly) Vestibule Volt Meter Volume Vent Through Roof Wide With Without Wet Bulb, Wood Bose Water Closet Wood Wire Guard, Water Gauge Water Heater Watt Hour Meter Waterproofing, Waterproof, Weather Proof. Work Point Weight Welded Wire Fabric Diameter At, About Center Line Plus /Minus Degrees ( GENERAL NOTES A. PROJECT SCOPE IS LIMITED TO THE INSTALLATION OF FREEZER AND COOLER FIXTURES ON THE EXISTING SALES FLOOR AS WELL AS THE INSTALLATION OF A FREEZER/COOLER STORAGE UNIT IN THE STOCKROOM. SCOPE INCLUDES THE ADDITION OF ROOFTOP CONDENSING UNITS AND ASSOCIATED PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. B. ARCHITECTURAL WORK IS LIMITED TO MINOR DEMOLITION AND REPAIR/REPLACEMENT OF FINISHES. THE EXISTING OCCUPANCY, USE AND LIFE SAFETY IS NOT IMPACTED BY THE COMPLETED WORK. C. BUILDING IS FULLY SPRINKLERED. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE ,_ A /1110IMMO FEB - 2 2007 wilo BUILDING DIVISION / KEY PLAN Ep O Ale ILILILIUI. z i i V .L.. -..2, s • O • • 0 :i 1 4; . � J 1 -.� T --�, unit MINIM 1 1 I I 1 --------- 1- - - -- – –i– – - - - --I --_ I 1 1 1 - . 1111 111 Mk r c ) 0 00 I I I I I I I I I in rot I 111111111* 11r - - - - - - - 111111111142 — — APPROXIMATE LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION ,T1 1 NNW l i J J T - — - I ROOF 1 nl 1r�'' r� I I 1 JAN 18 ZOLi PER!' r &=EN P TARGET STORE 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 PROJECT CODE REMOD CONFIGURATION COVER SHEET « STOCKROOM A / // /lam _ m 1/, ///7 4 E1 ��/f7L, r zLz 0 A 0 EXISTING FLOOR SLAB A _ r 11 r r - -rr-- r — r,-- -I r r —Y, a r --r—a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 II I I 1 1 ' 1 I 1 1 1 I I I �I i A (2) # 5 CONT. DOWEL INTO EXISTING CONC SLAB. *4'S @ 12" O.C. 5" EMBEDMENT W /HILTI RE500 EPDXY ADHESIVE ( w EXISTING 4° SLAB NOTE; PROVIDE CORNER BARS (TYP.) H I REFRIGERATION-- - _ CASES - - - I i , � i "� , " `I , ^ I, 1, ~, ~1 i < ffriAtrAWriliar-AIPP:AMIVAMMEral REFRIGERATION CASES PLAN - SALES FLOOR INTERIOR BOLLARD DETAIL n 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I, 1 1, I I, , 3/4" =1' -0" COOLER /FREEZER ]] / FIRE RETARDANT PLYWOOD OVER 2 -2x4 FIRE RETARDANT WOOD BLOCKING. SAWCUT AND REMOVE EXISTING CONC SLAB APPLY BONDING AGENT (TYP) EXISTING COMPACTED FILL TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 I' -0" l 1 O: \62506 \Target \55000 \20_CAD \T0627 South Center \A \Al.dgn 4' STEEL PIPE FILLED W /NON- SHRINK GROUT -ROUND TOP AND PAINT IPS -6, C -5 3 /8' x 8" STL BASE PLATE. CONT WELD TO 4" STL PIPE (4) %" EXPANSION BOLTS NEW CONSTRUCTION - SEE 13 /AI FREEZER/COOLER THRESHOLD DETAIL 3 „ =1 , -0 „ • NOTE: NEW FREEZER /COOLER SUPPLIED BY TARGET, INSTALLED BY G.C. CENTERED OVER WOOD BLOCKING --- FREEZER/COOLER DOOR FREEZER /COOLER SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE THERMAL BREAK THRESHOLD BELOW DOOR FOR STRUCTURE NOTES SEE DETAIL 13 /AI OAO o,�0 I' -6° PATCH AND REPAIR WALLS TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISH (IF REQUIRED) - TYP. 0 A0 • ,- ^i, -i,1 _i ,- �i, -�i,- 1-i, -i,- i� i/ I/ i/ I/ 1 I/ I/ I I/ i, V8" =1, -0„ I I 1111 11 4 1 6 � •41 DgU0 ?r u0 _ -- g C1C III1 I I=�-oO O q q 111 I A - 11 A .4.1. II 11 . A ll 11 6 � 6 A a I►� I► V gill p— ) A NILO RECESSED SLAB DETAIL @ FREEZER (COOLER SIM.) 1 V2" =1' -0" NEW FREEZER /COOLER SUPPLIED BY TARGET, INSTALLED BY G.C. CENTERED OVER WOOD BLOCKING - #4 "Z° BAR @ 12' O.C. FOR BASE NOTES SEE 14 /AI 4" CONC FLOOR SEALED CONC @ FREEZER ONLY. QUARRY TILE @ COOLER VAPOR BARRIER 6° CONC RECESSED FLOOR SLAB W / #4'S @ 12' O.C. EA. WAY The Benham Companies, Inc. 60 East Plato Blvd., Suite 300 Std Paul, MN 55107 FASTEN BRACE TO DECK AND VERTICAL STUD W/ (2) *10 TEK SCREWS \ i i i 2 LAYERS OF 3 °INSUL -2 INSTALL W /STAGGERED JOINTS \ 6 " GRANULAR COMPACTED BASE ON UNDISTURBED SOIL i i i DASHED CONDITION' INDICATES JOIST AT PERPENDICULAR WALL NEW COOLER PANEL W/ FIRE RETARDANT PLYWD ON EXTERIOR BY COOLER /FREEZER SUPPLIER. INSTALLED BY G.C. 2x10 BASE -FIRE RETARDANT' ATTACH TO WALLS. (FREEZER AND COOLER) UPRITE PROTECTION - CORNER GUARD SUPPLIED BY OWNER - TYP @ EACH OUTSIDE CORNER. INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR EXIST FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' --0 " /Z" 0 EXPANSION BOLT SPACED PER MFGR SPEC'S 3' MIN EMBEDMENT SILICONE SEALANT UNDER COOLER PANEL BY COOLER INSTALLER SUMP LOCATION - SEE MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL. SEE 3 20 GA. MTL STUD KICKERS @ 4' -0° O.C. (LENGTH NOT TO 2" MAX. EXCEED 14' -0 °) 1 /2 ° MIN. i I" MIN (2) #10 TEK SCREWS (TYP UNO) EXISTING CONC SLAB io EXISTING GYP BD WALL (FIELD VERIFY) K I SAWCUT AND REMOVE EXISTING CONC SLAB APPLY BONDING AGENT (TYP) SALES FLOOR LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION F- BASE DETAIL @ COOLER DOWEL INTO EXISTING CONC SLAB. #4'S @ 12" 0.C. 5° EMBEDMENT W /HILTI RE500 EPDXY ADHESIVE SLIP CONNECTION @ ROOF DECK i 3 20 GA. STL STUDS 24" 0.C. EXTEND TO ROOF DECK ABOVE HARDWARE CLOTH TOP OF COOLER /FREEZER TO ROOF DECK - COOLER /FREEZER HARDWARE CLOTH SECTION @ FREEZER/COOLER NOT TO SCALE 3" = 1'--0 *4 "Z° BAR @ I2° 0.C. DO NOT UNDERMINE THE EXISTING SLAB VIBRATE THE NEW CONCRETE TO FILL ALL VOIDS SOLID COVED QUARRY TILE BASE QUARRY TILE NOTE: PROVIDE CORNER BARS (TYP.) RECESSED SLAB DETAIL @ FREEZER (COOLER SIM.) FREEZER /COOLER PLAN -- STOCK 1 1/2" =1' -0" 4° CONC FLOOR SEALED CONC @ FREEZER ONLY. QUARRY TILE @ COOLER VAPOR BARRIER REFRIGERATED CASES FRONT ELEVATION - 1/2" FIRE RETARDANT PLYWOOD OVER 2 -2x4 FIRE RETARDANT WOOD BLOCKING. NEW FREEZER /COOLER SUPPLIED BY TARGET, INSTALLED BY G.C. CENTERED OVER WOOD BLOCKING 2 LAYERS OF 3 "INSUL -2 INSTALL W /STAGGERED JOINTS 6' CONC RECESSED FLOOR SLAB W/ @ 12" 0.C. EA. WAY 6° GRANULAR COMPACTED BASE ON UNDISTURBED SOIL L END CAP FILLER ELEVATION V �I - INTERIOR BOLLARD SEE INTERIOR BOLLARD SEE INSTALL HARDWARE CLOTH PARTITION ON TOP OF COOLER /FREEZER TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. SEE DETAIL 5 /AI. LEAVE 3' WIDE X 5' HIGH OPENING TO ALLOW FOR ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT. \\ UPRITE CORNER GUARD SUPPLIED BY OWNER INSTALL BY GC 4 $ (USER) z v z BASE SEE CORNER GUARD SEE HEAVY DUTY BASE DTL @ FREEZER/COOLER SEALED CONC @ FREEZER ONLY 4' CONC FLOOR SLAB CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE PER TARGET PLANS CC 1/8"=1'-0" FREEZER 12/212006 FALSE COLUMN TO EXTEND 6° ABOVE CEILING FALSE COLUMN TO BE CLEAR OF WALL TO PROTECT EX NEON FALSE COLUMN, SEAMS TO BE CONTINOUS, STRAIGHT & TRUE. HOLD SEAMS TO BACK SIDE OF COLUMN. PAINT COLUMN IPS -9, C -5 TO MATCH WALL. SEE EXISTING - --- EXTERIOR WALL. FILLER PANEL TO BE TIGHT TO WALL. SALES FLOOR GONDOLA END CAP FIXTER FILLER, OWNER SUPPLIED PART # WF2579, W/ FALSE COLUMN ABOVE. END CAP FIXTURE TO BE TIGHT TO COOLER AND ADJ GONDOLA FREEZER /COOLER SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE THERMAL BREAK THRESHOLD BELOW DOOR SEE DETAIL 8 /A1. 11/2" =V-0" - 4 4 4 , 4 4 • 4 4 4 4 4 4 J � �O D ate O ! 0,0 44O SIDE ELEVATION COOLER 77 a 4 4 4 0 4 a 4 4 4 10 v0" Zo FREEZER/COOLER SLAB DETAIL NEW FIXTURE CAP FILLER WITH FALSE COLUMN ABOVE. SEE 6 /AL COORDINATE MECHANICAL, PIPING AND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT RUNS i 30" x 30" ALUMINUM FLOOR ACCESS DOOR NEW CONCRETE SLAB TO MATCH EXISTING 30' DI METER GAL METAL FORM ACED ON SUMP BODY. R OMPACT SOIL AROUND W SUMP AND METAL FOR \ NEW SUMP- SEE MECHANICA VERIFY THAT SUMP \ EXCAVATION DOES NOT IMPACT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION SUMP DETAIL v4" =1' -0" FREEZER /COOLER BASE COOLER- INTEGRAL QT BASE FREEZER- STAINLESS OR GALVANIZED STEEL BASE- (PER FREEZER MFGR) WHEN NEW SLAB IS SEALED- INTEGRAL QT BASE WHEN QT FLOOR IS REQUIRED. NEW FREEZER /COOLER SUPPLIED BY TARGET, INSTALLED BY G.C. CENTERED OVER WOOD BLOCKING / FIRE RETARDANT PLYWOOD OVER 2 - 2x4 FIRE RETARDANT WOOD BLOCKING. ~ QUARRY TILE INSTALLED FLUSH W /FREEZER SLAB & EXISTING ADJACENT SLAB IN THE STOCK ROOM 2 LAYERS OF 3 "INSUL - 2 INSTALL W /STAGGERED JOINTS _—VAPOR BARRIER - 6" CONC RECESSED FLOOR SLAB WPM'S @ 12' 0.C. EA. WAY 6" GRANULAR COMPACTED BASE ON UNDISTURBED SOIL 112" =1' -0" AEI Nov , 0 Jot in / / VERIFY THAT SUMP / EXCAVATION DOES / NOT IMPACT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION I1/2" INSUL. -7 UNDISTURBED - SOIL - NEW 4" CONC SLAB DASHED LINES INDICATE EXISTING FIXTURES TO BE REMOVED BY OWNER AND REPLACED WITH OWNER SUPPLIED COOLER /FREEZER, INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THAT REQUIRED EXCAVATION DOES NOT ADVERSELY IMPACT STRUCTURE. NOTIFY ARCHITECT WHERE NEW CONSTRUCTION MAY IMPACT EXISTING STRUCTURE. REFERENCE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL FOR PIPING /CONDUIT CONNECTIONS. PIPING /CONDUIT RISERS TO BE INSTALLED WITHIN THE FIXTURE END CAP FILLERS AND FALSE COLUMNS ON EACH END. 20 GA 3' x 2° SHT MTL ANGLE EACH SIDE. ATTACH TO FALSE COLUMN & SUSPENDED CEILING MAIN RUNNER W/ *10 TEK SCREWS. SIM AT BOTTOM WHERE ATTACHED TO TOP OF FIXTURE SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM FALSE COLUMN SECTION 6 ° -8° MTL STUD VENT PIPING AS REQUIRED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT I° HEMMED EDGE TYP *10 TEK SCREWS @ I' -0" TYP 20 GA (PAINT -LOCK) °GALVANNEALED ". EXTEND 6" MIN ABOVE CEILING, IPS -9, C -5 REFRIGERATION PIPING, SEE MECH FALSE COLUMN PLAN PIPE COVER PLAN NEW FREEZER /COOLER SUPPLIED BY TARGET, INSTALLED BY G.C. CENTERED OVER WOOD BLOCKING 2 -2x6 FIRE RETARDANT SEALED CONC FREEZER ONLY. QUARRY TILE @ COOLER 4 CONC FLOOR (2) LAYERS OF 3° INSUL - 2. INSTALL W /STAGGERED JOINTS VAPOR BARRIER 6° CONC RECESSED FLOOR SLAB W / #4'S @ 12° 0.0. EA. WAY 6° GRANULAR COMPACTED BASE ON COMPACTED SOIL FALSE COLUMN DETAIL 5" MIN EMBEDMENT TYPICAL ALL EMBEDS EXISTING CMU WALL EXISTING CONCRETE FOUDATION 11/2" =1' -0" *4 @ 12" OC - PLACE IN DRILLED HOLES WITH HILTI RE500 EPDXY ADHESIVE. (FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INSTALLATION). TYPICAL SLAB REPAIR DETAIL AT EXTERIOR WALL NOT TO SCALE RECESSED SLAB DETAIL @ FREEZER (COOLER SIM.) 1 12" =1'-0" GENERAL DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION NOTES A. REMOVE EXISTING MATERIALS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. PATCH NEW MATERIALS INTO EXISTING AS REQUIRED FOR A SEAMLESS, "LIKE NEW APPEARANCE. B. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL EXECUTE ALL DEMOLITION WORK IN AN ORDERLY AND CAREFUL MANNER UTILIZING UTMOST CARE TO PROTECT EXISTING, SURROUNDING AREAS. C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A DUST -FREE PROTECTIVE COVERING AND /OR ENCLOSURE AROUND DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION AREAS TO PROTECT OCCUPANTS, PEDESTRIANS, WORKMEN AND TO PREVENT POTENTIAL DAMAGE TO EXISTING, ADJACENT MATERIALS. PROVIDE A TEMPORARY, HINGED DOOR TO ACCESS THE CONSTRUCTION AREA. PERIODICALLY SPRINKLE CONSTRUCTION AREA TO MINIMIZE DUST TRANSMISSION. D. REMOVE DEBRIS FROM SITE DAILY. MINIMIZE CONSTRUCTION INTERFERENCE WITH EXISTING FACILITIES. E. ALL UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS SHALL BE REMOVED WITHOUT DAMAGING EXISTING MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT AND LEGALLY DISPOSED. F. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING, SHORING AND SUPPORT OF EXISTING STRUCTURES (IF REQUIRED) DURING DEMOLITION TO PROTECT PERSONS AND PROPERTY. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL EMPLOY THE SERVICES OF A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE STATE OF THE PROJECT'S LOCATION TO PROVIDE CERTIFIED DESIGN CALCULATIONS OR ANALYSIS OF TEMPORARY SHORING, BRACING, UNDERPINNING AND SUPPORT OF EXISTING STRUCTURE. G. ALL EXTERIOR WALL AND ROOF OPENINGS SHALL BE WEATHERPROOFED AND INSULATED. H. REPORT ALL CONDITIONS TO THE PROJECT MANAGER WHERE EXISTING MATERIALS, COLORS AND FINISHES CANNOT BE MATCHED TO EXISTING FINISHES. J. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR AND FINISH ANY DAMAGE TO ADJACENT, EXISTING MATERIALS TO °LIKE NEW APPEARANCE. K. VERIFY /COORDINATE WITH FIXTURE CONTRACTOR, OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE OR THE PROJECT MANAGER, SAVING, RELOCATION AND /OR REUSE OF EXISTING STORE FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT L. VERIFY CONDITION OF EXISTING KYDEX AND EXISTING RUBBER BASE W/ PROJECT MANAGER AND REMOVE AS REQUIRED. M. REVIEW REMOVAL OF INTERIOR SIGNAGE WITH THE PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO SIGNAGE DISMANTLING AND REMOVAL. N. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW WITH THE PROJECT MANAGER SEQUENCING AND PHASING OF CONSTRUCTION PRIOR TO MOBILIZING THE WORK FORCE. 0. IN AREAS OF ROOF DEMOLITION AND /OR NEW CONSTRUCTION ON ROOF, PATCH NEW ROOFING INTO EXISTING ROOFING AS REQUIRED FOR WATERLIGHT, WARRANTED INSTALLATION. ROOFER SHALL INSTALL NEW ROOFING PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS, PROVIDING DETAILS AS NEEDED TO COMPLY WITH WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. P. REFER TO STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR FURTHER DEMOLITION NOTES. Q. REMOVE AND REPLACE ACT AS REQUIRED DUE TO OVERHEAD MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. R. VERIFY WITH OWNER ALL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR S. DASHED LINES INDICATE REFRIGERATION CASES, FREEZERS /COOLERS OR TARGET SUPPLIED MATERIALS, INSTALLED BY G.C. KEYNOTES 2 3 4 SHADED AREA INDICATES THE APPROXIMATE REMOVAL OF CONCRETE SLAB, FLOOR FINISH (IF APPLICABLE) & TRENCHING TO ACCOMODATE MECHANICAL. REPLACE SLAB SMOOTH AND FLUSH WITH EXISTING SLAB AND REPLACE FLOOR FINISH IF APPLICABLE TO MATCH EXISTING. EXIST FLOOR TILE TO BE CUT BACK TO NEAREST FULL JOINT. NEW FLOOR TILE TO BE ARMSTRONG IMPERIAL TEXTURE, 12" x 12' x� /8" THICK. - TO MATCH EXIST. GC TO VERIFY MATCH OF NEW TO EXISTING. PIPING TO BE INSTALLED UNDERFLOOR TYP - SEE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL. REPAIR AND PATCH FLOOR (AND WALL) TO MATCH ADJACENT. PROTECT NEON FROM EXPOSURE AND DAMAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION. EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL /z" FIRE RETARDANT PLYWOOD OVER 2 -2x4 FIRE RETARDANT WOOD BLOCKING. EXPANSION MATERIAL EXISTING RIGID INSULATION 5" MIN EMBEDMENT (TYP) NEW CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE (MIN 3000 P51 @ 28 DAYS) MATCH EXISTING SLAB THICKNESS *4'S @ I' -0° O.C. MIN. 3 (CENTER IN NEW SLAB) @ 24' OC - PLACE IN DRILLED HOLES WITH HILTI HYI50 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM. (FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INSTALLATION). TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 PROJECT CODE REMOD CONFIGURATION TITLE FREEZER /COOLER PLANS, DETAILS, AND NOTES EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE (REINFORCEMNT NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) APPLY BONDING AGENT (TYP) COMPACTED FILL OVER NEW PLUMBING LINES REVIEWED FOR 112" =1' -0' CODE COMPLIANCE • FEB-22007 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION JAN 1 8 2007 CENTER SHEET Al SUPPORT NOTE: 8° FOR STORES IN CO, IA, IL, IN, MA, MD, MI, MN, MT, NH, NJ, NY, OH, PA, RI, UT, WA, WI 4' FOR ALL OTHER STORES CONDENSING UNIT - MUST BE CENTERED ABOVE EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN BELOW PARTIAL ROOF PLAN VENT PIPE SLEEVE NOTE: PIPE STRAP TO BE ONE PIPE SIZE LARGER THAN PIPE TO ALLOW FOR PIPE MOVEMENT DUE TO EXPANSION. FASTEN TO SUPPORT. SEE MECH SPEC SECTION 5050 FOR SUPPORT SPACING (VARIES W/ DIA OF PIPE) --- 1- - - - - -- I" WALKWAY PAD 3' -0" MIN AROUND CONDENSING UNIT, TYP SEE CONDENSER UNIT - SEE SEE 9/A2 FOR PPE SUPPORT REFRIGERATION PIPE BOX SEE I' -0° TYP_ _ VENT PIPE CLAMP DETAIL SEE PREMOLDED PIPE SLEEVE WELD TO ROOF MEMBRANE EXISTING ROOFING MEMBRANE. TYP 1 1/2" - 1 , - 0" PIPE STRAP BY MECH. PRE - FABRICATED PIPE SUPPORT 13" =V WALKWAY PAD PRE - FABRICATED PIPE SUPPORT TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 0:\ 62506 \Target \55000 \20_CAD \T0627 South Center \A \A2.dgn 1 1/2" =1' -0" CONDENSING UNIT - MUST BE CENTERED ABOVE EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN BELOW The Benham Companies, Inc. 60 East Plato Blvd., Suite 300 St. Paul, MN 55107 EXISTING ROOF DECK 2X BL KG IN FLUTES. TYP, WALKWAY PAD 3' -0° MIN AROUND CONDENSING UNIT, TYP SEE CONDENSER UNIT - SEE TYP SEE 9/A2 FOR PIPE SUPPORT REFRIGERATION PIPE BOX SEE CLAMP DETAIL NOTE: FOR REFRIGERATION PENETRATIONS SEE SLNT -7 IN PRE - DRILLED HOLE & ON TOP OF LAG BOLT HEAD 24 GA GALV SHEET METAL FLASHING ATTACH W/ GALV STL OR SST FAST- ENERS W/ NEOPREME WASHERS I6d TOENAILS - @ 12" OC EA SIDE EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM OR JOIST SLNT -7 APPLIED AGAIN AFTER CLAMP IS TIGHTENED AT TOP OF SLEEVE CLAMP SLNT -7 BEHIND INSIDE OF PPE SLEEVE PIPE SLEEVE TALL CONE FLASHING @ FLUE FLASHING ONLY PVC PIPE WALL 61PP _ _ _ hA . i h Ma Sk 1 ''' PP 1 . ' - v^ CONDENSER UNIT SUPPORT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE CENTER HOLE IN LEGS ON MIDDLE 2x CONDENSING UNIT WALKWAY PAD GALV, I6d NAIL @ 12" OC STAGGERED TOP & BOTTOM BOTH SIDES (3) 2x12 W/ END JOINTS STAGGERED FACE NAIL ENDS @ EA SPLICE W/ (2) I6d NAILS 4' WOOD CANT WELD NEW PVC FLASHING TO UNDERSIDE OF EXISTING 2x SILL - THICKNESS TO MATCH INSULATION (II /z° MINIMUM) #12 TEK SCREWS- FASTEN TO TOP RIB OF DECKING STAGGERED @ 24° OC 1 1/2" =1 FOR PIPE SUPPORT SEE ° EXISTING JOISTS EXISTING - BEAM WALKWAY PAD DETAIL 12" MIN OVERHANG SLNT -5 CONT AROUND PIPES & AT ALL EXPOSED SEAMS �1 UNDER HOOD 1 20 GA GALV SHEET 1 METAL PANEL CLOSURE. CUT OUT HOLES FOR I PIPING 1 PIPE BOX DETAIL { 3' -0" GAP BETWEEN PAD & CURB MUST NOT EXCEED 2° HAND -WELD THE PAD ALONGSIDE THE CURB - PROTECTIVE PAD MUST BE MOUNTED AROUND ALL ACTIVE ROOFTOP MOTORS (FROM LARGE HVAC UNITS TO SMALL FORCED AIR VENTS) AS WELL AS THE THREE ACTIVE SIDES OF THE ROOF HATCH. ■ CONDENSING UNIT- - CENTER ABOVE EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN BELOW CLAMP REFRIGERATION LINES TO UNISTRUT W /HYDRO -ZORB OR CUSHA CLAMPS THE ENTIRE OUTSIDE EDGE OF EACH PAD MUST BE 1007. WELDED, EXCEPT I" WEEPHOLE INSIDE LOWER SIDE OF EACH PAD ADJACENT TO UNIT. PROBE AND CLOSE ALL GAPS AND VOIDS. PAD -TO -PAD JOINT MAY BE BUT TED, MAY BE OVERLAPPED, BUT THE MAXIMUM GAP ALLOWED IS J /8 °. $(USER) 1/4"= 20 GA GALV SHEET METAL HOOD ATTACH TO PI000 UNISTRUT W/ TEK SCREWS W/ NEOPREME WASHER 6" OC REFRIGERATION PIPING 8" BATT INSUL W /VAPOR BARRIER ON WARM SIDE. GLUE, TAPE OR WELD HARDWARE CLOTH ATTACH TO DECK 12/212006 1 V2" =1'-0" 20 GA GALV SHEET MTL HOOD SECURE ROOFING W/ #15 ROOFING SCREW @ 2" OC AROUND ENTIRE CURB. LOCATE SCREWS ONLY AT TOP OF FLUTES. GLUE, TAPE OR WELD FLASHING TO ROOF MEMBRANE 11 1 SLNT -5 CONT AROUND PIPES & AT ALL EXPOSED SEAMS UNDER HOOD 20 GA GALV SHEET METAL PANEL CLOSURE, CUT OUT HOLES FOR PIPING CURB @ SHORT SIDE 20 GA GALV SHEET METAL HOOD ATTACH TO PI000 UNISTRUT W/ TEK SCREWS W/ NEOPREME WASHER 6" OC CURB PLAN NTS NOTE: HOUSING SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED SUCH THAT IT ALLOWS FOR ACCESS TO THE PIPING. PROVIDE OPENABLE WEATHER PROOF PANEL. PIPE BOX ISOMETRIC I ° X 2° HEMMED 20 GA CLIP SPOT WELD TO HOOD PI000 UNISTRUT ANCHORED TO CURB W/ #12 WASHER HEAD SELF- TAPPING SELF DRILLING SCREWS � CONT ROOF FLASHING WRAP UP & OVER CURB, FULLY ADHERED TEK SCREW W/ NEOPREME WASHER MIN 3 SCREWS PER SIDE, MAX 24" OC 2 X 2 TREATED WOOD CURB ANCHOR TO WOOD BLOCKING W/ SELF DRILLING, SELF - TAPPING #12 CONTER SUNK SCREWS ANCHOR WOOD BLOCKING W/ #14 HD ROOFING SCREWS, PRE -DRILL WD BLOCKING ONLY DO NOT DRILL INTO THE ROOF DECK 3"=1'-0" SECURE ROOFING W / #15 ROOFING SCREW @ 12" OC AROUND ENTIRE CURB. LOCATE SCREWS ONLY AT TOP OF FLUTES. GLUE, TAPE OR WELD FLASHING TO ROOF MEMBRANE. SEE SACRIFICIAL PAD NOTE ON 2/42 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■. ■. ��ii�iit■ir�i � a an . ■ aI► tuff REFR PIPES =I= = i NOT TO SCALE 20 GA GALV SHEET MTL HOOD PI000 UNISTRUT ANCHORED TO CURB W/ #12 WASHER HEAD SELF TAPPING SELF DRILLING SCREWS CONT ROOF FLASHING WRAP UP & OVER CURB, FULLY ADHERED J TEK SCREW W/ NEOPREME WASHER. MIN 3 SCREWS PER SIDE, MAX 24" OC 7"7 -- 2 X 2 TREATED WOOD CURB ANCHOR TO WOOD BLOCKING W/ SELF DRILLING, SELF - TAPPING #12 CONTER SUNK SCREWS ANCHOR WOOD BLOCKING W/ #I4 HD ROOFING SCREWS, PRE -DRILL WD BLOCKING ONLY DO NOT DRILL INTO THE ROOF DECK CURB @ LONG SIDE REVIEW�P1�A �� CODE CO FEB - L. NW Viil ,DING DIVISION TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 PROJECT CODE REMOD CONFIGURATION PARTIAL ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS 3 „ =1 , 0 ” JAN 16 2001 CENTER SHEET A2 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE DOOR DOOR GLASS TYPE FRAME NOTES NO. MAT'L QUANT WIDTH HEIGHT THICK MAT'L HEAD DTL, JAMB DTL. SILL DTL. 100 H.M. I 3' -8° 7' -0° I3/ GL -7 H.M. 4/A3 5/A3 6/A3 1,3 2" SEE SCHEDULE TYPE V 2° VISION PANEL SEE SCHEDULE ,4l EQ EQ NOTES: t t t HOLLOW METAL ± 2 "TYP ° " L EXISTING DOOR TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED W /NEW DOOR AND HARDWARE. EXISTING FRAME TO REMAIN. 2. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME. INFILL DOOR OPENING AND INSTALL NEW DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE. 3. COORDINATE W /ELECTRICAL FOR SECURITY SENSORS /SWITCHES WHERE APPLICABLE. FRAME DOOR TYPE TYPE COMPACTOR CONTAINER TO BE REMOVED COMPACTOR TO BE REMOVED REMOVE EXISTING PIPE GUARDRAIL, OVHD COILING DOOR, STL ANGLES, AND ALL RELATED COMPONENTS ,r ■ COMPACTOR DEMOLITION PLAN NEW HM DOOR AND HM FRAME SLNT -I STEEL COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE WALL & FLASHING ANGLE BY COMPACTOR SUPPLIER TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761-3322 O:\ 62506 \Target \55000 \20_CAD \T0627 South Center \A \A3.dgn A N HEAD AT COMPACTOR CHUTE REMOVE EXISTING CHECKERED PLATE AND ACCESS PANEL V4" =1'-0" EXISTING WALL -FIELD VERIFY MATERIALS & CONFIGURATION NEW INSUL. & GYP BD TO MATCH EXISTING CAULK -EA. SIDE w L z w 1 12" =1' -0" GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES I. DESIGN STRESSES MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES Fy = 36 KSI (ASTM A36) 2. CONCRETE DRILLED PIERS AND SLABS ON GRADE f'c = 3000 PSI MASONRY GROUT f'c = 3000 PSI REINFORCING Fy = 60 KSI (ASTM 4615) UNO Fy = 60 KSI (ASTM 4615) FOR UNIT MASONRY CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT f'm = 1500 PSI MORTAR FOR CMU f'c = 2500 PSI, TYPE M OR f'c = 1800 PSI, TYPE 5 3. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE ARRANGEMENT AND BENDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ACI 'MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR DETAILING REINFORCING CONCRETE STRUCTURES ". PROVIDE SUITABLE WIRE SPACERS, CHAIRS AND TIES FOR SUPPORTING REINFORCING STEEL IN PROPER POSITION. SPLICE REINFORCING 48 BAR DIAMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONCRETE COVERAGE SHALL COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 7 OF AC1318. BEN A The Benham Companies, Inc. 60 East Plato Blvdo9 Suite 300 St. Paul, MN 55107 SLNT - I& BACKER ROD STEEL COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE WALL & FLASHING ANGLE BY COMPACTOR SUPPLIER '/8" STL PLATE WELDED TO 6' STL STUDS 6%18 GA., STL STUDS - DBL STUD © JAMB. WELD TO EXISTING STL PLATE. FILL CAVITY W /BATT INSUL. & VAPOR BARRIER @ WARM SIDE ff E0. 4' -0° EC. JAMB AT COMPACTOR CHUTE COMPACTOR - CONTAINER BY OTHERS NEW HM DOOR AND HM FRAME CONC FOOTING BY G.C. EXISTING WALL - FIELD VERIFY MATERIALS & CONFIGURATION NEW INSUL. & GYP BD TO MATCH EXISTING 1 12" =1'-0" TYPICAL WALL CONSTRUCTION NOTES I. NEW EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR CMU WALLS UNO: STANDARD JOINT REINFORCING AT 16 °OC HORIZONTAL UNO WITH VERTICAL REINFORCING FULL HEIGHT PER PLANS AND DETAILS. 2. MASONRY REINFORCING LAP SPLICES: #5 BARS = 32 °. 3. GROUT SOLID ALL CELLS AND SPACES CONTAINING REINFORCING BARS. 4. SEE ARCH FOR SIZE OF CMU AND MASONRY OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR CMU WALLS. OF COMPACTOR DOOR COMPACTOR AND ENCLOSURE PLAN $(USER) NEW DOOR & FRAME NEW CONC. SLAB STEEL COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE, FLASHING ANGLE, AND WALL ANCHORS BY COMPACTOR MANUFACTURER, SLNT -I& BACKER ROD COMPACTOR, SUPPORT POSTS AND ALL RELATED COMPONENTS ARE BY COMPACTOR MANUFACTURER. NEW COMPACTOR TO BE CENTERED ON EXISTING DOOR OPENING. V4" =1'-0" 12/212006 SILL AT COMPACTOR CHUTE NEW HM DOOR AND FRAME. BY G.C. CONC SLAB N( 1 12" =1' -0" EXISTING BUILDING WALL TRASH COMPACTOR AND STEEL ENCLOSURE STEEL SUPPORT LEG FOR WALK -IN ENCLOSURE BY COMPACTOR SUPPLIER SLNT -2 & BACKER ROD JOINT FILLER EXISTING CONC SLAB DRILLED CONC FOOTING SEE DETAIL 7/A3. BY G.C. 7 111111 MI a 1 11 1111 • D • r r I L- SECTION AT TRASH COMPACTOR NEW CMU INFILL TO MATCH EXISTING 1 MFGR SPEC'S MFGR SPEC'S ) OF COMPACTOR DOOR PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN @ DOCK 18" DIA. X 4' - 0" DEEP CONC PIER REINF. W/ (4) - 4 5 VERT & #3 ROUND TIES @ 12" O.C. W/ 3" DEPTH 1 12" =1' -0" 6" CONC SLAB ON GRADE W/ 4* 5 © 12° O.C. EACH WAY 12 =1 -0 PLACE REBARS IN DRILLED HOLES (MIN.5" EMBED) WITH HILTI HIT HYI50 NEW ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM JOINT FILLER EXISTING PIT WALL AND FLOOR COMPACTED FILL 8° CMU WALL REINFORCED W/ 4 5 © 16° O.C. VERTICALS. PLACE REBAR IN DRILLED HOLES W /HILTI HIT HYI50 NEW ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM. 5" MIN. EMBEDMENT * PROVIDE HORIZONTAL BED JOINT REINFORCEMENT (TRUSS TYPE) 16° O.C. MEASURED VERTICALS FIN FIR EL= 100' -0' REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE FEB -- 2 2007 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION TARGET STORE OUTH CENTER, WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE -062 PROJECT CODE REMOD CONFIGURATION Tu COM PACTO R PLANS, DETAILS, AND NOTES P; • JAN 13 ?O7 r- , LL.7 L•J • SHEET A3 w PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE WASTE AND FIRE PROTECTION PIPING PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING Sch 40 Sch 10 THREADED LIGHTWALL GROOVED LIGHTWALL TYPE L COPPER PVC/ ABS 1' 8' -0' OR LESS" 12' -0' H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 N/A H -1 N/A 11/2' 10' -0' OR LESS 12' -0' 15' -0' H -1 H -1 11-1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 N/A H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 N/A N/A H -1 N/A N/A 2' 10' -O' OR LESS 12' -0' 15' -0' H -1 H -1 H -1 11-1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 N/A H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 N/A N/A H -1 N/A N/A 21/2' 9' -0' OR LESS' H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 H -1 TARGET STORE SOUTH E, ri'�;�w CONDENSATE PUMP SCHEDULE "wA98� w R WA BLVD TrnF obvReMOO TFTLE FREEZER /COOLER PROJECT `w` CONFIGURATION MECHANICAL PLAN KFD) FLOOR DRAIN SCHEDULE CONDENSATE PUMP SCHEDULE AEA w NO DESCRIPTION LOCATION MFR & MODEL GPH HEAD (FT) MOTOR H.P. RPM DISCHARGE SIZE VOLT/ PH. REMARKS CP -1 CONDENSATE PUMP STOCK ROOM LITTLE GIANT VCL -24UL 110 20 1/12 /2 MNPT 120/1 1 2 SUMP PUMP 1 BASIN COVER S OES J ACKEL INC. FIBERGLASS 2' 1 /2 1 - KFD) FLOOR DRAIN SCHEDULE BASIN SCHEDULE AEA w NO DESCRIPTION LOCATION MFR & MODEL MATERIAL PIPE CONNECTIONS REMARKS VENT DISCHARGE INLET B -1 BASIN S L JACKEL INC. FIBERGLASS - - 4' 2' 115/1 1 2 SUMP PUMP B -2 BASIN COVER S OES J ACKEL INC. FIBERGLASS 2' 1 /2 1 - KFD) FLOOR DRAIN SCHEDULE SUMP PUMP SCHEDULE AEA w NO DESCRIPTION LOCATION MFR & MODEL GPM HEAD (FT) MOTOR H.P. RP DISCHARGE SIZE VOLT/ PH. REMARKS SP -1 SUMP PUMP SALES FLOOR LITTLE GIANT 14EH -CIM 30 35 1/2 2' 115/1 SP - 2 SUMP PUMP SALES FLOOR LITTLE GIANT 14EH -CIM 30 35 1 /2 2' 115/1 KFD) FLOOR DRAIN SCHEDULE DRAIN NO SERVICE WASTE VENT MODEL NO AND TYPE REMARKS FD -1 FLOOR SINK 3' DRAWN BY JOSAM 49010 SEE DETAIL 1/M2 DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 21 DECEMBER 2006 12 - 21 - 06 BP - 3.O COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY JRB, KRZ CHECKED BY SFR • REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 15050 FOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HANGER SPACING FOR TYPE L COPPER AND PVC /ABS PIPING. N/A = NOT ALLOWED OR NOT APPLICABLE GENERAL HANGER NOTES: A. THIS PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE SHOWS MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HANGER SPACING BASED ON PIPE WEIGHT AND STRUCTURAL CONSTRAINTS. REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 15050 FOR ADDITIONAL PIPE HANGER REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING REQUIRED HANGER ROD DIAMETER AND MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING BASED ON PIPE MATERIAL AND PIPE DIAMETER. B. SUPPORT ALL PIPING WITHIN 6' OF BAR JOIST TOP CHORD PANEL POINT. LOCATE TOP OF PIPE AT 6' MINIMUM BELOW ROOF DECK. C. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER PIPING SUPPORT SHALL COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA AND LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES. D. DO NOT DEVIATE FROM PIPE HANGER DETAILS AS SHOWN. DEVIATION FROM HANGER DETAILS MAY VOID JOIST MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY. PIPE HANGER DETAILS TYPE "H -1" HANGERS ROOF DECK BEAM CLAMP TO TOP CHORD OF JOIST WITHIN 6' OF PANEL POINT. THREADED ROD BAR JOIST SWIVEL RING NOT TO SCALE TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX:(612) 761 -3322 J J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores \T -0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627m001.dgn Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 GENERAL NOTES: (EXISTING CONDITIONS) A. ALL EXISTING PIPING INDICATED ON PLAN WAS TAKEN FROM EXISTING MECHANICAL PLANS AND /OR FIELD OBSERVATION AND SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED 100% ACCURATE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING SYSTEMS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL NOTIFY THE PROJECT MANAGER AND THE ENGINEER OF ANY POTENTIAL CONFLICTS. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE A THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. FAILURE TO ACQUIRE SUCH KNOWLEDGE WILL NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACTOR FOR PERFORMING THE WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO BECOME FAMILIAR WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS. C. ANY PIPING ABANDONED IN PLACE SHALL BE CAPPED, PLUGGED AND CONCEALED - PLUGGING AND CAPPING SHALL BE DONE IN A MANNER AS TO ALLOW REOPENING AND REUSE LATER. D. FLOOR PATCHING SHALL BE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. E. CONCRETE CUTS (BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR) SHALL BE STRAIGHT AND CLEAN, REPLACE SLAB WITH CONCRETE FLUSH AND SMOOTH WITH ADJACENT SURFACE. F. FIELD VERIFY LOCATIONS AND QUALITY OF ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES AND PIPING NECESSARY TO COMPLETE SCOPE OF WORK. G. INDICATES EXISTING CONDITIONS. C O r -- ---TYP. TEXT OF EXISTING CONDITIONS - CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS. GENERAL NOTES: A. PITCH SANITARY WASTE AND COMBINATION WASTE /VENT PIPING 4' AND GREATER AT 1 /8 ' PER FOOT. PITCH ALL OTHER WASTE PIPING AT 1/4' PER FOOT. B. REFER TO SHEET M2 FOR PLUMBING RISERS DIAGRAMS AND PIPE SIZES NOT SHOWN. C. INVERT ELEVATION FOR PIPES ARE INDICATED WITH THE SYMBOL 1 XX' -X' I BASED ON A FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION OF 100' -0'. D. VENT PIPING BELOW FLOOR AND THROUGH FLOOR SHALL BE 2' MINIMUM. E. SEE SHEET M1 FOR TYPICAL PIPE HANGER DETAILS. F. ALL COOLERS AND FREEZERS ARE FOR THE STORAGE AND OR DISPLAY OF PREPACKAGED FOOD PRODUCTS. G. INDIRECT CONDENSATE PIPING CAN BE FOUND ON SHEET R2. H. ALL INDIRECT CONDENSATE WASTE PIPING IS ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. I. ALL FLOOR SINKS ARE LOCATED OUTSIDE OF THE COOLER/ FREEZER HALF EXPOSED AT KICK PLATE. J. CUT EXISTING CONCRETE STRAIGHT AND CLEAN AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW INSTALLATION OF NEW SANITARY PIPING. SEE DRAWING Al FOR LOCATION OF SLAB TO BE REMOVED. 11 EPDXY COATED CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, EPDXY COATED CAST ALUMINUM COVER, 1 GALLON ABS TANK, 1/2' MNPT DISCHARGE WITH CHECK VALVE, INTEGRAL FLOAT ACTIVATED MERCURY SWITCH. KEYNOTES: 1/M1 & 2/M1 11 El 4 6 8 9 10 E 14 151 16 18 19 20 Ea RUN y CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE DOWN TO MOP SINK. PROVIDE 2' AIR GAP. SECURE PIPE TO WALL. RUN Y4' CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE DOWN TO MOP SINK, PROVIDE A 2' AIR GAP. SECURE PIPE TO WALL. RUN 34" CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE IN JOIST SPACE. HANG PIPE FROM JOIST WITH A MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING OF 4' 0'. SLOPE PIPE AT%' PER FOOT TOWARDS THE MOP SINK. RUN N. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE FROM PUMP DISCHARGE UP ALONG COOLER WALL INTO THE JOIST SPACE. SECURE PIPE TO THE COOLER WALL. SET CONDENSATE PUMP ON SHELF 6' -O' AFF. SEE DETAIL: SEE REFRIGERATION DRAWINGS FOR CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE FROM COOLER /FREEZER EVAPORATOR TO THE CONDENSATE PUMP. PROVIDE DRY PENDENT SPRINKLER HEADS IN COOLER AND FREEZER. CONNECT TO EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM. HEADS SHALL BE TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS DS -1 (TY3255), STANDARD RESPONSE, K -5.6 GLASS BULB TYPE, 3 /4 ' NPT THREADS, CHROME FINISH, RECESSED CHROME ESCUTCHEON. NOT USED. PROVIDE WALL CLEANOUT 24' AFF WITH ACCESS FROM SALES SIDE OF FALSE COLUMN. NOT USED. NOT USED SEE 4/M2 FOR WASTE AND VENT RISER DIAGRAM. 2' VENT UP IN FALSE COLUMN TO 4' VENT THRU ROOF. NEW FLOOR SINK FD -1 SEE DETAIL: NEW DUPLEX SUMP PUMP SYSTEM. SEE DETAILS: SEE DETAIL: SEE DETAIL. PROVIDE CLEANOUT AT TOP OF SANITARY WASTE RISER. DUPLEX SUMP PUMP CONTROLLER, PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. WIRE TERMINATIONS BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ROUTE SANITARY WASTE PIPE DOWN INTO PLUMBING CHASE AND CONNECT TO EXISTING 2' WASTE LINE ABOVE FLOOR. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WALL BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. RUN SANITARY WASTE PIPING IN CEILING SPACE. CEILING TILE TO BE REMOVED, STORED AND REINSTALLED BY OTHERS. CONNECT 1/2' CW TO EXISTING 1% COLD WATER. 1/2' CW DOWN TO TRAP PRIMER, SEE DETAIL 3/M2. TRAP PRIMER LINES BELOW SLAB IN PVC SLEEVE, TYPICAL, SHUT-OFF -- -->r) VALVE MECHANICAL SHEET INDEX M1 FREEZER /COOLER MECHANICAL PLAN M2 MECHANICAL DETAILS R1 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PLAN & SCHEDULES R2 REFRIGERATION PIPING & TRIM PLANS R3 REFRIGERATION DETAILS R4 REFRIGERATION DETAILS R5 REFRIGERATION CONTROLS PLUMBING / PIPING SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ouvononamooinsui O Co 1 91 6 ' 1 REF V CD - -- 1CWV - - -• sw - -- sw EXISTING SYMBOL JANITORS SINK HUB DRAIN FLOOR DRAIN FLOOR SINK TRENCH DRAIN CLEAN OUT VENT THRU ROOF INVERT ELEVATION TAG TOP CONNECTION BOTTOM CONNECTION DROP IN DIRECTION OF PITCH RISE IN DIRECTION OF FLOW REFRIGERANT PIPING VENT CONDENSATE DRAIN COMBINATION WASTE & VENT SANITARY WASTE ABOVE FLOOR SANITARY WASTE BELOW FLOOR PIPE BREAK COLD WATER CONDITION SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION EXISTING PIPE CONNECT TO EXISTING EXISTING NG DENOTES 11 — -- — - SEE ARCHITECTURAL DETAIL 3/A1 FOR INSTALLATION. PROVIDE HUB CONNECTION FOR INLET FROM COMBINATION WASTE AND VENT PIPE TO BASIN. f /2' WALK-IN FREEZER/COOLER MECH. PLAN 1/8"=1'-0" 0 4' S 8' 16' 24' 20—DEC -2006 12 :49 WALK -IN FREEZER 0 WALK -IN COOLER 11 ▪ ., ..mm. • .,.�.,n • • 5161 WALK -IN FREEZER/COOLER MECH. PLAN 1 3 CD 1/8"=1' ca CO 16' 24' REVCOMPUA FOR CODE n rigftropcp FEB - 2 ZOO1 City Of Tu�Uta���! BUILDING Q JAN 1 3 J7 P FD ,' 1\ SHEET Mi TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE T- 0627REMOD TITLE MECHANICAL PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION DETAILS DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 21 DECEMBER 2006 12 -21 -06 BP -3.0 COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY JRB, KRZ CHECKED BY SFR - TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 4' VTR 0 A11 WALL CO 1 1 • • • • • J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores \T -0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627m002.dgn - -. • . 4 " • AIR GAP PER CODE d DUPLEX • SUMP PUMP SYSTEM WASTE & VENT RISER Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 CONDENSATE FLOOR SINK (FD -1) 4' VTR 0 (2 1 CO NOT TO SCALE CONDENSATE LINES FROM REFRIGERATED CASES PROVIDED BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. SEE SHEET R1. HALF GRATE FINISHED FLOOR INTERNAL DOME STRAINER 11 NOT TO SCALE FLOOR CONDENSATE PUMP, CP -1 PLUMBING STRAP TO HOLD PUMP TO WALL. FASTEN BOTH ENDS TO WALL. BOLT PLYWOOD SHELF TO ANGLE SHELF BRACKET. 24" LONG x 8" WIDE x %z" THICK PLYWOOD SHELF. STEEL ANGLE SHELF BRACKET AT EACH END OF SHELF. FASTENER NOTES: 1. IF SHELF I5 MOUNTED TO STUD WALL: FASTEN TO STUDS IF POSSIBLE. USE *8 1 1 /4" SCREWS IF FASTENING TO STUD. USE ANCHOR BOLTS IF NOT FASTENING TO STUD. 2. IF SHELF IS MOUNTED TO COOLER WALL: COOLER WALL IS COVERED WITH PLYWOOD. USE *8 1 SCREWS. SCREW INTO COOLER WALL STUD IF POSSIBLE. CONDENSATE PUMP MOUNTING DETAIL DUPLEX SUMP PUMP PACKAGE— OWNER FURNISHED SOME ASSEMBLY REQUIRED r - - r r ' r - 1 LL , 1 �r 'r l r - I LL I' 111 , 4111 r; 1l Y, ^JX �K L r1 irA- Arn Q_°IrE :_ ci, tr , C_ rJ 1 , 11 1 11 II Iti It 11 II 111 rr%r's.� �— rr— �LLirh'CS71' a ^. _ r te = . ti s de _! • • • • ' i • „• r Y • r : • r i • ' : • y r . ! - r i• • - ♦ Ir.•'::T.r r.• Y1. r i _�: _.v.:,.� ,•61.�� '�.1y.• • .� NOT TO SCALE SWEAT DISCHARGE PIPE TO VALVE ASSEMBLY VAVLE ASSEMBLY SWEAT UNION TO CHECK VALVE PIPE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR PUMP POWER CORDS AND ALARM FLOAT CABLES. ROUTE LOW VOLTAGE CABLES VIA JUNCTION BOX AND CONDUIT TO SUMP PUMP CONTROL PANEL. PUMP POWER CORDS AND FLOAT CONTROL WIRE GROMMET. CHECK VALVE PIPE ASSEMBLY INSTALL FLOAT THREAD CHECK VALVE PIPE TO PUMP 20 DEC - 2006 12:49 STUD WALL OR COOLER WALL. SEE PLAN FOR PUMP LOCATION. FASTEN ANGLE SHELF BRACKET TO WALL. DUPLEX BASIN COVER WITH CONTROL ACCESS. PUMP DISCHARGE CONNECTION OWNER FURNISHED PART OF PUMP PACKAGE VENT CONNECTION FLOOR CONNECT CONTROL AND POWER CABLES - ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 4' x 4' JUNCTION BOX WITH SPLIT WIRED RECEPTACLE. CONNECT POWER CORDS TO RECEPTACLE. uuLU, C L---- r - �' �! ' L -- -n � ° a DUPLEX SUMP PUMP AND BASIN (SP -1 AND SP -2) 2' VENT PIPE. SEE 2/M1 FO CONTINUATION. 2 " PUMP DISCHARGE PIPE. SEE 2/M1 FOR CONTINUATION. NOT TO SCALE PLAN VIEW W, 11 is r -Gw Utr z_ 'AAA -44 Pr -rn s' �C �`.�iLrJ JT1G n r II II 11 II III 1. ti, _�, .LL_Jtu___rJ� - 1 - - , - - i -. L ' .. J1 - - L7 h :11 " r v —7,s '16 8 15 4' INSPECTION HOLE r WATER T LINE JOSAM SERIES 88250 TRAP PRIMER VALVE �/2' TRAP PRIMER LINE TO FLOOR DRAIN 1 /2" TRAP PRIMER LINE TO FLOOR DRAIN TRAP SEAL PRIMER CONNECTOR NOTES: PROVIDE 12X12 ACCESS PANEL IN PLUMBING WALLS FOR SERVICING OF TRAP PRIMER VALVES. TRAP PRIMER CONNECT VENT PIPE TO BASIN COVER CONNECT SANITARY WASTE TO BASIN 11 L MIFAB MR-500 TRAP PRIMER TRAP SEAL PRIMER DISTRIBUTION UNIT, MIFAB MODEL *MI-DU. (4) OUTLET CONNECTIONS (MAX). - FLOOR DRAIN OOR SLAB 11 11 11 II 11 11 1 11 %2' BRANCH WATER LINE DOMESTIC WATER LINE L NOT TO SCALE FALSE COLUMN PUMP POWER AND FLOAT CONTROL WIRES. WIRING TO BE RUN INSIDE CONDUIT LOCATED INSIDE FALSE COLUMN. CONDUIT FOR PUMP POWER AND ALARM FLOAT CONTROL WIRING TO PANELS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. - Ye C. W/ 3* 12, 1 *12 GND AND (1) LOW VOLTAGE CABLES TO (FURNISHED WITH FLOATS) SUMP PUMP CONTROL PANEL. CONNECT 120 VOLT POWER WIRING TO EACH OF (2) CONTACTORS IN CONTROL PANEL. CONNECT (2) LOW VOLTAGE CABLES TO CONTROL FLOATS TERMINALS IN CONTROL PANEL. REVIEWED CODE CO porgonvmn BUILDING city 0t T'laIVISION MIK SHEET M2 La OWNER COIL REFRIGERATION CASE AND EVAPORATOR SCHEDULE 74 OWNER FURNISHED FURNISHED EQUIPMENT SYMBOL EVAPORATOR W OWNER SYSTEM * * DOORS MODEL USE LOAD/ DOOR (BTUH) TOTAL LOAD (BTUH) DISCH. TEMP EVAP TEMP CONTROL WALK -IN EVAPORATOR COILS DEFROST ELECTRICAL REFRIGERATION LINE SIZES CASES (120V UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) EVAP. COILS EQUIV. LENGTH T SUCTION LINE LIQUID LINE SUCTION LINE RISER EQUIP. COMP. RLA COND. FAN FLA TOTAL CAPACITY BTUH /1° TD ° TD DIMENSION DEFROST QUANT TIME EVAP LIGHT ELEC DEFROST 208 /(PH) ANTI -SWEAT (DOORS) ANTI -SWEAT (FRAMES) ANTI -SWEAT (TOTAL) FAN ELECT. DEF ROST SIZ IN -OD TEMP. DIFF. F . F PRESSURE DIFF. GAS VEL. FT / MIN SIZE IN -OD RISER IN -OD GAS VEL. FT / MIN A01 5 P5FGN ICE CREAM 1492 7460 -8° F -18° F CPC, LL SOLENOID -- -- -- -- -- -- ELECT 1 0 46 MIN 13 3.4 35.6 (3) 6.06 3.87 9.93 - -- -- --- 105 1%e 0.93 0.67 1268 %2 1%8 1268 1049 3 DUAL DAIRY 805 447 2415 -8 34° F -18 27° F -- -- -- -- r- -- ELEC OT X46 MI i�34 MIN 1.76 1.94 3.63 2.29 5.92 - -- --- - A02 7 P5NGN DAIRY 805 5635 34° F 27° F CPC, LL SOLENOID -- -- -- -- -- -- OT 1 a 34 MIN 2.2 4.8 -- 2.59 2.30 4.89 - -- - -- 105 1%8 1.4 0.97 1424 %2 11 /s 1553 1114 3 P5FGN DUAL TEMP j l492 DAIRY 805 447 2415 -8° F 34° F -18° F 27° F -- -- -- -- `ELEC OT 146 MI g�3.1.4..---- 4 MIN 1.76 1'94 12.5 (3) 3.63 2.29 5.92 ---- - -- 3 P5FGN DUAL TEMP IC DAIRY 1492 805 447 2415 -8 °F 34° F -18° 27° F -- -- -- -- -- -- ELEC OT 046 X34 MIN 1.76 1.94 12.5 (3) 3.63 2.29 5.92 - -- - -- A03 21x8.5x9.5 WALK -IN FREEZER - -- 19868 -15° F -23° F CPC, LL SOLENOID 1 BOHN BML -220 2090 9.5 67.3 "x19'x25' ELECT 2 a 20 MIN - -- - -- --- - -- - -- - -- (208V/1) (208V/1) 50 1 1.2 0,79 2194 %2 1 /a 2194 A04 14x8.5x9.5 WALK -IN COOLER --- 10923 36 F 36° 24 F 24° CPC, LL SOLENOID 1 BOHN ADT -130 1300 8.4 r r 45.5 x15 x16 OT 2 el 20 MIN - -- - -- - -- - -- --- - -- 2.0 (1 15V/1) - -- 50 /g % 1.3 1.8 1453 I /2 % /a 1453 La OWNER CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT SCHEDULE k OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT SYMBOL w FURNISHED COND. UNIT * SYSTEM * MANUF MODEL COMPRESSOR MODEL REFRIG. CLASS COMP. HP AMBIENT TEMP. ACTUAL COND. TEMP. ..0-- H_0 CITY ( ) SUCTION TEMP• CONNECTION MAXIMUM DEFROST AMPS 208 /(PH) ELECTRICAL AMPS RECEIVER CAPACITY AT $0% FULL (LBS) SOUND (DBA) WEIGHT (LBS) DIMENSIONS (LxWxH) VOLTAGE COMP. RLA COND. FAN FLA TOTAL SUCTION IN -OD LIQUID IN -OD MCA MOPD CU -1 A01 BOHN BZT045L6C ZF13K4E R--404A Al 4.5 100° F 109.2°F 11936 13050 -256F 1%8 I/2 35.6 (3) 208 -230/3 13.5 3.5 44.5 60 39.0 73 307 30.25'x42.5 "x29.75' CU -2 AQ2 BOHN BZT055L6C ZF15K4E R -404A Al 5.5 100° F 109.4°F 14587 16378 -25° F 11/8 1/2 39.9 (3) 208 -230/3 19.2 3.5 49.9 60 46.0 74 313 30.255;42.5 CU -3 A03 BOHN BZN060L6C ZF18K4E R -404A Al 6.0 90° F 101.0° F 19868 21098 -25° F 1%8 1/2 39.9 (3) 208 -230/3 21.5 3.5 49.9 50 39.0 76 317 30,25'x42.5 "x29.75' CU -4 A04 BOHN BSNO20M6C KAK020E R -404A Al 2.0 90° F 101.8°F 10923 18513 22° F % 1/2 r -- 208-230/3 6.1 3.5 15 15 39.0 70 385 30.25'x42.5 "x29.75' ESTIMATED REFRIGERANT CHARGE SYSTEM * EVAPORATOR CHARGE (LBS) HORIZONTAL PIPE LENGTH SUCTION LINE LIQUID LINE SUCTION LINE RISER (30' -0 ") CONDENSER CHARGE (LBS) LIQUID SEAL (LBS) TOTAL CHARGE (LBS) RECEIVER SIZE (LBS) LINE SIZE / FT ESTIMATED CHARGE (LBS) S IZE / FT ESTIMATED CHARGE (LBS) RISER LINE SIZE # / FT ESTIMATED CHARGE (LBS) A01 7.25 75 1 0.0039 0.29 1/2 0.064 5.12 1 / 8 0.0039 0.12 11.5 4 28.28 39 A02 11.87 75 1%8 0.0039 0.29 1/2 0.064 5.12 1 0.0039 0.12 11.5 4 32.9 39 A03 2.8 50 1%8 0.0039 0.195 1/2 0.064 3.2 -- -- -- 11.5 4 21.70 39 A04 0.6 50 5 /a 0.0025 0.125 1 /2 0.064 3.2 -- -- -- 7.5 4 15.43 39 TAFtGETSTORE SOUTH CENTER, 1 08 7g�w "w „R 98188 ¢ ry oeaennoo M REFRIGERATION ,mm CODE CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PLAN & SCHEDULES DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 21 DECEMBER 2006 12 -21 -06 BP -3.0 COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY JRB, KRZ CHECKED BY SFR 1 :. - - -- - - . - -- ti k � I` TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX :(612) 761-3322 • L 1 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores \T -0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627r001.dgn 1 • _ COOLER 145 • Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 - (K.' ::,K:; ;'.!1;:.'''''' • • • • • ,, : .... • M...... -- ' w�n s��'ni: , ... :....� . - _� � ,�,, : ...., !�!•�,n �+ne . tea.. »,�„ �. �., - • L._....- ALL WORK ON SHEETS Rl, R2, R3, R4 & R5 SHALL BE COMPLETED BY TARGET APPROVED REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. • REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PLAN • ... ", ...wn. - .w. -w.. w....ww.. w - nen... n...^}y w,..�,..r .gin.. n w.w�. w...w. -... T . . . � .......n,. n. •••• .w...w.w...w • • • • • • •„ • �. _ 'Dr' A . al .... - - � - - - - I 20- DEC -2006 12:49 M-. . �:'yt, 3 '�..... h:;!AYM(, 15..,1W.0 �\..wwr..M w.wr'; K.•• • • SALES 1/16"=1'-0" 6.17 102 0 8' 16' 32' 48' REMOVE EXISTING ROOF MOUNTED CONDENSING UNITS, ACCESSORIES AND ALL REFRIGERATION PIPING FROM THE UNITS DOWN TO THE REFRIGERATED CASES. • • 1. - --- -._ -I 1- REFRIGERATION SYMBOLS: ( A01) SYSTEM NUMBERS P5FGN P5NGN - REF -REF- - CD t8 3 PIPING UP PIPING DOWN SOLENOID VALVE HUB DRAIN BY OTHERS CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT IDENTIFICATION EVAPORATOR COIL IDENTIFICATION LOW TEMPERATURE CASE MODEL NUMBER MEDIUM TEMPERATURE CASE MODEL NUMBER REFRIGERATION PIPING CONDENSATE PIPING OUTLINE OF CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT LOCATED ON ROOF. ARROW REPRESENTS DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW THROUGH UNIT. TRENCH DRAIN BY OTHERS CASE FAN KIT NOTE NOT ALL SYMBOLS APPEAR ON ALL DRAWINGS. GENERAL NOTES: A. THIS PLAN SHOWS THE REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS FOR SALES FLOOR CASES AND STOCKROOM WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER. B. SEE 2/M1 FOR DRAIN LOCATIONS. C. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL WALK -IN COOLER / FREEZER. D. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL SALES FLOOR MARKET CASES. RECEIVE AND INSTALL RECEIVE AND INSTALL E. REFRIGERANTS R22 AND R404A ARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASHRAE STANDARD 34-2001 'DESIGNATION AND SAFETY CLASSIFICATIONS OF REFRIGERANTS.' F. INSTALL HAIL GUARDS FURNISHED WITH CONDENSING UNITS. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE � rormirwm FEB b 2 2007 city of - mmHg BUILDING DIVISION SHEET Ri T-0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, sm srwwoea BLVD iIIKWIUA, WA 98188 ST T TITLE REFRIGERATION PIPING & TRIM PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION PLANS DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 21 DECEMBER 2006 12 - 21 - 06 BP COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION _ DRAWN BY JRB, KRZ CHECKED BY SFR ALL WORK ON SHEETS R1, R2, R3, R4 & R5 SHALL BE COMPLETED BY APPROVED REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stares \T -0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627r002.dgn KEYNOTES: 0 El 4 0 6 0 9 10 14 El LIQUID AND SUCTION PIPING DOWN THROUGH WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER ROOF. SEE DETAIL 1/R3. NOT USED INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED INDOOR CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT ON SUPPORTS ON WALK -IN BOX ROOF. SEE CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT SCHEDULE ON R1 FOR MODEL INFORMATION. SEE DETAILS 1/R3 & 5/R3. INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED EVAPORATOR COIL UNIT TIGHT TO CEILING. SEE DETAIL 3/R3. PROVIDE 74' COPPER CONDENSATE DRAIN WITH HEAT TAPE AND INSULATION IN FREEZER. INSTALL HEAT TAPE PER THE MANUFACTURES RECOMMENDATIONS. ROUTE PIPING TIGHT TO WALL AND SLOPE PIPING %' PER 1' -0' MINIMUM IN THE DIRECTION OF FLOW. DO NOT TRAP DRAIN PIPING IN FREEZER SPACE. PROVIDE TRAP FOR FREEZER UNIT CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING PRIOR TO CONNECTION WITH COOLER UNIT CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING. TRAP TO BE LOCATED OUTSIDE WALK -IN FREEZER. PROVIDE 74' COPPER CONDENSATE DRAIN, ROUTE PIPING TIGHT TO WALLS AND SLOPE PIPING 1 /4' PER 1 -0' MINIMUM IN THE DIRECTION OF FLOW. 8 SEE DETAIL 13/R3 FOR CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING IN WALK -IN 8 I COOLER AND FREEZER. ROUTE Y CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING DOWN TO CONDENSATE PUMP. SEE DETAIL 14/R3 FOR WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER DOOR DETAIL. 1 NOT USED. PROVIDE SOLENOID VALVE ON LIQUID LINE FOR WALK -IN COOLER AND WALK -IN FREEZER. SEE DETAIL 1/R3. INSTALL REFRIGERANT LEAK INDICATOR INSIDE & OUTSIDE OF WALK -IN COOLER AND WALK -IN FREEZER. MOUNT ABOVE DOOR. SEE DETAILS 10/R3 AND 14/R3. INSTALL REFRIGERANT LEAK TRANSDUCER IN WALK -IN COOLER AND WALK -IN FREEZER. SEE DETAIL 10/R3. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH ELECTRICAL AND WALK -IN FIXTURES. DOOR SWITCH AND HORN /STROBE ALARM UNIT. SEE DETAILS 14/R3 AND 15/R3. KEYNOTES: 0 0 0 n ROUTE REFRIGERATION PIPES DOWN IN CHASE. CONNECT TO SALES I I FLOOR CASES. SEE DETAILS 6/R3, 7/R3, 8 /R3, 9/R3 AND 14/R4. 0 l ° I REMS PANEL. SEE DETAIL 16/R3. 0 8 9 10 m LIQUID AND SUCTION PIPING UP THROUGH ROOF. SEE DETAIL 6/R3. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ROOF PENETRATION DETAILS. INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT ON ROOF CURBS. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CURB DETAILS. ROUTE REFRIGERATION PIPING THROUGH CEILING SPACE. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICTS AND INTERFERENCES. CEILING TILE TO BE REMOVED STORED AND REINSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. SEE DETAILS 2/R3, 4/R3 AND 7/R3. INSTALL SOLENOID VALVE ON LIQUID LINE ON EACH SIDE OF DOOR OPENING FOR SYSTEM A02. INSTALL INSULATED PARTITION BETWEEN CASES. ROUTE CASE CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING UNDER CASES TO FLOOR SINKS AND PROVIDE A 1' AIR GAP AT FLOOR SINK. INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED TRIM PIECES ON ALL CASES. SEE DETAILS 9/R3 AND 12/R3. INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED FAN BLOWER KIT. SEE DETAILS 9/R3, 12/R3 AND 14/R4. THE FAN BLOWER KIT IS 30" SHORTER THAN THE CASE IT SETS ON. INSTALL BLANK -OFF PANEL FURNISHED BY THE CASE MANUFACTURER TO SEAL OFF THE TOP OF THE CASE FROM THE END OF THE FAN KIT TO THE END OF THE CASE, BETWEEN THE CASE AND THE WALL DUAL TEMPERATURE CASE. CASE COMES FURNISHED WITH CONTROLTEC ANTI -SWEAT HEATER CONTROL, RELAYS FOR CONTROL OF THE EVAPORATOR FAN AND DEFROST AND AN EEPR VALVE. DAIRY CASE COMES FURNISHED WITH EEPR. GENERAL NOTES: A. DIMENSIONS FOR THE EVAP COILS ARE FROM THE INSIDE WALL OF THE COOLERS /FREEZERS. B. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL ERECT OWNER FURNISHED WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER PANELS AND ALL ASSOCIATED PARTS PER MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS. SEE DETAILS ON R4. C. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED TEMPERATURE SENSORS IN WALK -IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS. SEE DETAIL 1/R3. D. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER WALLS, SEE DETAILS 9/R4, 10/R4 AND 11/R4. E. EVAPORATOR COILS ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. SEE REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE ON SHEET R1. F. BLOCKING BETWEEN WALK -IN FREEZER AND EXTERIOR WALL SHALL BE PROVIDED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR, INSTALLED BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. G. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL RECEIVE, UNLOAD, SET, ALIGN AND LEVEL CASES. INCLUDING THE JOINING OF CASES, INSTALLATION OF ANY COVER PLATES AND TRIM STRIPS. H. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL REFRIGERATION PIPING AND HANGERS FROM ROOFTOP CONDENSING UNITS TO REFRIGERATED CASE CONNECTIONS. I. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL REFRIGERATION PIPING AND HANGERS FROM CONDENSING UNITS TO WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER EVAPORATOR COILS. J. UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING BY OTHERS. K. 1' GALVANIZED CONDENSATE TRAPS ON REFRIGERATED CASES SHALL BE FACTORY INSTALLED. L. THE CASE CONDENSATE LINE SIZE SHALL MATCH THE SIZE OF THE FACTORY INSTALLED CONDENSATE TRAP FOR EACH CASE. CONDENSATE LINES SHALL BE INSTALLED ACCORDING TO LOCAL PLUMBING CODES. M. INSTALL LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVE ON TOP OF CASES AND WALK -INS. N. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL MANUFACTURER PROVIDED HAIL GUARDS ON ALL OUTDOOR COMPRESSOR /CONDENSER UNITS. Scott F. Rude MECHANICAL ENGINEER Tel: (651) 644-2400 Fax: (651) 647-4120 E>frilKilggS 07 -21- REFRIGERATION SYMBOLS: A01) SYSTEM NUMBERS P5FGN P5NGN — REF —REF- - CD IDQOIt11 11Ell 1 1 CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT IDENTIFICATION EVAPORATOR COIL IDENTIFICATION LOW TEMPERATURE CASE MODEL NUMBER MEDIUM TEMPERATURE CASE MODEL NUMBER REFRIGERATION PIPING CONDENSATE PIPING PIPING UP PIPING DOWN SOLENOID VALVE OUTLINE OF CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT LOCATED ON ROOF. ARROW REPRESENTS DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW THROUGH UNIT. HUB DRAIN BY OTHERS TRENCH DRAIN BY OTHERS CASE FAN KIT AND BLANK -OFF PANEL NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS APPEAR ON ALL DRAWINGS. TARGET 20— DEC -2006 12:49 COOLER 1 145 FREEZER 1 144 10 WALK —IN COOLER/FREEZER REFRIGERATION PIPING V4" = 1' — O" 0 2' 4' 8' 12' CASE REFRIGERATION PIPING PLAN V4" 1' -0" 0 2' 4' 8' 12' REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE r9.44 "IF p FEB - 21007 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DTI nsym► JAN is 'AN d zuu. „ . . SHEET R2 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE T -0627 REMOD TITLE REFRIGERATION PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION DETAILS DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 21 DECEMBER 2006 12 -21 -06 BP -3.0 COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT I� ' 1 1 1 DRAWN BY 1 JRB, KRZ FREEZER EVAP. 1 1 CHECKED BY 1 I COOLER EVAP SFR 1. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT 1 1 1 1 1 1_ I 1 1 1 WALK -IN 1 COOLER 1 1 1 L V) (4) VIBRATION ISOLATION RUBBER PADS FURNISHED WITH EACH CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT. INSTALL ISOLATION PAD ON 4x4 UNDER EACH CORNER OF THE CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT. (TYP) DRAIN PAN y4 CONDENSATE DRAIN TO CONDENSATE PUMP. SEE DRAWING M1 FO DISCHARGE PIPING BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ►�� - ►=� t� W IWI° COOLER /FREEZER ROOF a (2) 4x4 SUPPORTS BELOW UNIT TO SPAN WIDTH OF WALK -IN (TYP) 2x4 SUPPORT TO SPAN ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALK -IN (TYP) EQ. SEE - LAN SUCTION PIPING EVAPORATOR COIL PIPING DETAIL/TEMP SENSOR LOCATION NOT TO SCALE 4x4 SUPPORTS BELOW UNIT TO SPAN WIDTH OF WALK -IN ANCHOR TO 2x4 SUPPORT 2x4 SUPPORT TO SPAN ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALK -IN 1 ANCHOR TO WALK -IN PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED BELOW TOP OF TRIM PIECE HIDDEN FROM VIEW. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER PROVIDED TRIM PIECE. 7' INDOOR AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT COOLER /FREEZER ROOF LIQUID PIPING INDOOR AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT CONDENSING UNIT SUPPORT PLAN TOP OF SALES FLOOR CASES PENETRATION THROUGH COOLER WALL . . 1. - . . . . . ---.. . ') COOLER �` ` �� Y I EVAP. COIL .T - I „2-`. I ` •J CO .�"" fS EVAP COIL EVAP COIL DRAIN PAN INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF RISER. inLo JUNCTION BOX SEAL PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. 111 REFER TO REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE FOR PIPE SIZE. 1 UNISTRUT WITH KLO -SHURE CLAMP. TEMP SENSOR UNION (TYPICAL) CO CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING INSTALLATION JUNCTION BOX r SEAL PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. REFER TO REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE FOR PIPE SIZE. 1 UNISTRUT WITH KLO-SHURE CLAMP. HAND VALVE (4) VIBRATION ISOLATION RUBBER PADS FURNISHED WITH EACH CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT. INSTALL ISOLATION PAD 1 ON 4x4 UNDER EACH CORNER OF THE CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT. SEE DETAIL 3/R3 FOR EVAPORATOR MOUNTING DETAIL UNISTRUT TEMP SENSOR PROBE SOLENOID VALVE ABOVE COOLER /FREEZER ROOF P -TRAP AT BOTTOM OF SUCTION RISER. NOT TO SCALE SEE DETAIL 14/R4 INSULATED SUCTION LINE LIQUID LINE FAN BOX BEHIND PIPING. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED FAN BLOWER KIT AND BLANK -OFF PANEL. INSTALL PER CASE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. FASTEN AND SEAL FAN KIT TO CASE. SEAL MECHANICAL INSULATION TIGHT TO TOP OF CASE WITH BEAD OF SILICONE CAULK. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 07900. CONNECT TO CASE MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED PIPING. SUCTION AND LIQUID PIPING INSIDE CASE BY CASE MANUFACTURER. SET SUCTION AND LIQUID HEADER ON TOP OF 1" THICK BY 4" WIDE STRIP OF RIGID INSULATION SPACED EVERY 4' -O" 3' SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE INTEGRAL TO CASE STRUCTURE. GYP WALL NOT TO SCALE SLOPE CONDENSATE DRAIN IN FREEZER %2' PER FOOT. COPPER CONSENSATE DRAIN PIPE IN FREEZER WRAPPED WITH HEAT TAPE AND INSULATION. INSTALL HEAT TAPE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMENDATIONS. TRAP LOCATED IN COOLER PRIOR TO CONNECTION WITH COOLER CONDENSATE DRAIN. SLOPE CONDENSATE DRAIN IN COOLER W PER FOOT. NOT TO SCALE CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF RISER SUCTION LINE TOP OF RISER DETAIL FACTORY INSTALLED DRIER FACTORY INSTALLED LIQUID LINE SIGHT GLASS INSTALL INTERMEDIATE ROOF P -TRAP ABOVE CEILING IF RISER IS ABOVE 15' -0" HIGH INSULATE LIQUID LINES PER SPECIFICATIONS. REFRIGERATION PIPING IN WALL. P -TRAP REQUIRED AT BASE OF SUCTION LINE. 22/4 LIGHT GREY CABLE TO REMS PANEL SEAL END OF CONDUIT WITH CAULK CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR REFRIGERANT LEAK J TRANSDUCER FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. MOUNT ON COVER PLATE OF SINGLE GANG BOX INSIDE WALK -IN BEHIND EVAP COIL. TYP. IN COOLER & FREEZER, SEE R2. ELECTRIC HEAT PROVIDED IN FREEZER DOOR JAMBS. REFRIGERATION PIPING RISER COOLER /FREEZER LEAK DETECTION DETAIL L-� ADJUST AND SHIM HINGE PLATES SO THAT DOOR GASKET CONTACTS DOOR FRAME WHEN DOOR IS CLOSED. VERIFY OPERATION OF DOOR FRAME HEATERS EVAP COIL 18' MAX F N COOLER / FREEZER DOOR L CEILING Y • 1 LIQUID LINE PIPE BOX SEE ARCHITECTURAL 1 J INSULATE SUCTION LINES PER SPECIFICATIONS. COOLER / FREEZER DOOR COOLER AND FREEZER DOOR DETAIL 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO METAL STUD (TYPICAL) APPROVED PIPE HANGER, SEE DETAIL 4/R3 PROVIDE PROTECTIVE JACKETING OVER INSULATION FOR EXTERIOR PIPING PER SPECIFICATIONS. INVERTED TRAP REQUIRED AT TOP OF SUCTION RISER MOUNT LIQUID LINE SOLENOID ON TOP OF CASE BEFORE FIRST TAKE -OFF. SUCTION LINE CONNECTION TOP TOP OF CASE (TYPICAL) LIQUID LINE CONNECTION AT TOP OF CASE (TYPICAL) Q 18/4 YELLOW CABLE TO REMS PANEL SEAL END OF CONDUIT WITH CAULK MOUNT REFRIGERANT LEAK INDICATOR PANEL ON INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER. MOUNT ABOVE DOOR. VERIFY THAT REFRIG. LEAK INDICATOR ALARM FLASHES & BUZZES WHEN REFRIG. IS PRESENT. VERIFY HEATED VENTS OPERATE C PROPERLY. INSTALL DOOR OPEN ALARM. MOUNT MAGNETIC DOOR SWITCH. YELLOW LIGHT SHALL BLINK CONSTANTLY WHEN DOOR IS OPEN. YELLOW LIGHT SHALL BE OFF WHEN THE DOOR IS SHUT. INSTALL & ADJUST CLOSER MECHANISM VERIFY TEMPERATURE READING AND ADJUST THERMOMETER TO CORRECT READING. ADJUST LATCH AND STRIKE MECHANISM SO THAT DOOR WILL LATCH CLOSED. ADJUST DOOR CLOSING MECHANISM OR HINGES TO PULL /PUSH DOOR CLOSE FROM OPEN POSITION. AJUST DOOR SWEEP TO MAKE CONTACT WITH FLOOR SLAB. ELECTRIC HEAT PROVIDED IN BOTTOM OF FREEZER DOOR. ALL WORK ON SHEETS Rl, R2, R3, R4 & R5 SHALL BE COMPLETED BY TARGET APPROVED REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores \T -0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627r003.dgn Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR REFRIGERATION LEAK INDICATORS FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. MOUNT ON THE INSIDE & OUTSIDE OF THE FREEZER /COOLER ABOVE THE DOOR (MINIMUM T-6' AFF) TYP. AT COOLER & FREEZER. SEE R2. NOTE: WALK -THRU TYPE COOLER /FREEZER WILL REQUIRE AN ADDITIONAL FREEZER LEAK INDICATOR ON THE OUTSIDE OF THE COOLER. INSIDE OF COOLER OR FREEZER NOTES: 1. LOW VOTAGE WIRING CONNECTIONS BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 2. LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND CONDUIT INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 3. REFRIGERATION LEAK INDICATOR AND LEAK TRANSDUCER ARE FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR AND INSTALLED BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 4. SEAL ALL COOLER /FREEZER PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE SEAL PIPING PENETRATIONS WATER TIGHT. I I amm._ �t� � � ` t: irr BIM II SEAL PENETRATIONS WITH SILICONE CAULK REFER TO SECTION 07900 PROVIDE PROTECTIVE JACKETING OVER INSULATION FOR EXTERIOR PIPING PER SPECIFICATIONS. NOTE: DO NOT USE SPRAY FOAM MATERIALS TO SEAL PENETRATIONS. - X11 ..�. ; ��.��.�� .rte.•... �'Iilr CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT TRAP AT BOTTOM OF SUCTION RISER 1'-0' CEILING FINISHED FLOOR FREEZER FREEZER FREEZER DOOR EVAPORATOR COIL SUPPORT SLOPE REFRIGERATION PIPING 1' IN 20' TOWARD CONDENSING UNIT ON ROOF. REFRIGERANT PIPING FOR SALES FLOOR CASES @ WALL FACTORY INSTALLED TEMPERATURE SENSOR IN THE DISCHARGE AIR GRILLE. FACTORY INSTALLED TEMPERATURE SENSOR IN THE RETURN AIR GRILLES CASE SENSOR DETAIL 22/4 LIGHT GREY CONTROL CABLE TO PANEL REMS2 ON TOP OF WALK -IN. SEAL END 0 CONDUIT WITH CAULK CONDUIT UP TO TOP OF W LK -IN 11 NOTES: 1. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONNECTIONS BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 2. HORN /STROBE DOOR SWITCH UNIT, LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND CONDUIT INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 20- DEC -2006 12:50 PIPE BOX COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF SUCTION RISER REFRIGERANT PIPING HANGER -SEE DETAIL 4/R3 REFRIGERANT PIPING TO BE INSTALLED IN EXISTING WALL. CUTTING AND PATCHING BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. FRONT 3. FOR FREEZER AND COOLER, DOOR SWITCH WILL CLOSE LIQUID LINE SOLENOID AND SHUT OFF THE EVAPORATOR FAN WHEN DOOR IS OPEN, ALSO WHEN THE DOOR IS OPEN STROBE LIGHT WILL FLASH. 4. SEAL ALL COOLER /FREEZER PANEL PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. REFRIGERATION PIPING RISERS TRAP AT BOTTOM OF SUCTION RISER 120V AC IN CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HORN /STROBE DOOR SWITCH UNIT FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. 22/4 LIGHT GREY CONTROL CABLE TO PANEL REMS2 ON TOP OF WALK -IN. CONDUIT UP TO TOP OF WALK -IN REAR 1% UNISTRUT (TYP) %NUTS & WASHERS y4' WOOD BLOCK 4x4 TO SPAN MIN 2 PANEL JOINTS 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO HANGER ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL) 8 ' NUT ' WASHER /s' ALL THREAD FACTORY BRACKET (TYP) NOT TO SCALE CASES NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE COOLER DOOR WALK -IN FREEZER AND COOLER DOOR SWITCWALARM DETAIL INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF SUCTION RISER ROOF CEILING SEE DETAIL 9/R3 FOR CONTINUATION 120V AC IN CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SEAL END OF CONDUIT WITH CAULK HORN /STROBE DOOR SWITCH UNIT FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. NOT TO SCALE WALK -IN COOLER BAR JOIST - r° END VIEW ROOF DECK BEAM CLAMP SHALL BE ATTACHED WITHIN 6' OF THE BAR JOIST PANEL POINT. ATTACHED TO TOP CHORD OF BAR JOIST BEAM CLAMP 3 /8' 'ALL - THREAD' HANGER ROD 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUE TO METAL STUD (TYPICAL) 2'x6' METAL STUD TRIM PIECE FRONT REFRIGERATION - PIPING REFRIGERATION PIPE HANGER DETAIL WALL RISER SUPPORT DETAIL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER PROVIDED TRIM PIECE. 1' PARTITION BETWEEN CASES 7' gg,„ CASE FAN BLOWER DETAIL - CASE TO WALL CASE • CASE PLAN VIEW CASE FAN KIT REMS -X PANEL (SEE PLANS) CASE FAN KIT I' NUT ' WASHER (TYPICAL) 2'x6' METAL STUD CUT TO LENGTH 1 %' UNISTRU SUPPORT REFRIGERATION PIPES 3 ' NUT ' WASHER (TYPICAL) 3 /8' WASHER 2 -3/8' NUTS — 1 %' UNISTRUT CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED FAN BLOWER KIT TO VENTILATE SPACE ® BETWEEN WALL AND BACK OF CASE. INSTALL PER CASE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. FASTEN AND SEAL FAN KIT TO CASE. INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED END TRIM PLATE ON BOTH ENDS OF LINEUP. GYP WALL FINISHED FLOOR STRUT MOUNTED CLAMP REFRIGERATION PIPING NOT TO SCALE INSULATION COUPLING OR INSULATED INSERT. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 15620. STRUT MOUNTED TO ARCHITECTURAL STEEL STUD. NOT TO SCALE REFRIGERATION PIPING 3' SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE INTEGRAL TO CASE STRUCTURE. INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER 7 .---- FURNISHED END KICK PLATTE EXTENSION. WALL 3' SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE INTEGRAL TO CASE STRUCTURE BELOW. BACK OF CASE BELOW INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED 30' BLANK -OFF PANEL TO BLOCK OFF SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE FROM FAN KIT TO END OF CASE. PROVIDE CUT -OUTS FOR PIPING OR WIRING CONNECTIONS. REFRIGERATION PIPING CONNECTION AT THE TOP OF THE CASE. REFRIGERATION CONTROL PANEL LOCATION DETAIL INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED BLANK -OFF PANEL TO BLOCK OFF SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE FROM FAN KIT TO END OF CASE, LAST UPDATE: 12-15-05 NOT TO SCALE CODE COMP FOR LIANCE pniphrtli FEB ° 2 2007 '4 Of NOT TO IS� C.Q�' ��� Tukwila ONTSTON w, l a SHEET R3 I 1 WALK -IN 1 FREEZER T 1 1 1 1 r AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT I� ' 1 1 1 1 FREEZER EVAP. 1 1 1 I COOLER EVAP 1. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT 1 1 1 1 1 1_ I 1 1 1 WALK -IN 1 COOLER 1 1 1 L V) (4) VIBRATION ISOLATION RUBBER PADS FURNISHED WITH EACH CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT. INSTALL ISOLATION PAD ON 4x4 UNDER EACH CORNER OF THE CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT. (TYP) DRAIN PAN y4 CONDENSATE DRAIN TO CONDENSATE PUMP. SEE DRAWING M1 FO DISCHARGE PIPING BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ►�� - ►=� t� W IWI° COOLER /FREEZER ROOF a (2) 4x4 SUPPORTS BELOW UNIT TO SPAN WIDTH OF WALK -IN (TYP) 2x4 SUPPORT TO SPAN ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALK -IN (TYP) EQ. SEE - LAN SUCTION PIPING EVAPORATOR COIL PIPING DETAIL/TEMP SENSOR LOCATION NOT TO SCALE 4x4 SUPPORTS BELOW UNIT TO SPAN WIDTH OF WALK -IN ANCHOR TO 2x4 SUPPORT 2x4 SUPPORT TO SPAN ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALK -IN 1 ANCHOR TO WALK -IN PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED BELOW TOP OF TRIM PIECE HIDDEN FROM VIEW. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER PROVIDED TRIM PIECE. 7' INDOOR AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT COOLER /FREEZER ROOF LIQUID PIPING INDOOR AIR COOLED CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT CONDENSING UNIT SUPPORT PLAN TOP OF SALES FLOOR CASES PENETRATION THROUGH COOLER WALL . . 1. - . . . . . ---.. . ') COOLER �` ` �� Y I EVAP. COIL .T - I „2-`. I ` •J CO .�"" fS EVAP COIL EVAP COIL DRAIN PAN INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF RISER. inLo JUNCTION BOX SEAL PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. 111 REFER TO REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE FOR PIPE SIZE. 1 UNISTRUT WITH KLO -SHURE CLAMP. TEMP SENSOR UNION (TYPICAL) CO CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING INSTALLATION JUNCTION BOX r SEAL PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. REFER TO REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE FOR PIPE SIZE. 1 UNISTRUT WITH KLO-SHURE CLAMP. HAND VALVE (4) VIBRATION ISOLATION RUBBER PADS FURNISHED WITH EACH CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT. INSTALL ISOLATION PAD 1 ON 4x4 UNDER EACH CORNER OF THE CONDENSER /COMPRESSOR UNIT. SEE DETAIL 3/R3 FOR EVAPORATOR MOUNTING DETAIL UNISTRUT TEMP SENSOR PROBE SOLENOID VALVE ABOVE COOLER /FREEZER ROOF P -TRAP AT BOTTOM OF SUCTION RISER. NOT TO SCALE SEE DETAIL 14/R4 INSULATED SUCTION LINE LIQUID LINE FAN BOX BEHIND PIPING. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED FAN BLOWER KIT AND BLANK -OFF PANEL. INSTALL PER CASE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. FASTEN AND SEAL FAN KIT TO CASE. SEAL MECHANICAL INSULATION TIGHT TO TOP OF CASE WITH BEAD OF SILICONE CAULK. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 07900. CONNECT TO CASE MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED PIPING. SUCTION AND LIQUID PIPING INSIDE CASE BY CASE MANUFACTURER. SET SUCTION AND LIQUID HEADER ON TOP OF 1" THICK BY 4" WIDE STRIP OF RIGID INSULATION SPACED EVERY 4' -O" 3' SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE INTEGRAL TO CASE STRUCTURE. GYP WALL NOT TO SCALE SLOPE CONDENSATE DRAIN IN FREEZER %2' PER FOOT. COPPER CONSENSATE DRAIN PIPE IN FREEZER WRAPPED WITH HEAT TAPE AND INSULATION. INSTALL HEAT TAPE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMENDATIONS. TRAP LOCATED IN COOLER PRIOR TO CONNECTION WITH COOLER CONDENSATE DRAIN. SLOPE CONDENSATE DRAIN IN COOLER W PER FOOT. NOT TO SCALE CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF RISER SUCTION LINE TOP OF RISER DETAIL FACTORY INSTALLED DRIER FACTORY INSTALLED LIQUID LINE SIGHT GLASS INSTALL INTERMEDIATE ROOF P -TRAP ABOVE CEILING IF RISER IS ABOVE 15' -0" HIGH INSULATE LIQUID LINES PER SPECIFICATIONS. REFRIGERATION PIPING IN WALL. P -TRAP REQUIRED AT BASE OF SUCTION LINE. 22/4 LIGHT GREY CABLE TO REMS PANEL SEAL END OF CONDUIT WITH CAULK CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR REFRIGERANT LEAK J TRANSDUCER FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. MOUNT ON COVER PLATE OF SINGLE GANG BOX INSIDE WALK -IN BEHIND EVAP COIL. TYP. IN COOLER & FREEZER, SEE R2. ELECTRIC HEAT PROVIDED IN FREEZER DOOR JAMBS. REFRIGERATION PIPING RISER COOLER /FREEZER LEAK DETECTION DETAIL L-� ADJUST AND SHIM HINGE PLATES SO THAT DOOR GASKET CONTACTS DOOR FRAME WHEN DOOR IS CLOSED. VERIFY OPERATION OF DOOR FRAME HEATERS EVAP COIL 18' MAX F N COOLER / FREEZER DOOR L CEILING Y • 1 LIQUID LINE PIPE BOX SEE ARCHITECTURAL 1 J INSULATE SUCTION LINES PER SPECIFICATIONS. COOLER / FREEZER DOOR COOLER AND FREEZER DOOR DETAIL 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO METAL STUD (TYPICAL) APPROVED PIPE HANGER, SEE DETAIL 4/R3 PROVIDE PROTECTIVE JACKETING OVER INSULATION FOR EXTERIOR PIPING PER SPECIFICATIONS. INVERTED TRAP REQUIRED AT TOP OF SUCTION RISER MOUNT LIQUID LINE SOLENOID ON TOP OF CASE BEFORE FIRST TAKE -OFF. SUCTION LINE CONNECTION TOP TOP OF CASE (TYPICAL) LIQUID LINE CONNECTION AT TOP OF CASE (TYPICAL) Q 18/4 YELLOW CABLE TO REMS PANEL SEAL END OF CONDUIT WITH CAULK MOUNT REFRIGERANT LEAK INDICATOR PANEL ON INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER. MOUNT ABOVE DOOR. VERIFY THAT REFRIG. LEAK INDICATOR ALARM FLASHES & BUZZES WHEN REFRIG. IS PRESENT. VERIFY HEATED VENTS OPERATE C PROPERLY. INSTALL DOOR OPEN ALARM. MOUNT MAGNETIC DOOR SWITCH. YELLOW LIGHT SHALL BLINK CONSTANTLY WHEN DOOR IS OPEN. YELLOW LIGHT SHALL BE OFF WHEN THE DOOR IS SHUT. INSTALL & ADJUST CLOSER MECHANISM VERIFY TEMPERATURE READING AND ADJUST THERMOMETER TO CORRECT READING. ADJUST LATCH AND STRIKE MECHANISM SO THAT DOOR WILL LATCH CLOSED. ADJUST DOOR CLOSING MECHANISM OR HINGES TO PULL /PUSH DOOR CLOSE FROM OPEN POSITION. AJUST DOOR SWEEP TO MAKE CONTACT WITH FLOOR SLAB. ELECTRIC HEAT PROVIDED IN BOTTOM OF FREEZER DOOR. ALL WORK ON SHEETS Rl, R2, R3, R4 & R5 SHALL BE COMPLETED BY TARGET APPROVED REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores \T -0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627r003.dgn Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR REFRIGERATION LEAK INDICATORS FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. MOUNT ON THE INSIDE & OUTSIDE OF THE FREEZER /COOLER ABOVE THE DOOR (MINIMUM T-6' AFF) TYP. AT COOLER & FREEZER. SEE R2. NOTE: WALK -THRU TYPE COOLER /FREEZER WILL REQUIRE AN ADDITIONAL FREEZER LEAK INDICATOR ON THE OUTSIDE OF THE COOLER. INSIDE OF COOLER OR FREEZER NOTES: 1. LOW VOTAGE WIRING CONNECTIONS BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 2. LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND CONDUIT INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 3. REFRIGERATION LEAK INDICATOR AND LEAK TRANSDUCER ARE FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR AND INSTALLED BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 4. SEAL ALL COOLER /FREEZER PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE SEAL PIPING PENETRATIONS WATER TIGHT. I I amm._ �t� � � ` t: irr BIM II SEAL PENETRATIONS WITH SILICONE CAULK REFER TO SECTION 07900 PROVIDE PROTECTIVE JACKETING OVER INSULATION FOR EXTERIOR PIPING PER SPECIFICATIONS. NOTE: DO NOT USE SPRAY FOAM MATERIALS TO SEAL PENETRATIONS. - X11 ..�. ; ��.��.�� .rte.•... �'Iilr CONDENSER/ COMPRESSOR UNIT TRAP AT BOTTOM OF SUCTION RISER 1'-0' CEILING FINISHED FLOOR FREEZER FREEZER FREEZER DOOR EVAPORATOR COIL SUPPORT SLOPE REFRIGERATION PIPING 1' IN 20' TOWARD CONDENSING UNIT ON ROOF. REFRIGERANT PIPING FOR SALES FLOOR CASES @ WALL FACTORY INSTALLED TEMPERATURE SENSOR IN THE DISCHARGE AIR GRILLE. FACTORY INSTALLED TEMPERATURE SENSOR IN THE RETURN AIR GRILLES CASE SENSOR DETAIL 22/4 LIGHT GREY CONTROL CABLE TO PANEL REMS2 ON TOP OF WALK -IN. SEAL END 0 CONDUIT WITH CAULK CONDUIT UP TO TOP OF W LK -IN 11 NOTES: 1. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONNECTIONS BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 2. HORN /STROBE DOOR SWITCH UNIT, LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND CONDUIT INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 20- DEC -2006 12:50 PIPE BOX COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF SUCTION RISER REFRIGERANT PIPING HANGER -SEE DETAIL 4/R3 REFRIGERANT PIPING TO BE INSTALLED IN EXISTING WALL. CUTTING AND PATCHING BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. FRONT 3. FOR FREEZER AND COOLER, DOOR SWITCH WILL CLOSE LIQUID LINE SOLENOID AND SHUT OFF THE EVAPORATOR FAN WHEN DOOR IS OPEN, ALSO WHEN THE DOOR IS OPEN STROBE LIGHT WILL FLASH. 4. SEAL ALL COOLER /FREEZER PANEL PENETRATIONS. SEE DETAIL 9/R4. REFRIGERATION PIPING RISERS TRAP AT BOTTOM OF SUCTION RISER 120V AC IN CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HORN /STROBE DOOR SWITCH UNIT FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. 22/4 LIGHT GREY CONTROL CABLE TO PANEL REMS2 ON TOP OF WALK -IN. CONDUIT UP TO TOP OF WALK -IN REAR 1% UNISTRUT (TYP) %NUTS & WASHERS y4' WOOD BLOCK 4x4 TO SPAN MIN 2 PANEL JOINTS 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO HANGER ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL) 8 ' NUT ' WASHER /s' ALL THREAD FACTORY BRACKET (TYP) NOT TO SCALE CASES NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE COOLER DOOR WALK -IN FREEZER AND COOLER DOOR SWITCWALARM DETAIL INVERTED P -TRAP AT TOP OF SUCTION RISER ROOF CEILING SEE DETAIL 9/R3 FOR CONTINUATION 120V AC IN CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SEAL END OF CONDUIT WITH CAULK HORN /STROBE DOOR SWITCH UNIT FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. NOT TO SCALE WALK -IN COOLER BAR JOIST - r° END VIEW ROOF DECK BEAM CLAMP SHALL BE ATTACHED WITHIN 6' OF THE BAR JOIST PANEL POINT. ATTACHED TO TOP CHORD OF BAR JOIST BEAM CLAMP 3 /8' 'ALL - THREAD' HANGER ROD 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUE TO METAL STUD (TYPICAL) 2'x6' METAL STUD TRIM PIECE FRONT REFRIGERATION - PIPING REFRIGERATION PIPE HANGER DETAIL WALL RISER SUPPORT DETAIL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER PROVIDED TRIM PIECE. 1' PARTITION BETWEEN CASES 7' gg,„ CASE FAN BLOWER DETAIL - CASE TO WALL CASE • CASE PLAN VIEW CASE FAN KIT REMS -X PANEL (SEE PLANS) CASE FAN KIT I' NUT ' WASHER (TYPICAL) 2'x6' METAL STUD CUT TO LENGTH 1 %' UNISTRU SUPPORT REFRIGERATION PIPES 3 ' NUT ' WASHER (TYPICAL) 3 /8' WASHER 2 -3/8' NUTS — 1 %' UNISTRUT CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED FAN BLOWER KIT TO VENTILATE SPACE ® BETWEEN WALL AND BACK OF CASE. INSTALL PER CASE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. FASTEN AND SEAL FAN KIT TO CASE. INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED END TRIM PLATE ON BOTH ENDS OF LINEUP. GYP WALL FINISHED FLOOR STRUT MOUNTED CLAMP REFRIGERATION PIPING NOT TO SCALE INSULATION COUPLING OR INSULATED INSERT. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 15620. STRUT MOUNTED TO ARCHITECTURAL STEEL STUD. NOT TO SCALE REFRIGERATION PIPING 3' SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE INTEGRAL TO CASE STRUCTURE. INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER 7 .---- FURNISHED END KICK PLATTE EXTENSION. WALL 3' SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE INTEGRAL TO CASE STRUCTURE BELOW. BACK OF CASE BELOW INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED 30' BLANK -OFF PANEL TO BLOCK OFF SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE FROM FAN KIT TO END OF CASE. PROVIDE CUT -OUTS FOR PIPING OR WIRING CONNECTIONS. REFRIGERATION PIPING CONNECTION AT THE TOP OF THE CASE. REFRIGERATION CONTROL PANEL LOCATION DETAIL INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED BLANK -OFF PANEL TO BLOCK OFF SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND CASE FROM FAN KIT TO END OF CASE, LAST UPDATE: 12-15-05 NOT TO SCALE CODE COMP FOR LIANCE pniphrtli FEB ° 2 2007 '4 Of NOT TO IS� C.Q�' ��� Tukwila ONTSTON w, l a SHEET R3 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER,WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE T- O627REMOD TITLE REFRIGERATION PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION DETAILS DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 21 DECEMBER 2006 12 - 21 - 06 BP - 3.0 COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY ^ LIQUID LINE SOLENOID S .. JRB, KRZ S CHECKED BY - F . : SFR - - - 7 SEE DETAIL 9/R3. d.22 gtr Fie SUMP PUMP/ BASIN SEE 5/M2 1O INTERIOR SLNT -4 INPUT /OUTPUT CABLING BY OTHERS. SEE 3/R5 FOR DETAILS. - r C EXTERIOR SLNT -4 CONTROL FLOAT AND ALARM FLOAT 22/4 CABLE. CONNECTION BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. FROM FLOATS TO REMS -PC PANEL ON TOP OF GROCERY CASES. SEE DETAIL 16/R3. FINISHED FLOOR TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX:(612) 761 -3322 BOX INSIDE DIMENSION LINE 1 /2 1 DIA. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF BUTYL CAULK BOX OUTSIDE DIMENSION LINE CHALK LINE A / V INSULATED PANEL -- FLOOR TO WALL PANEL JOINT @ WALK -IN INSULATED PANEL 1 \1 \ \\ \111 \` INSULATED PANEL PANEL PIPE PENETRATION 11 1 1 1I1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 111 tI) SUMP PUMP CONTROL WIRING DETAIL 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores\T-0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627r004.dgn DIM. A & B = BOX O.D. - BOX THICKNESS DIM.0 = BOX THICKNESS / 2 NOT TO SCALE COOLER NOT TO SCALE EXTERIOR SLNT -4 PIPE INSULATION TO BE CONTINUOUS THROUGH PENETRATION CUT HOLES /8' LARGER THAN O.D. O 0.D. OF INSULATED PIPE NOT TO SCALE PUMP POWER CABLES. CONNECTION BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. FROM PUMPS TO REMS -PC PANEL ON TOP OF GROCERY STYLE CASES. SEE DETAIL 16/R3. Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 NOT TO SCALE Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER INTERIOIj FASTENER (TYP.) KEY -WAY REINFORCEMENT ANGLE SLNT -4 ' 0 - •• \ °F i 5 i 233% 4, G 'STEaG q •` • ,� ° NM o f w�. :..:71 x 1 E 07 -21- 1/ CORNER POINT 3' -O" 6' -O' 12' -0' 24' -O' 48' -0' O \ . h ,0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • NOT USED -- -I 1 PANEL. FASTEN AND SEAL TO CASE AND WALL. PROVIDE CUT -OUTS FOR PIPING OR WIRING CONNECTIONS. TYPICAL. • • Op '\°-. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4' -0' 8' -0' • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 1 • • • • • 1 / 1 1 1 1 -' • • • .' • • • • • • LAYOUT DIMENSIONS CASE PIPING DETAIL O - O - \p ? - • • .' • • • • • • 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO HANGER ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL) • • • • • • CONNECT TO LIQUID AND SUCTION PIPING CONNECTIONS AT THE TOP OF THE CASE. TYPICAL. rill • • • RASE WALL LINE • • • • • • P PP- _ 1 • • • • • • • • FAN KIT IS 30' SHORTER THAN THE CASE. INSTALL PER CASE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. FASTEN AND SEAL FAN KIT TO CASE. TYPICAL. • • FIRE SPRINKLER PENETRATION AT WALK -IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS gy p-,. Op ' 9,o, • • • • - • • • • • • • • • 1 1 / 1 1 • • • 16' -0' • • • • • • • • SEAL INSULATION TO INSULATED PANEL AND PIPING WITH SILICONE CAULK REFER TO SECTION 07900 T T T INSULATED CEILING PANE \/ NOTE: DO NOT USE SPRAY FOAM MATERIALS TO SEAL PENETRATIONS. • • • • • 1 1 1 1 • • ALL WORK ON SHEETS Rl, R2, R3, R4 & R5 SHALL BE COMPLETED BY TARGET APPROVED REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. • • • • 32' -0' • • • • TARGET • • • NOT TO SCALE • NOT TO SCALE • • NOT TO SCALE SET SUCTION AND LIQUID PIPING ON TOP OF 1" THICK BY 4" WIDE STRIP OF RIGID INSULATION SPACED EVERY 4' -O" ON TOP OF CASE. TYPICAL. • • • 64` -0' • • INSTALLCASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED TRIM PIECE ON TOP OF CASE. - -- I - - - - 1 ' 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 , NOT TO SCALE 0 Q II • ' 1 0 11 4 ' A D I 1 EXTERIOR SLNT -4 FINISHED FLOOR KEY -WAY DETAIL 1 ' DIA. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF BUTYL CAULK FLOOR TO WALL PANEL JOINT @ WALK -IN FREEZER NOT TO SCALE SEAL INSULATION TO INSULATED PANEL AND PIPING WITH SILICONE CAULK REFER TO SECTION 07900 NOT USED 20 —DEC -2006 12:50 r� REINFORCEMEN A KEY -WAY 2OGA. GALV. 7 / " x REINFORCEMENT ANGLE KEY -WAY CHALK LINE I FLEXIBLE AS LPER R OMERIC SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO HANGER ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL) COOLER /FREEZER CONDUIT PENETRATION NOT TO SCALE INTERIOR FASTENER (TYP.) SLNT -4 NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE KEY -WAY REINFORCEMENT ANGLE INSULATED PANEL TYPICAL PANEL TO PANEL JOINT CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SILICONE CAULK REFER SECTION 07900 FILL VOID SPACE COMPLETEL WITH FOAM IF GAP EXCEEDS 14'• TRIM OFF EXCESS FOAM THA SQUEEZES OUT THE TOP. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 15615. CONTINUOUS WALL PANEL PANEL GASKET EXTERIOR CEILING TO WALL PANEL JOINT 4. NOT USED TOP OF WALK -IN FREEZER /COOLER EVAPORATOR COIL DEFROST --� TERMINATION SENSOR INSTALLED ON COIL BY EVAPORATOR COIL MANUFACTURER. THE SENSOR WIRE IS COILED UP IN THE ELECTRICAL BOX. NOTES: 1 ' THE DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR IS INSTALLED ON ALL EVAPORATOR COILS THAT USE ELECTRIC DEFROST. 2. LOW VOLTAGE CABLE INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 3. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONNECTIONS BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 4. SEAL ALL COOLER /FREEZER PENETRATIONS. EVAP. COIL EXTERIOR INTERIOR WALL PANEL ti VINYL GASKET 1 I 'DIA. CONTINUOUS Ye OF BUTYL CAULK l/ ' DIA. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF BUTYL CAULK VINYL GASKET • INSULATED PANEL CEILING PANEL -JUNCTION BOX TEMPERATURE PROBE WALK -IN EVAPORATOR COIL ELECTRIC DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PANEL GASKET INTERIOR NOT TO SCALE REVIEWED FOR ODE COMPLIANCE FEB -• 2 ZDD/ Of ThkLNIIa BUILDING Ott/T'T(+u NOT TO SCALE LIGHT GREY 22/4 CONTROL CABLE TO REMS PANEL. CONNECT CONTROL CABLE TO THE DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR WIRE COILED IN THE EVAPORATOR COIL ELECTRICAL BOX. NOT TO SCALE 3 /8' LAG BOLTS AND WASHERS a 24' 0.C. CEILING PANEL 15 FURNISHED WITH PRE - DRILLED HOLES. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SEALANT SLNT -4 AT CEILING TO WALL JOINT. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR SEALANT TYPE SLNT -4. UAONITLAULK ci f , 3 ••� PE's SHEET R4 ti LIQUID LINE SOLENOID S .. S .411 - F . : - - - - 7 SEE DETAIL 9/R3. d.22 gtr Fie — ,7 — — 1 - --r�9— — — — — J n INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER INSTALL CASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED 30' LONG BLANK -OFF FURNISHED FAN BLOWER KIT. REFRIGERATION PIPING DOWN IN WALL (OR CHASE, SEE PLAN) Tn TnP CIF cest=_ SUMP PUMP/ BASIN SEE 5/M2 1O INTERIOR SLNT -4 INPUT /OUTPUT CABLING BY OTHERS. SEE 3/R5 FOR DETAILS. - r C EXTERIOR SLNT -4 CONTROL FLOAT AND ALARM FLOAT 22/4 CABLE. CONNECTION BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. FROM FLOATS TO REMS -PC PANEL ON TOP OF GROCERY CASES. SEE DETAIL 16/R3. FINISHED FLOOR TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX:(612) 761 -3322 BOX INSIDE DIMENSION LINE 1 /2 1 DIA. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF BUTYL CAULK BOX OUTSIDE DIMENSION LINE CHALK LINE A / V INSULATED PANEL -- FLOOR TO WALL PANEL JOINT @ WALK -IN INSULATED PANEL 1 \1 \ \\ \111 \` INSULATED PANEL PANEL PIPE PENETRATION 11 1 1 1I1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 111 tI) SUMP PUMP CONTROL WIRING DETAIL 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores\T-0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627r004.dgn DIM. A & B = BOX O.D. - BOX THICKNESS DIM.0 = BOX THICKNESS / 2 NOT TO SCALE COOLER NOT TO SCALE EXTERIOR SLNT -4 PIPE INSULATION TO BE CONTINUOUS THROUGH PENETRATION CUT HOLES /8' LARGER THAN O.D. O 0.D. OF INSULATED PIPE NOT TO SCALE PUMP POWER CABLES. CONNECTION BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. FROM PUMPS TO REMS -PC PANEL ON TOP OF GROCERY STYLE CASES. SEE DETAIL 16/R3. Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 NOT TO SCALE Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER INTERIOIj FASTENER (TYP.) KEY -WAY REINFORCEMENT ANGLE SLNT -4 ' 0 - •• \ °F i 5 i 233% 4, G 'STEaG q •` • ,� ° NM o f w�. :..:71 x 1 E 07 -21- 1/ CORNER POINT 3' -O" 6' -O' 12' -0' 24' -O' 48' -0' O \ . h ,0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • NOT USED -- -I 1 PANEL. FASTEN AND SEAL TO CASE AND WALL. PROVIDE CUT -OUTS FOR PIPING OR WIRING CONNECTIONS. TYPICAL. • • Op '\°-. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4' -0' 8' -0' • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 1 • • • • • 1 / 1 1 1 1 -' • • • .' • • • • • • LAYOUT DIMENSIONS CASE PIPING DETAIL O - O - \p ? - • • .' • • • • • • 3 /8' FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION, AS PER SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO HANGER ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL) • • • • • • CONNECT TO LIQUID AND SUCTION PIPING CONNECTIONS AT THE TOP OF THE CASE. TYPICAL. rill • • • RASE WALL LINE • • • • • • P PP- _ 1 • • • • • • • • FAN KIT IS 30' SHORTER THAN THE CASE. INSTALL PER CASE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. FASTEN AND SEAL FAN KIT TO CASE. TYPICAL. • • FIRE SPRINKLER PENETRATION AT WALK -IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS gy p-,. Op ' 9,o, • • • • - • • • • • • • • • 1 1 / 1 1 • • • 16' -0' • • • • • • • • SEAL INSULATION TO INSULATED PANEL AND PIPING WITH SILICONE CAULK REFER TO SECTION 07900 T T T INSULATED CEILING PANE \/ NOTE: DO NOT USE SPRAY FOAM MATERIALS TO SEAL PENETRATIONS. • • • • • 1 1 1 1 • • ALL WORK ON SHEETS Rl, R2, R3, R4 & R5 SHALL BE COMPLETED BY TARGET APPROVED REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. • • • • 32' -0' • • • • TARGET • • • NOT TO SCALE • NOT TO SCALE • • NOT TO SCALE SET SUCTION AND LIQUID PIPING ON TOP OF 1" THICK BY 4" WIDE STRIP OF RIGID INSULATION SPACED EVERY 4' -O" ON TOP OF CASE. TYPICAL. • • • 64` -0' • • INSTALLCASE MANUFACTURER FURNISHED TRIM PIECE ON TOP OF CASE. - -- I - - - - 1 ' 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 , NOT TO SCALE 0 Q II • ' 1 0 11 4 ' A D I 1 EXTERIOR SLNT -4 FINISHED FLOOR KEY -WAY DETAIL 1 ' DIA. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF BUTYL CAULK FLOOR TO WALL PANEL JOINT @ WALK -IN FREEZER NOT TO SCALE SEAL INSULATION TO INSULATED PANEL AND PIPING WITH SILICONE CAULK REFER TO SECTION 07900 NOT USED 20 —DEC -2006 12:50 r� REINFORCEMEN A KEY -WAY 2OGA. GALV. 7 / " x REINFORCEMENT ANGLE KEY -WAY CHALK LINE I FLEXIBLE AS LPER R OMERIC SPECIFICATION 15620 GLUED TO HANGER ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL) COOLER /FREEZER CONDUIT PENETRATION NOT TO SCALE INTERIOR FASTENER (TYP.) SLNT -4 NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE KEY -WAY REINFORCEMENT ANGLE INSULATED PANEL TYPICAL PANEL TO PANEL JOINT CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SILICONE CAULK REFER SECTION 07900 FILL VOID SPACE COMPLETEL WITH FOAM IF GAP EXCEEDS 14'• TRIM OFF EXCESS FOAM THA SQUEEZES OUT THE TOP. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 15615. CONTINUOUS WALL PANEL PANEL GASKET EXTERIOR CEILING TO WALL PANEL JOINT 4. NOT USED TOP OF WALK -IN FREEZER /COOLER EVAPORATOR COIL DEFROST --� TERMINATION SENSOR INSTALLED ON COIL BY EVAPORATOR COIL MANUFACTURER. THE SENSOR WIRE IS COILED UP IN THE ELECTRICAL BOX. NOTES: 1 ' THE DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR IS INSTALLED ON ALL EVAPORATOR COILS THAT USE ELECTRIC DEFROST. 2. LOW VOLTAGE CABLE INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 3. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONNECTIONS BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. 4. SEAL ALL COOLER /FREEZER PENETRATIONS. EVAP. COIL EXTERIOR INTERIOR WALL PANEL ti VINYL GASKET 1 I 'DIA. CONTINUOUS Ye OF BUTYL CAULK l/ ' DIA. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF BUTYL CAULK VINYL GASKET • INSULATED PANEL CEILING PANEL -JUNCTION BOX TEMPERATURE PROBE WALK -IN EVAPORATOR COIL ELECTRIC DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PANEL GASKET INTERIOR NOT TO SCALE REVIEWED FOR ODE COMPLIANCE FEB -• 2 ZDD/ Of ThkLNIIa BUILDING Ott/T'T(+u NOT TO SCALE LIGHT GREY 22/4 CONTROL CABLE TO REMS PANEL. CONNECT CONTROL CABLE TO THE DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR WIRE COILED IN THE EVAPORATOR COIL ELECTRICAL BOX. NOT TO SCALE 3 /8' LAG BOLTS AND WASHERS a 24' 0.C. CEILING PANEL 15 FURNISHED WITH PRE - DRILLED HOLES. CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SEALANT SLNT -4 AT CEILING TO WALL JOINT. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR SEALANT TYPE SLNT -4. UAONITLAULK ci f , 3 ••� PE's SHEET R4 REMS -3 (M168, M168, MESR8) INPUT TERMINATIONS SYSTEM * EQUIPMENT TERMINATION SYMBOL REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR A01 P5FGN DUAL TEMP DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR D1 22/4 3011 LIGHT GREY - RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR R1 A01 P5FGN ICE CREAM DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR D2 22/4 3012 LIGHT GREY RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR R2 A02 P5NGN DAIRY DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR D1 22/4 3021 LIGHT GREY RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR R1 A02 P5NGN DAIRY DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR D2 22/4 3022 LIGHT GREY RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR R2 A02 P5FGN DUAL TEMP DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR D3 22/4 3023 LIGHT GREY RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR R3 A02 P5FGN DUAL TEMP DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR D4 22/4 3024 LIGHT GREY RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR R4 A01 CU -1 SUCTION PRESSURE - -- 22/8 3013 GREEN DISCHARGE PRESSURE - -- DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE - -- A02 CU -2 SUCTION PRESSURE - -- 22/8 3025 GREEN DISCHARGE PRESSURE - -- DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE - -- --- --- MARKET ZONE TEMP. SENSOR T 22/4 3001 LIGHT GREY MARKET ZONE HUMIDITY SENSOR H - -- - -- OUTDOOR AMBIENT AIR TEMP. SENSOR T 22/4 3002 LIGHT GREY OUTPUT TERMINATIONS SYSTEM * EQUIPMENT TERMINATION SYMBOL REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR A01 P5FGN ICE CREAM P5FGN DUAL TEMP REFRIGERATION 2046 18/4 3014 YELLOW DEFROST - -- A02 P5NGN DAIRY P5FGN DUAL TEMP REFRIGERATION 18/4 3026 YELLOW DEFROST - -- A01 P5FGN DUAL TEMP EEPR CONTROL CABLE - -- 14/4 3015 WHITE A02 P5NGN DAIRY EEPR CONTROL CABLE - -- 14/4 3027 WHITE A02 P5NGN DAIRY EEPR CONTROL CABLE — 14/4 3028 WHITE A02 P5NGN DAIRY EEPR CONTROL CABLE - -- 14/4 3029 WHITE A02 P5FGN DUAL TEMP EEPR CONTROL CABLE - -- 14/4 30210 WHITE A01 P5FGN DUAL TEMP DUAL TEMP RELAY - -- 18/4 3016 YELLOW A02 P5FGN DUAL TEMP DUAL TEMP RELAY - -- 18/4 30211 YELLOW A02 P5FGN DUAL TEMP DUAL TEMP RELAY - -- 18/4 30212 YELLOW - -- - -- REMS -L /DH LIGHTS - -- 18/4 3003 YELLOW - -- - -- REMS -L /DH DOOR HEAT - -- 18/4 3004 YELLOW REMS -2 (M168) INPUT TERMINATIONS SYSTEM * EQUIPMENT TERMINATION SYMBOL REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR A03 WALK -IN FREEZER RETURN AIR TEMP SENSOR R1 22/4 2031 LIGHT GREY A03 WALK -IN FREEZER DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR DTS 22/4 2032 LIGHT GREY A02 WALK -IN COOLER RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR R1 22/4 2041 LIGHT GREY A03 CU -3 SUCTION PRESSURE - -- 22/8 2033 GREEN DISCHARGE PRESSURE - -- A02 CU -4 SUCTION PRESSURE - -- 22/8 2042 _ GREEN DISCHARGE PRESSURE - -- A03 WALK -IN FREEZER DOOR SWITCH AND ALARM SW /DA 22/4 2034 LIGHT GREY A02 WALK -IN COOLER DOOR SWITCH AND ALARM SW /DA 22/4 2043 LIGHT GREY r A03 WALK -IN FREEZER REFRIG. LEAK TRANSDUCER RT 22/4 2035 LIGHT GREY A02 WALK -IN COOLER REFRIG. LEAK TRANSDUCER RT 22/4 2044 LIGHT GREY OUTPUT TERMINATIONS SYSTEM * EQUIPMENT TERMINATION SYMBOL REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR A03 WALK -IN FREEZER REFRIGERATION - -- 18/4 2036 YELLOW DEFROST - -- A02 WALK -IN COOLER REFRIGERATION -- 18/4 2045 YELLOW A03 WALK -IN FREEZER REFRIGERANT LEAK INDICATOR RLI 18/4 2037 YELLOW A02 WALK -IN COOLER REFRIGERANT LEAK INDICATOR RLI 18/4 2046 YELLOW A03 WALK -IN FREEZER FAN COIL CONTACTOR FC - -- - -- - -- REMS -1 (EINSTEIN PANEL, M88) INPUT TERMINATIONS SYSTEM * EQUIPMENT TERMINATION ' SYMBOL REMS CABLE - REMS 'CABLE * JACKET COLOR - -- ALARM ANNUN. PANEL ALARM SILENCE BUTTON - -- EXIST EXIST EXIST - -- REMS -1A DUAL TEMP PANEL - -- 22/8 1001 GREEN OUTPUT TERMINATIONS SYSTEM * EQUIPMENT TERMINATION SYMBOL REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR --- ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL ALARM ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT --- EXIST EXIST EXIST ALARM ANNUNCIATOR HORN - -- SECURITY /BURGLAR ALARM DRY CONTACTS - -- TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE T - REMOD TITLE REFRIGERATION PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION CONTROLS COMMUNICATION NETWORK CABLE SCHEDULE FROM TO REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR REMS -1 LOCATED IN ELEC.ROOM REMS -3 LOCATED ABOVE SALES FLOOR CASES 22/2 00 BLUE REMS -3 LOCATED ABOVE SALES FLOOR CASES REMS -2 LOCATED ABOVE WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER 22/2 00 BLUE YELLOW JRB, KRZ SUMP PUMP CONTROL BOX TO REMS -PC - -- 22/4 DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS DESCRIPTION 21 DECEMBER 2006 12 - 21 - 06 BP - 3.O COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION - -- SUMP PUMP 1 CONTROL FROM REMS -3 P1 DRAWN BY 3006 YELLOW _ - -- SUMP PUMP 2 CONTROL FROM REMS -3 P2 YELLOW JRB, KRZ SUMP PUMP CONTROL BOX TO REMS -PC - -- 22/4 3007 YELLOW CHECKED BY SFR REMS —PC INPUT BOARD TERMINATIONS — NEW SYSTEM * DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR - -- SUMP PUMP 1 CONTROL FROM REMS -3 P1 18/4 3006 YELLOW _ - -- SUMP PUMP 2 CONTROL FROM REMS -3 P2 YELLOW - -- SUMP PUMP CONTROL BOX TO REMS -PC - -- 22/4 3007 YELLOW REMS —PC OUTPUT BOARD TERMINATIONS — NEW SYSTEM * DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMS CABLE REMS CABLE * JACKET COLOR - -- CONTROL FLOAT TO REMS -3 PANEL CF 22/4 3005 LIGHT GREY - -- ALARM FLOAT TO REMS -3 PANEL AF LIGHT GREY f CA03) WALK -IN FREEZER (A04) WALK -IN COOLER (°°) TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 0 0 V) 2034) 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores\T-0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627r005_dgn s sssysssss; sss«syssssyssv;vs •�ff� WALK-IN COOLER /FREEZER CONTROL WIRING PLAN NOT TO SCALE Scott F. Rudie MECHANICAL ENGINEER Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 tk ZyE:'xE..: tl ? 1::.tt�;�.N. ti SALES 1 102 REMS -1 AND REMS -1A PANELS AT SHIP'S LADDER ABOVE. PANEL TO SWITCH THE DUAL TEMP CASES BETWEEN LOW TEMP AND MEDIUM OPERATION FURNISHED BY THE REMS VENDOR. MOUNT NEAR REMS -1. SEE EMC DRAWINGS FOR CONNECTIONS TO REMS -1. = REUSE EXISTING CABLE, REPLACE EXISTING ALARM PANEL AT GUEST SERVICES WITH NEW PANEL FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. ALARM REMS -L /DH IN ELEC. ROOM ABOVE. ALL WORK ON SHEETS R1, R2, R3, R4 & R5 SHALL BE COMPLETED BY TARGET APPROVED REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TARGET REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CONTROL WIRING PLAN NOT TO SCALE 20- DEC -2006 12:50 GENERAL NOTES: A. ALL REMS PANELS, CABLE AND COMPONENTS ARE FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS 608 - 822 -3550. B. REMS -1 PANEL (EINSTEIN PANEL) IS LOCATED IN ELECTRICAL ROOM AND IS AN EXISTING PANEL.VERIFY EXACT LOCATION ON ELECTRICAL PLANS. C. REMS -2 PANEL IS LOCATED ON TOP OF WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER AND IS INSTALLED AND POWERED (120 VAC & 208 VAC) BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. INSTALL PANEL SO THAT IT IS HIDDEN FROM VIEW. D. REMS -3 PANEL IS LOCATED ON TOP OF SALES FLOOR CASES AND IS INSTALLED AND POWERED (120 VAC) BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. INSTALL PANEL SO THAT IT IS HIDDEN FROM VIEW. SEE 2/R2 AND DETAIL 16/R3. E. LOW VOLTAGE CABLE INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR, TERMINATION CONNECTIONS BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR. F. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INSTALLS ALL REMS PANELS AND DOOR SWITCH AND ALARM PANEL. G. THE REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR INSTALLS ALL SENSORS, LEAK TRANDUCERS AND LEAK INDICATORS WITH THE EXCEPTION OF CASE TEMPERATURE SENSORS WHICH ARE FACTORY INSTALLED BY THE CASE MANUFACTURER. H. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE INSTALLATION OF REMS COMPONENTS, SEE DETAILS 1/R3,10/R3, 11/R3,15/R3 AND 16/R3. I. REMS DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS. CONTACT TECH. SUPPORT a 608--822 -3550. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR TO REFER TO REMS DRAWINGS FOR FINAL CONNECTIONS. J. REMS -L /DH IS INSTALLED AND POWERED (120 VAC) BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION ON ELECTRICAL PLANS. REFRIGERATION CONTROL SYMBOLS: ( AO, SYSTEM NUMBER DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR REFRIGERANT LEAK TRANSDUCER REMOTE DOOR SWITCH R1 4>. SW DA CO ZONE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR REMS2 REMS3 REMS - 1 /DH ALARM DTS REMS - PC DOOR ALARM HORN & STROBE REFRIGERANT LEAK INDICATOR EINSTEIN PANEL REMOTE PANEL AT WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER REMOTE PANEL AT MARKET CASES LIGHTING / DOOR HEATER CONTROL PANEL ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR REMOTE PANEL SUMP PUMP CONTROL REMS CABLE NUMBER REMOTE CONDENSING UNITS REMS INPUT /OUTPUT SCHEDULE SYMBOLS: INPUT /OUTPUT SYMBOLS T - AIR TEMP. SENSOR H - AIR HUMIDITY SENSOR D - DISCHARGE AIR TEMP. SENSOR R - RETURN AIR TEMP. SENSOR SW - DOOR SWITCH RT - REFRIGERANT LEAK TRANSDUCER RLI - REFRIGERATION LEAK INDICATOR DA - DOOR ALARM FC - FAN COIL CONTACTOR DTS - DEFROST TERMINATION SENSOR CONTROL CABLE LEGEND COLOR TYPE BLUE 22/2 LIGHT GREY 22/4 GREEN 22/8 YELLOW 18/4 JACKET MARKING EMC CONTROL CABLE EMC CONTROL CABLE EMC CONTROL CABLE EMC CONTROL CABLE REMS PANEL NUMBER REF CIRCUIT NUMBER REMS CABLE KEY CABLE NUMBER - 485 COMMUNICATION NETWORK - SENSOR INPUT / 4 COND. - SENSOR INPUT / 8 COND. - 24V OUTPUT / 4 COND. n•�a °�::��:. °ate: :' < 3028 4 4 CASE CONTROL WIRING PLAN KEYNOTES: El 0 EXTEND CABLE TO PANEL REMS -1. EXTEND CABLE TO PANEL REMS -2. EXTEND CABLE TO PANEL REMS -3. EXTEND CABLE TO PANEL REMS -L /DH. CODE COMPLIANCE !norm ()limn FEB ~ 2 2007 City ( f T kwil8 RUILDIK DIVISION NOT TO SCALE MARKET ZONE TEMP. & HUMIDITY SENSOR MOUNTED ON WALL AT 96' AFF. SHEET R5 GENERAL NOTES A. MOUNT CONTROL PANELS AND PULL LOW VOLTAGE CABLES FURNISHED BY ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS (EMC). B. CONDUIT IN UNFINISHED SPACES TO BE EXPOSED. C. VERIFY CONDITIONS AT SITE PRIOR TO BIDS AND /OR INSTALLATION. D. STORE SHALL REMAIN FULLY OPERATIONAL DURING CONSTRUCTION. E. THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS IS TO DESCRIBE A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM. BRING ANY QUESTIONS TO THE ENGINEER'S ATTENTION PRIOR TO BIDDING. CONTACT: WILL EVANS OR JOE TUPY (651.644.2400) F. PROVIDE COORDINATION FOR FUSE SWITCH INSTALLATION AFTER NORMAL STORE HOURS. G. PROVIDE NEW FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH INTERRUPTING RATINGS MATCHING OR GREATER THAN EXISTING EQUIPMENT. H. COORDINATE CONTROL PANEL LOCATIONS WITH EMC (ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS) PLANS. I. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE STRIP LIGHT FIXTURES ABOVE WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER. LIGHT FIXTURE AND OCCUPANCY SENSOR SHALL BE TURNED OVER TO STORE BUILDING MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL. J. PROVIDE )':4' PLYWOOD BACKBOARD FOR NEW PANELS IF NO EXISTING BACKBOARD AVAILABLE. K. ROUTE LOW VOLTAGE CABLES PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR WITH JOISTS. L. ROUTE CASE LIGHTING AND DOOR HEAT CIRCUITS TO FRONT ELEC. PANEL VIA REMS -L /DH. M. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. N. ROUTE LOW VOLTAGE CABLES IN BUNDLES AND BRANCH OFF AS REQUIRED.. SECURE CABLE TO JOISTS WITH BRIDLE RINGS. 0. FIRE STOP PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS ABOVE CEILING. P. PROVIDE BUSHINGS FOR CONDUIT STUBS. R. INSTALL LOW VOLTAGE CABLE FROM REFRIGERATION CONTROL PANELS TO ROOFTOP CONDENSING UNIT, WALK -IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS, ALARM PANEL IN GUEST SERVICES, DOOR HEATER CONTROLLER AND EACH SALES FLOOR REFRIG CASE. CABLE FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. FINAL CONNECTIONS BY REMS CONTRACTOR. REFER TO SHEET R5 FOR REMS WIRING DETAILS. S. COORDINATE DEVICE LOCATIONS WITH EMC (ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS) PLANS. KEY NOTES TITLE FREEZEWCOOLER 0 CONDENSING UNIT MOUNTED ON TOP OF COOLER AND FREEZER. DISCONNECT FURNISHED WITH UNIT. 2 NOT USED. E L E C T R 3 LOCATE LIGHT A MINIMUM OF 1' -0' AWAY FROM EVAPORATOR AIR DISCHARGE. l] PROVIDE CONNECTION TO CASE LIGHTS, FANS, AND HEATER CIRCUITS AT J -BOX ON TOP OF CASE. J -BOX PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER, TYPICAL. 5 PROVIDE 3 #8 FOR CASE DEFROST HEATERS FROM DEFROST CONTACTOR PROVIDED ON ROOFTOP UNIT TO CASE J -BOX. ALTERNATE PHASE CONDUCTORS AT CASES FOR CONNECTION TO 208 VOLT, 1 PHASE DEFROST HEATERS. BALANCE LOAD AS FOLLOWS: FIRST CASE - L1 & L2 SECOND CASE - L2 & L3 THIRD + FOURTH - L1 & L3 6 PROVIDE CONNECTION TO PILOT LIGHT SWITCH FURNISHED WITH COOLER /FREEZER. JUNCTION BOX AND CONDUIT STUB TO TOP OF COOLER/ FREEZER BY VENDOR, 7 PROVIDE 1'C FOR LOW VOLTAGE CABLE FROM ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE DOWN WALL AND STUB OUT AT 85' AFF. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH REFRIGERATION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. 8 PROVIDE SINGLE RECEPTACLE FOR CONDENSATE PUMP CP-1. MOUNT RECEPTACLE 6' ABOVE PUMP AND 4 ' FROM COOLER WALL. MOUNT RECEPTACLE ON COOLER WALL IF NO WALL IS ADJACENT TO COOLER. g PROVIDE 2 *14 CONNECTION FROM ROOFTOP CONDESING UNIT TO LIQUID LINE SOLENOID FOR EACH SYSTEM. 10 REMS -2 PANEL LOCATED ON TOP OF COOLER & FREEZER. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. EE ROUTE CONDUIT THROUGH WALL AND STUB OUT ABOVE CASE AT 85' AFF. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH REFRIGERATION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. ® ROUTE CONDUIT VIA ROOF PENETRATION. COORDINATE WITH REFRIGERATION PIPING. 13 REMS -L /DH CONTROL PANEL PROVIDE 120V CONNECTION AS SHOWN. p] INSTALL HORN /STROBE DOOR SWITCH UNITS. FURNISHED BY REMS VENDOR. OUTSIDE OF FREEZER AND COOLER. REFER TO WALK -IN FREEZER /COOLER DOOR ALARM DETAIL ® PROVIDE 120V CONNECTION TO UNITS AND I /2 C FROM UNITS TO ABOVE FREEZER/ COOLER FOR REMS CABLE. ® FEED EVAP FAN THROUGH CONTACTOR IN REMS -2. 16 MOUNT REFRIG. LEAK INDICATOR AT 90'. STUB 1/2' C. UP TO 4' ABOVE COOLER /FREEZER. INSTALL LOW VOLTAGE CABLE TO REFRIG. CONTROL PANEL REMS -2. REFER TO © W. Ij PROVIDE SHALLOW SINGLE GANG METAL JUNCTION BOX WITH BLANK METAL COVERPLATE FOR REFRIGERATION LEAK TRANSDUCER. MOUNT AT 6' BELOW EVAP FAN COIL UNIT. PROVIDEN' EMPTY CONDUIT AND STUB THROUGH COOLER /FREEZER CEILING TO 6' ABOVE TOP OF COOLER /FREEZERS. SEE ALSO © W. EE PROVIDE Y4 C FROM JOIST SPACE INSIDE STORE THROUGH ROOF PENETRATION FOR ROUTING OF LOW VOLTAGE CABLING. E PROVIDE STEEL STRUT STRUCTURE TO SUPPORT PANELS. CONDUIT CABLES GROUND AND TO SUMP PUMP BASIN. 21 MOUNT SUMP PUMP CONTROL PANEL (REMS -PC) ON TOP OF CASE. REFER TO alk n,, TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE T -0 62 7 REMO D TITLE FREEZEWCOOLER • ;gARATE 4Pp Q� L 1 D 1 C A L P LA N PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION E L E C T R DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS DECEMBER 21, 2006 12.21.2006 BP -3.0 COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY JBT CHECKED BY ANE, WEE LP- FRONT ELECTRICAL ROOM SURFACE MOUNT BOTTOM FEED INTEGRATED SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (IER) - 10,000 RMS 120/208 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, WITH GROUND BUS 150A BUS 150A MCB SUPPLIED FROM NEW T -12 DESCRIBTION KVA LOAD LOAD BREAKER # TYPE AMP /POLE BREAKER LOAD LOAD AMP/POLE TYPE QTY KVA DESCRIBTION COOLER A02 LIGHTS COOLER A02 FANS (DUAL TEMP) CLR A02 ANTI -SWEAT HTR (DT) COOLER A02 FANS CLR A02 ANTI -SWEAT HTR FREEZER A01 LIGHTS FREEZER A01 FANS FREEZER A01 FANS FRZ A01 ANTI -SWEAT HTR FRZ A01 ANTI -SWEAT HTR SUMP PUMP SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE ROOF TOP RECEPTACLES SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE CONT. CAB #3, DOOR HTR PNL 1.4 1.4 0.9 1.7 0.6 1.0 1.6 1.6 1.1 0.9 1.2 0 0 0 0.4 (2) 0 0 0 0 0.4 (1) PN PN PN L PN PN PN PN PN PN SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR PN 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C 2 4 6 8 10 12 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 14 50/3 16 18 20 50/3 22 24 26 20/1 28 20/1 30 20/1 32 20/1 34 20/1 36 20/1 38 20/1 40 20/1 42 20/1 SR SR SR SR SR PN PN PN PN PN PN PN SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR 0 SPARE 0 SPARE 0 SPARE O SPARE 0 SPARE (1) 0.4 REFR. CTRL PANEL (REMS - (1) 3.4 CU -1 (W /DEFROST) 7.7 7.7 (1) 3.4 CU -2 (W /DEFROST) 3.4 3.4 0 SPARE O SPARE 0 SPARE 0 SPARE 0 SPARE 0 SPARE 0 SPARE O SPARE O SPARE Connected Load KVA Phase A Phase B Phase C Total Average *Spares not included 12.2 9.7 9.1 31.0 Phase A 6.4 Phase B 6.2 Phase C 6.0 Total 18.6 Average *Spares not included AMPS 101.7 80.8 75.8 86.1 LP -13 REAR EDC SURFACE MOUNT BOTTOM FEED INTEGRATED SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (IER) - 10,000 RMS 120/208 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, WITH GROUND BUS 150A BUS 150A MCB SUPPLIED FROM NEW T -13 DESCRIBTION KVA LOAD LOAD BREAKER # TYPE AMP/POLE # BREAKER LOAD LOAD AMP /POLE TYPE QTY KVA DESCRIBTION CU -3 (WALK -IN FREEZER) CLR /FRZ HEAT TAPE CP -1 MAINT. RECEPTACLE REMS -2 CONTROL PANEL EVAP FREEZER SPARE SPARE SPARE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE 4.8 4.8 4.8 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0 0 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN SR SR SR SC SC SC SC SC SC SC SC SC 50/3 1 3 5 20/1 7 20/1 9 20/1 11 20/1 13 15/2 15 17 20/1 19 20/1 21 20/1 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 A 2 15/3 B 4 C 6 A 8 20/1 B 10 20/1 C 12 20/1 A 14 20/1 B 16 20/1 C 18 20/1 A 20 20/1 B 22 20/1 C 24 20/1 A 26 B 28 C 30 A 32 B 34 C 36 A 38 B 40 C 42 MN MN MN PN MN SR SR SR SR SR SR SC SC SC SC SC SC SC SC SC (1) 0.6 CU - 4 (WALK - IN COOLER) 0.6 0.6 (1) 0.7 DOOR HEATER (1) 0.7 EVAP COIL (COOLER) (2) 0.5 COMP. CHUTE FAN /LIGHT 0 SPARE 0 SPARE 0 SPARE 0 SPARE O SPARE 0 SPARE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE Connected Load KVA AMPS 53.3 51.6 49.9 51.6 TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 Type R PN PW MN MNI MS MW KT Total Type L R PN PW MN MNI MS MW KT Total • KVA 2.4 0.4 28.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 31.0 KVA 0.0 0.2 15.9 0.0 2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 18.6 Factor KVA x 1.25 = 3.0 x 0.5 = 0.4 x 1 = 28.2 x 1 = 0.0 x 1 = 0.0 x 1 = 0.0 x 1 = 0.0 x 1 = 0.0 x 0.65 = 0.0 31.6 Factor KVA x 1.25 = 0.0 x 0.5 = 0.2 x 1 = 15.9 x 1 = 0.0 x 1 = 2.5 x 1 = 0.0 x 1 = 0.0 x 1 = 0.0 x 0.65 = 0.0 18.6 EXISTING REAR ELECTRICAL ROOM PLAN J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores \T -0627 South Center WA 046\DGN\0627e001.dgn *100% of 1st 10kva, plus 50% of remainder. 31.0 Total Connected KVA 86.1 Total Connected Amps 31.6 Total Demand KVA 87.8 Total Demand Amps *100% of 1st 10kva, plus 50% of remainder. 18.6 Total Connected KVA 51.6 Total Connected Amps 18.6 Total Demand KVA 51.6 Total Demand Amps 1 f 1/4"-1 Andrew N. Erdmann Electrical Engineer 2575 University Ave. W. Suite 135 St. Paul, MN 55114 Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 NEW PANEL LP -13 NEW TRANSFORMER T -13 TRANSFORMER SECONDARY GROUND. BOND TO UFER GROUND VIA BUILDING STEEL. WESTINGHOUSE SWITCHBOARD MAIN DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM-MDS, 1200A, 480/277V, 3 #, 4W, BUS W/ GROUND; 50,000 AIC PANEL LP-13 100A 3P (3) 70A 1 1/4 - 3 *4 & 1 *8 GND T -13 (45 kva) 2' C, #1/0& 1 * 6 GND FAULT CURRENT AVAILABLE: LESS THAN 2,850 AMPS PROVIDE 100/100 TWIN TYPE SWITCH, EACH WITH 70A FUSES. ONE-LINE DIAGRAM - MDS NEW PANEL LP -12 • TRANSFORMER SECONDARY GROUND. BOND TO UFER GROUND VIA BUILDING STEEL, PANEL LP -12 MDS IS LOCATED IN THE MAIN ELECTRICAL I ROOM 100A REFER TO �► 3P (3) 70A 1 I/4'C. -3 *1 & 1 *6 GND LP -12 41 FRONT ELECTRICAL ROOM PLAN T -12 (45 kva) FAULT CURRENT AVAILABLE: LESS THAN 2,850 AMPS 2' C, 4 * 1/0 & 1* 6 GND ___ ISTING TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER T -12 rr , , MOUNT ON TOP OF 1/4" =1' -0" • 20- DEC -2006 10:53 145 FREEZER 1441 5 *1 LP -12 1,7,9 REAR WALK -IN FREEZER/COOLER LIGHTING PLAN CU -2 (coaLERI , (ON ROOF) LP -12 20,22,24 *8 #14 PROVIDE CONNECTION FROM NEAREST EXISTING 277 VOLT UNCONTROLED LIGHTING CIRCUIT. 1/4"=1'-0" • 8 1 8 *10 LP -12 31 PROVIDE MAINTENANCE RECEPTACLE 18' ABOV WALK -IN COOLER /FREEZER 6 *1 LP -13 11 • LP -13 13,15,17 El II LP -13 10 Y4'C, 3 1 '12 & 1.12 6 *1 & 110G LP -13 2,4,6 12 ' I REFRIGERATION CONTROL PANEL (REMS -3) LP -1 REMS -2 0 -_ 1 11 • 1 * O LP -12 1,3,5,7,9,12 • • Ell 11 TYP. ION 13 FRONT FREEZER/COOLER CASES POWER PLAN FREEZER CU -3 CU -4 1/8" DOOR HEATER EVAP COIL (COOLER) 1 145 COOLER 74' c, 2 #12 FOR FAN CONTROLS. 4 *1 REAR WALK -IN FREEZER/COOLER POWER PLAN 2 *10 (DEFROST HEATERS, 208V) EC 90 NL 2*12 (FAN, 208V) EVAP COIL & DEFROST HTR (FREEZER) EE 18 9 5 LP -12 14,16,18 31 GFI wP • 1 ISE I El • c U -1 ( FREEZER) - - (ON ROOF) 8 LP -12 *14 8 #10 11,13,15,17,19,21 LP -13 8' AFF FOR HEAT TAPE LP -13 9 V4" =1' -0" REMS INFO: REMS VENDOR: EMC (ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS) 1.608.822.3550, TECH SUPPORT EXT, 0. ELECTRICAL SHEET INDEX SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME El FREEZER /COOLER ELECTRICAL PLAN E2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS & COMPACTOR POWER PLAN E3 SPECIALTY LIGHTING /POWER PLAN Pig.._. . SHEET El 1 � i ,1, -T Ij' TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, 3015iRANDER BLVD iUKWIL4, WA 98188 ST T TITLE ELECTRICAL DETAILS & COMPACTOR POWER PROJECT CONFIGURATION PLAN DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS DECEMBER 21, 2006 12.21.2006 BP - 3.0 COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY JBT CHECKED BY ANE, WEE ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LIST KEY NOTE DESIGNATES OWNER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT. K H W MULTIPLE SYMBOLS ON BRACKET INDICATE ALL DEVICES UNDER ONE COVER PLATE. INCANDESCENT OR HID LUMINAIRE WALL MOUNT JUNCTION BOX - 18' AFF UNO OR CABINET MOUNT JUNCTION BOX FURNITURE OR FIXTURE MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX CEILING MOUNT JUNCTION BOX A = MASTER ANTENNA -TV (MATV) SYSTEM CRT = NETWORK SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL F = FIRE ALARM SYSTEM P = PAGING SYSTEM S = SECURITY SYSTEM TS = LV TEMPERATURE SENSOR - 96' AFF UNO SINGLE RECEPTACLE - 18' AFF UNO DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - 18' AFF UNO (SSR - DENOTES SURGE SUPPRESSION) (GFI - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER) OPTIONAL /EMERGENCY RECEPTACLE - 18' AFF UNO KEY - OPERATED SWITCH - 48' AFF UNO OS = OCCUPANCY (MOTION) SENSOR SWITCH TELEPHONE OUTLET - 18' AFF UNO WITH Y EMPTY CONDUIT TO ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING OR TO JOIST SPACE IN UNFINISHED SPACES, W INDICATES - 48' AFF UNO 1-1 DATA OUTLET - 18' UNO WITH N. EMPTY CONDUIT TO ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING OR TO JOIST SPACE IN UNFINISHED SPACES. 1-*1 TELEPHONE & DATA OUTLET - 18' UNO WITH N. EMPTY CONDUIT TO ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING OR TO JOIST SPACE IN UNFINISHED SPACES. LP PANELBOARD I 1 11111111 0 ❑ HL PANELBOARD HP & LD PANELBOARD TRANSFORMER SAFETY SWITCH (POLES NOTED, F INDICATES FUSED, SIZE AS NOTED). MOTOR CONNECTION LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT - 48' AFF UNO WIRING METHOD AND IDENTIFICATION (NOTE: WITHOUT FURTHER IDENTIFICATION SYMBOL INDICATES %' CONDUIT WITH 2 #12 AWG CONDUCTORS. CROSS LINES INDICATE QUANTITY OF *12 AWG CONDUCTORS AND EXTENDED CROSS LINE W/O DOT INDICATES NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR, W /DOT INDICATES SEPARATE GROUND, ALL IN CODE SIZED CONDUIT, NS INDICATES A NON - SWITCHED CIRCUIT FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION.) LP -1 1,2, CONDUIT CONCEALED IN CEILING OR WALL CONDUIT CONCEALED IN FLOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR, COLUMN MOUNTED 96' AFF UNO CONDUIT EXPOSED CONDUIT RUN UNDERGROUND (SLOPE TO DRAIN TO PULL BOXES), CONDUIT TURNED UP CONDUIT TURNED DOWN CONDUIT CAPPED OR BUSHED BRANCH CIRCUIT HOME RUN TO PANELBOARD (UPPER CODE - PANEL ID, LOWER NUMERALS IDENTIFY CIRCUIT NUMBERS) GROUND CONNECTION AS NOTED LOW VOLTAGE CABLE GROCERY & REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT NUMBER LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE FIXTURE TYPE LETTER MOUNTING LAMPS LIGHT CONTROL WATTS MANUFACTURER'S CATALOG NUMBER F1 8' WET LOCATION IN SURFACE (2) F96T12 /CW /HO -0 /ALTO COOLERS /FREEZERS Y1 ENCLOSED SURFACE (1) 100A21 INCANDESCENT N2 4' FLUORESCENT WALLWASH VALANCE FIXTURE BRACKET (1) F32T8/ADV830/EW/ALTO (1) F25T8/TL830 AS REQUIRED ACRYLIC 210 LITHONIA *DMW- 2- 96H0 -WL- 277- CW20- TUBSRHP GLASS GLOBE & WIREGUARD 100 RAB *VXBR -100D4 ASSYMETRIC REFLECTOR 59 ICON *WM -SP- EXAR -4D -1/32- 120 - STARDUST REMS -L /DH CONTROLLER SCHEDULE DEVICE NUMBER PANEL CIRCUITS CONTROLLED NUMBER OF COIL CONTACT CONTACT POLES VOLTAGE VOLTAGE AMPS LOAD DESCRIPTION REMS -DH-1 REMS -DH -2 LP -12 9,17,19 6 120V 120V 20A REFRIGERATED CASES DOOR HEATERS LP -12 6 120V 120V 20A CASE LIGHTING - ON STORE HOURS TRANSFOR VIER SCHEDULE NAME KVA PRIMARY SECONDARY MOUNTING REMARKS T -12 45 T -13 45 480V,3i,3W 208/120V,3 #,4W STACKED FEEDS PANEL LP -12 SEE DETAIL 8/E2 480V,30,3W 208/120V,3i,4W TRAPEZE FEEDS PANEL LP -13 SEE DETAIL 7/E2 ROOF JOIST liNi ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER VERIFY DIMENSIONS W /UNIT %Z' ALLTHREADED ROD WITH 2' SECURE TRANSFORMER WASHER AND DOUBLE TO STRUTS. PROVIDE NUTS BOTH ENDS. ISOLATION PADS. TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 TRAPEZE MOUNTED TRANSFORMER DETAIL J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores\T South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627e002.dgn Ll ROOF DECK ROOF JOIST UNI -STRUT P1000 CHANNEL. LENGTHS AS REQUIRED FOR JOIST SPAN. TYPICAL OF TWO. CLAMP TO JOISTS WITH P1379S CLAMPS. UNI -STRUT P1000 HS CHANNEL TYPICAL OF TWO. VERIFY LENGTH WITH UNIT DEMENSIONS. Andrew N. Erdmann Electrical Engineer 2575 University Ave. W. Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Suite 135 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 St. Paul, MN 55114 LOAD SU LOAD CALCULATION: EXISTING MDS: 264.0 KW x 1.25 NEW LOAD: LP -12 LP -13 TOTAL MDS: VIMARY (RE UTILITY MEASURED PEAK: 264 KW AT THE UTILITY TRANSFORMER. =330.0 KW/397.1 AMPS =38.0 Amps =22.4 Amps =457.5 Amps MODEL) E2 C'V D�nrr RACK MOUNTED TRANSFORMER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE FLOOR UNISTRUT P1325 CORNER CONNECTION OR EQUAL (TYP OF 4) UNISTRUT P1000 1 %i OR EQUAL (TYP OF 2) UNISTRUT P1887 POST BASE OR EQUAL (TYP OF 4) TARGET TYPICAL SALES FLOOR GONDOLA POWER POLE REFER TO PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF POWER POLE TYPICAL ELECTRONICS GONDOLA POWER POLE ROUTE WIRING BETWEEN POWER POLE AND RCPT IN 1/2' FLEX CONDUIT, CONCEALED WITHIN STORE FIXTURE. NOT TO SCALE PROVIDE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND COVER PLATE NOT TO SCALE 20— DEC -2006 10:53 POLE SUPPORT CLAMP OR T -BAR HANGER POWER /COMMUNICATION POLE NO ADDITIONAL WIRING REQ TYP POWER/COMM POLE INSTALLATION CORD & PLUG CONNECTION DISPLAY LIGHT BOX BY VENDOR. REFER TO SHEET E3 STORE SHELVES MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY PROVIDED BY TARGET FIXTURE PURCHASING AND INSTALLED BY OSR. KEY NOTES 0 0 El 6 PROVIDE J -BOX AT TOP LATCH SIDE OF COMPACTOR DOOR AND STUB N. CONDUIT UP TO JOIST SPACE. STUB CONDUIT (N' OR AS NOTED) FROM J -BOX TO AREA ABOVE CEILING LINE OR ABOVE BOTTOM OF ROOF SUPPORT MEMBER IN UNFINISHED AREAS. PROVIDE SWITCH ADJACENT TO EXHAUST FAN FOR SERVICE DISCONNECTING MEANS. PROVIDE J -BOX FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM HEAT DETECTOR CENTERED ABOVE COMPACTOR DOOR. APPROX 2' -0' FROM WALL ON BOTTOM OF TOP CHORD OF ROOF SUPPORT MEMBER. PROVIDE RACEWAY BETWEEN FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND DOOR RELEASE. MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE ON WALL ABOVE DOOR INSIDE COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE. ROUTE CONDUIT TO PILOT LIGHT SWITCH. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION TO DOOR CLOSER FROM EXISTING NEAREST 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT, USE EXISTING COMPACTOR CIRCUIT FOR NEW COMPACTOR. MODIFY AND EXTEND CIRCUITRY AS REQUIRED. UTILIZE EXISTING DISCONNECT SWITCH. NOT TO SCALE NOTE: ELECTRONICS GONDOLA POWER AND SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS WILL BE DIFFERENT FOR EACH GONDOLA. VERIFY REQUIRMENTS WITH FINAL FIXTURE PLAN AND OSR PRIOR TO INSTALLING POWER AND SYSTEMS IN GONDOLA. ROUTE CORDS FOR MULITOUTLET ASSEMBLY AND VENDOR LIGHTS OUT OF SIGHT OF GUESTS' VIEW. ROUTE CORDS IN A NEAT WORKMANSHIP MANNER. STRAP CORDS WITH CABLE TIES TO FIXTURE. P = POWER JUNCTION BOX MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEM CABLE SET TO J -BOX MOUNTED ON BLDG COLUMN 4 CEILING SYSTEM T -BARS FOR 2'X4' TILES CEILING TRIM PLATE/T -BAR CLAMP PREWIRED RECEPTACLE MOUNT POLE ON STORE FIXTURE OR FLOOR AS REQUIRED. 1/4' HOLE AND GROMMET 6 COLUMN MOUNTED MINI ASSISTANT CENTER (MAC) NOT TO SCALE LP -13 12 } COMPACTOR COMPACTOR POWER PLAN POWER POLE CONNECTIONS/ANCHOR 6 0' 30A P, NF COMPACTOR; CHUTE EXHAUST; FAN 1 INSTALL; CONTROLS ...FURNISHED WITH COMPACTOR 1/8" = 1' -0" STEEL COLUMN DATA CABLE FACTORY INSTALLED RCPT POWER POLE CONDUCTORS SELF TAPPING SCREWS SADDLE STRAP GONDOLA OR DISPLAY FIXTURE ANCHOR SADDLE STRAP TO FIXTURE WITH MACHINE SCREWS CABLE CONNECTOR 1/2° FLEXIBLE CONDUIT TO APPLICABLE DEVICE INSTALL ONLY IF ADDITIONAL WIRING IS REQUIRED NOT TO SCALE (MAC) MINI ASSISTANT CENTER e 4 APP p -,re '�D RE a.,_At SHEET E2 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER,WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE T- O627REMOD TITLE SPECIALTY LIGHTING/ PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION POWER P LA N DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS DECEMBER 21, 2006 12.21.2006 BP -3.0 COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY JBT CHECKED BY ANE, WEE k { a) _ — _ — _ — _ ....._ .. _ TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 1 r " r ...... r �,.'. 1 1 1. 1 j r 1 1 f J: \2006 \06109 \Specific Stores \T -0627 South Center WA 046 \DGN \0627e003.dgn 1 r »,» r. -, ,,,...»,,,,,,,,, „,,,,,,,,,,,.....,.,.,.,..,... m f.» Andrew N. Erdmann Electrical Engineer 2575 University Ave. W. Tel: (651) 644 -2400 Suite 135 Fax: (651) 647 -4120 St. Paul, MN 55114 i:Siiiiiiiilii!. i.,ir,:S':n,t RTk'S f e^`f 4+^ F ku> kl F .a?Vki�i?. ?<kJir'.'r. ? ?5 +cr.%riri 2K)k .f»ivt` `3Y abk.N . mss; ,;,, „,,,;,,, ” � •y �� ` • OdAttL' S, ,i y;�, b ' �i'SS iL;,Rb�$ ,k..:C:C »i tL»b:wsSSS3 7 �.:5 �::�i^� ,.,.;cneS:..s...�, :, T. »„ -.�.„... ,,.-. —..., r.. «. ,. « .:. r „ .. ...:...:...... ,., .....,,.............,.,........ .».,.....»... .......,,...., ..,.... ..,..,,..., 0 • ,h iMiIYL`::kra• ( • .. n #ca�; .dzzurrferx. ; .xac...r f .,uE'.rsvv neb.k;, 1 L . 1�1 ...... 4.- ...... SPECIALTY LIGHTING/POWER PLAN 20-LC -2006 10:53 1/16"=1 63\3 EL EXISTING SPECIALTY LIGHTING/POWER PLAN (DEMO) 1 /16"=1'-0" GENERAL NOTES A. VERIFY CONDITIONS AT SITE PRIOR TO BIDS AND /OR INSTALLATION. B. STORE SHALL REMAIN FULLY OPERATIONAL DURING CONSTRUCTION. C. PROVIDE COST FOR RELOCATION OF (3) POWER POLES AND EXTENSION OF CIRCUITRY AS REQUIRED TO MOVE 10' - 0", FIELD VERY LOCATION. D. REFER TO SHEET E2 FOR GONDOLA AND POWER POLE DETAILS. KEY NOTES 11 El 4 6 0 8 0 NOT USED. NOT USED. EXISTING POWER POLE TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE CONDUIT BACK TO NEAREST EXISTING J -BOX AND CAP OFF. EXISITNG POWER POLE TO BE REUSED FOR NEW VALANCE LIGHTING. REFER TO 0 FOR POWER POLE LOCATIONS. EXISTING VALANCE LIGHTING TO BE RELOCATED. REFER TO 0 FOR NEW LOCATIONS. NOT USED. RELOCATED POWER POLE. CONNECT TO NEW VALANCE LIGHTING. EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUIT FROM EXISTING J -BOX MOUNTED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING TO NEW POWER POLE LOCATIONS. RELOCATED VALANCE LIGHTING. MOUNT FIXTURES AT 9' -6' AFF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. EXISTING LIGHTING AT SEPARATION FIXTURE TO BE RELOCATED. DEMO CONDUIT AND WIRE BACK TO CLOSEST J -BOX ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. KEY NOTES liE 11 NEW 120V VALANCE LIGHTING. MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE AT 6' -6" AFF, TIE INTO NEAREST EXISTING 120V VALANCE LIGHTING CIRCUIT AND CONTROLS. REFER TO SHEET E2 FOR LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE., PROVIDE COVERPLATE FOR DEMOLISHED PUBLIC PAY PHONE. 1 ;' SHEET E3 1 0 rn 0 Fr) IY) fY ) 0 rn r7 O 0 0 c0 0 TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF TARGET CORPORATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 FAX: (612) 761 -3322 10% 1 5�- 0: \62506 \Target \55000 \20_CAD \T0627 South Center \as— builts \CAD \T627a004.dgn 50' -2° n 0 0 30' -0° The Benham Companies, Inc. 60 East Plato Blvd., Suite 300 St. Paul, MN 55107 PRV -SEE _ rD 1 _ I I I I- 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 I I I I___ IQ1J 1 42-10 n '11' 11 /2 ° ' 20' - 10/4' .\ 1 - - 44' -0° I � r 1 I p EXISTING RTU'S r 1 I I TYP. 1 I 1 1 - - -- - - -� - -- n om^ -� - -- G Tj E 1 1 I w fz 0 J V) 1 TYP. A 4- 1 L_ CV --- F--- I - - - - -- 1 1 ' 1 I L _ I _1 11 r 1 r1 I 1 " 1 EXISTING RTTU'S 1 I___! W 0 cr) 44' -0" EXISTING GAS PIPING TYP. ------ "EXISTING GAS PIPING TYP. EXISTING TYP. RTU'S $(USER) 44' -O° 475' -8 Z _- _ -_ ---- 1 1 El 1 1 ___ I 39 CONDENSING UNIT - CENTER ON WALKWAY PAD SEE 4 12/ 44' -0" r - I _ I FOR PIPE I PENETRATION SEE iA SIM 44' -0° r _ II I I 11 1 39 CONDENSING UNIT - CENTER ON WALKWAY PAD SEE 44' -0° !a 0 GAS PIPING -TYP. FOR SUPPORT SEE w o_ 0 V) 44 -0° �� - - - -II EXISTING RTU'S Pit TYP. I - -- I I TYP RTU 0 -J V) \/ I I I E I _ EXISTING BTU'S TYP. 20' 10 10%2° 1 1 I ROOF WALKWAY i 3' -O° MIN AROUND EXTREMITIES -TYP I ROOF PLAN NOTES A. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION OF ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS & EQUIPMENT W/ STRUC, MECH & ELEC. B. REFER TO STRUC FOR LOCATIONS OF FRAMED OPENINGS FOR RTU'S, ROOF DRAIN SUMP PANS, AND OTHER FRAMED OPENINGS. C. REFER TO STRUC FOR ROOF FRAMING ELEVATIONS. D. SEE AIO FOR ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT PAINTING INFORMATION. E. ALL ROOF SLOPES EXCEPT FOR TAPERED INSULATION REAR WALL ARE ACHIEVED BY SLOPING STRUCTURE F. MEMBRANE ROOFING, ROOF INSULATION, MEMBRANE FLASHING, FASTENERS, ETC ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER. SEE SPEC FOR COMPLETE LISTING. 78 G. ROOF PLAN OVERALL DIMENSIONS REFLECT PROJECTED MASONRY CORNICES. SEE SHEET AI FOR BUILDING PLAN. H. REFER TO EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR SCUPPER LOCATIONS AND WIDTHS. I. ROOF GAS PIPING REMAINS UNPAINTED. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE 4"071 rrn FEB - 2 2007 Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION TARGET STORE OUTH CENTER, WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 STORE -062 PROJECT CODE REMOD CONFIGURATION TITLE ROOF PLAN OA 8 2207